invitation to bid for 20141023- 10131240_r - the

Accession No: 72975-73200

Invitation to Bid for 20141023- 10131240_R

MUDDY CREEK WWTP GRIT REPLACEMENT

PROJECT ID 10131240_R ,

- VOLUME THREE -

Project Schedule (unless amended):

Bid Documents Available: 10/23/2014

Deadline for Questions: 1:30 PM, Thursday, November 6, 2014

Bid Open: 1:30 PM, 11/13/2014

SET No.: __________

PROJECT MANUAL

VOL. III OF III

GRIT REPLACEMENT PROJECT

I.D. NO. 10131240

SANITARY SEWER NO. 6241

METROPOLITAN SEWER DISTRICT OF GREATER CINCINNATI

CINCINNATI, OHIO

AUGUST 2014

REVISED: OCTOBER 2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS (REV. OCTOBER, 2014)

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION PAGE

NUMBER DESCRIPTION NUMBER

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF PROJECT 01 11 00-1

01 12 16 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE 01 12 16-1

01 14 00 CONTROL OF WORK 01 14 00-1

01 20 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 20 00-1

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 00-1

01 26 00 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01 26 00-1

01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1

01 31 21 SITE SAFETY PLAN 01 31 21-1

01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1

01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 01 33 00-1

01 33 19 REFERENCE FORMS 01 33 19-1

Muddy Creek WWTP Grit Replacement

TABLE OF CONTENTS (REV. OCTOBER, 2014) Section Page Number Description Number

01 33 23 Installation and Erection Data ......................................... 01 33 23-1

01 35 00 Special Provisions ........................................................... 01 35 00-1

01 42 19 Applicable Codes ............................................................ 01 42 19-1

01 45 16 Contractor Quality Control ............................................. 01 45 16-1

01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services ........................................... 01 45 29-1

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities ....................................................... 01 50 00-1

01 51 43 Temporary Bypass Pumping ........................................... 01 51 43-1

01 60 00 Delivery, Storage and Handling ...................................... 01 60 00-1

01 66 00 Material and Equipment .................................................. 01 66 00-1

01 71 23 Field Engineering ............................................................ 01 71 23-1

01 71 33 Restoration of Improvements .......................................... 01 71 33-1

01 73 29 Cutting and Patching ....................................................... 01 73 29-1

01 74 00 Cleaning .......................................................................... 01 74 00-1

01 75 00 Commissioning Requirements and Sequence ................. 01 75 00-1

01 75 01 Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing ......................... 01 75 01-1

01 75 02 Equipment Startup and Checkout ................................... 01 75 02-1

01 75 03 System Functional Testing .............................................. 01 75 03-1

01 75 04 Process Performance Testing .......................................... 01 75 04-1

01 75 05 Operational Testing ......................................................... 01 75 05-1

01 75 06 30 Day Commissioning Reliability Test ......................... 01 75 06-1

01 77 00 Contract Closeout............................................................ 01 77 00-1

01 77 19 Substantial Completion ................................................... 01 77 19-1

01 78 23 Equipment Operating and Maintenance Manual

Information ................................................................... 01 78 23-1

01 78 36 Manufacturer’s Product Warranties ................................ 01 78 36-1

01 78 39 Record Documents .......................................................... 01 78 39-1

01 78 43 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials .......................... 01 78 43-1

01 79 00 Training ........................................................................... 01 79 00-1

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 30 00 Subsurface Conditions .................................................... 02 30 00-1

02 41 01 Demolition of Existing Facilities .................................... 02 41 01-1

02 42 00 Removal of Existing Equipment and Piping ................... 02 42 00-1

02 42 01 Removal of Existing Concrete ........................................ 02 42 01-1



DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 00 00 Concrete Work ................................................................ 03 00 00-1

03 01 30.71 Rehabilitation of Cast-In-Place Concrete .................. 03 01 30.71-1

03 15 00 Concrete Accessories ...................................................... 03 15 00-1

03 15 19 Concrete Anchoring Systems .......................................... 03 15 19-1

03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement ................................................. 03 20 00-1

03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................... 03 30 00-1

03 31 00 Concrete Formwork ........................................................ 03 31 00-1

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry .................................................................. 04 20 00-1

DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 31 00 Steel Roof Decking ......................................................... 05 31 00-1

05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals...................................................... 05 50 00-1

05 52 13.10 Aluminum Handrails .................................................. 05 52 13.10-1

05 59 00 Aluminum Weir Plates .................................................... 05 59 00-1

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 75 13 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Fabrications .......... 06 75 13-1

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 15 00 Dampproofing ................................................................. 07 15 00-1

07 19 00 Water Repellents ............................................................. 07 19 00-1

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation .......................................................... 07 21 00-1

07 55 20 Modified Bitumen ........................................................... 07 55 20-1

07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal ................................................ 07 60 00-1

07 71 00 Roof Specialties .............................................................. 07 71 00-1

07 72 00 Roof Accessories ............................................................ 07 72 00-1

07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping ................................................. 07 84 13-1

07 84 46 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ........................................... 07 84 46-1

07 90 00 Sealants ........................................................................... 07 90 00-1



DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 11 16 Aluminum Flush Doors and Frames ............................... 08 11 16-1

08 31 13 Floor Doors and Frames.................................................. 08 31 13-1

08 31 14 Access Panels .................................................................. 08 31 14-1

08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors ................................................. 08 33 23-1

08 51 13 Aluminum Windows ....................................................... 08 51 13-1

08 71 00 Door Hardware................................................................ 08 71 00-1

08 80 00 Glazing ............................................................................ 08 80 00-1

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 91 00 Protective Coatings ......................................................... 09 91 00-1

09 91 00-1 Painting Schedule......................................................... 09 91 00-1-1

09 91 00-2 Painting Systems List ................................................... 09 91 00-2-1

09 91 00-3 Piping Colors ............................................................... 09 91 00-3-1

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage ............................................................................ 10 14 00-1

10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers ........................................................... 10 44 16-1

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ...................... 22 00 00-1

22 05 29 Pipe Hangers and Supports ............................................. 22 05 29-1

22 05 53 Mechanical Identification ............................................... 22 05 53-1

22 07 00 Mechanical Insulation ..................................................... 22 07 00-1

22 08 00.12 Testing of Piping Systems ......................................... 22 08 00.12-1

22 11 00B Water Supply System .................................................... 22 11 00B-1

22 13 00 Sanitary Drainage System ............................................... 22 13 00-1

22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment ...................................................... 22 30 00-1

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures ........................................................... 22 40 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing .................................. 23 05 93-1

23 11 23 Natural Gas System.................... ……………………….23 11 23-1

23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping ........................................................... 23 23 00-1



23 31 13 Ductwork......................................................................... 23 31 13-1

23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories .................................................... 23 33 00-1

23 33 56 Air Butterfly Valves ........................................................ 23 33 56-1

23 34 00 Fans ................................................................................. 23 34 00-1

23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets ...................................................... 23 37 00-1

23 75 23 Heating and Ventilating Unit .......................................... 23 75 23-1

23 81 26 Split Systems Air to Air Heat Pumps ............................. 23 81 26-1

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical ............................. 26 05 00-1

26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables .. 26 05 19-1

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding .................................................. 26 05 26-1

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ................. 26 05 29-1

26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems .................. 26 05 33-1

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems ............................... 26 05 53-1

26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination

Study and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis ......................... 26 05 73-1

26 05 83 Electric Motors................................................................ 26 05 83-1

26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems ............................ 26 08 00-1

26 22 13 Dry-Type Transformers .................................................. 26 22 13-1

26 24 16 Panelboards ..................................................................... 26 24 16-1

26 24 19 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers .............................. 26 24 19-1

26 27 26 Wiring Devices ............................................................... 26 27 26-1

26 28 00 Low Voltage Circuit Protection Devices ........................ 26 28 00-1

26 29 00 Low Voltage Controllers................................................. 26 29 00-1

26 29 23 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers ........................... 26 29 23-1

26 50 00 Lighting ........................................................................... 26 50 00-1

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment ................... 27 21 00-1

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 46 Smoke Detection Sensors ............................................... 28 31 46-1



DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing .................................................... 31 11 00-1

31 23 00 Trenching and Backfill ................................................... 31 23 00-1

31 23 19 Dewatering ...................................................................... 31 23 19-1

31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Control ................................ 31 25 00-1

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 05 11 Site Piping ....................................................................... 33 05 11-1

33 08 13 Piping Testing and Acceptance ....................................... 33 08 13-1

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 01 20.59 Piping and Equipment Cleaning and Testing............. 40 01 20.59-1

40 05 13.53 Ductile Iron Pipe………………………………... ..... 40 05 13.53-1

40 05 13.73 Plastic Pipe ................................................................. 40 05 13.73-1

40 05 23 Valves ............................................................................. 40 05 23-1

40 20 10 Slide Gates ...................................................................... 40 20 10-1

40 27 13 Steel, Alloy, and Copper Piping ..................................... 40 27 13-1

40 41 13 Process Piping Heat Tracing ........................................... 40 41 13-1

40 90 00 Process Controls – Scope of Work and

Loop Descriptions ......................................................... 40 90 00-1

40 91 00 Instrumentation Devices ................................................. 40 91 00-1

40 91 23.63 Influent Auto Sampler................................................ 40 91 23.63-1

40 92 43 Electric Actuators............................................................ 40 92 43-1

40 94 43 Programmable Logic Process Controllers ...................... 40 94 43-1

40 95 13 Control Panels ................................................................. 40 95 13-1

40 95 73 Instrument Signal and Power Wiring .............................. 40 95 73-1

DIVISION 43 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT (WASTEWATER) 43 21 13.25 Grit Pumps ............... ………………………………..43 21 13.25-1

43 21 39.16 Influent Sample Pump................................................ 43 21 39.16-1

DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 23 54 Grit Removal Equipment ........................................ ……46 23 54-1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS

AND METHODS 22 00 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 00 00

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work described in this Section and/or indicated on the Drawings shall include, except

where otherwise noted, the furnishing of all materials, equipment, appurtenances, accessories,

connections, labor, etc. required and/or necessary to completely install, clean, inspect, adjust,

test, balance and leave in safe and proper operating condition all mechanical systems. All

mechanical work shall be accomplished by workers skilled in the various trades involved.

B. Prior to the ordering or purchase of any equipment or materials or the layout or installation of

any work, visit and examine the site and shall examine and understand the work shown on the

Drawings and described in these Specifications. If any work involves existing equipment,

ductwork, piping, buildings, etc., first verify model numbers, electrical characteristics, sizes,

dimensions, etc. to be compatible with the work shown on the Drawings.

C. Throughout the course of the Project, schedule and coordinate work with the CITY and other

trades to optimize space utilization and avoid conflict or interference with the work of other

trades, structural elements, doors, windows, lights, conduit and other equipment or systems.

D. All electrical items shall be provided in accordance with applicable Sections of Division 26.

E. Produce complete finished operating systems and provide all incidental items required as part

of the work, regardless of whether such item is particularly specified or indicated.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

All materials shall be furnished by manufacturers fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the

manufacture of the particular material to be furnished. All material shall be designed, constructed

and installed in accordance with standard practices and methods and shall comply with these

Specifications as applicable.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for all mechanical work shall conform to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of

these Specifications.

B. Drawings and Specifications

1. The Drawings are diagrammatic and, unless specifically dimensioned, are intended to show

only the general arrangement of equipment and accessories, and the general routing of

piping, ductwork, etc. The Drawings do not specifically show every fitting, offset, contour,

etc. required to accomplish the intended work or to avoid every interference that may be

encountered. Arrange all work to fit within the allowed space without modifying any

building structure or property, and make readily accessible all equipment and accessories

requiring servicing or maintenance.



2. Should any changes be deemed necessary in items shown on the Drawings, shop drawings,

descriptions and the reason for the proposed changes shall be submitted to the CITY for

approval.

3. Exceptions and inconsistencies in Drawings and Specifications shall be brought to the

CITY's attention before Bids are submitted.

4. Titles of Sections and Articles in these Specifications are introduced merely for

convenience and are not to be construed as complete segregation of tabulation of the

various units of material and/or work.

C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Complete, neatly framed instructions for the care and

operation of all equipment shall be provided and installed where directed. Instruct the CITY's

personnel during the adjustment and testing period in the presence of the CITY's representative.

Demonstrate the complete operation of each and every piece of apparatus. In the case of

heating and air conditioning equipment, both the heating and cooling functions shall be fully

demonstrated at such times as are required. Instructional periods shall be for such lengths of

time as may be necessary to thoroughly familiarize operating personnel with the proper care,

operation and maintenance of the equipment.

D. Permits and Inspections

1. Obtain and pay for, as part of the mechanical work, all permits, fees, licenses, taxes,

assessments, etc. necessary for performing the work outlined in the Contract Documents.

2. All applicable certificates of inspection shall be delivered to the CITY at the completion of

the work.

1.04 TRANSPORATION AND DELIVERY

A. As part of the mechanical work, provide and pay for all transportation, delivery and storage

required for all equipment and materials.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall closely coordinate the ordering and delivery of all mechanical

equipment with other trades with other trades to assure that equipment will be delivered in time

to be installed without requiring special or temporary access or building modifications. Certain

equipment may have to be installed prior to the erection of the building walls or roofs.

1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Upon receipt of all equipment and materials, they shall be properly stored to protect them from

vandalism, theft, the elements and other harm or damage. Any equipment or materials received

in a damaged condition, or damaged after receipt, shall not be installed. Only new undamaged

equipment in first-class operating condition shall be installed.

B. Provide protection covers, skids, plugs or caps to protect equipment and materials stored or

otherwise exposed during construction.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The manufacturer shall provide written certification to the CITY that all equipment furnished

complies with all applicable requirements of these Specifications.



B. Codes and Standards

1. All mechanical work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable codes,

ordinances, rules and regulations of local, state, federal or other authorities having

jurisdiction. As a minimum this shall include:

a. 2009 International Building Code

b. 2009 International Mechanical Code

c. 2009 International Energy Conservation Code

d. 2009 International Plumbing Code

e. 2009 International Fuel Gas Code

f. 2009 International Fire Code

g. National Fire Protection Association Codes

h. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, the latest edition of all codes, including

state and local amendments or ordinances, shall be followed. Where code or other

requirements exceed the provisions shown on the Contract Documents, notify the

CITY. Where provisions of the Contract Documents exceed code or other

requirements, the Work shall be performed in accordance with the Contract

Documents.

2. All equipment, products and materials used in mechanical work shall be Underwriter's

Laboratories listed or labeled as applicable.

3. Schedule all required tests and inspections with a minimum of 72 hours prior notice to the

CITY.

C. Allowable Tolerances: Equipment shall be readily adaptable for installation and operation in

the structures shown on the Drawings. No responsibility for alteration of a planned structure to

accommodate other types of equipment will be assumed by the CITY. Equipment which

requires alteration of the structures will be considered only if the CONTRACTOR assumes all

responsibility for making and coordinating all necessary alterations. All such alterations shall

be made at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. General

1. All equipment, materials, accessories, etc. used as part of the mechanical work shall be

new, of the best grade and quality and of current production, unless specified otherwise.

Equipment not specified in the Contract Documents shall be suitable for the intended use

and shall be subject to approval by the CITY.

2. All equipment, products and materials used in mechanical work shall be Underwriter's

Laboratories listed or labeled as applicable.

3. All equipment, products and materials shall be free of defects and shall be constructed to

operate in a safe manner without excessive noise, vibration, leakage or wear.

4. Electric motors shall be standard efficiency, drip-proof type unless otherwise specified.



B. Piping: See appropriate Sections of Divisions 22, 23, 33, and 40 for Specifications on various

piping systems. See Part 3 of this Section for general stipulations on installation of piping

systems.

C. Valves: See appropriate Sections of Divisions 23 and 40 for Specifications and Part 3 of this

Section for general stipulations on valve installation.

D. Unions: Provide and install unions between each item of equipment and the valve controlling

and/or the various piping connections to it.

1. Steel Pipe: Unions 2-1/2-inches and smaller shall have ground joints. Unions 3-inches and

larger shall have flanged unions.

2. Copper Pipe: Unions 2-1/2-inches and smaller shall have brass ground joints, copper to

copper. Unions 3-inches and larger shall have brass flanged unions, with brass bolts.

3. PVC Pipe: Unions 2-inches and smaller shall have threaded Buna O-rings. Unions

2-1/2-inches and larger shall be flanged.

E. Strainers

1. Strainers in water lines shall have cast iron bodies, with standard pattern, stainless steel or

monel baskets with standard perforations and shall be equal to Hellan Fluid Strainer, Type

D, unless otherwise specified in other Sections of Division 40.

2. All strainers shall be of the same size as the piping in which they are installed. Provide

dielectric union, if necessary, to isolate strainer from pipe material.

F. Equipment Bases: Each piece of equipment which is motor driven shall be furnished with an

approved base, which shall be in addition to the foundation. Each base shall be furnished

integral with the equipment or apparatus, or shall be furnished as a separate item, designed to

accommodate the equipment or apparatus. Submit shop drawings for all foundations and

supports for review.

G. Dielectric Isolation

1. Wherever copper, brass or bronze piping systems are connected to steel or iron piping

systems, this connection shall be made with dielectric isolators. The dielectric isolators

shall be so designed that non-ferrous piping materials shall be isolated by the use of Teflon

or nylon isolating materials made up in the form of screwed type unions or insulating

gaskets and bolt sleeves and washers for standard flanged connection. All dielectric

isolators shall be selected for the pressure of the system involved.

2. Dielectric isolators shall be Watts, Epco, Crane or Maloney.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. All equipment, materials, accessories, etc. used as part of the mechanical work shall be

installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the best



practice and standards for the work.

2. All work shall be performed by competent personnel satisfactory to the CITY. All work

requiring particular skill shall be performed by persons that have had special training and

past experience in that line of work.

B. Equipment Support

1. Major equipment supports (concrete foundations, framed structural openings, etc.) shall be

furnished and installed under other Divisions of the Contract Documents as shown on the

Drawings. The mechanical work shall include the furnishing and installation of all

miscellaneous equipment supports, housekeeping pads, structural members, rods, clamps

and hangers required to provide adequate support of all mechanical equipment.

2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all mechanical equipment, piping and

accessories shall be installed level, square and plumb.

3. All equipment, piping, etc. supported by structural joists shall be supported by the top

chord only of such joists. Hangers shall not be attached to the bottom chord of any joists.

C. Pipe and Ductwork Penetrations

1. Sleeves shall be installed in all masonry or concrete walls, floors, roofs, etc. for pipe and

ductwork penetrations. Sleeves for pipe shall be standard weight steel pipe. Sleeves for

ductwork shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel. Sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum

of 1/4-inch clearance between the sleeve and pipe or duct. For insulated pipes or ducts, the

clearance shall be between the sleeve and the insulation. Each penetration shall be

firestopped or otherwise protected by listed materials with a minimum fire rating equivalent

to the rating of the structural element where it occurs.

2. As far as possible, all pipe and ductwork penetrations shall be provided for at the time of

masonry or concrete construction. Where drilling is required, only core drills shall be used.

Star drills shall not be used.

3. All pipes penetrating walls or floors of any construction shall be installed with escutcheon

plates on both sides of the penetration securely fastened to the wall or floor. In finished

areas, escutcheon plates shall be chrome-plated. All escutcheons plates shall be sized to

completely conceal the penetration. Ductwork penetrating walls or floors of any material

shall be installed with closure plates on both sides of the penetration. Penetrations through

exterior walls shall be sealed weathertight.

4. All penetrations through fire rated structures shall be firestopped with materials listed for

such use and shall equal or exceed the rating of the structure being penetrated.

D. Flashing

1. All piping and ductwork penetrating roofs shall be flashed in an approved manner, shall be

watertight and shall conform to the requirements detailed in other Sections of these

Specifications.

2. Flashing for piping shall be sheet lead of not less than six pounds per square foot, shall

have a base not less than two square feet, and shall extend up over and into the open end of

the pipe. All flashing shall be properly caulked and sealed.



E. Welding

1. All welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding process, employing a metallic

arc or gas welding process.

2. All welding operations shall conform to the latest recommendations of the American

Welding Society or to the applicable provisions of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping.

Pay for all electrical energy and/or gas used in welding.

F. Equipment Connections

1. Extend waste, water, gas and compressed air lines to the various items of equipment as

indicated or required, terminating the lines where and as directed. Make all final plumbing

connections. Provide shut-off valves and unions at each water, gas and air connection to

each item of equipment requiring same. Furnish all P-traps for waste connections to this

equipment.

2. During the roughing-in phase of the work, extend service lines to the various items of

equipment, terminating them at the proper points for connection to those items of

equipment as indicated on the detailed drawings of the equipment and/or as directed.

During the time the equipment is being installed or after it is in place, make all final

connections thereto.

3. The equipment manufacturer will provide all holes in the tops, racks, splash backs or

aprons required and will furnish all sinks, waste tailpieces, supply fittings, cocks, pedestals,

etc., required for all water and gas to be mounted on the equipment.

G. Cutting and Patching: Where cutting or patching becomes necessary to permit the installation

of any work or should it become necessary to repair any defects that may appear in patching,

the CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary repair at no cost to the CITY.

H. Large Apparatus and Equipment: All large apparatus and equipment which is specified or

shown to be furnished or installed under this Contract, and which may be too large to be moved

into its final position through the normal building openings planned, shall be placed in its

approximate final position before any obstructing structure is installed. All apparatus shall be

cribbed up from the floor and cared for as specified under "Storage and Protection" or as

directed by the CITY.

I. Cross Connection and Interconnections

1. No plumbing fixture, device or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross

connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic

purposes and a polluted supply, such as drainage system or a soil or waste pipe which will

permit or make possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water or waste into the water

supply system.

2. Verify location of all existing utilities and make all connections to existing facilities as

required.

J. Thermal Expansion of Piping

1. Furnish and install all devices required to permit the expansion and contraction of all work

subject to expansion and contraction, particularly in steam, water supply and circulating



systems. In these systems employ expansion joints and guides where required or directed

by the Engineer. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops or long offsets shall be provided

wherever shown on the Drawings or wherever necessary to allow for the expansion of

piping within the building. Broken pipes or fittings broken due to rigid connections must

be removed and replaced at no cost to the CITY.

2. Anchor all lines having expansion joints so that expansion and contraction effect is equally

distributed. Verify exact locations of anchors and guides with the Engineer prior to making

installation. The lines having expansion joints shall be accurately guided on both sides of

each joint. These guides shall consist of saddles and "U" clamps where not otherwise

indicated and shall be properly arranged and supported. Submit complete details for

approval.

3. Installing expansion members, exercise care to preserve proper pitch on lines. Furnish and

install all special fittings, connectors, etc., as required.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION, SHOP, AND FIELD PAINTING

A. Unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings, general painting of mechanical

equipment shall be in accordance with Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications.

B. Touch-up painting of mechanical equipment shall be part of the mechanical work. All

equipment and materials that are painted or coated by the manufacturer shall be touched-up

prior to completion to conceal any and all scratches or other finish irregularities and to maintain

the integrity of the paint or coating. All painting and coating shall match the original and shall

conform to the requirements detailed in other Sections of these Specifications.

C. All roof-mounted equipment shall be painted with an exterior paint of a type and color as

approved by the CITY. The painting shall not impair the performance of the equipment in any

manner.

3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Testing of Pipelines: Refer to Section 22 08 00 of these Specifications for general

requirements.

B. The mechanical work shall include all materials and labor required to properly test and balance

all mechanical systems as required by codes and as described herein.

C. Concealed, underground and insulated piping shall be tested in place before concealing,

burying or covering. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the CITY or designated

representative. Equipment, materials and instruments required for tests shall be furnished

without incurring additions to the Contract. The Contractor shall schedule all required tests and

inspections with a minimum of 72 hours prior notice to the CITY.

D. Unless otherwise specified herein, all mechanical piping shall be tested as required by Code to

1-1/2 times the rated system pressure or 150 psig, whichever is greater. Care shall be taken to

isolate all equipment not suitable for this test pressure by installing pipe caps or blank flanges at

the equipment connections. All valves and fittings shall be tested under pressure.

E. Unless more stringent requirements are specified herein, the following procedures shall be used

for pressure testing building mechanical piping gravity-drained piping systems. Soil, waste and



vent piping shall be tested with water before installing fixtures. Water test shall be applied to

the system either in its entirety or in sections. If the test is applied to the entire system, all

openings in the piping shall be closed except to highest opening, and the system shall be filled

with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the

highest opening of the section under test shall be plugged and each section shall be filled with

water and tested with at least a 10-foot head of water. Each joint or pipe in the building except

the uppermost 10 feet of the system shall be submitted to a test with at least a 10 foot head of

water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least one hour

before the inspection starts; no drop in the water level will be acceptable.

F. The services of an independent testing and balancing agency shall be used to balance the air

and water distribution systems.

3.04 CLEANING

A. At all times, the premises shall be kept reasonably clean and free of undue amounts of waste,

trash and debris by periodic cleaning and removal. After completion, all foreign material, trash

and other debris shall be removed from the site.

B. After all equipment has been installed, but prior to testing and balancing, all equipment, piping,

ductwork, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned both inside and out.

C. All air moving equipment operated during construction shall have filters in place and changed

regularly so as to be clean.

D. After testing and balancing and just prior to CITY review and acceptance, all systems shall be

finally cleaned and shall be left ready for use. Air filters shall be new and piping strainers shall

be clean.

END OF SECTION 22 00 00

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 22 05 29-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 05 29

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Design, furnish and install pipe hangers, supports and brackets necessary to install piping

furnished under these Contract Documents. Provide all foundations, shims, hangers, clamps,

supplemental steel, fasteners, anchor bolts and other hardware required for the complete

installation as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. The Drawings do not show every pipe hanger or support location. The CONTRACTOR shall

provide all pipe hangers and supports required to securely support all piping in accordance with

the referenced standards.

C. In general, pipe supports shall refer to items which support pipe from below and hangers refer to

items which support pipe from above.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit pipe hangers and support materials, locations, structural steel connections, supplemental

support steel, miscellaneous hardware and hot dip galvanizing procedure for materials not

factory galvanized.

C. Submit pipe hanger and support assembly drawings including location drawings identifying

member to which the hanger or support will be attached and a bill of materials for each

assembly.


A. Work shall be installed by workers experienced in the selection, fabrication and installation of

pipe support systems.

B. Selection, fabrication and installation of pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the

requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, SP-69 and SP-89, except as supplemented or

modified by the requirements of these Specifications.

C. Weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the required supporting force at each

hanger location and the pipe weight load at each equipment connection.

D. Pipe support system shall utilize standard manufactured hangers and supports wherever possible.

E. Pipe support materials in contact with piping shall be compatible with the piping materials such

that neither shall have a deteriorating action on the other.

F. Supplemental steel shall be designed per AISC Steel Construction Manual and the International

Building Code.

G. All supporting equipment shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 5 based on the

ultimate tensile strength of the material.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Where pipe hangers and supports are to be installed in existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall


be responsible for field verifying existing or as-built dimensions prior to fabrication of pipe hanger

and support systems.

1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate scheduling of pipe hanger and support installation with the

piping system installation to prevent any damage to installed piping due lack of pipe supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Pipe hangers and supports shall be manufactured by Anvil, B-Line Systems, Michigan Hanger

Company, Aickenstrut, or Jove.

2.02 GENERAL MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Contact between ferrous supports and non-ferrous piping materials shall not be permitted.

Supports and clamps shall be rubber coated or copper-plated as necessary to prevent this

condition.

B. All supports and hangers shall meet the following material requirements:

1. All exposed or submerged supports shall be Type 304 stainless steel. All fasteners shall be

Type 316 stainless steel. If the item described in the Figure numbers below cannot be

provided in stainless steel, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the closest equivalent product

in stainless steel.

2. All structural steel and stainless steel and hot rolled stainless steel rod shall conform to

ASTM A 36.

3. All pipe support columns shall conform to ASTM A 53, Grade B and shall be minimum

Schedule 40.

4. All embedded anchor bolt materials shall conform to ASTM A 193, Grade B8 or IFI-104,

Grade 304. Nuts shall be heavy hex nuts conforming to ASTM A 194, Grade 8 or IFI-104,

Grade 304. Minimum anchor bolt size and embedment shall be determined by the load that

the bolt is designed to support.

5. All rod and bolting materials shall conform to ASTM A 320, Grade B8. Nuts shall be heavy

hex nuts conforming to ASTM A 194, Grade 8 or 8T.

6. All carbon steel or malleable iron straps, hangers, clamps, U-bolts and other hardware in

contact with the pipe shall be shop primed except where specified or shown on the Drawings

to be galvanized.

7. Expansion type anchor bolts shall be of stainless steel construction and shall comply with

Federal Specifications FF-S-325.

8. Flat strap hangers shall not be permitted. Hangers relying on mastics or adhesives shall not

be used.

2.03 PIPE HANGERS FOR HORIZONTAL PIPING

A. Uninsulated Pipes: Steel, double bolt pipe clamp, equal to Anvil Figure 295(stainless).

B. Insulated Pipes: Steel, adjustable clevis pipe hanger, equal to Anvil Figure 260(stainless). Size

hanger to wrap around insulation; provide insulation protection shield between insulation and


hanger, equal to Anvil Figure 167(stainless).

C. Long runs of pipe subject to expansion shall be hung by means of adjustable swivel pipe roll

hangers equal to Anvil Figure 177(stainless).

D. Short runs of uninsulated pipe subject to expansion in sizes up to and including 3-1/2-inches as

well as all pipe of those sizes not subject to expansion shall be hung by means of adjustable

swivel, split pipe ring equal to Anvil Figure 104(stainless).

E. Insulated piping and tubing, short lengths of 4-inches and larger pipe subject to expansion, and

pipe 4-inches and larger not subject to expansion shall be hung by means of adjustable clevis

hangers equal to Anvil Figure 260(stainless). Corrosion resistant clevis hangers shall be

constructed of fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) and shall be equal to Jove FPH Series.

F. Uninsulated copper tubing shall be hung by means of copper-plated, split ring hangers with

copper-plated sockets equal to Anvil Figure CT-109.

2.04 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR HORIZONTAL PIPING

A. Pipe 2-inches and less in diameter and not subject to expansion may, when paralleling walls, be

supported by single hook clamp hangers equal to Anvil Figure 126(stainless).

B. Pipe supported from underneath and subject to expansion shall have adjustable pipe roll stand

supports equal to Anvil Figure 274(stainless). The pipe roll stand shall be supported by concrete

piers, structural steel or steel brackets as required.

C. Pipe supported from underneath and not subject to expansion shall have cast-in-place concrete

supports or adjustable pipe saddle supports on properly sized pipe stanchions and ample,

properly grouted floor flanges. Saddle supports shall be equal to Anvil Figure 264(stainless).

D. When supports are installed exterior to buildings, provide a 1/4-inch drain hole near the base.

2.05 PIPE RISER CLAMPS FOR VERTICAL PIPING

A. Steel riser clamps, equal to Anvil Figure 261(stainless).

B. Provide insulation protection shields for insulated piping.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE

A. General: Miscellaneous hardware shall be stainless steel material in all process areas.

B C-Clamp with Locknut: Steel, equal to Anvil Figure 86(stainless).

C. Hanger Rods: Continuously threaded, steel, equal to Anvil Figure 146(stainless).

D. Welded Eye Hanger Rods: Steel, threaded at end, left or right hand thread as required, equal to

Anvil Figure 278 or 278L(stainless).

E. U-Bolts: Steel with four finished hex nuts, galvanized, special dimensions as required for

installation, equal to Anvil Figure 137(stainless) (137S for special dimensions).

F. Turnbuckle: Forged construction, equal to Anvil Figure 230(stainless).

G. Threaded Rod Coupling: Malleable iron, equal to Anvil Figure 136(stainless) (136R for

reducing).

H. Hangers suspended from structural steel shall be supported on U.F.S. beam clamp equal to Anvil

Figure 228L(stainless) or 292L(stainless) with links as required.

I. Hangers from concrete work shall be secured by universal, metal inserts equal to Anvil Figure


282(stainless), placed in the concrete at the time of pouring. Wooden plugs or other improvised

means shall not be used for any form of hanger fastening.

J. Protection Saddles: Protection saddles shall be equal to Anvil Figure 160(stainless) or

161(stainless).

K. Insulation Shields: Insulation shields shall be galvanized with a 180 degree contour equal to

Anvil Figure 167(stainless).

L. Shock absorbing devices for shock and sway suppression shall be equal to Anvil Figure

200(stainless).

2.07 SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL

A. Utilize standard steel or stainless steel shapes fabricated in accordance with ASTM A 36.

B. Prime and paint supplemental steel support brackets and assemblies after all fabrication

procedures (welding, drilling, cutting, etc.) are complete. No coating is required for stainless

steel components.

2.08 NON-METALLIC SUPPORTS

A. All glass fiber reinforced channel covered under this Section shall have a flame spread rating of

25 or less when tested per ASTM E 84.

B. Glass fiber reinforced channel framing shall have a minimum pull out resistance of 1,000 pounds

when a load is applied to the inside of the flanges over a 3/8-inch long section of the channel and

shall not deflect more than 1/4-inch when a uniform load of 1,000 pounds is applied to a 24-inch

beam. Framing shall have a surface veil over 100 percent of the surface which, along with a

properly designed filler system will protect against degradation from ultraviolet light and shall be

made from corrosion resistant grade polyester or vinylester resins. Framing shall be Aickenstrut

Type P or V.

C. Polyvinyl chloride channel framing shall be manufactured by the extrusion process and shall

have a minimum pull-out strength of 1,400 pounds when a load is applied to the inside of the

flanges over a 3/8-inch long section of the channel. Framing shall be manufactured from a UV

stabilized resin. Framing shall be Aickenstrut Type E.

D. Universal pipe clamps shall be made by the injection molding process using a polyurethane base

resin, shall have full and interlocking contact with the interior area of channel flanges to

maximize pull-out resistance, shall be adjustable to accommodate a minimum 3/4-inch variance

in OD sizes of piping or conduit, and shall contain no metal materials. Pipe clamps shall be

Aickenstrut "Aickenstrap".

E. All fasteners shall be manufactured from long glass fiber-reinforced polyurethane.

F. All threaded rods shall be made from vinylester resin.

2.09 INSULATION SHIELDS AND SADDLES - HORIZONTAL PIPING

A. Minimum insulation shield requirements unless otherwise noted:

1. Pipes 2-Inches and Smaller: 18 gauge x 12-inches long.

2. Pipes 2-1/2-Inches and Larger: 16 gauge x 12-inches long.

B. Shields shall be 180 degree type at all pipe hangers, except that on trapeze hangers, pipe rack and

on floor supported horizontal pipes shields shall be 360 degree type. Use foamglass inserts at all

shields, hangers, sleeves, etc.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be installed in complete conformance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and the Contract Documents.

B. Pipe hangers and supports shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation.

Hangers and supports shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent

excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into the pipe or connected

equipment.

C. Intermediate pipe supports shall be provided between building structural members so as not to

exceed maximum support spacing specified shall be galvanized structural steel angles (minimum

2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 1/4-inch).

D. If vibration is encountered after the piping system is in operation, appropriate vibration control

equipment shall be installed at the direction of the ENGINEER.

E. All threaded connections installed loose, such as hanger rods and U-bolts, shall have a double

nut installation.

F. Provide pipe hangers or supports within 18-inches of each elbow and within 24-inches of each

equipment connection.

G. Pipes shall not be supported by non-loading bearing walls and partitions. Pipe hangers shall not

be connected to roof decking, bar joists or ceiling suspension systems unless approved by the

ENGINEER.

H. Unless otherwise shown, piping shall not be fastened to a support in such a manner than would

prevent axial movement due to thermal expansion and contraction.

I. Supports, guides, and anchors shall be so designed that excessive heat will not be transmitted to

the building steel. The temperature of supporting parts shall be based on a temperature gradient

of 100 degrees F per inch distance from the outside surface of the pipe.

J. No pipe shall be supported from floor grating.

K. The CONTRACTOR shall size supports and hangers using actual field dimensions.

3.02 INSTALLATION – HORIZONTAL PIPING

A. Spacing of hangers and supports for above ground horizontal piping shall be in accordance with

ANSI/ASME B31.1 and MSS SP-69.

B. Carbon steel, alloy steel, stainless steel and hard-drawn copper pipe shall be supported on

maximum intervals as follows:

Pipe Size Maximum Interval For Steel Maximum Interval For Copper

1/2" 5’ 4’

3/4" 6’ 5’

1" 7’ 6’

1-1/2" 9’ 8’

2" 10’ 9’


Pipe Size Maximum Interval For Steel Maximum Interval For Copper

2-1/2" 11’ 10’

3" 12’ 11’

4" 13’ -

6" 17’ -

8" 19’ -

10" 22’ -

12" 23’ -

14" 25’ -

16" 27’ -

18" 28’ -

20" 30’ -

24" 32’ -

C. Uninsulated PVC and CPVC piping shall be supported on maximum intervals as follows at

design temperatures up to 80 degrees F:

Pipe Size Maximum Intervals

PVC Schedule 40 PVC Schedule 80 CPVC Schedule 80

1/2" - 3/4" 4’ 4’ 4’

1" 4’ 5’ 5’

1-1/4" - 1-1/2" 5’ 5’ 6’

2" 5’ 6’ 7’

2-1/2" 5’ 6’ 8’

3" 6’ 7’ 8’

4" 6’ 7’ 9’

6" 6’ 8’ 10’

D. Pipe hangers and supports shall be installed at intervals recommended for a specific application

by the piping system manufacturer.

E. Provide all necessary steel angles and other items required to maintain the minimum hanger or

support spacing.

F. Wherever possible, pipe attachments for uninsulated horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps.

G. Wherever possible, structural attachments shall be beam clamps.

H. Pipe Hangers

1. Pipe hangers, trapeze hangers, upper attachments and other supports shall be selected based


on pipe material, size and service conditions. Provide all hangers and rods, turnbuckles,

angles, channels and other structural supports to support the piping systems. The minimum

rod diameter for single pipe rigid rod hangers shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Minimum Hanger Rod Diameter For

Steel, Ductile and Cast Iron Soil Pipe

Minimum Hanger Rod

Diameter For Copper

And Plastic Pipe

2" and smaller 3/8" 3/8"

2-1/2" and 3" 1/2" 1/2"

4" and 5" 5/8" 1/2"

6" 3/4" 5/8"

8", 10" and 12" 7/8" 3/4"

14" 1" 7/8"

16" and 18" 1" -

20" and 24" 1-1/4" -

2. Hangers shall permit a minimum of 1-1/2-inch vertical adjustment after installation.

3. Where the piping system is subject to shock loads, such as seismic disturbances or thrusts

imposed by the actuation of safety valves, pipe hangers shall include shock absorbing

devices.

4. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or

axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing. Where

lateral or axial movement cannot be tolerated, provide sway bracing for rods exceeding 10

feet.

5. Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod

angularity from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the

pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such a manner that the rod

is vertical in the hot position.

6. Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the

supported pipe.

7. Hangers shall be sized to fit around insulation.

I. Additional hangers and supports shall be provided as required so that there is no movement or

visible sagging between supports.

J. Where indicated on the Drawings or directed by the ENGINEER, exposed piping and tubing

carrying liquid shall be sloped as necessary to permit complete draining. Pipe deflection

between supports shall be considered when determining the slope required to permit complete

drainage.

K. Pipe Supports for Floor Supported Horizontal Piping: Pipe supports for horizontal piping

supported on concrete floors and on concrete bases shall be adjustable pipe saddle support with

U-bolt and screwed floor flange. Bolt floor flange to floor and bases utilizing all bolt holes. Use

foam glass inserts at all saddles, sleeves, etc.


L. Open ends of pipe columns used for support shall be completely covered with 1/4-inch thick

plate or angle leg welded in place.

3.03 INSTALLATION – VERTICAL PIPING

A. Supports for all pipes shall fit directly around the pipe, except that on insulated pipes, the support

shall be insulated and provided with vapor barrier.

B. Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with a riser clamp at each floor. Riser

clamps shall have steel lugs, 1/3-inch thick x 2-inches high x 1-1/2-inches long, welded to the

clamp arms so that clamp does not come in contact with the pipe sleeve.

C. Vertical piping shall be supported as shown or required to prevent buckling or swaying utilizing

special brackets. Unless otherwise shown, vertical piping shall be supported at the bottom and at

each floor. Vertical copper tubing 1-inch and smaller in size shall be supported at five foot

intervals.

3.04 INSULATION SHIELDS AND SADDLES - HORIZONTAL PIPING

A. Galvanized pipe clamps, including bolts and nuts, shall be provided with the framing channels

and shall be used for securing pipes to channels. Pipe clamps on insulated pipes shall fit around

pipe, pipe insulation and pipe insulation protection shield. Clamps and fasteners shall be

stainless steel in all process areas.

B. Insulation on hot piping (carrying fluids above 70 degrees F) shall be protected at supports and

hangers with a 12-inch long galvanized steel protection saddle with welded center support.

Protection saddle shall be equal to Anvil Figure 160(stainless) or 161(stainless).

C. Insulation on cold piping (carrying fluids at 70 degrees F or below) shall be protected at supports

and hangers by galvanized steel insulation shields with a 180 degree contour. Insulation shields

shall be equal to Anvil Figure 167(stainless).

D. On insulation finished with an aluminum jacket, a 1/32-inch thick sheet of neoprene shall be

provided between the jacket and the shield.

3.05 SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL

A. All supplemental steel shall be stainless steel fabricated in accordance with the requirements of

the AISC Manual of Steel Construction and the International Building Code.

B. If used, no flame cutting of galvanized steel members will be permitted.

3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING

Fabricated pipe supports and accessories, except where shown on the Drawings to be galvanized,

shall be cleaned and shop primed in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 91 00.

3.07 FIELD PAINTING

Field painting all pipe hangers, supports and accessories shall be in accordance with the requirements

of Section 09 91 00. Stainless and copper components shall be uncoated.

3.08 CLEANING

Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials, equipment

and related areas in accordance with Section 01 74 00.


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 22 05 53-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 05 53

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work specified in this section is subject to the provisions of Section 22 00 00.

B. Furnish and install markers, tags and nameplates for heating, ventilating, air conditioning,

plumbing and fire protection equipment, piping, controls, and valves to fully identify these items

in reference to a master list.

C. Furnish a complete list of all equipment, piping, controls and valves with coordinated

designations and locations for each device.

1.02 REFERENCES

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of

Piping Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Submit catalog cuts, product samples, installation instructions and any other information

required to determine compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Submit complete list of equipment, piping, controls and valves with identification codes and

locations. Coordinate this list with the equipment identifications utilized in other sections of the

Specifications and by the various trades involved in the work.


A. All materials of a similar type shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

B. Identification materials shall be manufactured by a company regularly producing this type of

product. Materials used shall be specifically manufactured for identification purposes.


A. Coordinate installation of identification devices with the installation of the mechanical

equipment.

B. Installation of identification devices may be done at the equipment manufacturer's factory.

C. Install identification devices prior to final testing and balancing of the mechanical systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Mechanical identification items shall be manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, Seton Name Plate

Corporation, or ComplianceSigns, Inc.

2.02 PIPE MARKERS

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 22 05 53-2 JULY 2013

For pipe markers, refer to Section 09 91 00.

2.03 VALVE MARKERS

A. Provide 1-1/2-inch diameter polished brass markers, not less than 19 gauge thickness.

B. Letters shall be 1/4-inch high. Numbers shall be 1/2-inch high. Both letters and numbers shall

be stamped and black-filled.

C. Valve marker fasteners shall be either meter seals, four-ply 18 gauge smooth copper wire, brass

"S" hooks, or brass jack chain.

D. Markers shall bear indications corresponding to the notations on the framed wiring diagrams,

control diagrams and operating instructions.

2.04 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Provide 2-1/2 x 3/4-inch aluminum nameplates with black enamel background and either etched

or engraved lettering.

B. Provide corrosion-resistant fasteners.

C. Nameplates shall bear indications corresponding to the notations on the framed wiring diagrams,

control diagrams and operating instructions.

2.05 CONTROL NAMEPLATES

A. Provide laminated white plastic nameplates with black lettering.

B. Each switch position shall be clearly indicated.

C. Word nameplates to identify the respective product and function.

D. Provide corrosion-resistant fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE MARKERS

For pipe markers, refer to Section 09 91 00.

3.02 VALVE MARKERS

Fasten to valve body in a manner which will facilitate being easily read.

3.03 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

Mount securely to the appropriate piece of equipment.

3.04 CONTROL NAMEPLATES

Mount securely to the appropriate control device such that switch position and control function are

easily read.

3.05 VALVE LIST FRAME

Secure on mechanical room wall; mount one valve list in frame.


MECHANICAL INSULATION 22 07 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 07 00

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish and install thermal insulation for equipment, ductwork, piping and tanks as indicated

below.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the testing standards indicated below shall be used as test procedures to

verify compliance of submitted products with performance standards specified herein.

Manufacturers of submitted products shall certify that materials furnished are tested in

accordance with these standards.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards

ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards

NFPA 255 Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL) Standards

UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials


A. Insulation products shall have a Flame Spread Rating not exceeding 25 and Smoke Developed

Rating not exceeding 50.

B. Installation shall be performed by workers skilled in the fitting and installation of insulation

products.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit catalog cuts, performance data, sealing tape, mastic and all other information required to

demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Insulation products shall be manufactured by CertainTeed, Knauf, Johns Manville, Owens-Corning,

IMCOA, Pittsburgh-Corning and Armstrong.

2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION


A. Board type insulation shall be glass fiber board with factory applied foil-skrim-kraft vapor

barrier. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.23 BTU./hr/Ft

2/F at 75 degrees F.

B. Ductwork carrying conditioned (heated or cooled) supply or return air located in mechanical

rooms or other service areas shall be insulated with 1-inch thick board type insulation.

C. Ductwork carrying outside air shall be insulated with 2-inch thick board type insulation.

D. Ductwork carrying exhaust air above suspended ceilings in return air plenums shall not be

insulated unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

E. Ductwork carrying conditioned (heated or cooled) air located outdoors or otherwise exposed to

weather shall be insulated with 2-inch thick board type insulation and coated with waterproof

mastic.

2.03 PIPE INSULATION

A. Materials (Indoor Piping for Temperatures 150 F and Less):

1. Piping insulation shall be flexible elastomeric closed-cell type, slipped on the pipe prior to

connection whenever possible. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, the insulation

shall be pre-slit and snapped over the pipe with pre-applied adhesive. Butt joints shall be

sealed with insulation manufacturer's adhesive or heat fuse method. Where required, the

insulation shall be covered with insulation manufacturer's finish. Thermal conductivity shall

not exceed 0.27 BTU.in/hr/Ft

2/F at 75 degrees F.

2. Fittings shall be insulated using fabricated fitting covers of flexible elastomeric closed-cell

type insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Join slit seams and

mitered joints with insulation manufacturer's adhesive or heat fuse method.

B. Materials (Outdoor Piping Exposed to Weather)

1. Premolded cellular glass thermal insulation shall be furnished in accordance with ASTM C

552 and C 585 fabricated for standard pipe sizes, fittings and valves.

2. Maximum thermal conductivity of 0.32 BTU.in/hr/Ft

2/F at 70 degrees F in accordance with

ASTM C 177 and C 518.

3. Maximum water vapor permeability of 0.00 perm-in when tested in accordance with ASTM

E 96.

4. Average density of 8.0 pounds per cubic foot.

5. Maximum Flame Spread Rating of 5 and Smoke-Developed Rating of 0 when tested in

accordance with NFPA 255.

6. Utilize installation adhesives and joint sealants as recommended by the insulation

manufacturer.

7. Furnish 30 gauge smooth Type 316 stainless steel jacketing over insulation retained by

stainless steel bands

8. Insulation products shall be equal to Pittsburgh Corning Foamglass.

C. Description: Piping insulation thickness shall be 1-inch for cold pipes up to 2-inches, 2-inch for

hot water pipes up to 2-inches 1-1/2-inches for pipes over 2-inches and up to 4-inches, and

2-inches for pipes over 4-inches in accordance with the ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Insulation butt joints shall be sealed with tape a minimum of 2-inches wide matching the

character of the insulation vapor barrier.

C. Insulation bonding must be by glue, self-adhesive lap or tape. Staples are not permitted.

Mechanical fasteners shall only be located on the underside of ductwork three feet or greater in

width. Seal all vapor barrier punctures.

D. Surface to be insulated and insulation shall be clean and dry during installation.

E. Insulation shall be continuous through wall or floor penetrations.

3.02 PIPE INSULATION

A. Pipe hangers shall be outside of the pipe insulation.

B. Install pipe insulation on exterior pipe below grade to a depth at least six inches below the frost

line or 30 inches below grade, whichever is greater.

C. Seal edges of pipe insulation with approved mastic to create a water and vapor proof seal.

D. Insulate all of the services listed below. Where domestic service is called out, it is defined as

piping concealed above ceilings and within walls or exposed in return air plenums and

mechanical rooms.

1. Tempered water piping.

2. Domestic potable water piping located in Mechanical Rooms, Toilet Room, storage rooms,

and Operator Room. Do not insulate potable water piping located in process areas.

3. Non-potable water piping subject to freezing and as indicated on drawings

4. Domestic hot water piping located in Mechanical Rooms, Toilet Room, storage rooms, and

Operator Room. Do not insulate hot potable water piping located in process areas.

5. AHU condensate piping.

6. Refrigeration piping.

E. Insulate all piping, valves and fittings that are heat traced in addition to those services specified

herein.

F. Paint or identify insulation on services in accordance with Section 22 05 53.


TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS 22 08 00.12-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 08 00.12

TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: Test all piping for integrity, including include water tests, air tests, and smoke tests as

specified herein.

B. Related Sections: All Sections of Division 22 regarding Plumbing Piping Systems.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Building Codes: Comply with the Uniform Plumbing Code, as supplemented by the authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. CITY shall witness all tests covered by this Section. CONTRACTOR shall provide 48 hours

advanced notice of tests.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus to the CITY for

approval at least 48 hours in advance of testing.

B. Submit a test report for each test to the CITY certifying the test pressure, duration of the test, and test

performance of all installed piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Test pressures for piping will be as scheduled in the piping Section(s). If not scheduled, they shall be

as specified below.

B. Conduct all tests in the presence of and in a manner approved by CITY and all state and local

authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat test for these authorities if requested by them.

C. Repair and retest all lines that do not pass the tests as specified herein.

D. All valves will be involved in the specified tests. CONTRACTOR shall plan and organize the test

procedures to test against at least one side of all valves (in closed position).

E. Inspect all valves, joints, and specialties for tightness and for proper operation while under test


pressure.

3.02 LIQUID PRESSURE PIPING

A. Piping carrying water or sewage, and normally flowing full, will be pressure tested. The procedure

to be followed is:

1. For underground pipe, complete backfill and compaction at least to the pipe centerline and allow

concrete for thrust blocks to reach design strength before testing, unless otherwise approved by

Engineer.

2. For aboveground pipe, assure that adequate thrust restraint is in place before testing.

3. Fill section to be tested slowly with water and expel all air. Install corporation cocks, if

necessary, to remove all air.

4. Apply specified test pressure (or 100 psi if not specified) (at high point of piping) for two hours

and observe pressure gage. Check carefully for leaks while test pressure is being maintained.

5. If pressure drop is observed, accurately measure the amount of water which must be added to

regain the initial test pressure.

6. Repair all visible leaks.

7. Pipe passes the test if allowable leakage rate is not exceeded.

8. Allowable Leakage Rates (in gallons per hour per 1,000 feet per inch diameter):

a. Underground Ductile Iron: 0.075.

b. Exposed pipe and Copper, Steel, Plastic: None.

9. Should any discrepancies arise on pipe testing pressures between various specification

systems, most stringent requirements will govern.

3.03 DRAIN, AND VENT PIPING

A. Drain, and vent piping, which normally does not flow full, shall be tested by either the water test, at

the specified test pressure (or 10 ft. of head, if not specified), or by the air test, as detailed below:

B. Water Test

1. Fill the pipe with water to provide a positive differential head on the top of the pipe at the

highest point of the pipeline under test of the specified test pressure.

2. Apply specified test pressure for four hours and observe water level. Check carefully for leaks

while test pressure is being maintained.

3. If level drop is observed, accurately measure the amount of water which must be added to regain

the initial test pressure.

4. The amount of water added to maintain this head shall be the leakage.

5. Repair all visible leaks.

6. Pipe passes the test if allowable leakage rate is not exceeded.


7. Allowable Leakage Rates (in gallons per hour per 1,000 feet per inch diameter):

a. Underground Sewer or Drain: 5.0.

b. Exposed Drain and Vent: None.

C. Air Test

1. Slowly fill the pipe with air to a pressure of 4 psig. Maintain pressure between 4 and 3.5 psig

for at least two minutes for temperature stabilization.

2. With a pressure of approximately 4 psig in pipe, disconnect air supply.

3. Allow pressure to decrease to 3.5 psig.

4. When the pressure reaches 3.5 psig, record the time required to decrease to 2.5 psig using a

stopwatch.

5. Pipe passes the test if the time required to decrease to 2.5 psig is at least 28.5 seconds per inch

diameter.

D. Should any discrepancies arise on pipe testing pressures between various specification systems,

most stringent requirements will govern.

3.04 AIR AND GAS PIPING

A. Piping which carries air or other gasses shall be tested by means of an air pressure test at the

specified test pressure (or 150 psi, if not specified):

1. If the process medium is air, the test medium shall be air, otherwise, then the test medium shall

be dehydrated, oil-free air with a dew point of –40°F.

2. Fill section to be tested slowly with air at specified test pressure for one hour and observe

pressure gage. Check carefully for leaks while test pressure is being maintained.

3. Pipe passes the test if no pressure drop occurs.

3.05 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL

A. Contractor shall provide suitable means for disposal of test and flushing water so that no damage

results to facilities or waterways. Means of disposal of test and flushing water shall be subject to the

approval of CITY, local governing authorities and regulatory agencies.

B. Cleaning

1. Thoroughly clean all piping and flush prior to placing in service in a manner approved by

Engineer.

2. Piping 24-inches in diameter and larger shall be inspected from inside and all debris, dirt and

foreign matter removed.

3. Disinfect all potable water piping in accordance with Section 22 11 00, Disinfection of

Plumbing.

4. After cleaning and flushing, purge all gas piping (except that carrying only air) with dry

nitrogen.


END OF SECTION 22 08 00.12

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 22 11 00B-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 11 00B

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish, install, disinfect and test the water supply system as indicated on the Contract

Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. This Specification references the latest edition of the publications listed below. Work shall be

performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with these publications as referenced

herein:

1. International Plumbing Code

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A112.1.2 Air Gap Standards

B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

3. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE)

1003 Water Pressure Regulators and Reducing Valves for Domestic Water

Supply Systems

4. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)

B 88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

D 1785 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings, Schedules 40, 80 and

120

D 2466 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

D 2467 Socket Type Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

D 2564 Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl chloride PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings

5. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

C110 Gray-iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48-inch for Water and

other Liquids

C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe Fittings

C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds,

for Water or Other Liquids

C651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

6. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (P&DI)

WH-201 Certification, Sizing, Placement of Water Hammer Arrestors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.


B. Submit product data on all products proposed for installation under this section, including but not

limited to the following:

1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Valves.

3. Pressure reducing valves.

4. Pressure control valves.

5. Thermostatic Mixing Valves.

6. Water hammer arresters.

C. Submit installation and maintenance instructions and spare parts lists in accordance with

Sections 01 78 23 and 01 78 43.


A. Work shall be performed by workers skilled in the installation of domestic water systems.

B. Installation, disinfection and testing shall be supervised by a master plumber licensed in the State

of Ohio who shall be responsible for the installation of the entire system in accordance with the

International Plumbing Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE FITTINGS (ABOVE GROUND)

A. Copper Tubing

1. ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn unless noted otherwise.

2. Fittings: Solder type, either cast bronze conforming to ANSI B16.18 or wrought copper or

bronze conforming to ANSI B16.22, except that unions shall conform to FS WW-U-516 and

be either brass or bronze and either threaded or soldered.

B. Copper Alloy Tubing

1. Tube: Heavy type conforming to ASTM B 543, Alloy 194.

2. Fittings: Solder type, either cast bronze conforming to ANSI B16.18 or wrought copper or

bronze conforming to ANSI B16.22, except that unions shall conform to FS WW-U-516 and

be either brass or bronze and either threaded or soldered.

C. PVC Piping

1. Schedule 80, ASTM D 1785.

2. Fittings: Solvent weld socket type, same schedule as piping, ASTM D 2466 or D 2467.

3. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

D. Ductile Iron Piping

1. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151 and shall have a

minimum pressure rating of 250 psi.

2. Fittings shall be flanged and conform to AWWA C115/ANSI A21.15.

E. Stainless Steel Piping refer to specification 40 05 13.


2.03 JOINTS AND JOINTING MATERIALS

A. Flanges for ends of pipe and fittings shall be cast iron and conform to AWWA C110, except that

pipe flanges shall be screw-on type having threads confirming to ANSI B16.1 for 125 pound

Class. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall conform to AWWA C111. Gaskets shall be plain rubber,

1/8-inch thick.

B. Fittings immediately inside exterior wall and fittings that unite dissimilar metals shall be

dielectric insulating type.

2.04 VALVES

A. Smaller than 3-inches shall be threaded or soldered, 3-inches and larger shall be flanged.

B. Gate Valves

1. Smaller than 3-inches shall be Class 125, Type III, rated for a hydraulic working pressure of

125 psi.

2. 3-inches and larger shall be Class 125, Type II, outside-screw-and yoke type; rated for a

hydraulic working pressure of 125 psi.

C. Check Valves

1. Smaller than 3-inches shall have bronze trim and either cast iron or steel body, and be rated

for a hydraulic working pressure of 125 psi.

2. 3-inches and larger shall be weight-loaded, have bronze trim and either cast iron or steel

body and be rated for a hydraulic working pressure of 125 psi.

a. Buried Lines: Mechanical joints.

b. In Valve Chambers, Valve Pits and Above Ground: Flanged joints.

D. Ball Valves

1. Smaller than 3-inches shall be bronze body with full port, rated for a hydraulic working

pressure of 150 psi.

2. 3-inches and larger shall be carbon steel or stainless steel body, stainless steel trim with full

port, rated for a hydraulic working pressure of 150 psi.

E. Globe Valves

1. Globe valves 2-inches and smaller shall be bronze body with rising stem, screwed bonnet,

integral bronze seat, renewable PTFE discs with screwed or solder joint ends. Valve shall be

rated for a non-shock cold working pressure of 300 psi.

2. Globe valves 2-1/2-inches and larger shall be iron body, Class 125, flanged ends with bolted

bonnet and non-rising stem. Valves shall be rated for a hydraulic working pressure of 150

psi.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Crane, Nibco, Stockham, Milwaukee, Watts, Apollo, Kitz.

2.05 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (1/2 to 2-INCH SIZE)

A. Provide bronze body, spring controlled, adjustable pressure reducing valve with threaded

connections.

B. Provide valves with high temperature diaphragm and renewable nickel alloy seat.

C. Provide with thermal expansion bypass.


D. Provide with separate bronze strainer with 20 mesh stainless steel basket. Attach to valve with

bronze nipple.

E. Rated for 300 psig maximum inlet water pressure with adjustable 25-75 psig outlet water

pressure.

F. Tested and certified under ASSE 1003 and the Standard Plumbing Code.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watts 223SB, Wilkins, Mueller.

2.06 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES (1-1/4-INCH to 6-INCH SIZE)

A. Provide fluid actuated automatic control valves where indicated to regulate downstream water

pressure.

B. Provide valves with cast iron valve body and cover. Exposed internal and external surfaces shall

be coated with an FDA approved fused epoxy finish coat.

C. Provide with flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved, reinforced synthetic elastomer diaphragm

integral with the valve assembly. Support the diaphragm with an actuation stem utilizing upper

and lower bearings.

D. Provide flow sealing in the closed position with a separate elastomer sealing ring and smooth

metal seat surface. Seat design shall be removable and shall not promote seal cutting or wear at

low flow rates.

E. Unless otherwise noted, valves shall be rated for a minimum of 150 psig inlet pressure with an

adjustable outlet pressure range of 30 to 90 psig. Nominal outlet pressure shall be adjusted to 50

psig.

F. Provide with inlet strainer per manufacturer's standard arrangement.

G. Provide valves with [threaded end connections for sizes 2-1/2 inch and smaller] [and] [flanged

end connections for sizes 3-inches and larger].

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watts Series 115, Clayton, GA Industries.

2.07 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

A. Thermostatic mixing valve shall conform to the requirements of ASSE Standard 1016 for hot

water temperature control.

B. Valve shall have a bronze or brass body and shall include integral check valves and an

adjustment cap with locking feature.

C. The valve shall be provided with union connections.

D. Valve shall be Watts Series MMV or equal by Simmons, PPP Inc. or Leonard.

E. For Safety equipment mixing valves refer to Section 22 40 00

2.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Permanently packaged water hammer arrester with bellows, diaphragm or O-ring/disc sealing

mechanism.

B. Provide in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sioux Chief Hydra-Rester, Zurn, Josam.

2.09 AUTOMATIC SELF CLEANING NPW


A. Manufacturer

1. NPW Filter System for Grit Pump Seal Water (M-13-30-0001) in Grit Pump Room, Model

ORV-100-LE by Orival Inc. or equal.

2. NPW Filter System for Sludge Pump Seal Water (M-F-30-0001) in Parts Storage Building,

Model ORV-100-LE by Orival Inc. or equal.

3. NPW Filter System inside Dewatering Building (M-H2-30-0001) Model ORG-060-LE by

Orival Inc. or equal.

B. The filtration system shall contain an automatic, self-cleaning filter and a control system.

C. Filter shall have 1” threaded inlet and outlet connection for filtering up to 27 gpm and 6”

threaded inlet for flows greater than 300 gpm. The filter can be supplied with a 50 micron

stainless steel fine screen. The minimum fine screen open area shall be 42in2.

D. Threaded reducers can be installed to the inlet and outlet ports to reduce the line size down to the

required size.

E. Filter shall be completely self-cleaning, and the cleaning cycle shall be powered by line pressure

only. No external pneumatic or electric power is required, and continuous system flow shall be

maintained during the rinse cycle.

F. A rinse cycle shall be initiated by the control system based on differential pressure, by timer, or

by local manual action. A dirt collecting assembly shall sweep the entire screen area to remove

accumulated particles and send them to a waste drain through a 1” rinse valve.

G. The filtration control system shall consist of a microprocessor based controller in a water

resistant enclosure with an attached, wired, and preset Differential Pressure Switch (DPS) plus a

normally open 3-way solenoid valve. The Differential Pressure Switch will be factory preset to 7

psig increasing.

2.10 PIPING ACCESSORIES

A. Nipples: FS WW-N-351; be of same type material as piping on which installed.

B. Unions for Copper Tubing: Brass or bronze, have either threaded or solder joint ends and

conform to FS WW-U-516.

C. Unions for Steel Piping: FS WW-U-531.

D. Escutcheons: Polished chromium-plated pressed steel, split-hinged, locking type held in-place

by either an internal tension spring or a set-screw; encompass sleeve or opening.

E. Bolts and Nuts: Machined brass, stainless steel or galvanized carbon steel, and not smaller than

1/4-inch; bolts shall have hexagonal heads and nuts shall be hexagonal.

F. Solder for Solder-Jointed Tubing: 95 percent tin and five percent antimony. Flux shall be

non-corrosive type conforming to NSF 61.

G. Strainers

1. Strainers in water lines shall have standard pattern, stainless steel baskets with standard

perforations. Bodies shall be bronze for sizes 2-inch and smaller and cast iron for sizes 2-

1/2-inch and larger. Strainers shall be equal to Watts Series 77 unless otherwise specified in

other Sections of Division 15.

2. All strainers shall be of the same size as the piping in which they are installed. Provide

dielectric union, if necessary, to isolate strainer from pipe material.


2.11 TRAP PRIMER

A. Provide brass trap primer that automatically supplies water to P-traps upon 5 psi or less pressure

drop in water line.

B. Install trap primer, distribution unit(s) and water lines per manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Precision Plumbing Products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install domestic water systems in accordance with AWWA standards and local codes applicable

to water system installation.

B. Trenching and backfill shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 00.

C. Cut pipe and tubing accurately to measurements established at worksite; work pipe into place

without springing and forcing. Install pipe with a fall towards either shut-off valve or lowest

fixture.

D. Remove fins and burrs from piping. Apply lubricant to male threads only; threads shall be full

cut, and not more than three threads on pipe shall remain exposed after tightening. Coat installed

and tested exposed ferrous threads with one coat of non-toxic primer and oil paint.

E. Cut ends of copper tubing square, and remove burrs. Clean ends of tubing and apply a rosin type

flux to outside surface of tubing ends and on recess inside of fittings. Insert tubing to full depth

of fitting; then solder-joints before soldering valves.

F. Install piping true to line and grade and support and guide in a manner which will ensure

indicated alignment. Installed piping shall clear obstructions, preserve headroom, keep openings

and passageways clear, and not be in same trenches as sewer lines. Water supply system

drawings are schematic; do not scale. Install unions on pipe ends immediately adjacent to

valves, equipment and tanks.

G. Valves shall be accessible for operation and servicing. Stems of installed valves shall not be

below horizontal position. Valves which will be in furred spaces shall be accessible.

H. Make-up soldered-to-threaded connections with male thread-to-solder adapters.

I. After pipes have been installed, either cap or plug ends of pipes. Neither bury, furr-in, nor

conceal piping before piping has been inspected and tested.

J. Provide access panels in finished walls for access to concealed valves, water hammer arrestors

and other devices requiring periodic maintenance.

K. Install insulation in accordance with Section 22 07 00.

L. Dielectric Isolation


systems, this connection shall be made with dielectric isolators. The dielectric isolators shall

be so designed that non-ferrous piping materials shall be isolated by the use of Teflon or

nylon isolating materials made up in the form of screwed type unions or insulating gaskets

and bolt sleeves and washers for standard flanged connection. All dielectric isolators shall

be selected for the pressure of the system involved.



3.02 TESTING

A. Test installed building water supply system in accordance with the International Plumbing Code

B. Test piping that will be buried and concealed prior to concealment.

3.03 DISINFECTING

A. Disinfect water systems in accordance with AWWA C651 and local codes applicable to water

system disinfecting.

B. Before disinfecting system, flush line in a manner which will remove all extraneous materials.

C. Disinfect each section of new line before seeking acceptance of water supply system.

D. Either directly apply chlorine or mix water and either calcium hypochlorite, chlorine gas, or

calcium chloride. Retain solution in pipe for not less than 24 hours, then measure residual

chlorine at ends of section and at other representative points; residual chlorine content is similar

to that obtained from source.

END OF SECTION 22 11 00B

SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 22 13 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 13 00

SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish, install and test the sanitary sewer system as indicated on the Contract Documents. Do

not scale Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES



herein:



B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25,125, 250 and 800

B16.12 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

B16.23 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings-DWV

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

A 48 Gray Iron Castings

A 74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

A 395 Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated

Temperatures

A 888 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

B 306 Copper Drainage Tube-DWV

C 564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

D 4101 Polypropylene Molding and Extrusion Materials

D 2665 Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

D 2665 Fittings: Solvent Weld Socket Type, Same Schedule as Piping

F 493 Solvent Cement

4. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3-inches through 48-inches, for Water

and other Liquids

C112 2-inch and 2-1/2-inch Cast Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or other

Liquids

C302 Reinforced-Concrete Water Pipe - Noncylinder Type, Not Prestressed

5. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI)

301 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,

Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

6. National Bureau of Standards (NBS)


Handbook H28

7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards

UL 971 Listed Non-Metal Pipe

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit product data on all products proposed for installation under this section, including but not

limited to the following:

1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Drains.

3. Cleanouts.

C. Submit installation and maintenance instructions and spare parts lists.


A. Work shall be performed by workers skilled in the installation of sanitary drainage systems.

B. Installation and testing shall be supervised by a master plumber licensed in the State of Ohio

who shall be responsible for the installation of the entire system in accordance with the

International Plumbing Code.

C. Installation tools and equipment shall not damage products.

1.05 JOBSITE CONDITIONS

Coordinate installation with other building systems in a manner which will preclude interferences.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 UNDERGROUND CAST IRON SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Provide cast iron pipe, furnished and coated in accordance with ASTM A 74, Class SV.

B. Joints shall be bell-and-spigot type, ASTM A 74, with rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C

564.

2.02 ABOVEGROUND CAST IRON SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Hub and Spigot: Pipe shall be hub type cast iron soil pipe, ASTM A 74. Fittings shall be

bell-and-spigot type per ASTM A 74 with rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 564.

B. Hubless: Pipe shall be hubless cast iron soil pipe in accordance with ASTM A 888 and CISPI

C301. Fittings shall conform to ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301.

C. Copper DWV: Tubing shall be in accordance with ASTM B 306. Fittings shall be cast bronze

with solder ends conforming to ANSI B16.23.

D. Fittings shall be drainage-pattern type, compatible with pipe, except where adapters connect

different pipe materials.

2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) Drain Waste Vent (DWV) PIPE

A. PVC Pipe and Fittings, 2 to 8-inch diameter, concealed or buried:


1. Pipe in accordance with ASTM D 2665.

2. Fittings: Solvent weld socket type, DWV pattern, same schedule as piping, in accordance

with ASTM F 1866.


B. PVC Pipe and Fittings, 10 to 20-inch diameter, buried:

1. Schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM 1785.

2. Fittings: Solvent weld socket type, DWV pattern, same schedule as piping, in accordance

with ASTM F 1866.


C. PVC Pipe and Fittings, 10 to 20-inch diameter, exposed:

1. Schedule 80 pipe in accordance with ASTM D 1785.

2. Fittings: Solvent weld socket type, DWV pattern, same schedule as piping, ASTM F 1866.


2.04 DRAINS

A. Floor Drain (FD-1)

1. Lacquered cast iron body, integral flange and double drainage weepholes with push-on joint

outlet connection.

2. Adjustable 6-inch diameter satin nickel bronze strainer with 1/2-inch thick grate with a free

area of at least 9.5 square inches.

3. Floor drains shall be Josam 30000-A, Smith, Wade, Zurn, or Ancon.

B. Floor Drain (FD-2)

1. Coated cast iron with side outlet hub connection, 13 x 11 IN rectangular top, removable

sediment bucket and extra heavy duty hinged grate.

2. Floor drain shall be Josam Series 38640, Smith, Wade, or Zurn.

C. Floor Drain (FD-3)

1. Provide with coated cast iron body, inside caulk connection, bottom outlet, round top and

heavy duty loose set tractor grate with removable internal dome strainer.

2. Hub drains shall be Josam 38850, Smith, Wade, Zurn, or Ancon.

D. Floor Drain (FD-4)

1. Coated cast iron body, integral flange and double drainage weepholes with push-on joint

outlet connection .

2. Adjustable 9-inch diameter tractor strainer with a free area of at least 21 square inches.

3. Floor drains shall be Josam 30000-E, Smith, Wade, Zurn, or Ancon.

E. Floor Drain (FD-5)

1. Coated cast iron with bottom outlet hub connection, 13 x 11 IN rectangular top, removable

sediment bucket and extra heavy duty hinged grate.

2. Floor drain shall be Josam Series 38620, Smith, Wade, or Zurn.


2.05 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanout bodies shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A 74.

B. Floor Cleanouts (FCO): Adjustable, with bronze tapped plug, scoriated nickel-bronze cover and,

if for membraned floors, a clamping device.

C. Wall Cleanouts (WCO): Bronze tapped plug, cover shall be polished stainless steel, in flanged

frame secured to plug with vandal-proof screw.

D. Exposed Cleanouts: Have tapered caulking ferrule and raised brass head cleanout plug.

E. Exterior Cleanouts (ECO): Have adjustable sleeve-type housing, countersunk threaded brass

plug and cast iron frame and cover.

F. Cleanout plugs shall not be larger than 4-inches. Cleanouts for cast iron soil pipe shall consists

of a longsweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place indicated; other cleanouts

shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings having screw plugs.

G. Cleanouts shall be manufactured by Josam, Smith, Wade, Zurn, or Ancon.

H. Backwater valves shall be manufactured by Josam 67800, Ancon, or Zurn.

2.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Full-face, either neoprene, asbestos, or rubber; rubber gaskets:

AWWA C302.

B. Vent Caps for Service Weight Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74.

C. Gaskets, Glands and Bolts for Mechanical Joint Pipe and Fittings: AWWA C110, AWWA

C112 and FS WW-P-421C.

D. Unions for Ferrous Pipe 3-Inches in Diameter and Smaller: 150 pound steam-working-pressure

zinc-coated malleable iron ground-joint type.

E. Unions for Ferrous Pipe 3-1/2-Inches in Diameter and Larger: 125 pound

steam-working-pressure forges steel flange type, having cloth-inserted rubber gaskets 1/16-inch

thick.

F. Couplings for Joining Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings: Cast iron housing conforming to

ASTM A 48, Class 30A, have bitumastic coating, neoprene gasket conforming to ASTM C 564

and 18-8 stainless steel bolts and nuts.

G. Solder for Solder-Jointed Tubing: 95 percent tin and five percent antimony; flux shall be

non-corrosive.

H. Joint in Sanitary Lines Immediately Inside Exterior Wall and Joint Between Pipe of Dissimilar

Metal: Dielectric insulating joint, union or coupling.

I. Threaded joints shall have ANSI taper pipe threads conforming to NBS Handbook H.

J. Joint Compound: Either graphite, inert filer and oil or polytetra-fluoroethylene tape.

K. Joints in cast iron soil pipe and fittings having a double seal, compression-type molded neoprene

gasket shall have a modified hub to provide a positive seal.

2.07 FLASHING

Either soft-temper or cold-rolled copper weighting not less than 16 ounces per square foot or sheet

lead weighting not less than four pounds per square foot.


2.08 TRAPS

"P" type, unless otherwise indicated; ASTM A 74. Traps for steel pipe shall have either recess

drainage pattern or brass tube not less than 17 gauge. Traps for PVC piping shall conform to ASTM

D 2665 and shall be approved by NSF or IAPMO.

2.09 ESCUTCHEON

Polished chromium-plated pressed steel, split-hinged, locking type held in place by either an internal

tension spring or a set-screw and encompass sleeve or opening.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Horizontal soil and waste pipe grades shall not be less than 1/4-inch per foot for 2-1/2-inch size

and smaller, and not be less than 1/8-inch per foot for 3-inch size and larger.

B. Changes of soil, waste, and drain pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in

direction shall be with either 45 degree wyes; long or short-sweep 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends; or

elbows.

C. Install trap at each fixture and piece of equipment connecting to the sanitary sewer system. Place

trap as near fixture and equipment as possible; do not double-trap fixture.

D. Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on inlet side of traps. Union connections shall

be made with either tucker or hub drainage fittings.

E. Install and connect products in accordance with product manufacturer's printed installation

instructions. Apply joint compound to threaded joints and tighten joints to a degree which will

prevent leaks.

F. Interior of pipe, pipe fittings, drains and cleanouts shall be clean before being installed and

foreign substances on interior surfaces shall have been removed.

G. Join sections of hubless pipe with cast iron assemblies. Tighten threaded assemblies to 60

inch-pounds torque on each joint with a torque wrench specifically designed for the purpose.

Retorque each screw not less than 24 hours after initial tightening.

H. Extend main vertical soil and waste stacks full size to roofline and above as vents, except where

otherwise specifically indicated. Install vent pipes in roof spaces as close as possible to roof

underside without forming traps in pipes; use fittings as required. If a circuit vent pipe from

fixture, or line of fixtures, will be connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, connect at least

6-inches above floor level rim of highest fixture served. Grade vent and branch-vent pipe in a

manner which will ensure that condensate will drain to vertical stack.

I. Surfaces and structures to, and on, which sewer products will be affixed, placed and erected shall

be capable of supporting those products.

J. Set pipe and fittings to line and grade before making-up joints

K. Angular deflection of joints shall not exceed the recommendations of the pipe and fitting

manufacturer. Should alignment require deflections to exceed those recommended, achieve

indicated deflection with either special bends or short lengths of pipe.

M. Secure products not to be buried to hangers, supports and anchors. Tighten bolts and nuts of

flanged joints to a degree which will prevent leaks.


N. Seal open ends of products at end of work period and in a manner which will prevent water and

foreign material from entering; remove seals when work resumes.

O. Install escutcheons where exposed piping, bare or insulated, passes through floors, walls and

ceilings. Fasten escutcheons to pipe or pipe covering.

P. Pipe sleeves for pipes passing under footings or through foundation walls shall be Schedule 40

ductile iron pipe extending one foot beyond either face of the footing or wall.

Q. Solvent-Welded PVC Joints: All solvent-welded PVC joints shall be installed in accordance

with ASTM 2855.

3.02 FLOOR DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate floor drain locations and installation elevations with the Structural and Architectural

Drawings.

B. Install floor drains at the local low point in the floor slab.

C. Install floor drains with membrane clamping rings if the floor slab contains a membrane.

D. Protect the floor drain during the floor slab pour to prevent extraneous material from entering the

drain or waste piping. Cover during the remainder of the construction to prevent blockage with

construction debris.

3.03 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanout tee with screw plug on each building drain.

B. Install outside cleanouts at grade centered in an 18 x 18 x 4-inch thick concrete pad. Top of pad

shall be at grade elevation unless otherwise noted.


A. Test installed sanitary drainage and building sewer systems with water and air in accordance

with [the International Plumbing Code.

B. If system exhibits leaks, repair leaks and retest system until system exhibits no leaks.

C. Test piping that will be buried and concealed prior to concealment.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove foreign material from product surfaces, but do not remove manufacturers' labels until

Project has been accepted by the Owner, then remove labels.

B. Repair pipe coating that may have been damaged during pipe installation.


PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 30 00

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish and install plumbing equipment of the type specified below and scheduled on the

Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the publications listed below is included as part of these Contract

Documents:


2. ANSI/ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels

3. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

4. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters

5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - UL Listing and Label

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other

equipment and piping.

C. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings

and drains.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 23.

E. Submit manufacturer's certificate that pressure vessels meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Include operation, maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability,

and service depot location and telephone number.

G. Submit pump curves, dimensional diagrams and wiring diagrams for pressure booster systems.


A. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations

and requirements of the following organizations:

1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

2. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI)

3. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA)

4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

B. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of


midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in undamaged condition by means consistent with the materials

provided.

B. Store and protect products from damage until installed on the job.

C. Provide temporary protection caps on all piping connection nozzles. Maintain caps in place until

installation of piping.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Warranties shall include complete coverage of labor and material charges for repair of covered

equipment and shall be in accordance with Section 01 78 36 except as described herein.

B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for coverage of domestic water heaters and pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GAS-FIRED TANKLESS WATER HEATERS

A. Factory assembled and wired, gas-fired tankless water heater, energy efficient per ASHRAE

standards, 150 psig working pressure, ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, with

copper coil fin and tube construction quick release waterways, and be factory assembled and

tested.

B. The heater shall be controlled by a solid state circuit board monitoring incoming and out going

temperatures with thermistors, sensing and controlling flow rate to setpoint temperature,

controlling both air and gas mixture inputs to maintain thermal combustion efficiency.

C. Safety devices shall include but not be limited to air fuel ratio sensor, a high limit temperature

switch, modulating and proportioning gas valves, and freeze protection sensor and an over heat

cutoff fuse.

D. Provide Temperature Pressure Safety Relief Valve on hot water supply

E. Provide Circuit setter on water supply.

F. Water heater shall be manufactured by AO Smith or approved equal; model 540H, at 5 GPM,

with maximum 10 PSI pressure loss, and minimum 75 degree F temperature rise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to UL requirements.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. Adjust water temperature setpoint to setting desired by the CITY.

B. Demonstrate proper operation of the water heaters to maintain the setpoint temperature,

including all safety devices, prior to acceptance.


C. The manufacturer's representative shall provide system start-up and instruction on operation and

maintenance.


PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 22 40 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish, install and test plumbing fixtures as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES



herein:



A112.6.1M Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use

Z358.1 Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submittal data shall include catalog cuts for fixtures and all accessories. Product data shall

completely describe all features and materials of construction.

C. Submit service and maintenance manuals and spare parts lists for all fixtures.


A. Inspect surfaces and structures to, and on, which plumbing fixtures will be affixed, placed, and

installed before starting the work of this section; surfaces shall be capable of supporting fixtures.

B. Surfaces which will be concealed by plumbing fixtures shall have been finished before fixtures

are installed.

C. Inspect fixtures before installing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WATER CLOSETS

A. Floor Mount Flush Tank Water Closet (WC-1)

1. Provide floor mounted, floor outlet, vitreous china, low consumption water closet, standard

height.

2. Provide with close coupled tank, siphon jet closet combination with elongated bowl.

3. Provide with open front, elongated solid plastic seat with cover, Bemis, Beneke, Kohler or

Olsonite.

4. Provide with 3/8-inch chrome plated brass wall supply with wall flange and wheel handle


stop.

5. Water closets shall be American Standard 2462.016 or equal by Eljer or Kohler.

2.02 LAVATORIES

A. Wall-Hung Lavatory (LAV-1)

1. Provide wall mounted, 20 x 18-inch vitreous china lavatory, punched for 4-inch centerset

faucets, with faucet ledge and backsplash.

2. Provide with single lever centerset lavatory fitting on 4-inch centers with chrome plated

brass handle, aerator with 2.0 gpm flow restrictor, grid drain and 1-1/4-inch O.D. tailpiece.

Faucet shall be American Standard Reliant 2385.278 or equal by Eljer, Kohler, Delta, or

Moen.

3. Provide with 1-1/4 x 1-1/4-inch 17 gauge chrome plated cast brass adjustable P-trap with

cleanout, slip joint inlet and tubing outlet with wall flange.

4. Provide with 3/8-inch chrome plated brass wall supplies with wall flanges and wheel handle

stops.

5. Lavatory shall be American Standard Lucerne 0356 or equal by Eljer or Kohler.

2.03 SINKS

A. Countertop Single Compartment Sink (SK-1)

1. Provide 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, 25 x 21 x 8-inch deep sink with one faucet

hole1, self-rimming type.

2. Provide with underside of sink fully undercoated.

3. Provide with single lever deck-mount faucet with 8-inch tubular swing spout, aerator with

2.5 gpm flow restrictor, 3/8-inch O.D. copper tube inlets, 1-hole installation. Faucet shall be

Elkay Model No. LKE-4160 or equal by Delta or Moen.

4. Provide duo strainer drain outlet fitting for 3-1/2-inch opening with one piece stainless

conical strainer basket with neoprene stopper and 1-1/2-inch tailpiece.

5. Provide with 1-1/2-inch 17 gauge chrome plated cast brass adjustable P-trap with cleanout,

slip joint inlet and tubing outlet with wall flange.

6. Provide with 3/8-inch chrome plated brass wall supplies with wall flanges and wheel handle

stops.

7. Sink shall be Elkay Lustertone LR-2521, or equal by Just.

2.04 EMERGENCY FIXTURES

A. Safety Shower/Eyewash (ESH-1)

1. Provide combination drench shower/eyewash units with impact-resistant plastic shower,

11-inch diameter stainless steel eyewash bowl, separate shower and eyewash stay-open

valves, 1-1/4 IPS supply inlet and drain, and floor flange. Construction to be of galvanized

steel pipe, and cast iron floor flange all coated with epoxy paint.

2. Provide with identification sign designed for wall mounting to read "EMERGENCY

SHOWER AND EYE WASH FOUNTAIN".

3. Shower/eyewash shall be Haws 8300CRP, or equal by Bradley or Speakman.


4. Provide with Thermostatic mixing valve specifically designed to provide tempered water for

safety shower/eyewash with a cold water bypass. Mixing valve shall be HAWS 9201E, or

approved equal.

B. Eyewash (EEW-1)

1. Provide sink-top mounted eyewash with stay-open ball valve and swing-away feature when

not in use. Refer to drawings for indication of sink mounting side.

2. Provide with identification sign for wall mounting to read "EMERGENCY EYEWASH

FOUNTAIN".

3. Eyewash shall be Haws 7612, or equal by Bradley or Speakman.

4. Provide with Thermostatic mixing valve specifically designed to provide tempered water for

safety shower/eyewash with a cold water bypass. Mixing valve shall be HAWS 9201EFE,

or approved equal.

2.05 HOSE BIBBS/WALL HYDRANTS

A. Hose Bibbs (HB1)

1. Provide brass hose bibbs with removable wheel handle, hose thread outlet of size indicated

on drawing with vacuum breaker.

2. Provide with polished chrome finish.

3. Inlet connection shall be copper tubing solder-type.

4. Hose bibbs shall be Woodford 24, or equal by Nibco or Chicago.

B. Non-Freeze Wall Hydrant (NFWH-1)

1. Provide non-freeze wall hydrant with vacuum breaker, 3/4-inch hose thread outlet in

accordance with ASSE Standard 1010.

2. Provide with one piece valve plunger and permanent type brass valve body.

3. Provide with hardened stainless steel stem and loose key.

4. Provide with polished brass casting.

5. Provide with 3/4-inch copper tube inlet.

6. Provide with wall clamp.

7. Wall hydrant shall be Woodford 65C, Ancon, or equal by Josam or Jonespec.

C. Post Hydrant (PH-1)

1. Provide bronze, non-freeze post hydrant with secured handle, 3/4-inch inlet and outlet

connections, vacuum breaker, and bronze casing.

2. Valve body shall be buried two feet deep.

3. Provide 12 x 12 x 12-inch deep (minimum) gravel around drain hole for post hydrant.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancon, Woodford, J.R. Smith or Zurn.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


A. Install plumbing fixtures in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install wall hung fixtures with heavy-duty carriers of the model and type recommended by the

manufacturer.

C. Caulk and seal around installed fixtures for a neat, finished appearance; coordinate with

architectural finishes and cabinetry related to the plumbing fixtures.

D. Install fixtures in accordance with all requirements of the International Plumbing Code.

E. Install handicap fixtures in accordance with all requirements of ANSI A117.1 and ADA

guidelines.

F. Insulate all exposed hot water and drain piping below lavatories and sinks, or configure hot

water and drain piping to protect against contact.

G. Install hose bibbs at 36 inches above floor or grating.

3.02 DEMONSTRATION

A. Test plumbing fixtures for proper operation and adjustments of valves, levels, etc.

B. Inspect plumbing connections to fixtures for leaks or damage. Repair as required.


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. All work specified in this section is subject to the provisions of Section 22 00 00.

B. Total system balance shall be performed by an independent agency certified by the

Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau

(NEBB). All work done by this agency shall be by qualified technicians under the direct

supervision of an AABC or NEBB certified test and balance engineer.

C. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with the AABC National Standards,

2002, for Total System Balance and in accordance with the scope of work defined by the

Contract Documents.

D. Total system balance shall not begin until all systems are complete.

E. Upon the completion of the work, the test and balance agency shall submit four copies of the

complete Test and Balance Report to the CITY. Final test and balance report shall be

required two weeks following completion of test and balance.

F. One agency will be responsible for all phases of total system balance.

G. The testing and balance agency as part of its contract shall act as an authorized inspection

agency, and shall, during the test and balance, list systems that are installed incorrectly,

require correction or have not been installed in accordance with Drawings and

Specifications.

H. The test and balance agency shall permanently mark the settings of all valves, dampers and

other adjustment devices in a manner that will allow the settings to be restored. If a

balancing device is provided with a memory stop, it shall be set and locked.

I. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate testing and balancing of odor control system with make-up

air system, and with biofilter manufacturer’s requirements for installation check and start-up

assistance.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Standards: National Standards for Total System

Balance

B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Standards: Procedural Standards for

Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) Standards:

HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

1.03 SUBMITTALS



A. The name of the test and balance agency, plus the name and registration number of the

certified test and balance engineer, shall be submitted for approval within 30 days after the

award of the Contract.

B. The selected test and balance agency, plus the name and registration number of certified test

and balance engineer, shall be submitted to the CITY for approval within thirty days after the

award of the Contract.

1. Detailed procedures.

2. Agenda.

3. Report Forms.

4. AABC National Project Performance Guaranty.

5. Instrument List and Calibration Dates.

C. A reviewed copy of each of the above listing shall be returned to the test and balance agency

before total system balance is begun.

D. If a complete submittal in accordance with Article 1.03, Paragraph B is not received within

the specified time, the CITY reserves the right to select the test and balance agency.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART3 - EXECUTION

3.01 REQUIRED DOCUMENTS

The CONTRACTOR shall provide the following, in a timely fashion, to the test and balance

agency: Contract Drawings and applicable Specifications; addenda; change orders; reviewed

shop drawings; reviewed equipment manufacturer's submittal data; and reviewed temperature

control drawings.

3.02 COOPERATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with the test and balance agency and provide:

1. Completely operable systems.

2. The right to adjust the systems.

3. Access to system components.

4. Immediate labor and tools to make corrections and repairs, when required, without undue

delay.

5. Balancing dampers as required by test and balance agency.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall start-up and maintain all heating, ventilating and air conditioning



systems and equipment into full operation and shall continue the operation of same during

each working day of testing and balancing. Start-up shall include, as a minimum, the

following:

1. All equipment operable in safe and normal conditions.

2. Temperature control systems installed complete.

3. Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.

4. Air Systems

a. Filters clean and in place.

b. Duct systems clean of debris.

c. Correct fan rotation.

d. Fire and volume dampers in place and open.

e. Coil fins cleaned and combed.

f. Access doors closed and duct end caps in place.

g. All outlets installed and connected.

h. Duct systems leakage shall not exceed the rate specified.

5. Hydronic Systems

a. Flushed, filled and vented.

b. Correct pump rotation.

c. Proper strainer baskets clean and in place.

d. Temporary start-up strainer baskets removed.

e. Service and balance valves open.

C. If it is determined by the test and balance agency that drive changes are required, the

CONTRACTOR shall obtain and install all necessary components.

D. The Test and Balance Agency shall cooperate with the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR

to perform the work in such a manner as to meet the job schedule.

E. The test and balance agency shall leave all system components in proper working order, such

as:

1. Replace belt guards.

2. Close access doors.

3. Close doors to electrical switch boxes.

4. Restore thermostats to specified settings.

F. All recorded data shall represent a true, actually measured or observed condition.

G. Any abnormal conditions in the mechanical systems of conditions which prevent total system

balance, as observed by the test and balance agency, shall be reported as quickly as possible

to the ENGINEER.

NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 23 11 23-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 11 23

NATURAL GAS SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish and install natural gas distribution piping, pressure regulating valves, shutoff valves,

safety devices and other items required for a complete system.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. This Specification references the latest edition of the publications listed below. Work shall

be performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with these publications as

referenced herein:

1. International Building Code

2. International Gas Code


NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code


ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-coated, Welded and

Seamless

ASTM A 106 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service

ASTM B 197 Cupola Malleable Iron


Z21.15 Manually Operated Gas Valves

Z21.18 Gas Appliance Regulators

Z21.21 Automatic Valves for Gas Appliances

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers' data, shop drawings and catalog cuts shall be submitted for all components

and materials in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval and permits from the authority having

jurisdiction for the proposed installation prior to submitting to the CITY.


A. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms capable of showing at least five years of

experience in the design and manufacture of natural gas equipment.


B. Installation of natural gas system components shall be performed by skilled workers

experienced in the installation of gas systems employed by and under direct supervision of a

licensed contractor.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Installation scheduling of natural gas system components shall be coordinated with the

building construction schedule to cause no delays in the execution of other portions of the

construction contract.

B. Coordinate natural gas service requirements with the local gas company for proper meter

selection and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe shall be Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A 53 or A 106.

B. Outdoor aboveground piping shall be primed and painted with products suitable for the

installation environment. Coordinate finish color selection with the CITY.

C. Pipe Fittings

1. Malleable Iron, ASTM A 197, screwed end, 150 psig rated.

2. Steel butt-weld or socket-weld pipe fittings, Schedule 40.

2.02 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Valves and accessories shall be AGA certified and stamped certifying compliance with ANSI

Z21.15, ANSI Z21.18 or ANSI Z21.21 as applicable.

B. Shutoff valves 2-inches and smaller shall be cast iron body gas cock, threaded ends; Crane

No. 1228, Nibco or Stockham.

C. Shutoff valves greater than 2-inches shall be cast iron body gas cock, threaded ends; Crane

No. 324, Nibco or Stockham.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 54 and the International Gas Code. Piping shall also

be supported in accordance with Section 22 05 29 where requirements exceed the Standard

Gas Code.

B. Test all piping in accordance with NFPA and the International Gas Code.

C. Gas piping shall be electrically continuous and bonded to a grounded electrode but shall not

itself be used as a grounding electrode.


3.02 DEMONSTRATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall instruct CITY's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of

gas system components after final system testing is completed.

B. Provide written confirmation to the CITY that the gas system has been tested, inspected by

the authority having jurisdiction, and is in satisfactory working order.


REFRIGERANT PIPING AND

PIPE SPECIALTIES 23 23 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING AND PIPE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. All work specified in this section shall comply with the provisions of Section 22 00 00.

B. Furnish and install all refrigerant piping, fittings, valves and accessories for heating,

ventilating and air conditioning systems.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for refrigerant piping components in accordance with the provisions of

Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit piping layout drawings in sufficient detail to show all fittings, hanger and support

locations and accessories.

C. Submit written approval from the HVAC equipment manufacturer certifying that line sizes,

line lengths and piping accessories are acceptable and shall cause no equipment performance

problems.


Installation of refrigerant piping shall be performed by skilled pipefitters with experience in

refrigerant piping installation.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean, dry location and not subject to damage.

B. Store piping with evacuation charge intact and ends capped.

C. Handle piping carefully to prevent kinked bends or flattened areas. Pipe with this damage

shall not be installed on the Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refrigerant Piping

1. Piping: Copper tubing, ASTM B 88, Type L, Hard Drawn, Soldered. Copper tubing for

refrigeration service shall be ACR type shipped evacuated and with ends capped to

prevent contamination.

2. Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI/ASME B16.26., soldered.



3. Exterior of piping to have a protective coating of BLYGOLD or approved equal.

B. Condensate Drains

1. Piping: PVC pipe, ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40, solvent welded.

2. Fittings: PVC socket type, ASTM D 2466, solvent welded.

2.02 PIPE SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Sleeves: Pipe sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through any concrete or

masonry walls or partitions, through any concrete floors or roofs, and through any fire rated

enclosure. Annular spaces between wall (or insulation) and sleeve shall be packed with UL

labeled fire proofing material sufficient to maintain or exceed the fire rating of the structure

as manufactured by Dow or 3M. Provide escutcheons on both sides of sleeve to contain

packing.

B. Flexible Pipe Connections: Flexible connection for chiller refrigerant relief piping shall be

flexible metal hose constructed of 320 stainless steel wire braid. Hose shall be designed for

working pressure or not less than 125 psig and temperatures up to 250 degrees F and shall be

12-inches long with screwed end connections for chiller refrigerant relief piping.

C. Unions: Unions shall be the same material and working pressure as the fittings specified for

the piping system. Unions on piping 2-1/2-inches in size and larger shall have a bolted

flanged joint.

D. Dielectric Adaptors: Connection between copper and ferrous piping shall be made with an

insulating type dielectric adapter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Workmanship: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site and

worked into place without springing or forcing. Pipes shall be installed to permit free

expansion and contraction without damage to joints, hangers or the building.

B. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except where branches are two or more

sizes less than the size of the main, the branch may be made using forged steel branch

connections such as weldolets, threadolets, latrolets, sweepolets and elbolets by Bonney

Forge, Capital Manufacturing, or WFI, Inc.

C. Pitch/Grade: All piping shall be installed with sufficient pitch to ensure drainage and

venting.

D. Solder Joint Connections: Copper tubing shall be cut square; ends shall be reamed and all

filings removed from interior of pipe. Joints shall be soldered with solder applied through

the feed holes and drawn through the full fitting length. Excess solder shall be wiped from

joint before solder hardens. Solder shall be a 95/5 tin antimony solder with a petroleum base

flux. Soldering to be in accordance with ANSI/AWS A5.8.

E. Threaded Connections: Screw-thread joints shall be made with cut tapered threads. Joints



shall be made tight with Teflon tape unless otherwise specified. Not more than two threads

shall show after the joint is made tight. Pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming cut end.

F. Refrigerant lines to packaged HVAC equipment shall be sized by the equipment

manufacturer prior to submittal. Written acceptance by the equipment manufacturer of the

refrigerant line sizing shall be submitted.

G. Dielectric Isolation


systems, this connection shall be made with dielectric isolators. The dielectric isolators

shall be so designed that non-ferrous piping materials shall be isolated by the use of

Teflon or nylon isolating materials made up in the form of screwed type unions or

insulating gaskets and bolt sleeves and washers for standard flanged connection. All

dielectric isolators shall be selected for the pressure of the system involved.


H. Insulation shall be applied to refrigerant piping after piping tests are completed and accepted.

Suction piping shall be insulated. Liquid piping shall be insulated if clamped with suction

piping and the two lines shall be insulated as a unit. Hot gas piping shall not be insulated

except where it passes through a finished space, supply or return air plenum or duct, or

presents a personnel hazard through regular contact. Insulation shall be as described in

Section 22 07 00.

3.02 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

A. Refrigerant Piping: Flush all solid particles from the piping with compressed nitrogen or

freon if the piping has not been evacuated. Purge piping with nitrogen or other gas

acceptable by the pipe manufacturer to remove all moisture and contaminants.

B. The systems shall not be used, except for chemical cleaning, until the Construction Manager

has been assured that cleaning has been accomplished.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. All tests shall be made before piping is painted, covered, concealed or backfilled.

B. The testing requirements for the respective systems shall include all those of the applicable

governing codes, such as state, local and insurance, and those specified herein. All

code-required inspection certificates shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR to the CITY.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all pumps, gauges, valves and other equipment and

material necessary to properly conduct the tests. Before testing, remove or otherwise protect

from damage, control devices, air vents, fixtures, meters and other equipment that is not

designed to withstand test pressures.

D. Systems receiving pneumatic test shall be filled with nitrogen gas and charged to test

pressure. Hold test pressure for one hour minimum. Exterior surface of pipe shall show no

cracks or leaks and shall be completely drop dry.

E. Pneumatic Pressure Test Criteria



1. Refrigerant Suction Piping: 200 percent of unit operating pressure.

2. Refrigerant Liquid Piping: 200 percent of unit operating pressure.

3. Refrigerant Gas Piping: 200 percent of unit operating pressure.

F. If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced. All

repairs to piping systems shall be made with new material. No caulking on screwed joints,

cracks or holes will be acceptable. Failed welds must be cut out and replaced. Where it

becomes necessary to replace pieces of pipe, such replacements shall be in the same length as

the defective piece. Tests shall be repeated after all defects have been made good.


DUCTWORK 23 31 13-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 31 13

DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work specified in this section is subject to provisions of Section 22 00 00.

B. Provide materials, labor and accessories necessary to completely fabricate and install ductwork

shown on the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES


Documents:

1. International Mechanical Code

2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA)

Standards

a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards

b. HVAC Systems Duct Design

c. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards

d. Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards

3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Standards

a. Fundamentals

b. Equipment

c. HVAC Systems and Applications


NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NFPA 90B Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

5. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) Standards

UL 181 Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors


ASTM A 90 Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel

Articles

ASTM A 525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by

the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 527 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock

Forming Quality


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data on all products proposed for installation under this section, including but

not limited to the following:

1. Duct material product data.

2. Ductwork layouts (not less than 1/4-inch scale).

3. Duct joint installation methods.


A. Work shall be performed in a neat, proficient manner by skilled workers experienced in the

fabrication and installation of ductwork systems of similar complexity.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate experience on at least 10 projects requiring similar

fabrication and installation methods.


A. Material shall be delivered and stored on the Project site in a manner to protect from dirt,

moisture, and physical damage. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing the

on-site storage facilities.

B. Do not install materials damaged prior to installation. Replace damaged materials with new

materials.


A. Coordinate installation schedule of ductwork with overall building construction schedule.

B. Coordinate installation locations of ductwork with the work of other trades to maximize the

accessibility and maintainability of all building systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SMACNA Standards indicated shall mean standards published by the Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. Ductwork shall be constructed in

complete conformance with the latest edition of the SMACNA Manual. Duct classification

shall be as follows unless shown on the Drawings otherwise:

1. Ductwork from makeup air handling units;: Medium Pressure - 4-inches static pressure,

Class A Seals.

2. Ductwork for exhaust and intake air: Low Pressure - 1/2-inch static pressure, Class B

Seals.


3. Industrial duct systems shall be Class 1.

B. Ductwork shall be constructed of G90 galvanized unless noted otherwise on the Drawings for

operating temperatures less than 400F. Ductwork shall be round or rectangular as indicated on

the Drawings. Sizes given shall be considered to be the minimum, and any conversion from the

given shape shall be made without increasing air velocity or friction losses. All duct

dimensions indicated are net clear inside dimensions.

C. Stainless steel ductwork shall be 304, ASTM A-240 with a No. 2B finish.

2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and

ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing

for operating pressures indicated.

2.03 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK

Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and

ASHRAE Handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing

for the operating pressures indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Transitions shall be made with a slope not exceeding 1 in 4 where space permits.

B. Transverse joints shall be sealed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Construction Standards

"Duct Sealing Requirements" with UL listed mastics.

C. Round duct shall be connected to rectangular duct using spin-in fittings with scoop and damper

or scoop only with no damper as indicated on the Drawings.

3.02 SHEET METAL WORK

Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, construct and install all sheet metal work in

accordance with the latest version of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, , the

SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, or the SMACNA Round Industrial

Duct Construction Standards as applicable.


A. All ductwork shall be leak tested in accordance with SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual

and shall be sealed to provide a system that is within the allowable leakage limits. The

ductwork test report shall be submitted to the CITY.

B. If the system is tested in sections, the leakage rates shall be added to define the performance of

the whole system. Leakage concentrated at one point may result in objectionable noise, even if

the system passes the leakage rate criteria. This noise source must be corrected to the

satisfaction of the CITY.


C. Ductwork shall be insulated or acoustically lined where shown on the Drawings or specified in

Section 22 07 00.

D. Ductwork accessories shall be as specified in Section 23 33 00.


DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 33 00

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish and install ductwork accessories as necessary to install ductwork shown on the

Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES


be performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with these publications where

referenced herein:



Standards

a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards

b. HVAC Systems Duct Design

c. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards

d. Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards


Standards

a. Equipment

b. HVAC Systems and Applications

d. Fundamentals



NFPA 90B Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems


UL 181 Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data on all ductwork accessories proposed for installation under this section,

including, but not limited to the following:

1. Air turning vanes


2. Volume control dampers

3. Backdraft dampers

4. Spin-in collar fittings

5. Flexible duct connectors

6. Duct access doors

C. Submittal data shall include catalog cuts, performance data, installation instructions and

other information required to completely describe the proposed equipment and allow

verification of conformance with the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES

A. Turning vanes shall be installed in all 90 degree square and rectangular elbows and at other

locations shown. The turning vanes shall be double thickness type, with vanes secured to the

runners and runners secured to the duct. Elbows in round ductwork and other radiused

elbows shall have an inside radius equal to the diameter of the duct.

B. Splitters shall be made of the same thickness galvanized steel as the duct, 24 gauge minimum

securely attached to a rod at the air leading edge and made of two thicknesses so the leading

edge presents a round nose to air flow. Length shall be equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the

smaller duct; 12-inch minimum.

2.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Single blade (up to 8-inches high), multi-blade (over 10-inches high), control damper.

B. Blades: Minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum airfoil shape:

1. Pivot Rods: Steel, minimum 1/2-inch diameter or hex, 6-inches long. One rod extended

to permit operation of damper from outside duct.

2. Maximum length 42-inches; maximum width 8-inches.

3. At Points of Contact, Except for Manual Balancing Application: Interlocking or

overlapping edges, and compressible neoprene or extruded vinyl blade seals, designed

for temperature of minimum 40 degrees F at specified leakage rate. In addition, hot and

cold deck dampers, and dampers opening to the outside shall have compressible metal

side seals.

4. Except for Manual Balancing Application, Leakage When Closed: Guaranteed less than

10 cfm per square foot at both 1-inch and 4-inches WG static pressure.

5. Opposed blade type for balancing and modulating applications, parallel blade type for

2-position applications.

C. Frames: Galvanized steel bar minimum 2-inches wide x 12 gauge for dampers 10-inches

high or less, 3-1/2 x 7/8-inches, 16 gauge galvanized roll-formed channel with double


thickness edges or 5 x 1 x 0.125-inch extruded aluminum channel for 11-inches high and

larger.

1. Corner bracing.

2. Full size of duct or opening in which installed.

D. Bearings: Bronze sleeve, steel ball type, or Cycoloy 800.

E. Manually operated dampers shall be provided with cadmium-plated steel quadrant with

device for locking damper in position.

F. Automated Dampers to have a 120VAC spring return direct coupled damper actuator

selection should be done in accordance with the damper manufacturer’s specification.

Provide auxiliary contact.

2.03 BACKDRAFT (RELIEF) DAMPERS

A. Heavy duty damper with anti-leakage features, counter-balanced, parallel blade operation.

B. Operating Linkage: Factory assembled, steel construction.

C. Counterbalance Weight: Adjustable and mounted on the entering side. Not required on

dampers located in ductwork on the discharge of fans.

D. Frame: 16 gauge galvanized 3-1/2-inch channel with 7/8-inch double thickness flanges and

corner bracing. Top and bottom stops and blade end seals shall be provided with galvanized

angles spot welded to frame and sealed with sealer. Face of angles shall have replaceable,

compressible polyurethane or neoprene seals.

E. Blades: Minimum 14 gauge extruded aluminum with extruded vinyl seals locked into blade

edges; maximum length 48-inches. Pivot rods shall be plated steel or molded synthetic

thermoplastic, ½-inch diameter or hex.

2.04 SPIN-IN COLLAR FITTINGS

Complete with air scoop and manual damper with locking device, for round duct connection to

supply duct. Spin-in collars shall be by the same manufacturer as the flexible duct and shall be

provided for each flexible duct take-off.

2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Flexible duct connections shall be non-combustible, installed at all belt-driven equipment

and where shown. Material shall be glass fabric double coated with neoprene (30 ounces per

square yard minimum).

B. Provide duct supports on each side of flexible connections.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ventfabrics, Duro-Dyne (Adamson Company), or Thermaflex.

2.06 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish in ductwork as indicated and wherever necessary for proper access to all


instruments, controls, fire dampers, motorized dampers and equipment and for convenient

inspection, maintenance and replacement of same, size to be ample for usage. Openings

shall be reinforced on all sides with material or ductwork in which doors are installed.

B. Two-piece pan construction, consisting of outer side crimped over inner dished side. Not

less than two hinges and not less than two heavy cam latches. All contact surfaces of doors

covered with heavy dense felt securely fastened in place to make doors air tight.

C. Access doors to be insulated or soundproofed with same material as ducts or casings where

located.

D. Coordinate the location of access doors above inaccessible ceilings with the CITY.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All ductwork accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.

B. Verify operation of dampers without binding of the linkage throughout entire operating

range.

C. Install flexible duct connectors with fabric in the midpoint of flexible range when in the

static condition. Verify that full extension or compression is not reached in the operating

mode.

D. Verify duct access door installation allows adequate accessibility to the duct device intended

for access.


AIR BUTTERFLY VALVES 23 33 56 - 1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 33 56

AIR BUTTERFLY VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish and install air butterfly valves of the size, type, and characteristics described within

the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES



referenced herein:


ASTM C 581 Test for Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in

Glass Fiber Reinforced Structures

ASTM C 582 Specifications for Reinforced Plastic Laminates for Self

Supporting Structures for Use in a Chemical Environment

ASTM D 638 Test for Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM D 790 Test for Flexural Properties of Plastics

ASTM D 2563 Recommended Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in

Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts

ASTM D 2583 Test for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a

Barcol Impressor

ASTM D 2584 Test for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit operating and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23.

1.04 WARRANTY

Refer to Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR BUTTERFLY VALVES (3, 4, 6, 8 and 10-INCHES)

A. Provide plastic air butterfly valves suitable for use in wet airstreams containing hydrogen

sulfide (H2S), sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl), and Sodium hydroxide (NaOH).


B. Provide valves with single piece bodies with flange hole characteristics meeting ANSI Class

125/150 dimensions.

C. Valve Construction

1. Polypropylene lens butterfly disc and shaft bearings.

2. PVC body, end plug, and seal restrainer.

3. EPDM liner, moisture seal, and draft O-rings.

4. Type 416 stainless steel valve stem.

D. Valves shall be manufactured by Belco Manufacturing or Hayward Industrial Products.

2.02 MANUAL OPERATORS (3, 4, 6, 8 and 10-INCH VALVES)

A. Provide corrosion resistant operators by valve manufacturer.

B. Provide lever operators for 3 and 4-inch valves.

C. Provide gear operators for 6, 8 and 10-inch valves.

2.03 AIR BUTTERFLY VALVES (12 THROUGH 96-INCHES)

A. Provide FRP air butterfly valves suitable for use with wet airstreams containing hydrogen

sulfide (H2S), sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl), and sodium hydroxide (NaOH).

B. Provide valves with flange hole characteristics meeting ANSI Class 150/125 dimensions.

C. Valve Construction

1. O-ring seal gasket around periphery of blade shall provide a positive seal at 15-inches

water gauge air pressure.

2. Bearings shall be Teflon.

3. Packing shall be Teflon impregnated.

4. Shafts shall be totally encapsulated 316 stainless steel.

5. Valve construction shall be in accordance with ASTM C 582. The same laminating resin

shall be used throughout the housing and the blade.

6. Valve exterior resin coat shall be pigmented, opaque, non-air-inhibited surfacing resin

containing UV protectors. Color charts shall be submitted with shop drawings for

selection by the Owner.

7. The inner surfaces exposed to the chemical environment shall be a resin rich layer

minimum 0.010-inches thickness with a Nexus veil.

8. The structure of the valve shall be alternating layers of chopped strand mat and woven

roving.

9. Valve fiberglass resin shall be fire-retardant.


D. Valves shall be Type B, Grade 4, manufactured by Ershigs.

2.04 MANUAL OPERATORS (12 THROUGH 96-INCH VALVES)

A. Provide corrosion resistant operators by valve manufacturer.

B. Manual operators shall be gear driven handwheel or chain wheel.

C. Valves installed over five feet AFF shall have chain wheel operators.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings, true

to alignment and properly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the

satisfaction of the CITY before they are installed.

C. Install valves between duct flanges with 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers.

D. Support duct at both sides of each valve in a manner that allows removal of valve for

maintenance without temporary duct support.


FANS 23 34 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 34 00

FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish and install unitary fans of the size, type, capacity and characteristics described

within the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES



referenced herein.



UL 705 Power Ventilators




4. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standards

AMCA 99 Standards Handbook

AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes

AMCA 300 Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data on all products proposed for installation under this section, including

but not limited to the following:

1. Centrifugal roof exhausters (belt driven)

2. Centrifugal wall exhausters (direct driven)

3. Industrial centrifugal utility fans

4. Wall-mounted propeller fans

C. Submittal data shall include catalog cuts, performance curves and other information required

to evaluate conformance with these Specification requirements. Data submitted shall include

at least the following:

FANS 23 34 00-2 JULY 2013

1. Materials of construction.

2. Fan performance data and AMCA certification.

3. Fan motor, horsepower, starters, electrical data and/or disconnects where specified or

shown.

4. Roof curbs.

5. Fan accessories.

6. Installation and maintenance instructions.

7. Spare parts lists.

8. Disconnect switches where indicated.

D. Motors shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 83.

E. Disconnects shall meet the requirements of Section 26 28 00.

F. Operating and maintenance data shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 78

23.


A. Provide factory built and tested fan equipment. Test fans in accordance with AMCA 210

and 300. Fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Performance Seal for both air and sound

performance.

B. Provide factory balanced fan wheel and shaft assemblies. Provide statically and dynamically

balanced fan assemblies. Imbalance shall not exceed limitations of the fan bearings for

maximum rated design life.

C. Belt drives shall be designed for not less than 150 percent of the connected driving capacity.

Motor sheave shall be adjustable to provide not less than 20 percent speed variation.

Sheaves shall be selected to drive the fan at a speed to produce the scheduled capacity when

set in the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. Motors with V-belt drives shall be

provided with adjustable bases.

D. Units shall be rigidly constructed of materials suitable for the intended service and shall be

installed with accessories listed on the Contract Documents.

E. Fans shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label.

1.05 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUSTERS (BELT DRIVEN)

A. Provide centrifugal, belt-driven rooftop exhausters complete with roof curb and backdraft

FANS 23 34 00-3 JULY 2013

damper. The fan housing shall be one piece, seamless, heavy gauge aluminum, aluminum

mounted on a rigid support structure. The fan wheel shall be continuous welded, backward

inclined and non-overloading. Riveted construction not acceptable. The drive frame and

motor plates shall be constructed of galvanized steel mounted on vibration isolators. The

motor and drives shall be located out of the exhaust airstream. A rigid aluminum birdscreen

shall be mounted at the exhaust outlet. Fans shall be suitable for outdoor use. Fans shall

include adjustable motor pulleys and heavy duty ball bearings to provide a minimum L50 life

of 200,000 hours.

B. The roof curb shall be provided by the fan manufacturer to assure proper fit between fan curb

cap and roof curb. The curb shall be constructed of aluminum with continuously welded

seams, with rigid fiberglass insulation bonded to the interior. A wood nailer shall be

attached to the top of the curb for fan mounting. Construction of the curb shall account for

roof slope. The roofing flange shall be the 45 degree cant type.

C. Provide with permanently lubricated, open drip-proof motors designed for continuous

operation.

D. The roof curb shall be furnished with a gravity backdraft damper properly sized to attach to a

mounting flange in the curb base. The damper shall be aluminum with felt edge seals.

E. Upblast fans shall have a forced cooled motor compartment with breather tubes.

F. Provide a disconnect switch meeting the requirements of Section 26 28 00.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Penn, Greenheck, Cook, or Hartzell.

2.02 CENTRIFUGAL WALL EXHAUSTERS (DIRECT DRIVEN)

A. Provide packaged aluminum, direct-driven centrifugal wall exhausters of the capacities

scheduled.

B. Housing and motor cover shall be of aluminum construction. Unexposed wall plate and

recessed opening shall be of steel construction and finished with epoxy primer and acrylic

epoxy.

C. Provide with external drip ring to prevent contaminates from running down the building wall.

D. Impellers shall be backward-curved airfoil type of die formed aluminum construction.

E. Motors shall be isolated from the exhaust air stream and cooled with outside air. Motors

shall be of permanent split capacitor construction with pre-lubricated ball bearings and

thermal overload protection.

F. Provide fans with 1/2 x 1/2-inch mesh aluminum birdscreens.

G. Provide fans with disconnect switches.

H. Provide with aluminum, multiple blade counter balanced backdraft dampers for mounting

flush with the inside wall surface.

I. Corrosion resistant finishes.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Twin City or Penn.

FANS 23 34 00-4 JULY 2013

2.03 INDUSTRIAL CENTRIFUGAL UTILITY FAN

A. Provide industrial, centrifugal, backward-inclined flat blade, utility fans complete with steel

plate housing, flanged outlet, fan wheel, shaft, bearings, motor and motor variable frequency

drive.

B. The fan wheel shall be constructed of welded steel plate material suitable for the intended

service. Fan wheel configuration shall be of nonoverloading power characteristics. Fan

assembly shall be dynamically balanced at the factory. Riveted construction not acceptable.

C. The bearings shall be selected to provide a minimum average life of 75,000 hours at

maximum speeds.

D. Fan construction shall be AMCA Class II and shall bear the AMCA seal.

E. Fan and drive arrangement shall be AMCA as shown on the Drawings.

F. Variable Frequency Motor Controller to meet the requirements of Section 26 29 23.

G. Coat entire fan as indicated on drawings.

H. Provide with unit mounted disconnect switch meeting the requirements of Section 26 28 00.

I. Accessories as indicated on drawings:

1. Outlet flange

2. Lifting lugs.

3. Housing drain 1-1/2-inch female pipe thread w/ plug.

4. Inlet flange

5. Bolted access door for inspection and cleaning of wheel.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: American Fan Company Type BI, Chicago Blower Type B,

Greenheck SWB, or Hartzell.

2.04 WALL-MOUNTED PROPELLER FANS

A. Provide belt driven sidewall propeller fans complete with fan blade, one piece steel fan panel

with spun venturi and driver support frame, motor and drive, bearings, gravity shutter, outlet

screens, motor side guards and mounting collars.

B. The propeller fan blade shall have six die formed gusseted blades welded to a spherically

formed hub. Provide keyway slots and set screws to secure fan wheel to the shaft.

C. The steel fan panel shall be of one piece construction with spun venturi, formed flanges and

welded corners. The fan panel shall have a drive support frame providing a rigid platform

for the motor and shaft. Provide a thermally fused powdered epoxy coating 4-5 mils thick.

D. Fan shaft shall be ground and polished steel with slotted keyways.

E. Bearings shall be the ball bearing pillow block type. Bearing shall be rated for an average

life of 100,000 hours.

FANS 23 34 00-5 JULY 2013

F. Provide matching factory fabricated motor side guards, outlet screens and mounting collars.

G. Shutters for exhaust fans shall be gravity type. Shutters shall be factory finished after

assembly with a coating as indicated on drawings. All material edges and surfaces shall be

thoroughly cleaned and deoxidized prior to application of an inhibitive primer.

H. Provide with unit mounted disconnect switch meeting the requirements of Division 26.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers: Penn Ventilator, Acme, Greenheck, or Cook.

2.05 FRP CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Provide packaged belt drive fans constructed of fiberglass reinforced polyester material.

B. Fan wheel shall be backward curvel type, of solid fiberglass construction.

C. All internal hardware and shaft shall be constructed of type 316 stainless steel. Internal

hardware shall be encapsulated.

D. All external hardware shall be resin-coated after assembly.

E. Belts shall be oil, heat and static resistant type. Shaft shall be turned, ground and polished.

Shaft shall be keyed at both ends.

F. Bearings shall be heavy duty, self-aligning, pillow block type.

G. Shaft seal shall be fiberglass and neoprene, and shall be installed with a neoprene shaft slinger.

H. Furnish with flanged inlet connection and rubber mount vibration isolators.

I. Base shall be epoxy coated steel.

J. Furnish fan with the following accessories:

1. PVC drain connection.

2. Weather guard outlet

3. Epoxy coated [drive guard and weather cover

4. Provide with disconnect switch

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hartzell Fan, Industrial Air, Greenheck or Viron.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown

on the Drawings. Provide adequate supports from wall or structure to prevent sagging,

vibration and damage.

B. Units shall be interlocked and controlled as shown on the Drawings.

FANS 23 34 00-6 JULY 2013

3.02 ROOF MOUNTED FANS

A. Install roof curb with roofing. Extend roof flashing up and over the roof curb sides. Mount

backdraft damper to curb, not to roof.

B. Mount fan level on roof curb after bonding a rubber gasket to roof curb top edge. Secure fan

to curb with lag bolts through fan curb cap into curb wood nailer. Use a minimum of two lag

bolts each fan side, with 12-inches maximum distance between bolts. Caulk between fan and

curb to provide a weathertight seal.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. Verify proper rotation of fan wheel.

B. Verify proper operation of backdraft damper.

C. Adjust fan speed by adjusting or replacing sheaves to obtain proper air flow.


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE


B. Furnish and install air outlets and inlets of the size, type, capacity, and characteristics

described within the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES



herein:


Standards

HVAC Duct Construction Standards


Standards

ASHRAE 70 Methods of Testing for Rating the Performance of Outlets and Inlets

3. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standards

ARI 650 Air Outlets and Inlets



5. Air Movement and Control Associations (AMCA) Standards

AMCA 500 Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters

6. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Standards

ADC 1062: GRD Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers

7. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM Standards)

ASTM E 90 Standard Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne

Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit product data on all air inlets and outlets including actuators proposed for installation

under this section.

C. Submit charts for color selection.

D. Submit sound attenuation data for acoustical products and sound power data for all outlets.

E. Submit airflow versus pressure drop performance data.

F. Submit louver schedule indicating type and sizes to suit field verified wall openings.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STATIONARY LOUVERS - STANDARD

A. Drainable Blade Stationary Louvers

1. Frame shall be welded, box style with downspouts in jambs and mullions and extruded

from 6063T5 aluminum.

2. Frame depth shall be –as indicated on drawings and verified in field.

3. Frame minimum thickness shall be 0.081-inch.

4. Blade minimum thickness shall be 0.081-inch.

5. Blades shall have drain gutters.

6. Provide with 0.081-inch thick extended sill.

7. Provide with continuous appearing stationary blades.

8. Provide with Kynar 500 finish on all exposed surfaces, color selected by the CITY.

9. Provide with aluminum insect or bird screen, mounted on interior side of louver, as

indicated on the Louver Schedule on the Drawings.

10. Louver air flow performance shall be AMCA certified. See the Drawings for louver air

flow and size.

11. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Ruskin Model ELF6375 or approved equal.

2.02 STATIONARY LOUVERS - FIBERGLASS

A. Louver shall be fiberglass construction and comply with ASTM D 4385-8A. Resin shall be

flame retardant vinyl ester based.

B. Frame shall be 0.125” thick, 4”x1.06” fiberglass channel.

C. Blades shall be 0.125” thick fiberglass on 45-degree angle at 5” center to center.

D. Screen shall be 0.5” mesh x 19 gauge PVC coated bird screen.

E. Louver shall bear AMCA seal. See the Louver Schedule on the Drawings for louver air flow

performance.

F. Louver colors as selected by the CITY during shop drawing review.

G. Acceptable Manufacturer: Equal to Swartwout Model SFG40.

2.03 COMBINATION LOUVERS

A. Drainable Blade Combination Louvers.

1. Frame shall be welded, box style with downspouts in jambs and mullions and extruded

from 6063T5 aluminum.

2. Frame depth shall be 6-inches.

3. Frame minimum thickness shall be 0.081-inch.

4. Stationary blade minimum thickness shall be 0.081-inch.

5. Adjustable blade minimum thickness shall be 0.081-inch.

6. Adjustable blade edge seal shall be vinyl.


7. Adjustable blade pivot bearing shall be Nylon.

8. Stationary blades shall have drain gutters.

9. Provide with 0.081-inch thick extended sill.

10. Provide with continuous appearing stationary blades.

11. Provide with Kynar 500 finish on all exposed surfaces, color selected by the Engineer.

12. Provide with aluminum insect or bird screen, mounted on interior side of louver, as

indicated on the Louver Schedule on the Drawings.

13. Louver air flow performance shall be AMCA certified. See the Louver Schedule on the

Drawings for louver air flow performance.

14. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Ruskin Model ELC6375.

2.04 GRAVITY HOODS

A. Intake vent shall be 0.08-inch thick aluminum. Base and throat shall have continuous welded

mitered corners. Aluminum hood shall be supported and reinforced by a structural frame. All

fasteners shall be aluminum.

B. Intake vents shall be provided with backdraft damper, insect screen and hinged hood.

C. Exhaust/relief vents shall be provided with gravity counter balanced backdraft damper, insect

screen and hinged hood.

D. The roof curb shall be provided by the vent manufacturer to assure proper fit between vent curb

cap and roof curb. The curb shall be 18-inches high, constructed of aluminum with continuously

welded seams, with rigid fiberglass insulation bonded to the interior. A wood nailer shall be

attached to the top of the curb for vent mounting. Construction of the curb shall account for roof

scope. The roofing flange shall be the 45 degree cant type. The roof curb shall have a mounting

flange located in the curb base to attach backdraft damper to.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Penn, Greenheck, or Acme.

2.05 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Units shall be of the type, size, construction, and factory finish as scheduled on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LOUVERS

A. Louvers shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be

caulked and sealed at the frame and flanges to make the installation weathertight. Install louvers

plumb, level, in plane of wall, and in alignment with adjacent work.

B. Combination louver dampers shall be installed with required damper operators and linkage

mechanisms (furnished by louver/damper manufacturer) and shall be field adjusted for full

opening/closure stroke. Louvers shall be interlocked with exhaust fans as scheduled on the

Drawings

C. Install joint sealants in accordance with the requirements of Division 07.

D. Clean louver surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Repair minor damaged surfaces .


3.02 GRAVITY ROOF VENTS

A. Install roof curb with roofing. Extend roof flashing up and over the roof curb sides. Mount

backdraft damper to curb, not to roof.

B. Mount vent level on roof curb after bonding a rubber gasket to roof curb top edge. Secure

vent to curb with lag bolts through vent curb cap with 12-inches maximum distance between

bolts. Caulk between vent and curb to provide a weathertight seal.

3.03 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. All units located in ceiling tiles shall be centered or shall be on quarter points of 2 x 4 foot

tiles.

B. Where a line of sight allows the ductwork, wall, or ceiling structure to be seen behind any

units, such ductwork, wall, or ceiling structure shall be painted with non-flammable flat black

paint to minimize visibility.

C. All units not installed on T-bar ceiling grids shall be securely fastened to adjacent structures.

D. Coordinate frame type with type of ceiling/wall to ensure proper installation.


HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 75 23-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 23 75 23

HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work specified in this section is subject to the provisions Section 22 00 00.

B. Furnish and install make-up air units of the size, type, capacity, and characteristics described

within the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES


Documents.

1. International Gas Code


3. American Gas Association (AGA) Standards

AGA Certification

4. Underwriter's Laboratory (UL) Standards

UL 795 Commercial-Industrial Gas-Heating Equipment


NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code



6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards

ANSI Z83.4 Direct Gas-Fired Make-up Air Heaters

ANSI Z83.18 Recirculating Direct Gas-Fired Industrial Air Heaters

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit information including the following:

1. Motor.

2. Fan and air side performance.

3. Fuel input.

4. Heat output.

5. Unit dimensions, configuration and operating weights.


6. Materials of construction.

7. Controls and sequence of operation.

8. Installation and operating procedures.

9. Provide complete electrical and control wiring diagrams specific to each unit being

provided.

C. Motors shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 83.

D. Disconnects shall meet the requirements of Section 26 28 00.

E. Pilot lights, relays, switches and starters shall meet the requirements of Section 26 29 00.

F. Variable frequency drives shall meet the requirements of Section 26 29 23.

G. Operating and maintenance data shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 78 23 of


1.04 WARRANTY

Provide with parts warranty covering 18 months from shipment or 12 months after start-up

whichever comes first. Refer to Section 01 78 36 for additional requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Heating and ventilating units shall be manufactured by Absolute Aire, or Engineered Air.

2.02 UNIT DESCRIPTION

Units shall be shop fabricated and assembled. Unit shall be designed for outdoor or indoor

installation as indicated on drawings. Each unit shall have channel base for mounting on steel or

housekeeping pad; an insulated casing; outside air dampers and operators; and/or return air

dampers and operators; air filters; gas heating section; fan with vibration control panel; motor

starter; control transformer; access doors; and required miscellaneous components as indicated

on drawings.

2.03 UNIT CONSTRUCTION

A. Casing: The casing shall be constructed of a minimum 18 gauge aluminized steel and shall

be factory primed and enamel coated. The outside coating shall have an epoxy primer and

polyurethane coating and the inside shall have a primer coating. Units to be located outdoors

shall have pitched roof surfaces, and shall have weather resistant construction. Provide

access doors to all controls, filter section, heating section, fan section, and damper sections.

The unit shall be of double wall construction with minimum of 1 thick 1.5 PSF thermal fiber

insulation.

B. Fan: The blower shall be forward curved centrifugal and fan wheel shall be statically and

dynamically balanced. The fan shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The premium


efficient motor shall be open drip-proof, with pre lubricated ball bearings and extended lube

lines. The fan drive shall be belt driven, designed for a 1.5 minimum service factor based on

motor horsepower or as indicated on drawings. Provide vibration isolators under the fan and

motor sized for the weight of the combined motor and frame.

C. Heating Section: Provide a direct fired burner with a maximum 25:1 turn down ratio and

stainless steel plates and aluminum burner. Provide FM and ANSI Z83.4 approved natural

gas controls with pilot and main gas regulator, and spark ignited pilot. Burners shall be

provided with an electronic flame safeguard controls and UV pilot flame sensing device.

The gas valve shall be able to modulate the gas flow in response to the discharge air sensor.

D. Dampers: Each unit shall have supply air, outside air dampers and return air dampers as

indicated on drawings. Dampers shall be parallel blade type with edge seals. Outside and

return air damper sets shall be capable of up to 100% recirculation

E. Inlet Hood: Each outdoor unit shall have a weatherproofed inlet hood with moisture

eliminators and a bird screen.

F. Filters: Provide filter section with 2 sets of 2-inch thick 30 percent efficient (ASHRAE 52)

standard sized filters .

G. Access panels shall have stainless steel hinges and be located across from the motor, fan,

filter, and burner. All panels shall have stainless steel or PVC coated steel latches

H. Convenience Receptacle and Light fixture shall be supplied on outdoor units.

I. Controls: Provide control panels mounted on unit or remote as indicated on drawings.

Panels located on units are to be less than 6 feet above finished floor. All panels shall have

an enclosure rating for area classification as stated on Electrical plans. Panels shall contain

the following safeties and control options:

1. Status lights.

2. Relays and contactors.

3. High limit switch.

4. Proof of airflow before pilot ignition.

5. High and low gas pressure switches.

6. Discharge air temperature sensor.

7. Flame monitoring system.

8. Magnetic full voltage fan motor starter.

9. Non fused disconnect switch.

10. Exhaust fan interlock relay (where indicated on drawings)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PRODUCT HANDLING


Each part of the unit shall be properly preserved and packed in accordance with the

manufacturer's standard practice. All components that may be subjected to damage during

shipment and handling shall be adequately braced and protected to prevent damage to the

equipment. Instructions for proper unpacking and handling shall be furnished. All parts shall be

prepared for shipment in a manner to ensure carrier acceptance and safe delivery to designated

location at the lowest applicable rate.

3.02 START-UP SERVICES

A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained, certified technician to supervise in start-

up of the equipment specified under this section.

B. The manufacturer's service representative shall provide technical direction for the following

work:

1. Inspection and final adjustments.

2. Operational and functional checks of Make-up Air Units.

3. Training of the CITY’s representative on the proper maintenance and operation of the

equipment.

C. The manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been

installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 EXCEPTIONS

A. Vendor shall state in proposal that the equipment is in full compliance with this

Specification, or any exception to this Specification shall be clearly defined in the proposal.

B. Exceptions shall be noted by page and paragraph corresponding to the Specification.

Exceptions shall be indicated on the first page of the proposal.


SPLIT SYSTEMS AIR TO AIR

HEAT PUMPS 23 81 26-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 23 81 26

SPLIT SYSTEMS AIR TO AIR HEAT PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. All work specified in this section shall comply with the provisions of Section 22 00 00.

B. Furnish all appropriate labor, tools, materials and equipment necessary to supply, receive, store

and install split system air-to-air heat pumps.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. International Mechanical Code

B. Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA) 210

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems

D. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): UL 1995 Standard and Label


The equipment manufacturer shall furnish, without additional charge, a factory-trained

representative to provide check-out, test and start-up of equipment.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 and Division

01.

B. Shop drawings shall include, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Identification by equipment number.

2. Performance Data: Including evaporator and condenser air quantity, unit KW input,

evaporator fan brake HP, fan rpm, air velocity and pressure loss across evaporator coil.

3. Equipment operation weight.

4. Catalog data marked to indicate specified components used.

5. Unit specifications and Drawings describing construction methods, including materials,

metal gauges and component spacing and thicknesses.

6. Fan characteristic curve for each fan selection.

7. Operating sound level data of fan.

8. Arrangement of unit.



9. Complete dimensional data of each representative unit.

10. Arrangement, location and size of drains and electrical connections.

11. Complete cooling and heating performance for each unit.

12. Mounting details.

C. Operating and maintenance data shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 78 23 of


1.05 WARRANTY

Split system heat pump units shall include a one year warranty on all parts and labor and a five year

warranty on all compressors. Refer to Section 01 78 36 for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Split system air-to-air heat pumps shall be manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric or approved equal.

2.02 HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

Split system air-to-air heat pump units shall comply with the requirements listed in this section and

capacities, performance and arrangements as indicated on the Drawings.

2.03 INDOOR FAN – COIL UNIT

A. General: Indoor wall mounted unit shall provide cooling and heating and all accessories

required for proper, safe and reliable operation of cooling to outdoor temperatures of 14 deg F

and heating with outdoor temperature of negative 4 deg F.

B. Multi speed direct drive blower, evaporator coil charge with R 410 refrigerant.

C. 30 percent efficiency cleanable filter

D. Unit casing to have an Munsell No. 1 finish, and have hinged access doors.

E. Indoor coil shall have a protective coating of BLYGOLD PoluA1XT or approved equal.

2.04 OUTDOOR UNIT

A. General: Outdoor unit shall include invertor driven compressor, condensing coil charged with

refrigerant, prop fan, liquid and gas line valves and all accessories required for proper, safe and

reliable operation.

B. Outdoor unit shall be pad mounted as indicated on the Drawings.

C. The outdoor coil in the condensing unit shall receive a protective coating of BLYGOLD

PoluA1XT or approved equal.

D. Indoor unit shall be powered from outdoor unit.



2.05 UNIT CONTROLS

A. Temperature controller shall be Mitsubishi Electric PAR-21MAA wall mounted wired remote

controller with contact terminal interface as required or approved equal with:

on/off operation

cool / heat / auto / fan modes

set point temperature from 40F to 90F

fan speed settings

error indication

space temperature display

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and adjust each unit in accordance with the Drawings and the manufacturer's

instructions. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for charging the unit, and installation of

refrigerant piping between indoor and outdoor units.

B. Demonstrate operation of unit complete with all control functions and safety devices. Provide

written certification that such demonstration has been successfully completed to the CITY.

C. Anchor condensing units to service pads with full-size epoxy coated bolts.

D. Route fan coil unit condensate piping to drain in accordance with applicable codes.

E. Install clean air filters prior to final acceptance and occupancy by the CITY. Do not operate the

units at any time without proper air filters in place.

F. Verify proper operation of the heat pump system complete with all operating and safety

controls.

G. Train the CITY’s representative on the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment.


COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRCAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Section includes basic electrical requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections.

1.02 SCOPE

A. All work included in this Division and its Sections is coordinated with and complementary to

all the requirements and conditions set forth in other Divisions and Sections of the

Specifications, and associated drawings wherever applicable to the electrical work.

B. The intent and object of these Specifications and Drawings is to include a complete wiring

system to each and every device indicated or specified, including connecting all electrical

devices and/or equipment furnished by the CITY or other contractors.

1.03 REFERENCE

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): ANSI/IEEE C2 – National

Electrical Safety Code

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

2. ANSI/NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

2. NEMA FB-1 – Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies

E. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): NECA Standard of Installation

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): Title 29, Part 1910, Subpart S –

Electrical – Safety Standards for Electrical Systems

G. Insulated Cable Engineering Association: ANSI/ICEA T-27-581-2008 - Standard Test

Methods for Extruded Dielectric for Power, Control, Instrumentation and portable Cables for

Test


A. All work shall be performed and materials provided in accordance with NFPA 70 - National

Electric Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), and other codes and

standards as applicable. Where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ),

equipment and materials shall be listed or labeled by Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) or by a

nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the AHJ. CONTRACTOR shall be

responsible for all costs associated with obtaining the required listing.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall not assume that any Drawing or Specification forming a part of

the Contract Documents authorizes the violation of any Code, regulation or standard. Where

COMMON WORK RESULTS


conflicts arise, it shall be deemed that the CONTRACTOR has estimated the cost of all work

to be completed in accord with the prevailing Code.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be licensed to perform electrical work in the jurisdiction in which

the Project is located.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain all necessary permits for electrical work. Any required

fees and sales or use taxes applicable to this branch of work shall be paid by the

CONTRACTOR.

E. Upon completion of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the CITY all required

certificates of inspection and approval.

1.05 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Drawings, which constitute a part of the Contract, are diagrammatic in nature and

indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, location of switches, panel boards

and other work; but accuracy is not guaranteed, and field verification of all locations and

dimensions by CONTRACTOR is required.

B. The Drawings will not show all structural and installation details. It shall be the responsi-

bility of the CONTRACTOR to make a complete and satisfactory installation in accordance

with the best modern practice and methods.

C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all dimensions required for laying-out and installing

the work. Any information involving accurate measurements of the building shall be taken

from the architectural and structural drawings, and field verified as required.

D. Outlets shall be located, as required, for proper installation of equipment and shall meet Code

requirements. Locations of equipment required to be wired shall be coordinated with

contractors of other trades. The CONTRACTOR shall consult the CITY and refer to all

details, sections, elevations and equipment plans and the plans of other trades for exact

location.

E. The CITY reserves the right to make reasonable changes in the location of outlets, apparatus

or equipment up to the time of roughing-in. Such changes as directed shall be made by the

CONTRACTOR without additional compensation.

1.06 CHANGE ORDER REQUESTS

Refer to Division 01 for procedures required for change order requests.

1.07 SUBMITTAL

A. All submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00. A

copy of each Specification shall be provided with the submittal with addendum updates.

Each paragraph shall be check-marked to indicate Specification compliance or marked to

indicate requested deviations from Specification requirements. Check marks (√) shall denote

full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the Specifications are

indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined

and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The

remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the

CONTRACTOR with the Specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed,

written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up

Specification Sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the

Specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the

COMMON WORK RESULTS


entire submittal with no further consideration.

B. CONTRACTOR’s Construction Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a construction

progress schedule, per the requirements of Section 01 32 16.

C. Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals

with performance of construction activities per the requirements of Section 01 33 00.

D. Shop Drawing Submittals

1. Include products specified in Division 26. Catalog cuts of equipment, devices, and

materials requested by the individual Specification Sections. Catalog information shall

include technical specifications and application information, including ratings, range,

weight, accuracy, etc. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model

numbers, and information which apply.

2. Include raceway shop drawings per Section 26 05 33, 1.03 C.

3. Group submittal data of related systems, products and accessories into a single submittal,

per the requirements of Section 01 33 00.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For all equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR,

provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals per Section 01 78 23.

F. Project Meetings: Project meetings will be in accordance with Section 01 31 19.

1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Scope: It is the intent of this Section that all wiring systems included in the Project be fully

documented. Record documents shall include all electrical devices and equipment furnished

by the CONTRACTOR, other contractors and the CITY. Such documentation shall consist

of "record drawings", per the requirements of Section 01 78 39.

B. Record Drawings

1. Record drawings shall consist of marked-up plans and shall contain the following

information:

a. Location of:

i. Large pull boxes and junction boxes (8-inches and larger)

ii. Equipment enclosures.

iii. Light switches and receptacles.

iv. Control stations.

v. Equipment shown on the plan sheets.

vi. Information as specified elsewhere in this Division.

2. CONTRACTOR shall also document the electrical work on Drawings obtained from

other sources.

a. Provide drawings of equipment furnished by this CONTRACTOR or other

contractors, which may be found on door panels or within instruction manuals

shipped with the equipment. CONTRACTOR shall mark up such drawings to reflect

any changes made as part of the electrical work.

b. Provide documentation of modifications that may have been made to electrical

equipment by manufacturer’s representatives or start-up personnel. It shall be the

responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain a copy of such changes, and include

that information with the record documentation.

COMMON WORK RESULTS


c. CONTRACTOR shall mark up submittal drawings of equipment furnished by this

CONTRACTOR or other contractors to reflect any changes made to the equipment as

part of the electrical work.

3. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a copy of the Record Drawings on-site, and keep them up

to date to reflect the work completed to date. Red-line copies shall be scanned at the end

of construction and provided to the CITY and ENGINEER for review.

4. Prior to final payment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit complete, clear, concise and

clean sets of marked-up prints, per the requirements of Section 01 78 39.

1.09 WARRANTIES

A. Provide guarantees, warranties and bonds as listed in the Instructions to Bidders, per Section

01 78 36.

B. CONTRACTOR shall leave the entire electrical system in good working order and shall, at

their expense, repair, rebuild, remodel and make good and acceptable all defective labor and

materials that may develop within 1-year after Substantial Completion of the Project, as

defined in Section 01 77 19.

C. It may be necessary to energize portions of the electrical system prior to final acceptance of

the complete work. It is the intent of these Specifications that the above guarantee period

shall be 1-year after Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials used for the electrical installation shall be new and unused, except as otherwise

indicated, and shall be uniform in type and manufacture for the entire electrical installation.

B. All materials shall be suitable for the conditions and duties imposed upon them in service and

shall be the latest standard catalog products of reputable manufacturers.

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders for information regarding

substitutions.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers shall have minimum 5-years continuous experience in the manufacture of

products specified under this Section.

B. Where materials, equipment, apparatus or other products are specified by manufacturer,

brand name, type or catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of desired

quality and style and shall be the basis of the bid.

C. Where "Acceptable Manufacturers" are listed, the list is for general acceptance only. Actual

product used must conform to plans and Specifications and be of equivalent type, function,

appearance and quality as the specified manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number, if

so specified. Products used shall be subject to Submittal requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

COMMON WORK RESULTS


A. Verify existing site conditions prior to beginning work.

B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways are ready for cable installation. Completely and thoroughly swab

raceway before installing wire.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation/General:

1. The complete installation is to be accomplished by skilled electrical tradesmen, with

certified or suitably qualified individuals performing all special systems installation and

testing. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality, sub-standard work will be

rejected.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall check the Drawings and Specifications of all other Divisions

of work, such as Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, Plumbing, Mechanical

Equipment, etc., for equipment and work which must be included in order to provide a

complete electrical installation.

3. Schedule the work and cooperate with all trades to avoid delays, interferences, and

unnecessary work. If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the Drawings and

Specifications, details of departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted immediately

for the CITY’s consideration.

4. Do not stub up conduits prior to receipt of approved shop drawings showing conduit

entry locations.

5. Prior to final inspection, clean all dirt, mud and construction debris from all boxes,

cabinets, manholes and equipment enclosures.

6. Prior to energizing any equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall first make a thorough

inspection of it, and remove all packing, braces and shipping supports, and thoroughly

vacuum all dirt and debris. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the CITY and other

on-site contractors. CONTRACTOR shall not energize any equipment without notifying

the CITY.

7. Electrical Equipment to be installed and wired per Division 26 Specifications and

equipment installation instructions.

B. Wiring Installation/General

1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.

3. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

4. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for 24 VDC and 120 VAC control circuits.

5. Use 10 AWG minimum conductors for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuits longer than

75-feet.

6. Use 10 AWG minimum conductors for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuits longer than

200-feet.

7. Pull all conductors into each raceway at same time.

8. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant.

COMMON WORK RESULTS


9. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

10. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panel boards.

11. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. All connectors for

copper conductors shall be manufactured from copper. No tin plated aluminum

connectors or lugs (even if rated for copper conductors) shall be acceptable.

12. Enclosures for switches, over-current devices and panelboards shall not be used as

junction boxes, splice boxes, auxiliary gutters or raceways for conductors feeding

through or tapping to other switches, over-current devices or panelboards unless specified

on Drawings.

13. No more than one conductor will be permitted to be connected to any single lug or

terminal, unless such lug or terminal is of a type specifically approved for the purpose.

C. Wiring Installation Overview

1. Install and terminate all cables and conductors indicated on Drawings.

2. Install and terminate wiring required for lighting system and convenience receptacles as

shown on Drawings.

3. Single-Conductor Cables: Install entirely in conduit.

4. Multiple-Conductor Cables: Install in trays per the Contract Drawings, insofar as

possible, within limitations specified herein; install in conduit between trays and

equipment, except where specified otherwise.

5. Instrumentation wiring (24VDC, 4-20mA, 0-10VDC, etc.), shall be installed in conduits

for their entire run.

D. Cable Pulling

1. Cable Lubricant: Use the cable manufacturer’s recommended lubricant.

2. Bending Radii: Not less than permitted by ICEA and cable manufacturer’s

specifications.

3. Conduit: Use of steel pulling cables is not permitted.

4. Type TC Cable (all ratings):

a. Pull by hand.

b. Basket-grip and rollers may be used for heavier AWG sizes on long pulls.

c. Cables may be pulled in groups or individually by hand. Care shall be taken to keep

cables in group pulls from twisting.

d. Installation using a mechanical puller:

i. Puller shall be equipped with gage to indicate pulling tension.

ii. For every pull involving the mechanical puller, CONTRACTOR shall furnish

ENGINEER with a signed report containing the following information:

1) Single-line of pull rigging.

2) Dimensions between rollers or sheaves.

3) Radius maintained at bends.

4) Footage of elevation changes.

5) Maximum pulling tension on gage.

6) Description of sheaves.

COMMON WORK RESULTS


iii. Use rollers, sheaves, and similar devices during pulling to prevent damage to

cable.

1) Where tray changes direction, use sheave with large enough radius to satisfy

cable manufacturer’s maximum allowable cable side-wall pressure limits

and minimum binding radii requirements. Any permanent deformation of

the cable armor will be cause for cable replacement.

2) Pulling tensions on each cable shall not exceed cable manufacturer’s

specifications. Provide copy of maximum pulling tensions encountered to

ENGINEER after pulling cables.

iv. Short runs or ends of long runs may be pulled by hand using rollers as required.

v. After using any style of pulling grip, remove a minimum of 2-feet of pulling end

before installing termination.

E. Cables Installed in Conduit

1. CONTRACTOR may group Type TC cables used for power circuits in same conduit.

This shall be for short runs of three feet or less only, for conduit exit from MCC to

overhead cable tray. Otherwise each power circuits shall have individual conduit, unless

indicated otherwise on Drawings and as permitted per N.E.C.

2. CONTRACTOR may group Type TC cables used for control circuits in same conduit.

3. Instrument cables shall be grouped in conduit only with other instrument cables.

4. Conduits containing instrument cables shall be spaced minimum of 18 inches from non

instrument conduits or trays for parallel runs and run at right angles to the non-instrument

conduits or trays when conduits cross. Conduits crossing instrument signals shall be run

a minimum of 60” from power transformers and switchgear. Instrumentation Conduit to

be PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel (PGRS) for installation in all areas.

5. Provide cable supports in vertical runs as required by NEC.

F. Cable Entry to Equipment

1. General:

a. Where top entry is required into motor control centers, switchgear, or similar

equipment in electrical rooms, cut holes in top of panels as required for conduit

and/or cable entry. Use care in cutting entry holes to prevent metal shavings, cutting

out, and other debris from falling into equipment.

b. Bottom/Side Entry:

i. Where bottom/side entry is required into equipment, CONTRACTOR shall cut

opening in bottom/side panel to match floor opening location.

ii. CONTRACTOR shall provide sleeves and floor openings as required.

c. After cables are installed in floor openings under equipment, fill remaining opening

with Fire Stop Systems “ELASTA-SEAL”.

2. Type TC Cables and Type XHHW Ground Conductor: Top entry into equipment

cabinets without conduit up to 3 feet maximum (electrical room only): Install on cabinet

top straight strain relief cord connector, threaded-type, O.Z. Gedney Co. Type SR, for

each cable.

3. Bottom entry into equipment cabinets without conduit up to 3 feet maximum:

a. Bundle cables together at entry and support from cabinet framing near floor entry.

COMMON WORK RESULTS


b. If no suitable support framing is available, furnish and install 3/8" steel bar

approximately 6" above panel floor and tie cables thereto.

c. Use Thomas & Betts "Ty-Rap", or equal, specified elsewhere for binding and tying

cables.

d. Where cable entry is in conduit, no additional supports are required. Conduit

opening shall be horizontal and attached to cable tray with approved fittings.

e. Type XHHW cable tray ground shall be required for all cable tray runs. Taps into

this ground shall be protected from corrosion using a spray on enamel such as

glyptal. Other options must be approved by the CITY. In no case shall bare,

uncoated conductors be allowed to be left uncoated.

G. Splicing and Connections

1. Splicing: Splices permitted in lighting and convenience receptacle circuits. Use

insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps,

10 AWG and smaller.

2. All solenoids with integral wires to be spliced in a condulet mounted in close proximity.

Materials: Insulated crimp-sleeve connector, 3M Co. "Scotchlok S-11 and S31", or equal.

3. Other devices with integral wires to be terminated in a condulet or NEMA 4 terminal box

and connections to it are to be fully insulated and sealed with electrical tape.

4. Splicing not permitted in other circuits, unless specifically indicated or approved by

CITY and ENGINEER.

5. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise.

6. Install splices as continuous operation in accessible locations under clean, dry conditions.

a. Connections: General:

i. Connectors shall be UL listed for conductors and service conditions encountered.

All connectors shall be tin plated copper. All connectors #2AWG and larger

shall be two-hole, long barrel and shall be crimped multiple times as the lug

allows.

ii. Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

iii. Provide compression tools and properly sized dies needed to install compression

connectors. All compression tools shall be listed for the lugs being installed.

iv. Provide shield termination and grounding for terminations.

v. Provide necessary mounting hardware, covers, and connectors.

vi. Control connections:

1) Certain conductors may require re-identification of color. CONTRACTOR

shall make such re-identifications using Thomas & Betts Shrink-Kon thin

wall heat shrinkable tubing of the proper diameter and color. The tube shall

be a minimum of two inches in length and be heat shrunk. The re-

identifications shall be applied at both ends of circuit as well as in all

intermediate terminal boxes. Phasing tape is acceptable for larger

(>#10AWG) wires.

2) Cable jackets shall remain intact in close proximity to terminations and shall

not be stripped back to point of entry. Cable number defined on cable

schedules shall be applied to end of jacket using specified cable markers.

All cables with jackets shall be supported next to terminal strip. After

COMMON WORK RESULTS


mounting the cables, all labels shall be legible and visible, and the cables

shall be traceable without disturbing the cable mounting or separating cable

bundles.

3) The cut end of the cable jackets shall be dressed out using Thomas & Betts

Shrink-Kon type CPO thin wall heat shrinkable tubing of the proper

diameter and in the color black. This heat shrunk tube shall cover the wire

breakout from the cable jacket.

4) All drain wires in instrument cables shall be insulated with Thomas & Betts

Shrink-Kon type CPO thin wall heat shrinkable tubing of the proper

diameter and in the color clear. This heat shrunk tube shall cover the wire

from breakout from the cable jacket to termination. Drain and cable shield

wires shall be terminated at the control panel end. The field end drain and

shield wires shall be neatly cutoff and taped or have heat shrink tubing

applied to provide insulation from ground.

b. Apparatus Lugs: 10 AWG and Smaller:

i. Type: Pre-insulated, ring-tongue compression terminals, Thomas & Betts “Sta-

Kon”, or equal.

ii. Use equipment with stud terminals, screw terminals without pressure plates, and

lighting panel board circuit breakers.

c. 460-Volt Motor Lead Terminations:

i. 10 AWG and Smaller: Use non-insulated, ring-tongue terminals, tin-plated

copper, compression-type, Burndy "Hylug Type YAV", or equal.

ii. 8 AWG through #4 AWG: Use non-insulated, 1-hole terminals, tin-plated

copper, color-coded, compression type, Burndy "Hylug Type YA-L", or equal;

apply four crimps per terminal.

iii. #2 AWG and Larger: Use non-insulated terminal, 2-hole NEMA spacing, tin-

plated copper, color-coded, compression type, Burndy "Hylug Type YA-2N", or

equal; apply four crimps per terminal.

d. Power Feeder Cables (480-Volt): Use non-insulated terminal, 2-hole NEMA

spacing, tin-plated copper, color-coded, compression type, Burndy "Hylug Type YA-

2N", or equal; apply four crimps per terminal.

e. Connecting Hardware: Use manufacturer’s standard design or silicon bronze nuts,

bolts, washers, and lock-washers; sizes as required.

f. Insulate bus connections with heat shrinking tubing, tape, and sheets.

g. Make bus connections removable and reusable in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

H. Cable and Conductor Identifications

1. General:

a. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit.

b. Where this would result in the same number being assigned to more than one circuit,

add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique.

2. Cable Identifications: Identify Type CMP, TC, PLTC and all cables supplied by others at

each end of circuit using marking tag.

a. Type TC, PLTC, and CMP cables. Cable diameter - 0-.55”. Type Of Tag: Self-

laminating cable marker, Brady No. WML511-292.

COMMON WORK RESULTS


b. Cable diameter - .30-.95”. Type Of Tag: Self-laminating cable marker, Brady No.

WML711-292.

c. Mark tag with cable number as indicated on Connection Diagrams utilizing one of

the following Brady portable printers. Hand marking of labels is not acceptable.

i. Bradymarker XC-PS or XC plus.

ii. Bradymarker I.D. PRO

d. Cable diameter - .95” and larger

i. Type of tag: Self-laminating cable marker, Brady No. WML2431-292-75.

ii. Marking shall be typewritten using permanent, water-proof ink or thermal

transfer.

e. Install so that cable number is visible without removing cable bundles or twisting

cable.

3. Conductor Identification:

a. Provide identifying sleeve on both ends of conductors of control circuits terminating

in control panels, and in terminal boxes.

b. Description: Sleeve shall be heat-shrink, polyolefin, white with black letters, thermal

printed type.

I. Insulation of Connections Including Stress Relief Applications

1. Motor Leads With Nominal 480 Volts - Insulation Of Connections: Wrap Scotch #70

HDT Self-Vulcanizing Rubber Electrical Tape – two half-lapped layers. Next apply a

minimum of two half-lapped layers of Scotch #33+ electrical tape. Taping shall protect

connection from puncture, weather and dirt. For larger installations, Scotch 130C may be

used to provide additional protection from any sharp edges. For installations subject to

high vibrations, install rubber pads around conductors to prevent erosion of the

insulation.

2. Equipment Terminations

a. For 600V applications no additional insulation is required.

b. CONTRACTOR will furnish and install stress-relief terminations and lugs on

medium-voltage shielded cables and connect cables to equipment. Stress Relief

Termination Kits will be RAYCHEM type HVT. Inside the equipment termination

compartment the copper tape will be protected by Raychem Uncoated Spooled

Tubing MWTM series without sealant. The shield braids will be butt spliced to 1/C

#8 to extend for grounding on the switch end only. The transformer end shall have

the shield terminations installed but shall be taped up and insulated from ground to

eliminate any circulating ground currents from damaging cable shield.

J. Phasing Conventions

1. If two sources of power can be connected together, they shall be wired to be “in phase”.

2. The connections to the marked equipment terminals shall follow the color convention.

3. CONTRACTOR supplied rotation devices shall be taped to follow this color convention.

4. Motor rotation shall be corrected if necessary by switching leads at the Power Panel

starter terminals.

5. All newly installed equipment shall be phased A-B-C left to right from the front of the

equipment, top to bottom and front to back with the equipment nameplate or operating

COMMON WORK RESULTS


mechanism being the front. Any changes in this shall be approved in writing from the

ENGINEER.

K. Interface with Other Products

1. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Division 26.

2. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation as required.

3.03 DEMOLITION

A. Coordinate and schedule all demolition work and outages of existing services prior to starting

work.

B. Existing services and facilities damaged or otherwise interrupted by the CONTRACTOR

through negligence or through use of faulty materials or workmanship shall be promptly

repaired, replaced, or otherwise restored by the CONTRACTOR without additional cost to

the CITY.

C. Interruptions of services necessary for connection to or modification of existing systems or

facilities shall occur only at pre-arranged times approved by the CITY. Interruptions shall

only occur after the provision of all necessary temporary work and the availability of

adequate labor and materials has been assured that the duration of the interruption will not

exceed the time agreed upon.

D. Existing materials shall remain the property of the CITY and shall be stored at a location and

in a manner as directed, or if classified by the CITY as unsuitable for further use, shall

become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site.

E. All exposed conduits in structures or buildings to be removed, shall be cut and plugged flush

with structure or floor.

F. All wiring to be removed shall be disconnected at distribution panels or MCCs. All wiring

which serves equipment to be removed shall be removed.

G. Schedule: Demolish electrical equipment from structures as indicated or as required to

facilitate the installation of new equipment and work.

H. All wiring, conduit or equipment designated on the Demolition Plan shall be disposed of in a

safe manner in accordance with all applicable local, state and federal environmental agencies.

3.04 START-UP

A. All system start-ups are to be coordinated through the CITY.

B. Field testing and checking of installation to be performed by the manufacturer’s field

representative or by an independent testing firm provided by CONTRACTOR. This does not

relieve the CONTRACTOR of installing the equipment per the manufacturer’s instructions

and performing testing described in Section 26 08 00.

C. Provide adequate manpower during start-up to troubleshoot system. During such periods of

time said individual shall have no other responsibilities other than assisting the CITY.

D. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 04 – Equipment

Startup and Section 01 75 05 – Functional Testing.


COMMON WORK RESULTS



LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Low-Voltage Cables

2. VFD Cables

3. Cable Connectors, Termination and Splice Kits, Lugs and Markers

B. Scope

1. Conductor sizes are based on copper.

2. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project conditions.

3. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated,

CONTRACTOR shall determine exact routing and lengths required.

1.02 REFERENCES



B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electric Code


1. UL 44 – Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

2. UL 83 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA WC7 – Cross-Linked

Thermosetting Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electric

Energy

E. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM B3 – Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.

2. ASTM B8 – Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,

Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

3. ASTM B33 – Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

F. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): Standard of Installation

1.03 SUBMITTALS



A. Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and

Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer data sheets and catalog pages for all materials and

components.

C. Shop Drawings: Cable and conduit routing plans and cable schedule shall be provided by

CONTRACTOR for review by ENGINEER prior to installation per Section 26 05 33, 1.03 C.

D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Cable testing form for CITY approval. Cable testing form

shall detail tests to be performed with space to include detailed results for each test.

E. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Submit instructions for storage, preparation, and installation of

exothermic connectors and electrodes.

1.04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout Procedures

B. Manufacturer Data: Submit original manufacturer manuals and data sheets for products

purchased.

C. Record Documentation: Provide accurate as-built record drawings in paper and electronic

format.

D. Certificate of Compliance: Provide approval of construction and installation by government

authority having jurisdiction.


All Work shall be performed and materials provided in accordance with NFPA 70 - National

Electric Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), and other codes and standards

as applicable. Where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), equipment and

materials shall be listed or labeled by Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) or by a nationally

recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the AHJ. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all

costs associated with obtaining the required listing.


A. Wire and cables shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

One copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

B. Accept materials on site in manufacturer’s packaging and inspect for damage.

C. Protect from weather. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation.

D. Wire and cables shall be delivered in full reels and shall be protected against injury. UL

approved tags showing the manufacturer’s name and type of insulation, size, and length of

wire in each coil or reel shall be attached.

1.07 SITE CONDITIONS

A. General: CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that

equipment will fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances



specified in National Electrical Code.

B. Construction Materials

1. Refer to Contract plans for NEMA rating requirements for equipment in each area.

2. Construction shall conform to the requirements of Section 26 05 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 600-VOLT POWER CONDUCTORS IN CONDUIT

A. Use

1. Non VFD motors.

2. Miscellaneous feeders.

3. #14 AWG – 750kcmil AWG.

B. UL Listed, Type TC

1. General:

a. Copper conductor.

b. XLP Insulation.

c. Hypalon, CPE or Poylolefin Jacket.

2. Specific:

a. Conductor: Class B stranded annealed tinned copper.

b. Number of Conductors: 3

c. Insulation: XLP or EPR per UL 44 for type XHHW-2, VW-1 conductors.

d. Overall Jacket: Hypalon (CSPE), CPE or Polyolefin Jacket.

e. Standards: IEEE 1202 and UL 1277

f. Temperature: 90ºC.

g. Voltage: 600-volt.

h. Ground Conductor(s): Class B stranded annealed bare copper ground conductors(s)

on sizes larger than 10 AWG.

i. MCC Feeders: Three symmetrically placed stranded bare copper grounding

conductors.

j. Meets EPA 10 CFR, Part 261 for leachable lead content per TCLP method.

k. Conductor Identification:

i. 14 - 10 AWG: Colored per Method 1 Table K2 of ICEA S-66-524.

ii. 8 AWG and larger: Numbered per Method 4 or ICEA S-66-524.

C. Manufacturers

1. Okonite

2. Southwire



3. General Cable

4. Or Approved equal.

2.02 600-VOLT POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN CONDUIT

A. Uses

1. Lighting/receptacles.

2. Grounding.

3. Control conductors – discrete wiring.

B. Description

1. General:


b. XLP Insulation.

2. Specific:

a. Conductor: Class B stranded annealed tinned copper.


c. Insulation: XLP per UL 44 for type XHHW-2.

d. Temperature: 90ºC.

e. Voltage: 600-volt.

f. Size: 14 AWG through 4/0 AWG.

g. Conductor Identification: See Specification Article - Color Coding of Circuit

Conductors.

C. Manufacturers

1. General Cable

2. Okonite

3. Southwire


2.03 600-VOLT POWER CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN CONTROL PANELS

A. Uses: Control/Power wiring in control panels.

B. Description

1. General:


b. XLP Insulation.

2. Specific:

a. Conductor: Class K stranded annealed tinned copper.




c. Insulation: XLP per UL 44.

d. Temperature: 90ºC.

e. Voltage: 600-volt.

f. Size: #14 through #10AWG.

g. Conductor Identification: See Specification Article - Color Coding of Circuit

Conductors Conductor Identification.

C. Manufacturers

1. General Cable

2. Okonite

3. Southwire


2.04 CABLES FOR VFD APPLICATIONS INSTALLED IN CONDUIT

A. Uses: VFD motor feeders #14 AWG through #4/0 AWG.

B. Description:

1. General:

a. XLP insulation.

b. Two shields.

c. PVC jacket overall.

2. Specific:

a. Conductor: Class B stranded tinned copper.


c. Insulation: XLP per UL 44 for type XHHW-2, VW-1 conductors.

d. Outer Shield: Aluminum Foil-Polyester Tape, TC – 100% coverage.

e. Drain Wire: Tinned copper.

f. Overall Jacket: Black, sunlight resistant PVC.

g. Standards: IEEE 1202, UL 1277.

h. Temperature: 90ºC.

i. Ground Conductor: Three Class B stranded bare copper grounding conductors.

j. Voltage: 600V (CSA & UL Type TC), 1000V (UL-flexible motor supply cable).

k. Meets EPA 10 CFR, Part 261 for leachable lead content per TCLP method.

l. Conductor Identification: Numbered per Method 4 of ICEA S-66-524

C. Manufacturer:

1. Belden 29000-Series.

2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS



A. Wire Sizes 10 AWG and Smaller:

1. Splices and Taps: 3M Scotchlok Type Y & R insulated spring connectors, or equivalent

NEC-approved component.

2. Terminals: Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon Series RA, RB and RC insulated terminals, or

equivalent NEC-approved component. Use locking fork type for connection to terminal

blocks and ring type for motor terminations.

B. Wire Sizes 8 AWG through 500 MCM:

1. Splices: Thomas & Betts or Burndy Hylug barrel-type 2-way compression connector, or

equivalent NEC-approved component.

2. Taps: Thomas & Betts or Burndy Hylug color-keyed C-type compression connector, or

equivalent NEC-approved component.

3. Pigtails: Thomas & Betts or Burndy Hylug color-keyed cable joint-type compression

connector, or equivalent NEC-approved component.

4. Lugs: Thomas & Betts or Burndy Hylug color-keyed long barrel-type lug compression

connector, or equivalent NEC-approved component. Use one hole-type for motor

terminations and wire sizes 8 AWG to 4 AWG. Use two hole-type for wire sizes 2 AWG

and larger.

2.06 CONNECTION INSULATION AND WRAP

A. Motor Lead Connection Insulation: Scotch 70 HDT self-vulcanizing rubber electrical tape, or

Approved equal. Heavy-duty, self-fusing, silicone electrical tape, 20-mil thickness.

B. Protection Wraps: Scotch Super 33+ vinyl electrical insulating tape with adhesive and elastic

backing, or Approved equal. Professional-grade, 7-mil thickness.

2.07 COLOR CODING OF CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Color coding shall be consistent throughout the site.

B. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120, 208/120-volt system.

1. Phase A - Black.

2. Phase B - Red.

3. Phase C - Blue.

4. Single Phase System - Black for one hot leg, red for the other.

5. Neutral - White. Where there are two or more neutrals in one conduit, each shall be

individually identified with the associated circuit.

6. High Phase or Wild Leg - Orange.

7. Equipment Ground - Green.

C. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277-volt systems.



1. Phase A - Brown.

2. Phase B - Orange.

3. Phase C - Yellow.

4. Neutral - Gray. Where there are two or more neutrals in one conduit, each shall be

individually identified with the associated circuit.

5. Equipment Ground - Green.

D. Switch legs shall be violet. Three-way switch runners shall be Pink.

E. All 120-VAC control wiring shall be Red for power and White for neutral.

F. Color wire by either using:

1. Wire manufactured of the desired color.

2. Continuously spiral wrap all exposed surfaces of wire and color tape, wrap to overlap ½-

width of tape.

3. Wire shall be color coded at all terminals, splices, and boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

Refer to Section 26 05 00 for examination requirements of cable and wiring systems.

3.02 PREPARATION

Refer to Section 26 05 00 for preparation requirements of cable and wiring systems.

3.03 INSTALLATION

Refer to Section 26 05 00 for installation requirements of cable and wiring systems.


Refer to Section 26 05 00 for field quality control and testing requirements of cable and wiring

systems.


GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Rod Electrodes.

2. Grounding Conductors.

3. Mechanical Conductors.

4. Exothermic Connections.

5. Equipment Grounding Conductors.

6. Bonding Methods and Materials.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

1. IEEE 142 – Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

2. ANSI/IEEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code


C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 467 – UL Standard for Safety for Grounding and

Bonding Equipment

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA 250 – Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment

E. National Contractors Association (NECA): NECA Standard of Installation

1.03 SUBMITTALS




components.

C. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Submit instructions for storage, preparation, and installation of


D. Shop Drawings: Provide installation, dimension, and detail drawings for proposed grounding

system prior to installation of any ground components.

E. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each


electrode. Include testing procedures and values obtained.



B. Manufacturer Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit original manufacturer manuals and

data sheets for products purchased.


format, per Section 01 78 39.




All work shall be performed and materials provided in accordance with NFPA 70 - National







A. Accept materials on site in manufacturer’s packaging and inspect for damage.

B. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Protect from weather. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation






1. Refer to contract plans for NEMA rating requirements for equipment in each area.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ROD ELECTRODE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Thomas & Betts / Blackburn.

2. Erico.


3. Galvan Industries, Inc.


B. Material: Copper-clad steel.

C. Diameter: 3/4-inch.

D. Length: 10-feet.

E. Connector: Connector required for test well connection only, otherwise exothermic welded

connection is required.

2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Material: Bare: Annealed, concentric stranded bare copper.

B. Number of Conductors: 1

C. Foundation Electrodes: 4/0 AWG.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

E. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor

F. Size: Minimum #4 AWG.

2.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers

1. Burndy.

2. O-Z/Gedney.

3. Thomas & Betts.

4. Anderson.


B. Product Description: Compression Type Grounding Connectors and Lugs.

1. Compression, high conductivity pure wrought copper, non-ferrous, non-corrosive; heavy-

duty design.

2. Provide lugs for equipment to be grounded. Size in accordance with NEC.

3. All connectors must be of a heavy duty design and must be equivalent in current carrying

capacity to the maximum size copper conductors being joined while maintaining high

mechanical strength and electrical integrity.

4. Terminals and splices may accommodate only one conductor size. All other connectors

must be range taking.

5. All connectors must be designed to provide high integrity connections.


6. Connectors must be pre-filled with a corrosion inhibiting compound which is compatible

with the conductors being joined.

7. Long barrel – NEMA two hole spacing.

8. Connectors must be clearly and permanently marked with the information listed below:

a. Manufacturer symbol and/or logo.

b. Catalog number.

c. Conductors accommodated.

d. Installation die index number or die catalog number, as required.

e. Underwriters laboratories "Listing Mark".

C. Connections: Direct Burial or Embedded in Concrete

1. Cable To Cable: Compression.

2. Cable To Rebar Or Ground Rod Or Buried Ground Bus: Compression connector for this

intended purpose.

3. Cable tail to building column: Compression Lug.

4. All connectors must be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for direct burial in earth or

embedment in concrete. All connectors to be high conductivity copper. Non-ferrous,

non-corrosive.

2.04 GROUNDING TEST WELL COMPONENTS

A. Well Pipe: 8-inch diameter by 24-inch long concrete pipe with belled end.

B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.

2.05 GROUNDING TYPE INSULATED BUSHINGS

A. Where bonding and grounding of single or multiple conduits, or positive bonding or

grounding of metal conduit to the box, enclosure, or auxiliary gutter is required, the end of

the conduit shall be equipped with an insulated metallic grounding and bonding bushing.

B. Location: Where indicated on the plans, or where required by Code.

C. Manufacturers

1. Thomas & Betts, Series 3870.

2. O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG or HBLG.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.02 INSTALLATION


A. General

1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. All grounding conductors that are to be extended beyond the concrete surface shall have a

free pigtail of sufficient length to reach the point where they are to be connected without

splicing. Minimum extension shall be 5-feet or as shown on Drawings. Grounding

conductors that project from a concrete surface where they may be subject to mechanical

damage shall be terminated in a flush grounding plate. Grounding conductors that project

from a concrete surface shall be protected by using a 1” Schedule 40 PVC conduit

embedded in the concrete from 24” below grade (grid level) to above grade. Exposed

grounding conductors shall be supported on surfaces of the building and on equipment

with non-corrosive hardware, at not less than 4-foot intervals.

3. Provide bonding to meet regulatory requirements.

4. Install transient suppression plate where indicated.

5. Install 4/0 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.

6. Embedded ground cables and fittings shall be securely attached to concrete reinforcing

steel with tie wires to prevent displacement during concrete placement. Precautions shall

be taken to ensure that no damage is done to grounding conductors or connections during

backfilling, compacting, or concreting operations. The work shall be arranged in such a

manner that each part of the grounding system that is laid below finished grade shall be

completed and inspected before backfilling is done.

7. All available NEC-recognized grounding electrodes shall be bonded together to form a

grounding electrode system. Any separate made electrode present for other services

(telephone, cable TV, etc.), shall be bonded together with the grounding electrode system

for the electrical service.

B. Equipment Grounding

1. All non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment, such as motor frames, conduits,

cabinets, etc. shall be solidly grounded to the building ground system in accordance with

N.E.C. 250.

2. All exposed grounding connections between ground conductors and from ground conduc-

tors to equipment shall be made by compression connectors of an approved type. No

solder shall be used in any part of the ground circuit.

3. Ground tap connections to equipment shall be made at the points provided on the equip-

ment for grounding, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

Connections from ground conductors to the ground buses of switch gear, switchboards,

motor control centers, and other cabinet-mounted equipment shall be made by means of

compression lug specified elsewhere.

4. Grounding connections shall be made in accordance with the Drawings and as specified

hereinbefore. Paint, scale, rust, corrosion or other foreign matter shall be removed from

the point of contact on metal surfaces before ground connections are made.

5. The electrical continuity of cable trays, wire-ways, pipes and enclosures shall be main-

tained by bonding. Bonding of electrical raceway and enclosures shall ensure electrical


continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current that could be imposed.

Bonding shall comply fully with Article 250 of the NEC.

6. All electrical power apparatus shall be provided with a permanent and continuous ground

fault-current return path.

7. All sections of flexible conduit shall be jumpered with a bonding conductor in

accordance with N.E.C. Section 250-79, Table 250-94 with a minimum #8 AWG

stranded conductor.


A. Additional Requirements

1. General:

a. Remove paint, rust, or other non-conduction material from contact surfaces before

making ground connections. Coat any exposed ground connections in Process Areas

with an enamel spray coating such as Glyptal to prevent corrosion.

b. Leave traps, junctions, and splices uncovered until reviewed by the CITY.

2. Raceway grounding: Ground conduit systems; use double locknuts at panels; use

bonding jumpers if conduits are installed in concentric knockouts, or if terminating in a

non-metallic box.

3. Equipment grounding:

a. Provide ground cable and/or equipment taps to motor control centers, control panels,

panel boards, power transformers, equipment cabinets, 2,300 and 4,000 volt motor

frames, and unit substations.

b. Any grounding conductor to which two or more equipment taps are connected shall

be No. 4/0 copper cable, or larger.

c. Where power cable contains an integral bare copper ground conductor, terminate

ground conductor to the associated equipment ground connection at both ends of the

cable.

d. Where power cable to equipment contains no bare copper ground conductor, furnish

and install a single-conductor ground wire to parallel the liquid tight flexible steel

conduit. Ground wire shall be snugly wrapped around flexible conduit and

terminated at grounding connectors (each end).

e. External grounding conductor shall be XHHW-2.

f. Conductor: Soft-annealed tinned copper, No. 10 AWG minimum.

g. Variable Speed Motors fed by type MC cables shall have a ground wire run between

the motor frame and the cable tray.

4. Structural Steel Grounding:

a. Connections: Copper Compression Lug two-hole, long barrel design.

b. Connections must be visible for inspection after installation complete.

c. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.

5. Buried Ground Loop: Provide excavation required for installation and backfill and

compact after installation is complete.


6. Depth:

a. Allow sufficient slack to prevent breakage during backfill or due to ground move-

ment.

b. Cover ground bus installed in slag or other corrosive fill with a minimum of 1-foot

radius of loam.

c. Leave traps, junctions and splices uncovered until reviewed by the CITY.

d. Backfill around bus completely, thoroughly tamping to provide good contact between

backfill materials and ground bus.

7. Ground Rods:

a. Locate ground rods at approximate locations shown, or as required to achieve

specific resistance.

b. Install in firm soil outside of excavated areas.

c. Drive top of rod to minimum depth of 2’-0” below grade or per N.E.C. requirements.

d. Use driving studs or other suitable means to prevent damage to threaded ends of

sectional rods.

e. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.

B. Ground Tests

1. Test ground by Fall-of-Potential Test, using “Ground Megger” device, furnished by

CONTRACTOR.

a. Test Instrument

i. Sufficient resolution for ground system with resistive values below 1 ohm.

ii. Noise reduction capabilities.

b. Testing Method: Size, complexity and site may affect available test lead length.

c. Alternate test method to Fall-of-Potential.

i. Identify test method used: Slope or Four Potential

ii. Justify use of alternate method in report.

iii. If ground resistance is greater than 5-ohms, re-check all grounding connections

and install additional ground rods as required to achieve the specific resistance.

iv. Submit Test Report, under provisions of Division 26 08 00.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Conduit Supports.

2. Formed Steel Channels.

3. Sleeves.

4. Mechanical Seals for Sleeves.

5. Enclosure Stands.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. IEEE 142 – Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems



C. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM A123 / A123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products.

2. ASTM A653 / A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM A924 / A924M – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel

Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.




1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer data sheets and catalog pages for all hanger and support

materials and components.

C. Design Data: Provide load carrying capacity of hangers and supports.



D. Shop Drawings: Provide layout and detail drawings for proposed hanger systems.



B. Record Documentation: Provide accurate as-built record drawings in paper and electronic

format, per Section 01 78 39.

C. Certificate of Compliance: Provide approval of construction and installation by government







A. General: Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment

will fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances specified in

National Electrical Code.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Framing channel shall be provided for groups of conduits.

B. Ceiling hangers shall be ½” adjustable threaded rod hangers, meeting ASTM A193.

C. Supports shall be Stainless Steel with stainless steel hardware.

D. Structural Support steel if required shall be aluminum.

2.02 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Manufacturer

1. Atkore - Unistrut.

2. Thomas & Betts.

2. Cooper B-line Systems.




B. Product Description: 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch 316 stainless steel, 12 gauge thick. With slots

1-1/2 inch on center or as indicated.

2.03 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Hilti Corporation.

2. Rawl Systems.

B. Description: Stainless Steel inserts with two-part epoxy adhesive.

2.04 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Conduit Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick stainless steel.

B. Sleeves for Conduit Through Non-fire Rated, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:

Steel pipe or 18 gage thick stainless steel.

2.05 CABLE MANAGEMENT - HOLDERS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Hubbell – Kellems Wire Management Products


B. Description: Stainless Steel heavy-duty single-weave braided cable support grip with

reinforced single eye, closed mesh.

2.06 ENCLOSURE STANDS

A. Enclosures, panels, and local control stations which are independently mounted (free

standing) shall be supported using 3” aluminum stands.

B. Construction: 3” aluminum channel welded to 6” square base. Aluminum shall be Type

6061-T6. Channel dimensions shall be 3” x 1.41”. Base dimensions shall be 6” x 6” x 3/8”

thick. Weld 2” gussets at base, on either side of channel.

C. Stand height shall be based on mounting requirements and shall provide full support to top of

enclosure. More than one stand is required if panel width is 16” or greater.

D. Mount stand base using 1/2" stainless steel anchors and fill in below with non-shrink grout.

Apply bituminuous coating to base where in contact with concrete.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Verify that existing structures used for connections are structurally sound and will support

designated loads.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Hangers and Supports

1. Anchor and fasten electrical products to building elements and finishes as follows:

a. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, epoxy or adhesive anchors,

and preset inserts.

b. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide epoxy or adhesive anchors and preset inserts.

2. Inserts:

a. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

b. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4

inches.

3. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. All

anchors to be stainless steel, epoxy type. No lead or plastic anchors are acceptable.

4. In wet and damp locations, install stainless steel channel supports to stand cabinets and

panelboards 1 inch off wall.

5. Support frames and anchors for mounting equipment to be furnished by the

CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER.

6. Raceway Surface Mounted: Support by one-hole, stainless clamps with clamp backs

which provide clearance between the raceways and the mounting surface.

7. Support coated conduit with stainless steel fasteners and supports.

8. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. Supports or

raceways shall not be mounted to or supported by handrails.

9. Do not drill structural steel members. Do not install supports that will weaken the

structure.

10. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.

11. Refer to NEC for maximum support spacing based on number and size of conduits.

12. Supports: Fabricate supports from formed aluminum channel or stainless steel members

as indicated. Rigidly weld members for shop connections. HDGAF required. Use HDG

hexagon head bolts for field connections to present neat appearance with adequate

strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under nuts.

B. Sleeves

1. Install rigid stainless steel sleeves where exposed raceways pass through ceilings, floors,

and walls (except exterior walls below grade).

2. Refer to Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for wall seals.

3. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.

4. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

5. Size sleeves to accommodate their through penetrating items and allow a minimum of a 1



inch void between the sleeve and the item of penetration.

6. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.

Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

7. Extend sleeves 3 inches above finished floors or ceilings, and 1 inch each side of finished

walls. Caulk sleeves.

8. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.


A. Section 01 45 16 – Quality Requirements: Field inspecting and testing.

B. Section 01 14 00 – Execution – requirements for protecting finished work.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by material installation.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Raceways – Conduit

2. Seals

3. Boxes

1.02 REFERENCES



B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies.

2. ANSI C80.1 – Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.

3. ANSI 80.5 – Rigid Aluminum Conduit

D. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM A48, Rev. A – Gray Iron Castings

2. ASTM A193/A193M, Rev. C – Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel

3. ASTM F512 – Smooth Wall Polyvinylchloride Conduit and Fittings

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)


2. NEMA ICS 6 – Industrial Control and System Enclosures

F. National Contractors Association (NECA): NECA Standard of Installation

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 1 – Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit

2. UL 6 – Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

3. UL 360 – Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer data sheets and catalog pages for all raceway, conduit,

and box materials and components.

C. Raceway System Shop Drawings: Provide layout and detail drawings for proposed raceway

systems for conduit and cable tray systems for review by ENGINEER prior to installation.

CONTRACTOR shall provide detailed wire and conduit schedules and conduit and cable tray

routing plan drawings in 11x17 format for ENGINEER review. Drawings shall be prepared

by CONTRACTOR using AutoCAD 2007 or greater. Conduit system drawings shall include

all conduit and wire systems, with the exception of those associated with lighting and

receptacles, which shall be field routed as required. Conduit and cable tray routing shall

avoid interferences, allow reasonable access to equipment for maintenance and operations

tasks, and shall comply with the requirements of this Specification. The conduit and cable

tray routing plans and wire and conduit schedules shall be submitted to ENGINEER for

review at least three weeks prior to installation. Submit detailed drawings showing the

following information:

1. Location of all conduits, cable trays, elevations above finished floor, type of conduit,

fittings, boxes and all other parts of the conduit system

2. Coordination of:

a. Conduit stub-ups and entrances for the actual equipment provided

b. Conduit, inserts and other items to be embedded in the concrete, or built into walls,

partitions, ceilings, or structural panels.

3. Terminal boxes and fabricated pull and junction box details:

a. Tabulation of locations and dimensions

b. Bill of Materials

c. Details of terminal boxes including subpanel layout, terminal block layout and

identification, and grounding provisions.

D. ENGINEER review of conduit and cable tray systems drawings is for general compliance

with the expectations of the contract documents and does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of

the responsibility to install complete wiring systems while avoiding interferences as required.

It is recognized that the raceway requirements indicated on the Contract Drawings are

diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the

electrical work, and its interference with other work including utilities, and mechanical and

structural work and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the

CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall provide offsets, transitions, boxes, fittings and

accessories which may be required but have not been shown because of the small scale of the

Drawings. All conduit and cable tray systems must be sized and installed per NEC

requirements.




format.



C. Certificate of Compliance: Provide approval of construction and installation by government






D. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing covered and above grade.

E. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAYS

A. General

1. Raceways shall be field routed as required. General locations for electrical and

instrumentation equipment are indicated on the electrical and instrumentation plans.

CONTRACTOR shall determine final location of all equipment, prior to routing of

conduit. The Electrical and Instrument Single-Line Diagrams include the major process

instrumentation and electrical wiring and conduit sizing.

2. Separate conduit systems (both above ground and underground) shall be provided for

power wiring above 600V, power and control wiring 600V and below, and for

instrumentation/communication wiring including 24VDC (4-20mADC signals,

intrinsically safe circuits, LAN, data highway circuits and communication circuits).

B. Conduit Raceway Sizes: Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch for exposed and 1 inch for

embedded raceway. The size and type of conduit shall be as specified herein and as indicated

on the Drawings. Any conduit or raceway system for a trade size is not indicated on the

Drawings shall be sized by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the NEC, and shall be

subject to the minimum sizes specified herein.

2.02 RACEWAY - CONDUIT

A. Conduit Requirements



1. All conduits shall be furnished in standard manufactured lengths.

2. Minimum Size: 3/4-inch unless otherwise specified.

3. Except as specifically noted on Drawings, conduit installation shall conform to this

section.

B. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT

1. Uses and Limitations:

a. Standard conduit type for this Installation, except for instrumentation and VFD motor

feeders (which shall be installed in PVC coated galvanized rigid steel or as indicated

on the Drawings).

b. Exposed indoor and outdoor location, except power wiring to and from VFDs,

24VDC control(4-20mADC Signals) and any conduit embedded in or in contact with

concrete.

c. As permitted by NEC, Article 344.

d. As indicated on the Drawings or in Scope of Work.

e. Do not use underground or embedded in concrete.

f. All support material to be stainless steel including but not limited to strut, clamps,

supports hardware and inserts.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation.

b. ALCOA

c. Or Approved equal.

3. Description:

a. Material: Copper-free Aluminum alloy No. 6063-T1.

b. Standards:

i. UL 64, “Standard For Electrical Rigid Metal Conduits - Aluminum…”

ii. ANSI C-80.5.

4. Couplings, Unions and Nipples: Threaded-type, aluminum alloy containing not more

than 0.40% copper.

5. Conduit Bodies:

a. Threaded-type, fabricated from copper-free aluminum alloy.

b. Equipment covers with solid gaskets and captive screw fasteners.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers:

i. Appleton, “Unilets-Form 85”.

ii. Killark, “O Series Electrolets”.

iii. Or approved equal.

C. PVC-COATED GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (PGRS)

1. Uses and Limitations.

a. Instrumentation signal 24 VDC control and (4-20mA) conductors, all communication

cables, and VFD motor feeders or as indicated on the Drawings or in Scope of Work.



b. Any metal conduit embedded in or in direct contact with concrete.

c. Support materials, including clamps, hardware, strut, etc. shall be stainless steel.


a. Thomas & Betts – OCAL.

b. Robroy Industries – Perma-Cote.


3. Description: NEMA RN 1; Galvanized rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40

mil thickness.

4. Manufacture: The hot dipped rigid steel galvanized conduit shall be coated with a primer

to provide a bond between the steel substrate and the coating. The PVC coating shall be

bonded to the primed outer surface of the conduit. The bond on the conduit and fittings

shall be stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC coating. A two part urethane

coating at a nominal 2 mil thickness shall be applied to the interior of all conduit and

fittings. The coating shall be sufficiently flexible to permit field bending of the conduit

without cracking or flaking of the interior coating. Conduit shall conform to UL 6 and

ANSI C80.1.

5. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; galvanized steel fittings with external

PVC coating and urethane interior coating to match conduit coatings. Conduit couplings,

fittings and connectors with a female conduit opening shall be provided with a PVC

sleeve extending a minimum of one conduit diameter or two inches, whichever is less,

beyond the threads to provide a seal of the PVC coating. The inside diameter of the

sleeve shall be the same diameter as the outside diameter of the conduit before coating.

The wall thickness of the sleeve shall be 40 mils.

D. FLEXIBLE LIQUID-TIGHT STEEL CONDUIT


a. Short lengths between motor terminal boxes or vibration producing devices and rigid

conduit.

b. Short lengths of conduit to motor-operated valves where valve movement occurs due

to thermal expansion of pipe.

c. Use in other location shown on Drawings.

d. Maximum Length: 36”

e. General use: Connecting conduit to motors or other equipment which may

experience movement.

f. Motors: Must allow for mechanical travel of slide bases.

g. Other limitations as defined by NEC, Article 350.

h. Minimum size: ½”


a. Anaconda “Sealtite”, Type U.A.

b. Electri-Flex Company “Liquitite, L.A”


3. Description:



a. Material: Mild steel, galvanized.

b. Construction: One continuous length of hot-dipped galvanized steel strip of uniform

weight and thickness and shaped in interlocking convolutions; fabrication shall result

in smooth interior surface.

c. Provide outer jacket of tough extruded polyvinyl. Jacket shall be positively locked to

steel core.

d. Continuous Integral Grounding Strip: Required in sizes 1¼-inch and smaller, not

required in larger sizes.

e. Color: Gray.

4. Liquid-Tight Fittings:

a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

i. O-Z/Gedney Company.

ii. Thomas & Betts, “Liquidtight”.

iii. Or Approved equal.

b. Material: Stainless steel or aluminum.

c. Compression-type with tapered hub and synthetic rubber gasket.

d. Ground ferrule for making positive ground contact with steel core.

e. Designed to prevent outer jacket from pulling away from steel core.

f. Liquid-tight, rain-tight and oil-tight suitable for wet locations and outdoor use.

5. Grounding Type Liquid-Tight Fittings:


i. O-Z/Gedney Company, “Ground-Tite”.

ii. Thomas & Betts, “Liquidtight”.


b. Use grounding liquid-tight fittings with external ground wire in Classified areas or

where required by Code.

c. Gland nut with cast-in lug of stainless steel or aluminum with set screw.

d. Vinyl conduit sealing ring.

e. One-piece ferrule threaded to engage conduit spiral.

f. Body of fitting with vinyl knockout sealing ring and lock-nut.

6. Standards: UL 360 and UL 514.

E. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT


a. Conduit embedded in concrete for duct bank installations, except for elbows and

bends.

b. As indicated on drawings or in Scope of Work.

c. Embedded conduit used for equipment bonding grounding conductors.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Carlon Electrical Products.

b. CANTEX Inc.



c. Innerduct.

d. Or Approved equal.

3. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC

4. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

F. BUSHINGS

1. Bushings for conduits 1-inch and smaller shall be self-extinguishing thermoplastic type,

150°C temperature rating.


i. Appleton, Series BBIXXH.

ii. Thomas & Betts, Series 510.

iii. O-Z/Gedney.

iv. Or Approved equal.

2. Bushings for conduits 1¼-inch and larger shall be malleable iron body with 150°C

insulating ring. Insulating material shall be locked in place and non-removable.


i. Appleton, Series BUXXXI.

ii. Thomas & Betts, Series 1222.

iii. O-Z/Gedney.

iv. Or Approved equal.

2.03 HAZARDOUS LOCATION CONDUIT SEALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Appleton - ESUF or ESUM.

2. Hubbell-Killark - EY or EYS.

3. Cooper Crouse-Hinds - EYS or EZS.


B. Product Description: Sealing fitting used where conduit passes through classified boundary.

Fittings are fillable with sealing compound, as recommended by the manufacturer. Conduit

seals shall be UL listed and comply with IP67.

C. Sealing Compound: Non-shrinking, pourable cement compound.

2.04 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers

1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.

2. NMP Corporation.




B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber

links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with

bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,

providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

C. Size: As instructed by manufacturer based on pipe size and opening size.

D. Sealing Element: EPDM rubber.

E. Pressure Plate: Glass-reinforced nylon plastic.

F. Bolts and Nuts: Type 316 stainless steel.

2.05 CAST IN PLACE WALL SEAL

A. Manufacturers:

1. O-Z/Gedney - Type WSK Thruwall and Floor Seals.


B. Wall Sleeve: High strength PVC pipe, epoxy-coated steel pipe, or high strength polyethylene

pipe.

C. Bodies and Pressure Clamps: Hot dip galvanized malleable iron. Provide two bodies and

pressure clamps for each wall sleeve.

D. Sealing Grommet: Neoprene. Provide one for each body and pressure clamp assembly.

E. Pressure Rings: PVC coated steel. Provide two for each sealing grommet.

2.06 WATER-TIGHT CABLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell-Kellems IP66 Cord Connector


B. Description: Machined or cast aluminum straight cord connector, water-tight to NEMA 4X /

IP66 standard - including metal clad sealing O-ring. Fitting shall include tapered

compression bushing, strain-relief, lubricated neoprene seal bushing, and threaded connector

body.

2.07 SEALING COMPOUNDS

A. Wire Bundle Moisture Sealant:

1. 3M EMB


B. Conduit Fill Moisture Sealant:

1. 3M Scotchfil Electrical Insulation Putty



2. Rainbow Technology Duct Seal Putty


2.08 FIRESTOPPING

A. Manufacturers:

1. 3M Fire Barrier.

2. Hilti Firestop Systems.


B. Description: Firestopping material to fill spaces or voids in Electrical Room walls, including

conduit penetrations and voids as a result of construction.

C. Rating for walls and horizontal assemblies of 2-hours as determined per ASTM E 814 or UL

1479. Product shall have flame-spread index of less than 25, as determined by ASTM E 84.

2.09 BOXES

A. Outlet Boxes

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hubbell Wiring Devices.

b. Thomas & Betts Corp.

c. The Wiremold Co.


2. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, aluminum, conform to FS W-J-800.

a. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment

supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.

b. Covers: Of the same material and to fit the box.

c. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

d. Multiple gangboxes: One piece construction.

3. Cast Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD and conforming to FS W-C-586.

a. Material: Cast metal aluminum.

b. Aluminum used for cast metal fittings to be copper free.

c. Depth: At least 2-1/2 inches deep.

d. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Cover of the same material designed to

fit the box.

e. Furnish threaded hubs.

f. Include cover screws.

4. Cast metal boxes to be close grain grey iron or copper free aluminum alloy, free from

blowholes, shrinkage cracks, cold-shuts, blisters, or other defects. Warped or defective

boxes will not be accepted.

5. Boxes and covers to have machined joints. Drilling and tapping to be accurate. Provide



clean cut, neoprene gaskets with boxes.

6. Cover Screws: Copper-silicon alloy for cast iron boxes, stainless steel for cast aluminum

boxes.

7. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: Provide standard cover.

8. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Provide gasketed cover.

B. Pull and Junction Boxes

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hoffman.

b. Hubbell.

c. Or Approved equal

2. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be cast metal or sheet steel as specified or indicated.

Covers shall be of the same material and shall fit the boxes.

3. Sheet Metal Boxes:

a. NEMA OS1, NEMA 4X rating minimum, aluminum or stainless steel with neoprene

gasket.

b. Sheet steel boxes 100 cu in or less in size shall be not less than 14 ga material; boxes

100 to 1,800 cu in shall be not less than 12-ga; and boxes larger than 1,800 cu in shall

be not less than 10-ga.

c. Unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER, boxes 3 x 3 x 1-1/2 ft and larger in any

dimension shall have a framework of structural steel members sized to provide a rigid

and substantial box. The structural steel members shall be welded, bolted, or riveted

together and to the sheet steel.

d. Covers shall be continuously hinged along one side and of the same gauge steel as

the boxes, or heavier if required to prevent bulging or warping.

e. Covers shall be attached with stainless steel clamps using copper silicon or stainless

steel screws. Covers heavier than 20 lbs. shall have two cast or pressed steel handles.

Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged,

surface-mounted junction box.

2.10 TERMINATION ENCLOSURES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman.

2. Hubbell.


B. Disconnect Box: NEMA 4X stainless steel. Boxes shall have a continuous hinge with

stainless steel screw-down clamps and gasket. Box shall mounted on vented stainless steel

stand with hinged cover for access to riser. Motor cables and control cables shall be

separated by barriers within the pedestal, and will enter the disconnect box through separate

fittings. All hardware shall be stainless steel.



C. Junction Box Stands: Junction boxes shall be supported by stainless steel wireway box

stands with hinged cover for access to riser. Sizes are indicated on Drawings. Wireway

stands shall be vented. Vents shall be a minimum of 5” x 5” in size with 5 or more louvers.

Louvers shall include manufacturer supplied filter and mounting. One louver may be omitted

if a side conduit entry is required.

D. Junction Box Internal Construction: Boxes shall contain a painted white backpanel for

mounting of terminal strips. Terminals shall be DIN-rail mounted and conform to Section 26

29 00. Cable penetrations into the enclosure shall be sealed with Water-Tight Cable

Connectors detailed in this Section. Internal components shall be grounded.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Verify that existing structures used for connections are structurally sound and will support

designated loads.

B. Verify installation will not interfere with egress or moving / actuating machinery.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Raceways

1. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as

required to complete wiring system.

2. Install raceways concealed in floors, walls, ceilings, or underground, unless otherwise

indicated or approved by ENGINEER.

3. Increase conduit size shown on the plan to meet ANSI/NFPA 70 conduit fill requirements

for the conductors installed.

4. Raceway Routing:

a. Install conduit to present a neat appearance. Route conduit parallel or perpendicular

to existing piping or building surfaces.

b. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.

c. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

d. Make changes in direction of exposed conduit runs with symmetrical bends or cast

metal conduit boxes.

e. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point or as shown on Drawings.

f. Maintain clearance for headroom.

g. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.

h. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures

exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).

5. Raceway Support:

a. Support raceway using stainless steel straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis

hangers, and split hangers.

b. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for



temporary supports

c. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

d. Support spacing shall be a maximum of seven feet on center. Support conduit within

three feet of a box, cabinet, or fitting.

e. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use concentric bends for parallel

runs.

f. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel

channel specified in Section 26 05 29; provide space on each for 25 percent

additional raceways.

g. Do not attach raceway conduit to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

B. Conduit

1. Conduit Support:

a. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

b. Support conduit using stainless steel, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers and

split hangers.

c. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using stainless

steel channel; provide space on each for 25% additional conduits.

d. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces using stainless steel

hardware.

e. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports.

f. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

g. Maintain air gap between conduit and concrete surfaces.

2. Workmanship:

a. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

b. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

c. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement, as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to

entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20-minutes, minimum.

d. Use conduit hubs or sealing lock-nuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp

and wet locations and to cast boxes.

e. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit

bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows or

hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends for metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.

f. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit

system.

g. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit

crosses expansion joints.

h. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.

i. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

j. Provide sleeves and openings for exposed conduits and wireways, where they pass

through walls or floors.

k. Sleeves for individual conduits shall be mild steel tube, hot-dip galvanized inside and



out. Sleeves shall be equal in gauge to heavy wall steel conduit and extend a

minimum of 1-inch above finished floor surface.

l. Where vertical drops are made to equipment in open space, 1-inch rigid conduit shall

be minimum size used. Provide an outlet box at the underside of construction above

each drop. Boxes shall be threaded hub type. The vertical conduit shall be rigidly

supported at the top and bottom. A floor flange shall be used at the bottom of each

drop.

m. All raceways and apparatus shall be thoroughly blown out and cleaned of foreign

matter prior to pulling in wires.

3. Other Requirements:

a. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Division 26 - Grounding & Bonding.

b. Identify conduit under provisions of Division 26 - Electrical Identification.

4. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit Installation:

a. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be installed in such a manner that liquids tend to

run off the surfaces and not drain toward the fittings.

b. All runs of flexible conduit to motors shall be as short as practicable, of the same size

as the conduit it extends and with enough slack to reduce the effects of vibration to a

minimum. A minimum of 18-inches and a maximum of 36-inches of flexible

conduits shall be installed for each motor.

c. Where the fittings are brought into an enclosure with a knock-out, a gasket assembly

consisting of an "O" ring and retainer shall be installed on the outside. Fittings shall

be insulated throat type.

5. Sizing Of Conduits:

a. CONTRACTOR shall determine conduit sizes, except use ¾-inch minimum.

b. In accordance with requirements of NEC, except where sizes are shown as larger on

Drawings.

6. Location:

a. Conduits shall be routed in field by CONTRACTOR.

b. Certain areas are designated as access, maintenance, hatchway, plant expansion and

similar areas; such areas shall be kept clear of field-routed conduit or other

equipment installed as part of this Project.

c. Locate conduits to avoid conflicts with large piping, HVAC ducts, flue gas ducts,

process equipment and support steel.

d. Coordinate location of conduits with work of others and with the CITY.

e. Do not install conduits in or along side cable tray.

7. Openings:

a. Floor openings for passage of conduits shall be provided by CONTRACTOR as

required.

i. Under motor control centers, unit substations and high voltage starter lineups.

ii. Under control panels and operator consoles.

b. CONTRACTOR shall provide for passage of electrical circuits through walls, floors

and grating platforms in all areas and where floor openings are not provided.

c. CONTRACTOR shall use corrosion prevention tape (3M or equal) on aluminum



conduit at wall and floor penetrations to prevent surface from contacting concrete.

Wrap conduit a minimum of 1” beyond end of concrete.

8. Sleeves:

a. Provide for passage of conduits through walls, floors or partitions. Where conduit or

raceway penetrates floors, ceilings, or walls, close off space between conduit or

raceway and adjacent surface with mechanical sleeve seals. Set sleeves in masonry

during construction; set sleeves through concrete before placement begins.

Coordinate with work of other Contractors and the CITY.

b. Material: Rigid steel conduit, pipe or flame retardant PVC conduit securely fastened

in position.

c. Floor Sleeves (referred to as “Grout Ring Floor Sleeves”):

i. The straight section shall be 12-gauge stainless steel outside diameter tube. The

grout ring shall be 3/4-inch wide and made of 12-guage stainless steel,

completely encircling the tube and welded in place perpendicular to the tube.

ii. For new installations, grout ring shall be centered in floor thickness. In existing

floors, the opening will be core drilled to a depth of 2-inches the diameter of the

grout ring. The remainder of the core drill to match the diameter of the tube.

iii. The sleeve shall be flush with the bottom of the floor and extend 4 inches above

the finished floor.

iv. The sleeve shall be sealed with grout.

v. These sleeves shall be used in all production/process areas.

d. Sleeves Through Exterior Building Walls: Install conduit in center or sleeve.

e. Seal around the sleeve with acrylic polymer sealant for a metallic building.

i. Acceptable Acrylic Polymer Sealant Manufacturers: DAP, Inc. or equal.

f. Seal interior and exterior joint of a masonry building with grout, if sleeve does not fit

tight in opening.

g. Openings required after footing, wall, floors or ceiling, as constructed, shall be core

drilled.

h. Openings required after footing, wall and floors shall be patched to match original

material in composition and appearance.

i. Openings required in existing concrete or masonry construction shall be core drilled.

j. Where openings are cut in grating platforms, provide additional structural bracing

required due to platform removal.

k. Notify the CITY prior to cutting openings in existing construction.

9. Joints: Make with approved couplings and unions to provide electrically continuous and

moisture-tight system.

10. Expansion Joints: Use expansion fittings and bonding jumpers wherever conduit spans

expansion joints in buildings or equipment.

11. Drainage: Avoid pockets in conduit runs as much as possible.

a. Provide the following at low spots in exposed conduit where pocket cannot be

avoided. Aluminum: Killark, KDB-1 or equal.

b. Galvanized or PVC Coated conduit.

i. Install in “T” in line with “T” pointing down.



ii. Install pipe plug in open end of “T” and drill 1/8” hole in pipe plug In general

areas or a drain rated for the hazardous location where required.

c. Weep holes in conduit runs are not permitted.

12. Bends:

a. Conduit Runs For Single-Conductor Wires: Not more than four 90-degree bends

between pulling points.

b. Conduit Runs for Other Cables: Not more than two 90-degree bends between pulling

points.

13. Field Cuts and Threads:

a. Cut ends of conduit square with hand or power saw and ream to remove burrs and

sharp edges. Do not use wheel cutter.

b. Threads cut on job shall have same effective length, thread dimensions and taper as

factory cut threads.

c. Carefully remove burrs, paint male threads using anti-seize compound per conduit

manufacturer’s requirements.

14. Conduit Ends:

a. Cap spare conduit.

b. Open conduit ends terminating in panels or enclosures where exposed to entrance of

foreign material: Plug space around cables with commercial duct-sealing compound.

c. Cap conduit ends during construction to prevent entrance of foreign material.

15. Cleaning: Clean and swab inside by mechanical means to remove foreign materials and

moisture before wires or cables are installed.

16. Conduit Connections:

a. Dry Locations At Panels & Boxes Indoors: T&B HTZ chase hub with insulated

throat.

b. At Panels and Boxes Outdoors, Obvious Wet Areas Or Ares Containing Process

Piping:

i. Rigid Conduit: Use fittings with ground hub, except where threaded hub is

provided.

ii. Acceptable Fittings Manufacturers: Myers “ScruTight” or equal.

iii. Flexible Conduit: Liquid-tight fittings specified in this section, and insulating

bushing.

iv. Insulating Bushings: Rugged thermosetting phenolic material. Acceptable

Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney Company, Type A or Equal.

v. If box is not metal, bushing shall be grounded type. Acceptable Manufacturers:

O-Z/Gedney Company, Type BLG or equal.

C. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit Installation

1. General:

a. Teeth marks, gouges, etc., shall be coated with manufacturer’s touch-up compound.

b. Assemble conduit using manufacturer’s recommended tooling to bend, thread and

assemble.



c. Coat all exposed threads with manufacturer’s touch-up compound.

d. Raw field-cut threads shall be de-greased and coated with a zinc-rich paint.

e. Cover all screws after tightening with manufacturer’s touch-up compound.

f. Use manufacturer’s touch-up compound to seal sleeve to PVC-coating of attached

conduit.

g. Use stainless steel mounting hardware and fasteners.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Manufacturer of conduit shall certify installers prior to any conduit installation.

b. Acceptable manufacturers:

i. Robroy.

ii. Permacoat.

iii. Or equal.

D. Hazardous Location Installations

1. Conduit installation shall comply in all respects with the requirements of NEC for respec-

tive Class, Division and Group installation.

2. Connections:

a. Conduit shall be rigid type. Threaded joint shall be made of at least five threads,

fully engaged.

b. Boxes, fittings and joints shall be rated for the Hazardous Area.

c. Where flexible connections are necessary, such as connections to motors, light fix-

tures, etc., flexible connections shall be rated for the Hazardous Area.

3. Seals:

a. Seals shall be provided as required by NEC in each conduit entering a required

device, within 18-inches of device, in conduits entering an enclosure, and in conduit

runs leaving a hazardous area.

b. Seals shall be fitted with the proper compound approved for the purpose, as recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

c. Conduits in concrete slab shall be considered within the Hazardous Area and shall be

PGRS (PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel).

E. Installation – Boxes

1. Size boxes to conform with NEC requirements, install larger boxes where indicated or to

facilitate cable installation.

2. Install electrical boxes in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices,

taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, outlet, junction, and pull boxes less than 1,800 cubic inches

shall be cast metal or malleable iron when installed:

a. Below grade floor elevation of structures, except fixture outlet boxes in ceilings.

i. Exposed less than 7 feet above the finished floor on floors above grade within a

structure.

ii. Exposed to the weather including those installed flush with the outside surface of



exterior walls. These boxes shall be NEMA 4.240.

4. Install cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather, below grade within a

structure and wet locations.

5. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated or

specified in section for outlet device.

6. Electrical boxes, when shown on Drawings, are approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate

intended purpose.

7. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices. Covers and doors shall open facing up or

to the side.

8. Install drainage openings in the bottom and vent openings in the bottom or sides of

junction and pull boxes which receive conduit drainage.

9. Install surface junction and pull boxes with a 1/2 in clearance between the box and the

surface. Spacers shall be 1 x 1/2 x 1/8 in bar channels. Wood spacers shall not be

installed.

10. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices

with each other.

11. Install only one device in a single gang position.

12. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner

only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

13. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; install minimum 6 inch

separation. Install minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

a. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices.

b. Locknuts, bushings, reducers and similar conduit fittings shall match the material of

the conduit.

c. Sheet metal boxes installed in masonry walls shall be square cornered tile type, or

standard boxes with square cornered tile type covers.

d. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to

allow for surface finish thickness.

e. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

f. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

g. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two

rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

h. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use

sectional box.

i. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

j. Provide junction and pull boxes with covers where indicated or as required. The size

of junction and pull boxes shall be in accordance with the NEC, but larger boxes

shall be provided where shown. Larger sizes or additional boxes than those shown or

required may be installed to utilize standard sizes or to facilitate the installation.

k. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in any



dimension.

i. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure.

ii. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box.

iii. Covers: To be attached with stainless steel screws. Furnish two cast or pressed

steel handles on covers heavier than 20 pounds.

l. Provide conduit hubs to terminate conduits at cast metal or malleable iron boxes

which do not have integral hubs, and at steel enclosures or boxes located below grade

floor elevation in structures.

m. Provide plates and covers on outlet boxes which do not have attached lighting

fixtures.

n. Aluminum boxes shall be protected from contact with concrete surfaces by the

application of a heavy alkali-resistant bituminous coating.

3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. Coordinate

with the CITY.

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack

with pitch pocket. Coordinate with the CITY.


A. Section 01 45 16 – Quality Requirements: Field inspecting and testing.

B. Section 01 14 00 – Execution – requirements for protecting finished work.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by material installation.


IDENTIFICATION FOR


SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Nameplates

2. Labels and Signs

3. Wire and Cable Markers

4. Conduit and Raceway Markers

1.02 REFERENCES





D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA 40 CFR 1910.145 –

Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags

1.03 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer catalog literature for each product required.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide a complete description and listing of proposed electrical

identification on Drawings, including list of wording, letter sizing, color coding, tag number,

symbols, location and function.




format indicating actual locations of tagged devices, including tag numbers.




IDENTIFICATION FOR




A. General: Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment

will fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances specified in





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES

A. Product Description: Laminated two-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white

background.

B. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. Front edge: 1/32 inch.

C. Lettering Size

1. 3/16 inch minimum letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.

2. 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

D. Nameplate Fabrication

1. Material: Laminated phenolic.

2. Inner layer: Black.

3. Outer layer: White.

4. Polished surface on both sides.

5. Engraved inscription: Black letters on white background.

6. Laminated thermoset plastic, 1/16-inch thick, engraved condensed block black lettering

on white background, square corners, and beveled front edges, or match existing.

7. Size: As required.

8. Letter Size: Minimum 3/16-inch.

9. Nameplates one inch or less in height shall have one mounting hole at each end.

Nameplates greater than one inch in height shall have mounting holes in the four corners.

10. Equipment nameplate engravings shall include the associated equipment description

without abbreviation and the equipment location number.

E. Legend Plates

IDENTIFICATION FOR


1. Legend plates for pushbuttons, pilot lights, selector switches and other panel mounted

devices shall be large size with dimensions of approximately 2-7/16 inches wide by 2-

13/32 inches tall (Allen Bradley large automotive size), plastic, custom engraved with

black letters on white background.

2. Standard size legend plates shall be provided where devices are mounted on motor

control centers and spacing of the devices precludes the use of automotive size legend

plates.

3. Lettering size and line weight shall be the same for all legend plates on the same panel or

enclosure. Maximum size shall be 1/4-inch and minimum size shall be 1/8-inch.

2.02 LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background.

B. Safety Signs and Voltage Markers:

1. Provide high voltage signs for equipment operating over 600 volts. High voltage safety

signs for installation on equipment shall be either pressure sensitive acrylic or vinyl, shall

conform to 40 CFR 1910.145, and shall read, “DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP

OUT”.

a. Products and Manufacturers:

1) Brady - B-302-84084.

2) Or Approved equal.

2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, high voltage safety admittance signs shall be a

minimum of 10 inches high by 14 inches wide, of fiberglass reinforced plastic, and

conform to 40 CFR 1910.145. The signs shall resist fading from exposure to temperature

extremes, ultraviolet light, abrasive, and corrosive environments, and shall read,

“DANGER – ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT – AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY”.

a. Provide for exterior of Electrical Room doors.

b. Mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Products and Manufacturers:

1) Brady - B-120-71545.

2) Or Approved equal.

C. High voltage safety labels for cable tray shall be pressure sensitive vinyl conforming to 40

CFR 1910.145, 5 inches by 3.5 inches in size, and shall read, “DANGER - HIGH

VOLTAGE”.

1. Products and Manufacturers:

a. Brady - B-302-86139.

b. Or Approved equal.

D. Low voltage safety labels for cable tray shall be pressure sensitive vinyl conforming to 40

CFR 1910.145, 5 inches by 3.5 inches in size, and shall read, “DANGER - 480 VOLTS”.


a. Brady - B-302-86060.


IDENTIFICATION FOR


E. Conduit Markers


a. Brady - B-915 Snap-On series.

b. Seton - Snap-Around marker.


2. Shall be pre-tensioned acrylic/vinyl construction coiled to completely encircle conduit for

conduit up through 5-inch diameter, or pre-molded to conform to the circumference of

conduit 6-inch and larger.

3. Strap-on style for 6-inch conduit shall be attached with stainless steel springs.

4. Conduit markers shall have black lettering on orange background and shall read, “FIBER

OPTIC”, “120 VOLTS”, “208 VOLTS”, “120/208 VOLTS”, “240 VOLTS”, “480

VOLTS”, or other voltage as required.

5. Custom Labels:

a. Shall have black lettering on yellow background.

b. Shall not contain abbreviations in legend.

F. Arc-flash Safety Signs: Provide as required per N.F.P.A. 70E. Refer to Section 26 05 73 for

requirements.

G. Wire Markers - Heat Shrinkable Wire and Cable Labeling System

1. White heat-shrinkable irradiated polyolefin shrink-on sleeves. Labels shall be thermal

printed. Labels shall be at least 2 inches wide.


a. Brady - TLS 2200/TLS PC Link.


2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Manufacturers:

1. W.H. Brady Company – “Identoline”.

2. Seton.

3. Panduit Corp.

4. Thomas & Betts, Co. – “EZ-Code”.


B. Description: 2 inch wide detectable tape with type B721 aluminum foil core laminated

between layers of 5 mil thick polyester plastic, colored red with suitable warning legend

describing buried electrical lines, similar to “CAUTION – BURIED ELECTRICAL LINE

BELOW.”

IDENTIFICATION FOR


PART 3 -EXECUTION


Verify that existing surfaces are clean and ready for installation of equipment identification.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and in

accordance with the contract documents.

B. Install nameplates and labels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to maintain the

NEMA rating of the equipment enclosure.

C. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.

D. Nameplate Installation

1. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with

stainless steel mechanical fasteners or adhesive.

2. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside

panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

3. Install nameplates for the following:

a. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.

b. Each starter, contactor, safety switch, local disconnect, and circuit breaker

enclosure.

c. Each pull box, junction box and termination box shall be labeled for box type

with voltage. Boxes containing fiber shall be labeled as Fiber Optic with box

type.

d. Each VFD enclosure and control panel.

e. All relays contained within MCC starters or control / electrical panels shall have

a nameplate matching the designation on the wiring diagram provided.

f. Local control stations noting the equipment, equipment number and contactor

location.

g. Motors and field loads. Nameplate shall include equipment number, MCC or

panel, and bucket or circuit number feeding the device.

h. All wall switches, receptacles, and electrical appurtenances. Nameplate shall

include panel number and circuit number.

4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using stainless steel screws, or rivets except on

explosion-proof equipment.

5. Secure nameplate from inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished

locations.

6. For explosion-proof equipment secure nameplate to equipment using suitable adhesive.

E. Label Installation

1. Install label parallel to equipment lines.

2. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

3. Install labels such as door signs after final painting has been completed and dried

IDENTIFICATION FOR


completely.

4. Conduit Marker Installation:

a. Install conduit marker for each conduit longer than 6 feet.

b. Conduit Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center.

5. Install labels for all wiring:

a. Wire Marker Installation:

i. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet

and junction boxes, terminal strips, and each load connection.

ii. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations

along the cable run.

iii. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation as

indicated on Drawings.

iv. Install wire labels for all conductors, control wiring, and data cables in each

enclosure.

v. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated.

vi. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and

interconnection diagrams or shop drawings. Prefix the wire number with the full

circuit number.


Section 01 45 16 – Quality Requirements: field inspecting and testing.


OVERCURRENT COORD STUDY

AND ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 26 05 73-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 05 73

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY AND

ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Short-Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study

2. Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis

B. General

1. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize a Professional Engineer, Registered in the State of

Ohio, to prepare:

a. Electrical equipment short-circuit and protective device coordination study report for

the new equipment being installed.

b. Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E for the new equipment being

installed. The report shall include the results of the arc flash hazard analysis study for

energized electrical equipment in accordance with the methods outlined in IEEE

Standard 1584 and stated hereinafter.

C. Scope

1. The Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Report shall include analysis of all

electrical equipment, including the Utility Company equipment, that affect the installed

equipment’s short circuit ratings, protective device ratings and protective device settings.

2. The Work shall include the fabrication of signs with the arc flash hazard study results and

the installation of the signs on the equipment in accordance with NFPA 70E that includes the

personnel protective equipment (PPE) risk category, the energy available, and the clothing

recommendation.

1.02 REFERENCES



2. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

3. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems

4. IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System

Analysis



5. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings

6. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used

in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

7. IEEE 1584 – Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations



2. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI C57.12.00 – Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,

Power, and Regulating Transformers

2. ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures

3. ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers

Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis

4. ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed

Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories

5. ANSI C37.5 – Methods for Determining the RMS Value of a Sinusoidal Current Wave

and Normal-Frequency Recovery Voltage, and for Simplified Calculation of Fault

Currents

D. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)

1. ANSI/NETA ATS 2009 – Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power

Distribution Equipment and Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS



B. General:

1. The short-circuit and protective device coordination studies shall be submitted to the

CITY prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and

prior to release of equipment drawings for manufacturing. If formal completion of the

studies may cause delay in equipment manufacturing, approval from the CITY may be

obtained for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of

device and characteristics will be satisfactory.

C. Record Documentation:

1. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard

analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report.

2. The report shall include the following sections:



a. One-line diagram showing protective device ampere ratings and associated

designations, cable size & lengths, transformer kVA & voltage ratings, motor &

generator kVA ratings, and switchgear/switchboard/panelboard designations.

b. Descriptions, purpose, basis and scope of the study.

c. Tabulations of the worst-case calculated short circuit duties as a percentage of the

applied device rating (automatic transfer switches, circuit breakers, fuses, etc.); the

short circuit duties shall be upward-adjusted for X/R ratios that are above the device

design ratings.

d. Protective device time versus current coordination curves with associated one line

diagram identifying the plotted devices, tabulations of ANSI protective relay

functions and adjustable circuit breaker trip unit settings.

e. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and current calculations including a

definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

f. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations.

g. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

h. Executive Summary including source of information and assumptions made.




A. Qualifications:

1. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies

shall be conducted by a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer, Registered in the

State of Ohio, and skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STUDIES

A. CONTRACTOR to furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies. The

coordination study shall begin with the utility company's feeder protective device and include

all of the electrical protective devices down to and include the largest feeder circuit breaker

and motor starter in the 480 Volt motor control centers and power distribution panelboards.

The study shall also include variable frequency drives, harmonic filters, power factor

correction equipment, transformers and protective devices associated with variable frequency

drives, emergency and standby generators associated paralleling equipment and distribution

switchgear.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E -

Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D.

C. The report shall be created using SKM software.

D. CONTRACTOR shall provide CITY with a copy of the project data files on DVD, upon

completion of the study.



2.02 DATA COLLECTION

A. CONTRACTOR shall collect all field data as required by the power system studies. The

Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard

analysis studies shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with a listing of required data immediately

after award of the contract. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite collection of the data to

eliminate unnecessary delays and assure completion of the studies as required for final

approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the

equipment for manufacturing.

B. Source combination may include present and future utility supplies, motors, and generators.

C. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract

Documents provided by CITY or CONTRACTOR.

D. Include fault contribution of existing motors in the study, with motors < 50 hp grouped

together. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to

satisfy the study requirements.

2.03 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY

A. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances

based on IEEE Standards 141, latest edition.

B. Transformer design impedances and standard X/R ratios shall be used when test values are

not available.

C. Provide the following:

1. Calculation methods and assumptions.

2. Selected base per unit quantities.

3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated with available fault at each bus, and

interrupting rating of devices noted.

4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution

characteristics.

5. Typical calculations.

6. Tabulations of calculated quantities.

7. Results, conclusions, and recommendations.

D. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at

each:

1. Electric utility’s supply termination point.

2. Incoming switchgear.

3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.

4. Low voltage switchgear.



5. Motor control centers.

6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.

7. Branch circuit panelboards.

8. Other significant locations throughout the system.

E. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined

for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

F. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings.

2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bracing to withstand

short-circuit stresses.

3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses.

4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating.

5. Notify CITY in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for the

calculated available fault current.

2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be graphically displayed on

log-log scale paper.

B. Include on each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the

specific portion of the system covered.

C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or

asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.

D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable,

tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

E. Plot the following characteristics on the curve sheets, where applicable:

1. Electric utility’s protective device.

2. Medium voltage equipment relays.

3. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total clearing,

tolerance, and damage bands.

4. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance

bands.

5. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI transformer

withstand parameters.

6. Conductor damage curves.

7. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable.



8. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points.

9. Pertinent generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.

10. Other system load protective devices for the largest branch circuit and the largest feeder

circuit breaker in each motor control center.

F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is

provided, while providing proper protection.

2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that

are presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.

B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase

overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model.

Alternative methods shall be presented in the arc flash hazard analysis report.

C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant

locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control

centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized

parts.

D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all Medium Voltage (MV) and 480 volt

locations and significant locations in 240 volt and 208 volt systems fed from transformers

equal to or greater than 125 kVA.

E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the

calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum

contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the

utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the

maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume

motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations,

where necessary.

H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time.

Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2.

2.06 REPORT SECTIONS

A. Input Data:

1. Utility three-phase and line-to-ground available contribution with associated X/R ratios.

2. Short-circuit reactance of rotating machines with associated X/R ratios.

3. Cable type, construction, size, # per phase, length, impedance and conduit type.

4. Bus duct type, size, length, and impedance.



5. Transformer primary & secondary voltages, winding configurations, kVA rating,

impedance, and X/R ratio.

6. Reactor inductance and continuous ampere rating.

7. Aerial line type, construction, conductor spacing, size, # per phase, and length.

B. Short-Circuit Data:

1. Source fault impedance and generator contributions.

2. X to R ratios.

3. Asymmetry factors.

4. Motor contributions.

5. Short circuit kVA.

6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

C. Recommended Protective Device Settings:

1. Phase and Ground Relays:

a. Current transformer ratio.

b. Current setting.

c. Time setting.

d. Instantaneous setting.

e. Specialty non-overcurrent device settings.

f. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

2. Circuit Breakers:

a. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground).

b. Adjustable time-current characteristic.

c. Adjustable instantaneous pickup.

d. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

D. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations.

1. Arcing fault magnitude.

2. Device clearing time.

3. Duration of arc.

4. Arc flash boundary.

5. Working distance.

6. Incident energy.

7. Hazard Risk Category.

8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction.



2.07 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a 4 in. x 6 in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesion

polyester for each work location analyzed.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING, ARC FLASH

HAZARD”, triangle graphic, and shall include the following information:

1. Location designation / Equipment ID.

2. Nominal voltage.

3. Flash protection boundary.

4. Hazard risk category.

5. Incident energy.

6. Working distance.

7. Required Flash Protection Equipment (PPE) for hazard category.

8. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.

2.08 ZONE SELECTIVE INTERLOCKING CONFIGURATION

A. Establish settings and determine pickup levels and delay times which cascade downward,

starting with the closest trip device, such that the largest values are at the main circuit breaker

and the smallest values are at the branch circuit level.

B. Complete final coordination of zone selective interlocking system per manufacturer’s

requirements for proper operation.

C. Perform visual and continuity checks to verify control wiring has been installed correctly.

Perform primary injection testing at start-up, using a high-current, low-voltage AC power

supply. During primary injection testing, adjust protective device pickup settings to the

lowest possible level to limit current required for testing. All devices should open except for

devices on the circuit breaker being tested.

2.09 ARC FLASH REDUCTION MAINTENACE SYSTEM (ARMS) CONFIGURATION

A. Coordinate with Manufacturer to establish settings and determine pickup levels and delay

times for Arc flash Reduction Maintenance System.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 IMPLEMENTATION

A. FIELD ADJUSTMENT

1. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table

provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by the Testing



Firm, as specified in Section 26 08 00.

2. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with

short circuit and protective device coordination studies.

3. Notify CITY in writing of any required major equipment modifications.

4. Following completion of all studies, acceptance testing and startup by the Testing Firm,

as specified in Section 26 08 00.

B. ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

1. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on

recommended overcurrent device settings.

a. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 volt panelboards and disconnects, one arc flash

label shall be provided.

b. For each motor control center section, one arc flash label shall be provided and

located at the top of each section.

c. For each low voltage switchboard section, one arc flash label shall be provided.

d. For each switchgear section, one flash label shall be provided.

e. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label per section shall be provided.

2. Labels shall be field installed by the Testing Firm.

3. Arc flash warning labels shall follow N.E.C. Article 110.16.

3.02 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. ARC FLASH TRAINING

1. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated

with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenance procedures in

accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E, Standard For Electrical Safety

Requirements For Employee Workplaces, shall be provided in the equipment manuals.




THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

ELECTRIC MOTORS 26 05 83-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 26 05 83

ELECTRIC MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Low-Voltage General Duty Electric Motors, less than 600VAC.

2. Low-Voltage Inverter Duty Rated Motors, less than 600VAC.

1.02 REFERENCES



B. National Fire Protection Association (NFP: ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 467 – UL Standard for Safety for Grounding and

Bonding Equipment




1.03 SUBMITTALS




components. For inverter duty motors, provide Manufacturer’s certification that the motor is

compatible with the adjustable frequency drive to be used.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide installation, dimension, and detail drawings for each motor frame

size to be supplied.

D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Include testing procedures and values obtained. Motors shall

be tested per IEEE Standard 112 and shall be documented as part of factory testing.

E. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Submit instructions for storage, preparation, and installation of








format.


All work shall be performed and materials provided in accordance with NFPA 70 - National









C. Protect from weather. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation

107 SITE CONDITIONS







1.08 WARRANTY

A. CONTRACTOR shall warrant all motors free from defects in materials and workmanship for

a minimum of five years from the date of CITY acceptance.

B. No pro-rating of warranty is acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General Electric.

B. Baldor.

C. Nidec / U.S. Motors.

D. Siemens USA.

E. Or Approved equal.


2.02 GENERAL MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS

A. General

1. Motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficiency and shall meet or exceed NEMA MG-1

efficiency ratings listed in NEMA Premium Table 12-11 and 12-12. Motors shall be

constructed in accordance with UL 1004 and UL 674 for hazardous locations where

required.

B. Mechanical

1. Enclosure to be TEFC (Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled) of cast iron construction, or

explosion-proof, as determined by the classification of the area and as defined in NEMA

MG 1. Lifting eye bolts shall be provided with the motor.

2. Wiring / conduit box and any other accessory connections boxes shall be oversized and of

cast iron, split construction. Wiring box shall be gasketed with petroleum-resistant

gaskets and contain a grounding lug terminal inside. Boxes shall be designed to rotate to

any one of four 90-degree positions. Furnish separate boxes for other devices such as

temperature sensors or space heaters.

3. Entire motor and wiring box shall be 2-part epoxy painted, 2 coats, with appropriate

primer. Coating shall pass ASTM B117 requirements for 96 hours.

4. All hardware to be corrosion resistant stainless steel or plated.

5. Motor enclosure to have Stainless Steel T-drain in bottom of motor.

6. Single-phase motors shall be 115/200/230V. Three-phase motors shall be 200/230/460V.

Motor speed shall match the requirements of the driven equipment.

7. Service Factor for motors shall be 1.15 (see below for Inverter-Duty motors).

8. Motor shall have copper rotors and stator windings with Class F insulation without

exceeding Class B temperature rise of 40°C ambient with NEMA Design B torque and

current requirements. NEMA Design shall be greater if required by the driven equipment

manufacturer.

9. Bearing system shall be anti-friction design and for direct connection unless specified

differently on Drawings. Direct coupled L-10 life for bearing shall be 130,000 hours.

Bearing lubrication system shall be grease design, re-greasable in service. Drain fitting

shall be provided for grease relief 180 degree opposite of inlet grease fitting. Inlet grease

fitting to be Alemite type with extensions to allow for re-lubrication without removing

coupling guards, etc. Grease to be polyurea type.

10. Bearings to be insulated/isolated type for variable frequency drive application above 100

HP (Horsepower) and include a shaft grounding brush. In motors 100 HP and below, a

shaft grounding brush or ring shall be utilized. Bearing design shall include cast iron

internal bearing caps.

11. Bearing Protection: Bearings to be protected by dynamic rotating seal (isolator) such as

Inpro design.

12. Vibration Requirements: Motor vibration shall be less than 0.04 IPS (Inches Per Second)

velocity in any direction. All motors to be tested and documented after final assembly.


Vibration to be tested on an isolated pad designed for such testing.

13. All motor physical designs shall be to a minimum of the latest edition of IEEE (Institute

of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 841 for NEMA frame motors and NEMA

(National Electrical Manufacturers Association) MG-1.

14. Motors used in NEMA 3R, 4, 4X, and 7 areas shall have 120V single-phase space heaters

to prevent moisture condensation. Heater shall be sized to increase motor temperature by

approximately 10°C above ambient.

15. Motor nameplate to be embossed Stainless Steel with minimum 1/8” letter height. The

following information shall be required:

Voltage Current Phase

Service Factor Hz Ambient

Insulation Class Temperature Rise Class Weight

AFBMA for Bearings Vibration Spec Grease Type

MFG Type MFG Style Serial No.

Base Speed Speed Range @ Torque Efficiency

16. Motor construction shall be F2 configuration unless specified differently on Drawings.

All motors shall be designed for both F1 and F2 by pulling rotor and rotating stator

housing.

C. Explosion-Proof Motors

1. Premium-efficiency explosion-proof motors (EP or XP).

2. UL listed in accordance with UL 674 for Class I, Division 1, Group D for hazardous

atmospheres.

3. Class F insulation.

4. Meets UL surface temperature limit codes for Class I, Division 1, Group D areas.

5. Motor nameplate shall indicate UL frame temperature limit code.

6. UL-approved breather / drain device in motor drain hole.

D. Factory Tests

1. Factory tests shall be required as outlined in IEEE 841.

2. All motors will be run and data recorded. A preliminary report is to be included with

motor as well as provided to the CITY under separate cover.

2.03 INVERTER DUTY RATED MOTORS

A. General:

1. Motors used with adjustable frequency or variable frequency controllers shall be inverter

duty motors designed for inverter service. Inverter duty motors shall be designed for

speed ranges and load torque characteristics required by the driven equipment.

2. Inverter motors shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1-31: Definite-Purpose

Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors.


3. Inverter duty rated motors shall have 4:1 turndown with variable torque motor controllers

or constant torque motor controllers rating designed to operate from 25% of base speed to

base speed continuously with full load current and torque without exceeding the Class F

insulation with B temperature rise.

4. Motor insulation shall be designed to meet 2000-volt peak at a minimum of 0.1 micro-

second rise time which exceeds the NEMA MG 1, Part 31: 1600-volt peak requirement

for the 460 volt motors. Service Factor: 1.0.

5. Inverter duty motors shall have electrically insulated bearings or shall be equipped with a

shaft-grounding unit mounted on the fan housing with stub shaft extended from the motor

shaft. Larger motors, using the shaft-grounding unit, shall be equipped with two brushes,

totally enclosed, and sealed against environmental contamination.

6. NEMA over-temperature self-protection: Thermal-overload, self-reset bimetallic Klixon

switch for motors 5 horsepower and smaller. Motors greater than 5 horsepower require

controller alarm / trip: Self-powered, motor mounted auxiliary device with Form-C

output contacts wired to variable speed or adjustable frequency drive to shut down the

motor controller. Both the normally open contact and the normally closed contact shall be

available at the motor terminal box.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Motor to be inspected for any signs of damage during shipment or handling. Hand rotate

shaft to verify free rotation.

B. Motor to be test run prior to installation. Vibration shall be less than 0.04 IPS.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and in

accordance with the contract documents.

B. Motors shall be lubricated to manufacturer’s requirements prior to operation.

C. Check motor rotation and correct as needed. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for

providing mechanic support if couplings need to be disconnected for rotation checks to

prevent damage to coupled equipment.


A. Testing

1. CONTRACTOR shall verify that alignment meets the manufacturer’s recommendations

and that vibration is less than 0.04 IPS in all directions for both motor and driven load.

2. Motor insulation to be tested with 1,000 volt Megger type insulation tester. Insulation

must test minimum 100 Meg-Ohm.

3. If motor requires RTDs, the CONTRACTOR shall verify proper operation of motor RTD

protection system, prior to operation.


4. If motor is operated from a variable frequency drive, CONTRACTOR shall verify that

the common mode capacitors are disconnected if used on a high-resistance grounded

power system.

5. CONTRACTOR shall verify proper motor rotation with motor in uncoupled state.

6. CONTRACTOR shall lubricate bearings prior to startup, if required by manufacturer.

7. Refer to testing Section 26 08 00 for additional requirements.

3.04 SYSTEM START-UP

Commissioning of motor shall be part of system startup procedure.


COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS 26 08 00-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 26 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Testing of electrical systems

B. Scope

1. Prior to energization of equipment or circuits, perform applicable tests and checks on all

electrical equipment, motors, and wiring to ensure compliance with all applicable codes

and standards and to demonstrate all systems function according to contract documents.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall retain an independent InterNational Electrical Testing

Association (NETA) member Testing Firm for specified on-site acceptance testing of the

project electrical power distribution system and utilization equipment covered by this

contract.

3. The CITY reserves the right to witness any tests performed by the Testing Firm.

CONTRACTOR shall provide the CITY 30-day advanced notice for all tests performed

by the Testing Firm.

4. The manufacturer of the electrical equipment supplied for the Project shall complete their

on-site factory inspection, testing, and setup prior to the Testing Firm’s Acceptance

Testing and subsequent Protective Device setting verification work. Power monitors

shall be setup by the factory representatives and power monitor readings and settings

verified by the Testing Firm. Manufacturer work is specified in the respective equipment

sections.

5. CONTRACTOR shall provide the labor, tools, material, including quality power sources

required by the Testing Firm equipment, and other services necessary to provide

specified tests and retesting.

6. Field tests performed are in addition to manufacturer testing performed prior to being

shipped from the manufacturer’s factory.

1.02 REFERENCES



2. IEEE Standard 43 – Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating

Machinery.

3. IEEE Standard 142 – Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems.


C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)



D. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): NETA ATS – Acceptance Testing

Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems


F. National Contractors Association (NECA)

G. ANSI International (ANSI)

H. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

I. Insulated Power Cable Engineer Association (IPCEA)

J. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

1.03 SUBMITTALS


Submittal Procedures. Submittals include complete cable testing reports and thermography

reports.

B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Provide reports containing the following information:

1. Report summary

2. Description of tested equipment and a description of the tests.

3. List of testing equipment used and most recent calibration date.

4. Include testing procedures and values obtained.

5. Conclusions, recommendations, and appendix containing any applicable testing forms.



B. Record Documentation: Provide accurate test and evaluation reports in paper and electronic

format.


A. All work shall be performed and materials provided in accordance with NFPA 70 - National






B. The testing plan and procedures shall be developed by the Testing Firm and reviewed by the

ENGINEER. The Testing Firm shall have at least 10 years of field experience testing

electrical apparatus.

C. The Testing Firm project manager shall have at least 10 years of experience testing electrical

apparatus, and has obtained factory training. All other employees working on this project



shall have had specific factory, and/or field training in accordance with division-wide

standards.

D. To ensure compliance with quality control standards, the Testing Firm shall conduct periodic

audits of test procedures and test record forms to ensure compliance with industry standards.

E. All test records shall be recorded onto standardized test forms.

F. Should repairs be required, the Manufacturer shall make all necessary repairs from dedicated

locations that perform remanufacturing and reconditioning of electrical equipment. All

repairs shall be conducted under the direction of a quality control and reconditioning standard

pursuant to ISO9001 compliance. A quality certificate, computer database and final test

records shall document the progress of each piece of electrical equipment through the repair

or reconditioning process. All work shall be performed in accordance with industry

standards. Documentation of periodic audits, as specified above, shall also be maintained for

the dedicated remanufacturing and reconditioning facility.

G. The Testing Firm shall have a calibration program which maintains all applicable test

instrumentation within rated accuracy.

H. The accuracy of testing equipment shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards in

an unbroken chain.

I. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:

1. Field instruments – six to twelve months minimum.

2. Laboratory instruments – twelve months minimum.

J. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

K. Records must be kept up to date, which show date and results of all instruments calibrated or

tested.

L. An up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure will be maintained for each

test instrument.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TESTING EQUIPMENT

CONTRACTOR shall provide all test equipment, as needed to perform the required tests.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. General

1. The CONTRACTOR shall torque down all accessible bolts; perform continuity checks

on all branch and control wiring; and perform rotational tests for all motors prior to and

in addition to tests performed by the Testing Firm, as specified herein. CONTRACTOR

shall remove metal shavings and thoroughly clean and vacuum equipment before testing



or energizing.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall supply a suitable and stable source of test power for testing at

each test site.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the Testing Firm and the CITY and ENGINEER when

equipment becomes available for electrical tests. Work shall be coordinated to expedite

Project scheduling.

4. The CONTRACTOR will supply a complete set of as-built electrical plans, specifications

and any pertinent change orders to the Testing Firm and to the CITY prior to

commencement of testing.

5. The Testing Firm shall notify the CITY and ENGINEER prior to commencement of any

testing.

6. The Testing Firm shall be responsible for implementing all final settings and adjustments

on protective devices and electrical equipment as required.

7. Any system, material or workmanship which is found defective on the basis of electrical

tests shall be reported directly to the CITY and ENGINEER and shall be corrected by the

CONTRACTOR.

8. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a written record of all tests and upon completion of

the Project, assemble and certify a final test report.

3.02 IMPLEMENTATION

A. General

1. The Testing Firm shall provide all material, equipment, labor and technical supervision to

perform electrical equipment tests and inspections. The Testing Firm shall administer all

acceptance and start-up testing, and is responsible for implementing the setpoint

parameters as required.

2. Refer to Specification 01 78 36 for manufacturer product warranties and guidelines.

3. The intent of these tests is to assure that all electrical equipment is operational within

industry standards and manufacturer’s tolerances and that equipment is installed and

functioning in the system in the manner intended by the CITY.

4. Upon completion of the tests and inspections noted in these Specifications, a label shall

be attached to all serviced devices. These labels will indicate date serviced and the

engineering service testing group responsible.

5. The tests and inspections shall determine suitability for initial continued reliable

operation.

B. Cable Testing

1. Insulation System – To ensure integrity of the cable insulation system after shipping, site

storage, and pulling through conduit an insulation resistance test will reveal insulation

deformities and moisture in the cable that otherwise might cause an untimely premature

cable failure possibly damaging equipment or personnel. Perform the following on all

customer power cables to and from main switchgear or switchboard. This would include



cables from utility transformer to the main switchgear or switchboard and cables from the

main switchgear to all secondary switchboards or distribution panels. Power feeds to

remote equipment as well as motor feed cables shall also be tested per this Section.

2. Visually inspect visible portion of cables for observable defects.

3. Insure all solid-state devices are disconnected from the system prior to meggering.

Typically but not all-inclusive would be Meters, trip units with voltage sensing, variable

speed drives and TVSS units.

4. Isolate cables by opening breakers. Meggering thru equipment like motors or

transformers will produce erroneous readings.

5. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each line and load cable, phase-to-phase, phase-to-

ground, phase-to-neutral and neutral-to-ground in each conduit. Megger at 1,000 Vdc for

600 volt cable and 500 Vdc for 300 volt cable for one minute. For 5kV cables megger at

5kV dc for one minute.

6. Insulation resistance shall be above 100 meg-ohms.

7. Ensure cable termination connections are tight after testing.

C. Low Voltage Air Switches

1. Mechanical, Electrical and Visual Inspection

a. Inspect for physical and mechanical condition.

b. Check for proper anchorage and required area clearances.

c. Perform mechanical operation tests.

d. Check blade alignment.

e. Check each fuse holder for adequate mechanical support of each fuse.

f. Inspect all bus or cable connections for tightness torque in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

g. Test all electrical and mechanical interlock systems for proper operation and

sequencing.

h. Vacuum and clean entire switch. (If cleaning solution is used, use only type

recommended by the manufacturer.)

i. Check proper phase barrier materials and installation.

j. Lubricate in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. (Use only

manufacturer's recommended lubricant.)

k. Exercise all active components.

l. Inspect all indicating devices for proper operation.

2. Electrical Tests

a. Perform insulation resistance tests on each pole, phase-to- phase and phase-to-ground

for one minute each.

b. Perform contact resistance test across each switch blade and fuse holder.

D. Follow up testing

1. Included in above cost as part of original Project.



2. Three months after equipment start-up, perform thermal scans of all breaker to cable,

breaker, bus connections, cable to panel chassis. Tests are to be done with system

normally loaded for 2 hours, not with partial or an unloaded condition.

3. Thermal scan temperatures shall be evaluated as follows (based on comparable size or

adjacent phases and loaded breakers, bus connections, and terminations).

a. 1-3 degrees C rise, Investigate as to the cause of temp rise.

b. 4 – 15 degree C rise, Repair as soon as possible.

c. 16 or higher degree C rise, Repair immediately.

4. Ensure that all bus and breaker to cable connections are tight.

5. Note corrective actions taken, deficiencies, recommendations and any general comments.

Thermal scans of areas of concern shall be presented in the report in full color.

6. Finish recording data on test forms, completely filling in the blanks.

7. Turn in 3 copies of report to CITY and ENGINEER for approval.



B. Safety and Precautions

1. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements:

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 – OSHA 29CFR 1910.269

b. National Fire Protection Association – NFPA 70E

c. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures.

2. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise

specified.

3. The Testing Firm’s lead test engineer for the Project shall be a designated safety

representative and shall be present on the Project and supervise testing operations and

safety requirements.

4. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hotline grounded device

approved for the purpose in accordance with the appropriate test procedures.

5. Work shall not proceed until the safety representative has determined that it is safe to do

so.

6. The Testing Firm shall have available sufficient protective barriers and warning signs,

where necessary, to conduct specified tests safely.

7. The CITY’s safety procedures shall be reviewed and understood and followed by the

Testing Firm personnel.

3.04 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Commissioning

1. CONTRACTOR will coordinate all startup activities with the CITY. Upon completion



of the electrical work, CONTRACTOR shall place the entire installation in operation, test

for proper function, and show systems and equipment to be free of defects. Motors and

driven equipment shall not be run until properly lubricated. Pumps shall not be run until

water or process fluid supply is connected and turned on. Test and record motor

maximum load amperage and terminal voltage when uncoupled and coupled for each

motor. Refer to Section 01 75 01 – Equipment Startup and Verification Sequence,

Section 01 75 03 – Equipment Commissioning, and Section 01 75 04 – Equipment

Startup.

2. Prior to energizing systems:

a. Remove and account for all test equipment, jumper wires, and tools used during

testing.

b. Remove and account for safety grounds and tools.

c. Replace all barriers and covers, close all doors, and secure all latches.

d. Remove safety locks and tags.

e. Ensure all adjustable meters, relays and trip devices are properly set in accordance

with the coordination study.

f. Apply testing label to equipment


A. Demonstration

1. Note corrective actions taken, deficiencies, recommendations and any general comments.

2. Finish recording data on test forms, completely filling in the blanks.

3. Turn in 3 electronic copies of report to CITY and ENGINEER for approval.


DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 13-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 22 13

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Dry-Type Transformers, 600V maximum.

B. Scope: Individually mounted dry-type transformers, 600V maximum, for general power and

lighting applications.

1.02 REFERENCES



2. ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01 – General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power

Transformers

3. ANSI/IEEE C89.2 – Dry Type Transformers for General Applications



1. UL 467 – UL Standard for Safety for Grounding and Bonding Equipment

2. UL 506 – Specialty Transformers

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA ST 20 – Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications

E. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)

1. NECA Standard of Installation

1.03 SUBMITTALS




components. Information to include outline and support point dimensions of transformer unit

and accessories, weight, kVA rating, primary and secondary voltage, % impedance, coil tap

configurations, insulation class, sound level, rated temperature rise, installation instructions,

wiring diagram, efficiency, inrush current, and UL rating label drawing.

C. Test and Evaluation Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports including the following

production tests: applied potential, induced potential, no load losses, voltage ratio, polarity,

and continuity. Manufacturer shall perform the following additional tests on units identical to


the design type being supplied to this specification, and shall provide test data sheets to prove

performance of these tests: sound levels, temperature rise tests, full-load losses, regulation,

and impedance. Include testing procedures and values obtained.

D. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Submit instructions for storage, preparation, and installation of

dry-type transformers.






format.




A. The manufacturer of the transformer as indicated by the label on the transformer shall be the

manufacturer of the major components within the transformer.

B. The manufacturer listed within this Specification has been selected for use on this Project.

All others need to be pre-approved by the CITY and ENGINEER before submitting.

C. All Transformers shall be UL listed and UL labeled.



B. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with

Section 01 60 00.









1.08 WARRANTY

Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in materials and workmanship


for a minimum of one year from the date of CITY acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. EATON / Cutler-Hammer

B. General Electric

C. Schneider Electric / Square D

D. Or Approved equal

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Core: Transformer core shall be constructed of high grade, grain-oriented, non-aging silicon

steel with high magnetic permeability, low hysteresis, and low eddy current losses. Magnetic

flux densities shall be kept well below core saturation point. Laminations shall be miter-cut.

Transformer core shall be clamped using insulated bolts through the core laminations to

provide consistent pressure throughout the core length. Completed core and coil shall be

bolted to enclosure base and isolated from base with rubber vibration-absorbing mounts.

Transformer core shall be visibly grounded to enclosure with a copper strap.

B. Windings: Transformers shall have electrically isolated primary and secondary windings.

Primary and secondary winding configurations shall be as specified. Provisions shall be

made to permit separate grounding of the neutral conductor and the enclosure.

C. Enclosure: NEMA 2, drip-proof or NEMA ST 20, Type 1 or NEMA 3R with supplied rain

shields based on NEMA rating of location, shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with

lifting provisions. Finish shall consist of degreasing, phosphate cleaning, and an electro-

deposited ANSI 61 enamel paint. Enclosure shall meet UL 506 requirements for the

following characteristics:

1. Ventilation Openings

2. Corrosion Resistance

3. Cable Bending Space

4. Surface Temperature Rise

5. Winding Compartment Temperature Rise

6. Terminations

D. Coils: Transformer coils shall be copper. Transformer coils 15kVA and above shall be

impregnated with varnish. Transformer coils 10kVA and below shall be encapsulated.

E. Taps: Transformers shall have the following primary voltage no-load tap arrangements

unless noted otherwise in plans: 15kVA-300kVA – six (6) 2-1/2 percent taps. 2 above and 4

below nominal voltage.

2.03 PERFORMANCE


A. Description: Factory assembled, air cooled dry type general purpose NEMA Premium

Efficiency transformer. Ratings as indicated on Drawings.

B. Primary Voltage: 480 Volts, 3 phase.

C. Secondary Voltage: 120/208 Volts, 3 phase.

D. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise: Transformers supplied to this

specification shall be able to operate continuously at 100 percent nameplate rating at ambient

temperature not exceeding 40 degrees C. Maximum temperature at top of enclosure shall not

exceed 50 degree C rise above 40 degree C ambient.

E. Sound Levels: Equal to or lower than 45 Decibels for 150°C, measured per ANSI C89.2.

F. Transformers shall meet or exceed the energy efficiency requirements of NEMA Premium /

US Department of Energy Candidate Standard Level 3 (CSL-3):

1. No load losses: Shall not exceed – 49W for 15kVA, 90W for 30kVA, 100W for 45kVA.

2. Efficiency: Shall meet or exceed DOE 10CFR Part 430 CSL-3 efficiency requirement,

tested per NEMA TP-2. 97.6% for 15kVA, 98.1% for 30kVA, 98.3% for 45kVA.

G. Transformers shall use properly classified UL approved temperature ratings. Provide a UL

recognized 220C insulation system capable of continuous operation at 40C ambient without

exceeding a 150C temperature rise. Temperature rise ratings shall be in accordance with UL

506. Provide transformers designed for 150C temperature rise unless otherwise noted on

drawings.

H. Transformer shall carry the fully rated load continuously when the surrounding air does not

exceed 30C/86F average, 40C/140F maximum and adjacent structures do not prohibit the free

movement of cooling air.

I. Transformers 15 KVA and above shall be able to meet ANSI/IEEE C57.96 daily overload

requirements. Transformers loaded in accordance with this paragraph shall be capable of

long service life under thermal conditions specified. There shall be no need for derating.

2.04 NAMEPLATES

A. Transformer shall be furnished with a non-corrosive diagrammatic nameplate, permanently

attached with non-corrosive hardware. The diagrammatic nameplate shall include the name

of the manufacturer of the equipment as well as the location where the transformer was

manufactured and tested.

B. The nameplate shall contain all connection and rating information in accordance with ANSI

C57.12.00, plus the approximate weight of parts to be lifted and the date of manufacture.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Verify that dry type transformers are ready to install.

B. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.


C. CONTRACTOR to verify that required utilities are available.

D. CONTRACTOR has obtained all necessary data to install the unit.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install required safety labels.

C. Transformer enclosures shall be bonded together and grounded.

D. Set transformer plumb and level.

E. Use flexible conduit, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make

conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.

F. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by

the manufacturer.



1. Inspect installed dry type transformers for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical

damage.

2. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections with calibrated

torque wrench. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions.

B. Testing

1. Transformer shall be fully tested in the factory prior to shipment. The manufacturer shall

retain a record of the performance testing.

2. Field testings shall be performed in accordance with Section 26 08 01.


PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution Panelboards – Circuit Breaker Type – Bolt In Design. Three

phase, four wire 208Y/120 volt circuit breaker type panelboard with current rating of 600-

amperes or less.

B. Scope: CONTRACTOR shall supply and modify panelboards as specified and shown on the

Contract Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES





1. UL 50 – Cabinets and Boxes

2. UL 67 – Electric Panelboards

3. UL 489 – Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures


1. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards

2. NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers


1.03 SUBMITTALS




components, including component list, assembly ratings (including short-circuit rating,

voltage, continutuous current), and terminal sizes. Manufacturer drawing shall be provided

and contain overall panelboard dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, conduit entry

locations, wiring gutter dimensions, nameplate designation, and one-line diagram for

applicable voltage.


panelboards.



B. Manufacturer Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit original manufacturer manuals,

installation instructions, and data sheets for products purchased.



format.




A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within

the assembly.

B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.

C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a

minimum period of five years.

D. The Panelboards shall be UL labeled.




C. Protect from weather, dirt and debris. Store in a clean, dry environment. Provide adequate

ventilation to prevent condensation.

D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.



equipment shall fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances





1.08 WARRANTY

Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in materials and

workmanship per requirements of Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer: Pow-R-Line with PRL 1a Clipper Power Visor Surge Protective

Device.

B. General Electric: AQ with internal Surge Protective Devices.

C. Square D: NQOD with internal Surge Protective Devices.

D. Or Approved equal.

The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do

not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved


from meeting these Specifications in their entirety.

2.02 RATINGS

A. Panelboards rated 480 VAC shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on the Drawings or as

herein scheduled, but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

B. Panelboards rated 240VAC or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on the Drawings

or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short-circuit rating. When series ratings are applied

with integral or remote upstream devices, a label or manual shall be provided. It shall state

the conditions of the UL series ratings including:

1. Size and type of upstream device.

2. Branch devices that can be used.

3. UL series short-circuit rating.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled. They shall be designed such that switching

and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without

removing the main bus connectors.

B Trims for branch circuit panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door over all circuit

breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall

have a semi flush cylinder lock and catch assembly. Door-in-door trim shall be provided.

Both hinged trim and trim door shall utilize three point latching. No tools shall be required to

install or remove trim. Trim shall be equipped with a door-actuated trim locking tab. Equip

locking tab with provision for a screw such that removal of trim requires a tool, at the

CITY’S option. Installation shall be tamper resistant with no exposed hardware on the

panelboard trim.

C. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be

accessible.

D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4

of an inch on all sides.

E. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the inside of

each door.

F. All locks shall be keyed alike.

G. Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide made from hot-dipped galvanized steel with

hinged door painted medium gray ANSI 61 enamel. Enclosure shall be rated for the area

installed and meet rigidity requirements per UL 50 standards.

2.04 BUS

A. Main bus bars shall be tin plated copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit

temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an

ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. Bus bars shall be insulated between phases for the entire

length of the bus.

B. A solidly bonded tin plated copper equipment ground bar shall be provided.


C. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards shown with

neutral. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence

phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each

outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%- rated neutrals shall be supplied for

panels designated on Drawings with oversized neutral conductors. Provisions for bonding the

neutral bus to the panel ground bus shall be provided.

2.05 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. The minimum short-circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be as specified herein

or as indicated on the Drawings. Panelboards shall be fully rated.

B. Circuit breaker shall be molded-case type, bolt-on type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-

break, single- and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein, shall be provided

for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped.

C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type with common type handle for all multiple

pole circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be minimum 100-ampere frame and through 100-

ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as

type SWD for lighting circuits.

1. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs,

emergency lights, energy management, and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm

panels.

D. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical at

240 volts, and 14,000 amperes symmetrical at 480 volts, unless otherwise noted on the

Drawings.

E. All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified, shall be fully equipped for future

devices, including all appropriate connectors and mounting hardware.

2.06 MAIN AND FEEDER PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded case circuit breakers shall have integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in

each pole.

B. Provide metal oxide varistor (MOV) surge protective device (SPD) integral within the

Panelboard that indicates the status and condition of the SPD, tested per NEMA LS-1, rated

IEEE C3 Combined Wave of 20kV and 10kA with 200kAIC internal fusing and listed /

labeled per UL 1449.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.

B. CONTRACTOR to verify that required utilities are available.

C. CONTRACTOR has obtained all necessary data to install the unit.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install circuit breakers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEMA PB 1.1

and NEC standards, and the Contract Drawings.


B. Install required safety labels.

C. CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing a printed, accurate panel directory for each

panel installed.



1. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and

grounding.

2. Check tightness of bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated

torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written specifications.


LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR

CONTROL CENTERS 26 24 19-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 26 24 19

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Factory assembled Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers (MCC), 600 volt

and less.

B. Scope

1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the quantity and type of 480 Volt Motor Control

Center (MCC) assemblies identified in the Contract Drawings. Also included are

necessary training, spare parts and installation/start-up assistance.

2. The MCC shall be furnished by a single manufacturer and shall be supplied with

accessories; enclosure type, finish and color described, and shall be designed for storage

and service conditions, including ambient, overload and unusual operating conditions, as

specified.

3. Design, construction and testing shall be in strict accord with latest revision of industry

standards and shall include as a minimum the applicable requirements of those listed

below. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining differences in the

listed standards and this specification and shall bring them to the attention of the CITY.

Where standards or specifications contain different minimum requirements, the more

stringent shall be used.

1.02 REFERENCES






C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 845 – UL Standard for Motor Control Centers



2. NEMA ICS 1 – General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems

3. NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control and Systems Controllers and Assemblies


F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): Title 29, Part 1910, Subpart S –

Electrical – Safety Standards for Electrical Systems

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for CITY review, prior to purchasing and fabrication, in accordance with the

requirements of Section 01 33 00:

1. All drawings shall be prepared in accordance with current industry standards and good

industrial practice. All information shall be in the English language, clearly readable,

with IEEE, NEMA and ANSI symbols, device numbers and other requirements.

Dimensions shall be English units (e.g., inches).

2. Submittal of typical drawings for similar MCC lineups is not acceptable. Uniquely

numbered and titled drawings shall be submitted.

3. Drawing or drawings showing single line, front elevation, dimensions, aisle space,

equipment weights, nameplate engravings, shipping splits, anchor bolt plan with

dimensions and device summary.

4. Incoming line section and MCC section base plans clearly defining space available for

power and control leads.

5. Elementary (schematic) diagrams including power and control of each unit. Elementary

diagrams shall include numbered terminal points, device designations, and all

interconnections to other units within the motor control center and to all associated

remote equipment, devices, and field instruments. Interfaces to systems and equipment

provided as work of other sections of this specification shall be fully coordinated by the

CONTRACTOR and shall be indicated on the elementary wiring diagrams.

6. Wiring (Interconnection) diagrams including power and control of each unit.

7. Include single-line diagram representation of each MCC.

8. Include conduit entrance locations and requirements.

9. Include interrupting, withstand and continuous current rating of bus bars, feeder tap units,

starter units, and main incoming units.

10. Time current curves for all protective devices.

11. The drawings are to have CITY’s equipment identification added.

12. Ethernet I/P architectural layout where used.

13. Provide manufacturer data sheets and catalog pages for all materials and components.

B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Include testing procedures and values obtained.

C. “As Shipped” Drawings

1. CONTRACTOR shall supply a complete set of “As Shipped” drawings.

a. The drawings shall consist of those previously submitted for review.

b. The drawings shall be supplied in a time frame not to exceed equipment shipment.

c. Elementary (schematic) diagrams of the Motor Control Center buckets. Diagrams

shall match those shipped with MCCs, and a copy shall be located within each unit.

D. CAD Drawing Format: CONTRACTOR shall supply CITY all drawings in AutoCAD

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


2005/2007 format on a CD. All Drawings, provided on paper or CD, shall be accompanied

with copies plotted (not scanned) to PDF. This will apply to preliminary through as-built

drawing releases.

E. Instruction Manuals

1. Contained in as many heavy duty locking type Post Binders with index pages as required.

2. Contains the following minimum materials: Provide in printed and electronic format.

a. Service & Maintenance Manuals for NEMA Starters/Contactors.

b. Manuals for thermal magnetic circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors.

c. MCC Installation Manual.

d. MCC Application & General Instruction Manual.

3. Quantity as indicated in specification section 01 33 00.

F. Spare Parts List: Furnish a list of recommended spare parts complete with pricing required

for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment.




data sheets for products purchased per Section 01 79 23.


format per Section 01 78 39.




A. All Work shall be performed and materials provided in accordance with NFPA 70 - National






B. The manufacturer shall have specialized in the design, manufacture and assembly of MCCs

for a minimum of ten years.

C. The manufacturer is to be ISO 9001 certified for the design and manufacture of MCCs of this

type.

D. Construction of all MCCs shall meet the requirements set forth by UL Publication UL845,

NEMA Publication ICS-2-322 and the National Electrical Code.

E. All manufactured standard units shall bear the UL label, and CSA certification where

required.

F. Tests called for in this Specification shall be made in strict accord with applicable standards.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


Certified test reports covering shop testing shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR to the

CITY and provided in the Instruction Manuals.

G. The Motor Control Centers shall be tested for satisfactory alignment, mechanical operation

and dielectric strength.

H. Service Personnel

1. The Manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide service organization, consisting of

factory trained field service personnel dedicated to the start-up, maintenance, and repair

of Motor Control Centers. The organization shall consist of regional and local offices.

2. The Manufacturer shall provide a fully automated national dispatch center to coordinate

field service personnel schedules. One toll-free number shall reach a qualified support

person 24 hours/day, 7 days/week, and 365 days/year. If emergency service is required,

response time shall be 3 hours or less.

I. Replacement Parts Stocking

1. Parts shall be available through an extensive network to ensure around-the-clock parts

availability throughout the country.

2. Recommended spare parts shall be fully stocked by local field service personnel with

back-up available from national parts center and the manufacturing location. The national

parts center Customer Support Parts Coordinators shall be on-call 24 hours/day, 7

days/week, and 365 days/year for immediate parts availability. Parts from the national

parts center shall be shipped within 4 hours on the next available flight out and delivered

to the customer's site within 24 hours.

1.06 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT)

A. The manufacturer shall organize and perform a Factory Acceptance Test per Section 01 75 02

– Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing.

B. Testing

1. The MCC shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the factory. After

assembly, the complete MCC shall be tested to ensure the accuracy of the wiring and the

functioning of all equipment.

2. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be shipped with each

assembly.

3. Factory test as outlined above shall be witnessed by the CITY’S representative at the

discretion of the CITY.

4. The manufacturer shall notify the CITY two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests are to be

performed. CITY or CITY’s Representative shall have the right to witness the testing of

the assembly at the factory at no additional expense.

C. Details

1. Download all parameters and configurations for across the line starters (ALS), and soft

starters (SS).

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


2. Full voltage test with a load (motor) for all Soft Starters.

3. Full voltage test with a meter for all ALSs.

4. Estimate five (5) days for all of the MCCs for this Project. Manufacturer to provide one

person for factory assistance during the FAT duration.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY in writing of his intent to ship not less than five

days before each shipment. At that time, the following information shall be supplied.

1. The method of shipment and carrier.

2. The estimated date of arrival at job site.

3. The number of packages, the overall dimensions, and shipping weight or each package.

4. The contents and Bill of Lading for each package.

B. The shipping container shall provide the following data with unpacking:

1. CITY's Name, Purchase Order Number and Equipment Number.

2. Manufacturer Name.

3. Identification consistent with the Bill of Lading.

C. Provide with the Equipment Shipment, in an obvious place, instructions for lifting, moving

and storage.

D. Equipment shall be suitably packaged for protection against damage, dust, and moisture

during transit and for short time outdoor storage.

E. The MCC shipping split shall be securely bolted to a skid capable of being moved by tow

motor.

F. CONTRACTOR shall accept materials on-site and inspect for damage.

G. CONTRACTOR shall store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions and in accordance with Section 01 60 00. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent

condensation.








LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


1.09 WARRANTY

CONTRACTOR shall warrant specified equipment per the requirements of Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Allen-Bradley

B. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer

C. General Electric

D. Square-D

2.02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Operating Ambient Temperature: Control room: 32°F to 104°F(0°C to 40°C)

B. Relative Humidity: 5-95%, non-condensing

C. Altitude: <3,300 ft above Mean Sea Level

D. Ventilation: Clean filtered air.

2.03 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

A. General

1. 480/277 Volt 3 phase WYE connected.

2. Solidly Grounded Neutral.

3. Voltage Variation: +10%, -10%.

4. Frequency: 60HZ.

2.04 GENERAL STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Each MCC shall consist of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid, self-supporting,

free-standing assembly, and shall be designed to permit future additions or rearrangement of

control units. Each vertical section shall be divided into compartments, which shall contain a

motor control unit connected to a common vertical power bus.

B. Individual vertical sections shall be fabricated from minimum 12-gauge steel top and bottom

frames. These steel frames shall be connected by vertical members consisting of steel box-

sills at each corner and minimum 13-gauge vertical channels.

C. Removable lifting angles shall be provided on top of each MCC shipping split.

D. Channel sills suitable for supporting the complete assembly shall be provided under the full

length of the MCC. These sills shall be an integral part of the structure, and shall be suitable

for attaching to a foundation.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


E. The MCC enclosure shall be designed to provide maximum protection against the specified

operating environment.

1. Enclosure type shall be NEMA Type 12 or as otherwise specified on the Drawings.

2. Gasketing shall be closed cell neoprene material.

F. Vertical sections shall have a nominal height of 90-inches.

1. The nominal standard width of each section shall be 20-inches.

2. Large reduced voltage starters may be mounted in vertical sections of greater width.

3. The nominal standard depth of each section shall be 20-inches, unless indicated otherwise

on drawings..

4. MCCs will be installed on a 3.5” high housekeeping pad. Manufacturer shall account for

this fact when designing breaker operator handles to meet the 6’-7” height limitation

required by the NEC.

G. The dimensions of all sections shall be as indicated. Actual dimensions may vary slightly to

conform with manufacturer’s standard dimensions. However, CONTRACTOR will be

responsible to ensure that any variations in dimensions, will still meet all of the working

space clearance requirements of the NEC.

H. Each section shall be dead-front and dead-back construction (unless Drawings or

Specifications specifically call for back-to-back sections).

1. Vertical barriers with insulating inserts shall completely isolate the horizontal and

vertical bus compartments from the motor starter area.

2. Rear access shall not be necessary for inspection, maintenance and power and ground bus

splices of MCCs.

3. On front-only MCCs, rear covers shall be provided.

4. Provide MCCs for front-only or for back-to-back construction as indicated.

5. Each vertical section shall have side sheets extending the full height and depth of the

section to minimize the chance of fault propagation.

I. The top and bottom of each vertical section shall be provided with an adequate conduit (or

cable) entrance area.

J. Each vertical section shall be provided with a top and bottom horizontal wireway extending

the entire length of the MCC.

1. The top and bottom horizontal wireways shall be isolated from all bus bars with a

grounded steel barrier.

2. The wireway opening between sections shall have rounded corners and the edges shall be

rolled back.

3. Horizontal wireways of back-to-back sections shall allow complete access from the front

section through to the back section.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


4. Horizontal wireways shall have removable covers.

K. End vertical sections shall have gasketed cover plates, which can be easily removed to allow

addition of future vertical sections, extensions of horizontal wiring troughs and horizontal and

ground bus.

L. Each standard vertical section shall have a vertical wireway extending the full height of the

structure.

1. This wireway shall be completely independent from plug-in buckets, isolated from the

horizontal and vertical bus and from adjacent vertical sections.

2. It shall have its own separate hinged door, and shall have no obstructions in the wire way.

3. Tie bars shall be provided in each vertical trough for cable/wire tie-down.

4. The vertical wire troughs shall intersect the top and bottom horizontal wire troughs for

easy cable routing.

5. A permanent wireway wall shall separate the units from the vertical wireway, and remain

intact even when the units are removed.

6. Minimum cross sectional area for the vertical wireway shall be 28 square inches.

M. Formed doors with concealed hinges shall be provided on the structure for: mains lugs, plug-

in buckets, unused unit mounting spaces, special units and all wireways. Doors shall be held

closed by means of 1/4 turn (or other approved means) captive fasteners and be removable.

N. The framework and the panels shall be chemically cleaned; hot phosphate treated, rinsed, and

given an eletrostatically applied baked coat of Epoxy powder paint - semi-gloss luster ANSI

No. 49 Grey. All structural bolts, nuts and washers shall be suitably treated to prevent

corrosion. All back plates of power cells, low voltage compartments and wireways shall be

painted high visibility gloss white.

O. Shipping splits shall not exceed 60”.

P. Removable top plate for cutting cable/conduit access.

2.05 BUS BARS

A. The main horizontal bus shall be rated as indicated on the single-line diagrams included with

the contract drawings and shall be tin plated copper and extend the entire length of the MCC.

1. Splicing horizontal buses shall be accomplished using a splice kit of the same ampere

rating as the horizontal power bus. Double stud bus clamp assemblies comprised of flat

washers and pre-assembled nuts with conical washers shall be used. These assemblies

shall provide a minimum of two bolted connections to each side of the splice. The splice

connections shall be front or top accessible for servicing with a torque wrench. The

location of all splices shall be indicated by a label located on the inside of the vertical

wireway door.

B. The vertical bus current rating provided in each section shall be determined by Manufacturer

and shall be 300A minimum or as indicated on the single-line diagrams included with the

contract drawings and shall be tin plated copper consisting of a single bus per phase of a

uniform cross section from top to bottom.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


1. For center mounted horizontal bus, the total ampere rating may be obtained with half of

the ampere rating of the bus extending above and the other half below the horizontal bus.

2. Vertical bus supports shall be formed of high dielectric strength, low moisture absorbing,

and high impact material with ample creep distance between bus bars. The vertical bus

shall be mounted in recessed channels of the bus support molding to protect against

accumulation of dust and tracking between phases. As a minimum, manual shutters shall

be available for isolation of unused stab openings so that personnel are not exposed to

live vertical bus bars and the bus is isolated from arcing faults.

3. The vertical bus shall be firmly bolted to the horizontal bus for a permanent contact.

B. Horizontal and vertical power buses shall be braced to withstand the mechanical stress caused

by fault currents.

1. Bus bracing shall be as indicated elsewhere in this Specification.

2. All ratings shall be UL listed.

C. Horizontal and vertical power bus ratings and material shall be as indicated elsewhere in this

specification.

1. Continuous current ratings shall be in accordance with temperature rise specifications set

forth by UL, ANSI and NEMA standards.

2. Maximum temperature rise of 50º Cover a 40ºC ambient.

D. A horizontal ground bus shall be provided in each section of the MCC.

1. Horizontal ground bus shall be ¼” x 1” tin plated copper run continuously throughout the

MCC.

2. Splicing the horizontal ground bus shall be accomplished using a splice kit of the same

ampere rating as the horizontal ground bus. See horizontal power bus splicing for

additional requirements.

3. Horizontal ground bus shall be located at the bottom of the MCC. Manufacturer shall

provide long barrel compression lugs (NEMA 2-hole spacing holes) on each end of the

ground bus for connection of 4/0 AWG copper conductor.

E. A vertical ground bus shall be provided in each section of the MCC.

1. Vertical ground bus shall be tin plated copper and run parallel to the power distribution

bus in each vertical section.

2. The vertical ground bus shall be connected to the horizontal ground bus to form a

complete internal grounding system.

3. The vertical ground bus in combination with the unit ground stab shall establish unit

insert grounding before the plug-in power stabs engage the power bus. As the unit is

withdrawn, grounding shall be maintained until after the plug-in power stabs are

disengaged.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


2.06 MAIN INCOMING LINE COMPARTMENT

A. Incoming Power Supply:

1. Line Voltage / Frequency: 480 Volts, 3 wire / 60 Hertz.

2. Main Bus Bracing: 65kA RMS Symmetrical minimum.

3. MCC Connection Type: Main Circuit Breaker

4. Incoming Line Compartment Location: As indicated on the MCC elevation drawings,

provided with the Contract Documents

B. The incoming power feeder enters the MCC from the top or bottom, as indicated on the MCC

elevation drawings, provided with the Contract Documents.

C. The incoming line compartment shall be of a height recommended by the manufacturer to

terminate the specified feeder cables without a TOP HAT, but in no case less than two space

factors plus the wireway.

D. The incoming line compartment shall be front accessible and isolated from the horizontal and

vertical wireways. The connection between the horizontal power bus and the mains lugs shall

be by bus. No cable connections allowed. The bus connection shall be rated no smaller than

the horizontal power bus.

E. Each mains lug pad shall have NEMA 2-hole spacing holes. One main lug pad per phase

shall be provided. Manufacturer shall provide long barrel, tin-plated copper, compression

lugs per phase (NEMA 2-hole spacing holes for ½” bolts at 1-3/4” spacing) on each mains

lug pad. No aluminum is acceptable. Lug size as indicated on the drawings.

F. Main Circuit Breaker disconnect shall be sized with frame and trip ratings as shown on the

single-line drawings. The interrupting capacity rating shall meet or exceed the available fault

current as determined by the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study, Section 26

05 73. Provide a circuit breaker with thermal magnetic trip unit for 400A and smaller frames

(unless otherwise noted on drawings); provide electronic trip unit for 600A and larger frames.

Provide one normally open and one normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contract which

follows the position of the circuit breaker main contacts for indication of “On” or

“Off/Tripped”. Main Circuit Breakers shall be frame mounted and shall be located at the top

or bottom of the section, as indicated on the single-line and MCC elevation drawings.

G. Incoming line section shall have a removable clear Lexan cover over all energized

components when unit door is opened for inspection. Lexan cover to be easily removable for

connections and IR scanning.

H. Main incoming line section shall contain two (2) current transformers with size as indicated

on the single line drawings. Class shall be C200 minimum. Current transformer secondaries

shall be wired to a short circuiting type terminal board GE type EB-27 or equal located in the

incoming line section.

I. MCC shall include a Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) to protect from transient

surges and electrical line noises. The surge protection devices shall be located within the

MCC and be as close as possible to the main incoming power. Suppressed voltage rating

shall be 1,500V peak at 480V system voltage. Surge current capacity shall be 160,000A per

phase. Assembly shall be UL rated and include status and shall include status lights for unit

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


on and functional, and loss of phase or device fault.

2.07 UNIT INFORMATION

A. Mounting

1. Plug-in units shall consist of a unit assembly, unit support pan and unit door assembly.

2. Each plug-in unit shall be supported and guided by a removable unit support pan, so

different unit arrangements are easily accomplished. The rearrangement of a unit support

pan from one location to another shall be accomplished without the use of special tools.

3. After insertion, each plug-in unit shall be held in placed by two (2) or more multi-turn

latches, located at the front of the unit. At least one (1) latch shall be located at the top of

the insert and one (1) at the bottom, for front accessibility and installation convenience. A

service position shall be provided with the unit supported in the structure but disengaged

from the bus. Padlocking shall be possible in this position.

4. Each unit shall be provided with removable pin type hinges that allow the door to swing

open at least 110°. Doors shall be removable from any location in the center without

disturbing any other doors. The unit doors shall be fastened to the stationary structure so

that it can be closed to cover the unit space when the insert has been removed. The unit

doors shall be held closed with a minimum of a single ¼-turn pawl type latch (or other

approved means) designed to contain forces during fault conditions.

B. Power Stabs

1. The unit plug-in power stab assemblies shall be tin plated copper for a low resistance

connection and designed to tighten during heavy current surges.

2. All full voltage starter units through NEMA size 5 and feeder tap units less than 225

amperes shall be of the drawout type. Drawout provisions shall include a positive guide

rail system and stab shrouds to absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus.

Drawout units shall have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No

wiring to these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment.

C. Handle

1. An industrial, heavy duty, flange mounted handle mechanism shall be supplied for the

control of each disconnect switch. This mechanism shall be engaged with the disconnect

device at all times as an integral part of the unit regardless of unit door position.

2. The operator handle shall pivot in the vertical plane. The on-off condition of the

disconnecting means shall be indicated by the handle position, red and green colored

indicators (which include the words ON and OFF), and the international symbols I and O

along with a pictorial indication of the handle position.

3. Handle shall also allow padlocking of the disconnect in the "ON" and "OFF" positions

with up to three (3) padlocks. All operating handles shall be of a non-conductive

material.

4. The operator handle of all units shall be interlocked with the unit door so that the

disconnect means cannot be switched to the ON position unless the door is closed. A

means shall be provided for purposely defeating this interlock during maintenance or

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


testing. This interlock shall also prevent opening the unit door unless the disconnecting

means is in the OFF position. An externally operated defeater requiring the use of a tool

shall provide access to the unit without interrupting service.

5. The operator handle shall be interlocked with the unit so that the unit cannot be inserted

or withdrawn with the operator handle in the ON position.

D. NEMA / EEMAC Wiring Class

1. NEMA/EEMAC Class I - Standard wiring diagrams for individual units shall consist of

drawings that identify electrical devices, connections, and terminal number designations.

Individual unit diagrams are supplied for each unit.

2. All power wiring shall have crimp type lugs for connections both internal to the unit and

for the external connection to the motor. No exceptions.

3. Soft Start

a. Separate terminal blocks are provided for control and power wiring.

b. Termination for motor lead wiring shall be crimp type lugs supplied by

CONTRACTOR. If power terminal blocks are the only option, then make sure to list

as an exception. Power terminal blocks are rated for a minimum of 90 deg C.

4. Non Soft Start

a. NEMA/EEMAC Type B: Pull-apart terminal blocks shall be supplied for user

control terminations for all field wiring and for all spare contacts for future wiring by

CITY.

b. NEMA Size 1 & 2: Power terminal blocks are rated for a minimum of 90 deg C if

required.

c. NEMA Size 3 through 5: Load power termination shall be 2-hole crimp lugs by

CONTRACTOR. If power terminal blocks are the only option, then make sure to list

as an exception. Power terminal blocks are rated for a minimum of 90 deg C.

d. Circuit Breaker Feeders:

i. 0-400A frame: Power termination on load side of circuit breakers shall be 1-hole

crimp lugs by CONTRACTOR.

ii. > 400A frame: Power termination on load side of circuit breakers shall be 2-hole

crimp lugs by CONTRACTOR

2.08 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS (MCP)

A. Shall be suitable for use in NEMA combination starters and soft start controllers.

B. Provide a minimum of (8) eight positive cam stops for the instantaneous setting.

C. Shipped with the instantaneous setting on the lowest value.

D. The motor full load current shall be used to determine the magnetic trip setting of the MCP.

E. A push to trip mechanism on the MCP provides a manual means for tripping.

F. The combination (starter plus MCP) short circuit withstand rating shall not be less than the

MCC Bus identified elsewhere this specification. MCP shall not utilize current limiting

fuses.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


G. CITY’s motors are almost exclusively premium efficiency IEEE841 design where new

motors are utilized. CITY’s distribution system may provide up to 5% higher than nominal

voltage at motor terminals. It is desired to avoid having to swap out similar frame MCPs in

the field due to nuisance tripping to obtain additional adjustability in excess of 1,300% of

FLC. Even worse is the situation where the nuisance tripping bumps into the next frame size

and the bucket design is affected. Manufacturer shall size the MCP taking into account

CITY’s motor choice to provide sufficient adjustability. CONTRACTOR shall be

responsible for obtaining and field verification of all existing motor data. Correction of any

field issues with inrush currents shall be at the MCC manufacturer’s expense.

2.09 THERMAL MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Shall be suitable for use in power feeders.

B. Rated Design-Frame & Trip (Percent): 80% unless otherwise indicated.

C. Interrupting Capacity (Sym Amperes): Equal to or greater than Main Bus listed elsewhere

this specification without the use of current limiting fuses.

D. Line and Load Terminal Wire Type: Copper.

E. 0-400A Molded Case Circuit Breaker Application Table:

Range of Application Range Fixed Fixed

Trips of Trips Thermal Magnetic

15-150A 15-150A YES YES

200-400A 200-400A YES NO

F. Greater than 400A Molded Case Circuit Breaker (unless otherwise noted)

1. Electronic RMS Trip Units (Standard).

2. Front Adjustable Trip Units.

3. Diagnostics not required.

4. System monitoring not required.

5. LSIG Capability.

6. 100% Rating.

G. MCC Feeder Breakers with Arc Flash Reduction:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Eaton – Digitrip RMS 310+.


2. Description: Electronic RMS Trip Unit with the following additional features – provide

local and remote selectable Maintenance Mode trip settings with dedicated analog

instantaneous sensing circuit to deliver faster breaker clearing times than instantaneous

for Arcflash Reduction Maintenance Switching (ARMS). Trip unit shall offer a contact

output for remote verification of trip setting, in addition to local indication at the breaker

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


of trip setting.

2.10 FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. The fused disconnects shall have blade type contacts and shall be supplied with fuse clips.

Fuse holders shall be for specified fuses only and shall reject insertion of other type fuses.

1. NEMA/EEMAC Starter Sizes 1 through 5 - UL Listed Class RK1.

2. Fusible Disconnect 30 through 600A - UL Listed Class RK1.

3. Fusible Disconnect 800 through 1,200A - UL Listed Class L.

B. 400-Amp fusible disconnect switch must be a minimum of 3½ space factors to allow proper

bending radius for a 3/C 500 kcmil cable which may be terminated on the switch.

C. Fusible disconnect switches above 400A shall utilize a bolted pressure contact switch with

visible blade disconnect mechanism.

D. Fused disconnect switches shall be so designed as to withstand the peak let-through current of

the selected fuse element without damage to the current carrying parts.

E. All fused disconnect switch conducting materials to be tin plated.

F. Units with side by side fused disconnects to be supplied only where indicated.

2.11 NEMA RATED CONTROLLERS

A. Disconnecting

1. Fusible disconnect switches shall be supplied in combination starter units where shown

on drawings and sized as shown in table below.

NEMA

Fusible

Disconnect

Starter

Size

Size

(Amps)

1 30

2 60

3 100

4 200

5 400

2. Motor Circuit Protectors shall be supplied in combination starter units where shown on

drawings.

B. Combination Starters.

1. Magnetic starters and contactors shall be built and sized in accordance with NEMA

standards for industrial control. They shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified. NEMA size

1 shall be the minimum size employed in any magnetic starter or contactor unit.

Contactors to have molded coils, replaceable contacts, and metal mounting plate.

2. The dielectric for the switching devices shall be air.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


3. Magnetic starters are UL certified to comply with IEC 947-4-1 Type “2” coordination

requirements when used with specified fuses/circuit breakers and overload relays.

4. Unit control power shall be provided by a control circuit transformer. It shall be mounted

within the unit with a VA of at least twice the total sealed VA of the starter including any

other loads as shown on drawings. The secondary side of the control circuit transformer

shall be 120V AC and have one leg fused and the other leg grounded. Primary protection

shall be by primary UL Class CC fuses.

5. Control wiring shall be #14 AWG, tin plated copper, 90° C, VW-1 Rated. Power wiring

shall be minimum #10 AWG, tinned or bare copper, 90° C, VW-1 Rated. Control

conductor color coding shall be manufacturer's standard with the exception that all status

and alarm signal circuits that will be powered from external sources, including the

process control systems, shall be yellow to indicate the presence of a foreign control

voltage.

6. Each contactor/relay is to be supplied with a surge suppressor on the coil.

7. Starter control wiring arrangement to be per wiring diagrams included with the contract

drawings. Motor starters will be controlled via traditional hardwired I/O from an external

PLC panel or via other hardwired controls, as indicated on the contract drawings.

8. Reversing and multi-speed controllers shall have both mechanical and electrical

interlocks between the two contactors.

9. Terminal Blocks shall be mounted within the unit insert located in front for easy

accessibility. Pull-apart terminal blocks shall consist of a male and female part held

together with captive screws on plug-in units for easy removal of the unit from the

structure. The terminals of both portions shall be recessed to isolate them from

accidental contact when withdrawn, Terminal marking shall be provided identifying all

terminations.

a. Control terminal blocks shall be pull-apart consisting of a minimum of 18 terminals

rated at 25A.

b. Power terminal blocks shall not be provided.

c. Terminal block rails shall not be mounted in the vertical wireways.

10. Each starter door is to be provided with an external low profile overload relay reset

button. The overload relay is defined elsewhere this Specification.

11. Contactor coils to be a maximum of 120VAC. Machine Tool Type Control relays shall

be used for NEMA #4 & #5 starters to reduce VA required for field and remote devices.

No exceptions. 480 VAC coil circuits shall be fused.

C. Overload Relays

1. The solid state overload relays shall provide protection for T-frame and U-frame motors

and shall meet NEMA Class 20 tripping characteristic unless otherwise indicated.

2. The overload relays shall have a tripping time as indicated by their Class under locked

rotor condition and shall be designed to trip within 3-seconds for phase loss conditions.

3. Ambient insensitive - Solid state electronics detect only the current actually going to the

motor and its effect in heating motor windings. The overload is unaffected by changes in

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


ambient temperature and shall be heaterless construction.

4. Overload trip indication shall be provided.

5. Self-powered - Generates its own low voltage control power through the same current

sensors used to monitor motor current. Control wiring to be similar traditional NEMA

starter. Loops of coiled wire to achieve proper ratio shall not be required.

6. Isolated hard contacts: 1 N.C. & 1 N.O.

7. Manual reset mode.

8. Overload relays shall be adjustable and contain a wide range of full load currents in the

adjustment range.

9. Short Circuit self-protection - In a short circuit, current sensors reach “saturation” and

limit generated voltage well below safe limits of the electronic circuitry so as not to

damage the electronic components in the overload device.

10. Unless noted otherwise, overloads shall be sized from Manufacturer’s overload selection

guide on the basis of TEFC motors with 1.0 service factor, based on listed motor

horsepower and full-load current provided by the CONTRACTOR. All new motors are

premium efficiency and have a 1.15 service factor. The 15% is retained as a thermal

margin for differences in the ambient between the MCC and motor location.

2.12 DOOR MOUNTED CONTROLS

A. NEMA Rated Controllers and Contactors – All devices to be 30.5mm NEMA Type 4/13

watertight/oiltight.

1. With controls as indicated on wiring schematics in the contract drawings, including:

Selector Switches, pushbuttons, LED type Push-To-Test (PTT) lights, and legend plates.

B. Soft Starters (NO SOFT STARTERS INCLUDED WITH THIS PROJECT) - All devices to

be 30.5mm NEMA Type 4/13 watertight/oiltight. Identical to NEMA Rated Controllers

above.

C. Reversing Starters: With controls as indicated on wiring schematics in the contract drawings,

including: Selector Switches, pushbuttons, LED type Push-To-Test (PTT) lights, and legend

plates.

D. Interconnecting wiring between door mounted devices and internal devices to route via the

terminal block with the exception of HIM wiring.

2.13 MOTOR TESTING PORTS:

On-Line Motor Monitor External Data Port. For new motor control centers, motor starters for

critical equipment, as defined by MSDGC (above 7.5HP or as shown on the single-line

diagrams); shall be furnished with on-line motor data monitoring devices as specified herein and

as indicated on Drawings. On-line motor monitor data port shall include an on-line motor

monitoring interface module, CTs, PTs (as required), wiring and panel mount connector plug

furnished by Baker Instrument Company division of SKF. The motor monitor interface shall be

the Baker/SKF Dynamic Motor Link EP1000 for use with the Baker Instrument Explorer Series

on-line motor testing equipment, without exception. The EP1000 motor monitoring equipment

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


shall include the EP Box pre-wired for voltage inputs, current input and mixed signal output port

connected to the EP1000 panel data port with the manufactured supplied MCC cable. The on-line

motor monitoring equipment shall be fully installed and wired in accordance with the

manufacturers published instructions and recommendations.

2.14 POWER METERING / ARC FLASH REDUCTION CONTROL STATION

A. Each motor control center shall be provided with a power metering system. The power

metering system shall consist of a digital microprocessor-based line metering system, current

transformers (located in the incoming line section) and fused potential transformers. Power

metering display module shall be furnished flush mounted in a 12” height bucket with a 30

amp circuit breaker for disconnecting the potential transformer primaries. The power meter

unit shall be removable. The main Current Transformers shall be run through a short

circuiting type terminal block type EB-27 located external to the removable unit. The power

meter shall be GE Digital Energy type Multilin PQM-II with Power Analysis / Harmonic

Analysis option (A) and an Ethernet interface (GE Multinet-FE serial to Ethernet converter)

installed, with no exceptions to match CITYs existing equipment, for future connection to the

CITY’s SCADA Ethernet switch. Power monitor and Ethernet interface shall be connected

per Manufacturer instructions using Serial cable interface – Belden 9841 or Equal. Power

meters are to be factory programmed with standard or basic metering parameters. Also

included in the bucket shall be the remote ARMs system selector switch and indicating light

(see below).

B. Each MCC shall be equipped with an Arc Flash Reduction Switch and Indicating Light. The

switch shall be a two position, maintained contact type. Light to be blue LED type to match

low voltage substation power circuit breaker requirements. Devices are to be wired to a

terminal block for connection to remote switch. See the Contract Drawings for the bucket

layout. Selector switch and indicating light shall be 30.5mm type. Lights shall be BLUE

24VDC LED design with push-to-test feature and clear plastic hinged cover. Both switch and

indicating light shall be wired to a terminal board located in this bucket. Relays, terminals,

DC power supply, lights, and selector switches required for maintenance mode operation

shall be provided. Relays and power supply shall be mounted in the breaker bucket with the

feeder breaker trip unit.

2.15 IDENTIFICATION

A. Each vertical section shall have a stamped metallic identification nameplate indicating serial

number, bus rating and vertical section reference numbering. The nameplate shall be

externally mounted near the center of the vertical wireway door of each section.

B. Units shall have an identification label, indicating either a catalog number or serial number

description, and shall be located inside of the unit compartment.

C. Each MCC and each door of every unit in the control center shall have an engraved iden-

tification nameplate.

D. Nameplates shall be equal to a laminated phenolic with white outer layers and a black center

layer and beveled edges. Lettering shall be engraved to produce black letters on a white

background. All nameplates shall be stainless steel screw fastened.

E. The MCC main nameplate shall be located at the incoming line compartment. The nameplate

shall be the Manufacturer's standard size but no less than 2-inch high by 8-inch long with 1-

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


inch high characters.

F. The unit door nameplate shall be 2-inch high by 6-inch long. The engraving will identify the

following with 1/8” letters: motor location number, equipment name, and MCC number

(including MCC number, vertical and compartment numbers).

G. For nameplate schedule for all equipment descriptions and location numbers, reference the

MCC loads lists in the contract drawings.

2.16 BLANK SPACE

Provide a minimum of 20% blank space for each motor control center supplied. Provide a

minimum of two 12-inch and two 6-inch blank doors for unused space. The blank space shall be

arranged, as a minimum, in 3-space factor continuous segments.

2.17 SPARE PARTS

A. The Manufacturer shall furnish a list of recommended spare parts required for normal

operation and maintenance of the equipment. The CITY will review this list with the

Manufacturer and determine which spare parts are desired.

B. Include startup spares and ship with the equipment.

C. Manufacturer shall provide information on any spare parts programs (on-site, off-site) that are

offered in lieu of simply ordering all required spares.

D. Complete spare buckets for feeders, combination starters, and soft starts shall be included as

indicated on drawings.

E. Refer to Section 01 78 43 for additional spare parts requirements.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


Verify existing site conditions prior to beginning Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of motor control centers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the

manufacturer and in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. CONTRACTOR shall adjust the circuit breakers to the lowest setting which will not cause a

false trip.

C. CONTRACTOR shall adjust the overload protection for each motor in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions, based on the actual full load amperes of the connected motor.

D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for programming all devices. Copies all programs to be

electronically provided to the CITY’s representative.


LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR



1. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit

the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment

installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in

operation, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected

and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of CITY.

2. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the

equipment has been properly installed; is free from any undue stress imposed by

connecting conduit or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and

that it operated satisfactorily.

3. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price for the number of days

and round trips to the site as required.

B. Field Testing

1. The MCC shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted on site. After assembly,

the complete assembly shall be field tested to ensure the accuracy of the wiring and the

functioning of all equipment. The main bus system shall be given a dielectric test

between live parts and ground and between opposite polarities per manufacturers

recommendations. Protect solid state devices from test voltages.

2. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test between live parts and

ground, in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

3. Test as outlined above shall be witnessed by the CITY’S representative at the discretion

of the CITY.



the MCC assembly.

5. Complete field testing of equipment functionality and condition is required.

6. Refer to testing Specification Section 26 08 00 for additional testing requirements.

3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide the following services for the system startup of the Motor

Control Centers:

1. Develop plan for checkout and startup activities.

2. Coordinate with plant personal to understand the process each MCC is applied on.

3. Coordinate with plant operations and maintenance personal to startup each MCC.

4. Refer to Section 01 75 01 – Equipment Startup and Verification Sequence for additional

startup requirements.


A. Training for CITY’s personnel.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR


1. Training Duration: Three (3) 4 hour sessions for up to 6 people.

2. Training Type: Certified Training: A portion of the plant electrical maintenance to be

trained and certified to execute any equipment warranty requirements. The

CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of a factory-trained instructor for the purpose

of training the CITY's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the Motor

Control Centers. Training shall address the theory of operation, MCC communications

systems, testing, troubleshooting and maintenance of the Motor Control Centers, in

accordance with Section 01 79 00. Each session shall cover the same material. Training

shall be certified on Form 44 00 00-B specified in Section 01 33 19.

3. Location: CITY’s plant site.

3.06 ATTACHMENTS

Refer to contract drawings for additional details for the motor control centers.


WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Wall Switches.

2. Receptacles.

3. Telephone Outlets / Data Outlets.

4. Wall Plates.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) – all devices shall be UL Listed for the current and voltage

specified.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)


2. NEMA WD 1 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

3. NEMA WD 6 – General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS




components, including component list, assembly ratings (including voltage and continutuous

current), dimensions and terminal sizes.


panelboards.






format.
















1.07 WARRANTY


per requirements of Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell.

2. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

3. Legrand - Pass & Seymour.

4. or Approved equal.

B. Product Description: Heavy-duty, AC only general use single-pole, double-throw snap

switch, NEMA WD 1, UL 20. Ivory plastic body with toggle handle.

C. Ratings: 120VAC, 20 Amps.

D. NEMA 7 Hazardous Areas: Class I, Division 1 (NEMA 7) two position snap switch. Switch

shall be factory assembled and sealed in an explosion-proof housing and UL Listed for

function indicated. Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS series switch, or Approved equal.

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:


1. Hubbell – 5362 series.

2. Legrand - Pass & Seymour – 2095W series.



B. Product Description: Heavy-duty, general use duplex GFCI receptacle which accepts 5-15P

or 5-20P straight blade plugs and includes provisions for testing and resetting, and indicating

light when device is tripped. NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.

C. Ratings: 120VAC, 20 Amps.

2.03 TELEPHONE OUTLETS / DATA OUTLETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Leviton.

2. Hubbell Premise Wiring, HXJ Series jacks.

3. Legrand – Pass & Seymour.


B. Product Description: RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, 4-pair UTP, TIA/EIA-

568-B.1. Complies with Category 5e and UL 1863. Data grade RJ-45 jack with beryllium

copper with min. 50 micro-inch gold plating contacts. Modular design consisting of 2-port,

single gang box. Jacks shall be color coded to indicate data or voice communications and

shall accept a machine-printed termination position label.

2.04 WALL PLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. O-Z/Gedney – Type FS-I-GFCA.

2. Hubbell.


4. Legrand – Pass & Seymour.

5. TayMac Corporation (weather covers).


B. Indoor Installations: Provide stainless steel or aluminum plate with gasketed spring-loaded

lift cover, rated for NEMA area designation.

C. Outdoor Installations: Provide clear In-Use type weatherproof lift cover for receptacles,

depth to be compatible with space from inside to outside panel doors to allow outside panel

doors to fully close.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


Verify that location of control stations is accessible to operators without obstruction.

3.02 INSTALLATION


A. Disconnect switches shall be mounted at a height of 48 inches above finished floor to bottom

of enclosure. Install switches so they are rigidly supported and readily accessible. Provide

stainless steel mounting channel or phenolic spacers to give nominal 1/2-inch separation from

concrete walls in wet or damp locations.

B. After all wiring terminations have been completed, terminals and terminal blocks shall be

sprayed with a silicone resin similar to Dow Corning R-4-3117 conformal coating.

C. For disconnect switches serving motors with space heaters, provide lamecoid nameplate

engraved "WARNING - Motor space heater energized with switch open".


LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

PROTECTION DEVICES 26 28 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 28 00

LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Disconnect switches

2. Terminal blocks

1.02 REFERENCES




C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 94 – Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for

Parts in Devices and Appliances



2. NEMA ICS-1 – General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems

3. NEMA ICS-2 – Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

4. NEMA KS-1 – Enclosed Switches

E. National CONTRACTORs Association (NECA): NECA Standard of Installation

1.03 SUBMITTALS








applicable voltage.


panelboards.



LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT





format.















1.07 WARRANTY



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Square D.

2. Eaton.

3. General Electric.

4. or Approved equal.

B. Disconnect switches for local lock-out or safety shall be 600 VAC, unless otherwise

specified, heavy-duty safety-type with an operating handle capable of being padlocked in the

“off” position. The switch shall have a positive, quick-make / quick-break mechanism.

Fusible switches shall be provided with Class R fuses rated as indicated on drawings. Line

terminals shall be shielded.

LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT


C. Enclosures shall have seal ratings in accordance with area NEMA rating, and NEMA 4X

enclosures shall be of stainless steel construction. Enclosure doors shall have a defeatable

door interlock to prevent the door from opening when operating handle is in the “on”

position.

D. Switches shall be rated for corresponding motor horsepower and shall comply with NEMA

KS-1.

E. Disconnect switches shall be furnished with an auxiliary contact for indicating switch

position to PLC. Auxiliary contact – 1 N.O./1 N.C..

2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES – ACTUATORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Allen-Bradley.

2. Eaton.


B. Description: Enclosed rotary disconnect switch for local lock-out of valve or gate actuators.

Switch shall be padlockable in the OFF position, allowing up to three locks. Rating – 600V,

3-phase, NEMA 4X minimum stainless steel enclosure. Provide auxiliary contacts – 1 N.O./1

N.C.. Rotary disconnect shall be UL listed.

2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates for all control stations, relays, motor contactors, MCCs, and disconnect switches

shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00.

B. Nameplates shall be machine engraved laminated white phenolic or lamacoid nameplates

with black lettering.

C. Nameplate engraving shall include the associated equipment description without abbreviation

and the equipment location number as defined by the CITY.

D. If changes to nameplate wording are changed prior to commencement of engraving, the

CONTRACTOR shall make requested changes without additional cost or time.

E. Engraving lettering shall be a minimum of 1/8” height.

F. Nameplates shall be attached with adhesive if mounting to a smooth, flat surface, or by

mounting clamp if being attached to conduit.

G. If instruments are mounted inside a panel, the tag numbers of instruments enclosed shall be

machine embossed on metallic adhesive labels and applied to interior of panel.

H. Nameplates shall be attached to panel surfaces, not to instruments.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Disconnect switches shall be mounted at a height of 48 inches above finished floor to bottom

of enclosure. Install switches so they are rigidly supported and readily accessible. Provide

stainless steel mounting channel or phenolic spacers to give nominal 1/2-inch separation from

concrete walls in wet or damp locations.

B. After all wiring terminations have been completed, terminals and terminal blocks shall be


C. For disconnect switches serving motors with space heaters, provide lamecoid nameplate

engraved "WARNING - Motor space heater energized with switch open".


LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS 26 29 00-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 26 29 00

LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Miscellaneous electrical control devices

2. Relays and contactors

3. Starters

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) ANSI/IEEE C2 – National Electrical

Safety Code


C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 94 – Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

2. UL-508A – Industrial Control Panels



2. NEMA AB-1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers

3. NEMA ICS-1 – General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems

4. NEMA ICS-2 – Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

5. NEMA KS-1 – Enclosed Switches

E. National CONTRACTORs Association (NECA): NECA Standard of Installation

1.03 SUBMITTALS








applicable voltage.



panelboards.






format.















1.07 WARRANTY



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All electrical and control panels shall be constructed to UL 508A standardards and shall be

UL Listed and bear the UL label.

2.02 CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manufacturer:


1. Allen-Bradley - 800 Series.

2. Square D - Harmony Type K.

3. IDEC - TWTD Series.

4. Cutler-Hammer - 10250T Series.


B. General: Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights:

1. Type: 30.5mm, heavy duty, watertight and oiltight NEMA rated devices. NEMA rating

to match enclosure type.

2. Terminals: Screw type for wire connections.

3. Legend Plates: Custom lettered, jumbo size, designations as shown on Drawings.

4. Contacts: 10A thermal continuous rating at 120VAC. Class A150 or higher.

Arrangement or Form as indicated on Drawings.

5. Approvals: UL listed, CSA certified.

C. Selector Switches:

1. Selector switches shall have maintained position contacts unless otherwise noted on

Drawings. Rotary operator.

2. Switches shall have contact blocks and have positions to match functions identified on

Drawings.

D. Push Buttons: Flush head, momentary contact type. Operator colors shall be, unless

otherwise noted:

1. Red - Stop.

2. Green - Start.

3. Yellow - Reset.

4. Black - all other functions.

E. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test, transformer type (120 VAC x 6 VAC), with LED lamps and

appropriate faceted plastic color cap. Lamp life of minimum 10,000 hours. Indication colors

shall be, unless otherwise noted:

1. Green - Running, Open.

2. Red - Stopped, Closed.

3. Amber - Failure, Transition.

4. White - Equipment Ready, Normal Condition.

F. Control Stations:

1. Independent or local control station enclosures shall be stainless steel or Rosite glass

polyester with NEMA rating to match location. Enclosures shall be UL 508 Listed.

2. Control stations shall be specifically designed for 30.5mm devices and shall have number

of openings and conduit hubs required for devices as defined on Drawings.


3. Control station covers shall have captive cover screws with oil-resistant gasket.

2.03 CONTROL RELAYS

A. Load-Switching Relays:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Allen-Bradley – Model 700-HK

b. Potter & Brumfield – Model KUP.

c. IDEC – Model RH.


2. Load-switching control relays shall be Allen-Bradley 700-HK Series slim line relay with

700-HK-DPDT socket base for 2-pole applications and Allen-Bradley 700-HA Series

tube base relay with 700-HN101 base for 3-pole applications, or approved equal.

3. Suppression on the relay coils should be used in all applications where the device

controlling the relay(s) does not implement “zero-crossing” switching.

B. Logic Level Switching Control Relays:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Allen-Bradley – Model 700-HK

b. Potter & Brumfield – Model KUP.

c. IDEC – Model RH.


2. Control relays used for switching solid-state logic and signal circuits shall be of the plug-

in type. Contacts shall, as a minimum, be two Form C, DPDT with a 5 amp rating.

Relay coil voltage shall be as indicated on the Drawings and used in part selection.

3. Suppression on the relay coils should be used in all applications where the device

controlling the relay(s) does not implement “zero-crossing” switching.

C. Time Delay Relays:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Allen-Bradley - Model 700-HT.

b. Potter & Brumfield - Model CG.

c. IDEC - Model RTE.


2. Description: NEMA ICS 5, solid state time delay relay, field adjustable, totally enclosed,

plug-in type mounted on heavy duty octal sockets with barrier protected screw terminals.

3. Functions: On-delay, off-delay, and interval timing.

4. Timing Range: 1-100 seconds..

5. Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form C, DPDT, pin-style terminals.

6. Contact Ratings: NEMA ICS 2, 10A. continuous rating at 120 VAC.


7. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz., AC.

8. Include tube base.

D. Alternating Relays:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Allen-Bradley Model 700-HTA.

b. Dwyer Instruments Series DPC.

c. Macromatic ARP Series.


2. Description: Switching relay to alternate between two loads.

3. Control Voltage: 120 VAC, 60 Hz.

4. Contacts: 10A SPDT, or as indicated on Drawings.

5. Housing: Industrial plug-in, 8-pin octal socket mounting, impact resistant dust cover.

6. Indicators: (2) LEDs indicating Load A or Load B active.

7. Life Expectancy: 10,000,000 operations – mechanical. 100,000 operations – electrical at

full load.

E. Seal Leak Relays:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Dwyer Instruments - Series SLD.

b. ATC Diversified Electronics - Model SPM.

c. Macromatic - SFP Series.


2. Description: Single channel relay for monitoring shaft seal leaks of submersible pump

motors with adjustable sensitivity range.

3. Control Voltage: 120 VAC, 60 Hz.

4. Contacts: 10A DPDT, or as indicated on Drawings.

5. Housing: Industrial plug-in, 11-pin octal socket mounting, impact resistant dust cover.

6. Indicators: (1) LED indicating leak detected.

7. Sensitivity Adjustment: 4.7k Ω to 100k Ω adjustable.

8. Life Expectancy: 10,000,000 operations – mechanical. 50,000 operations – electrical at

full load.

F. E-Stop Safety Relays

1. Manufacturers:

a. Allen-Bradley - Guardmaster MSR100, or Approved equal.

2. Single-Function Safety Relay for any coordination of E-Stop circuits.


2.04 NEMA RATED CONTROLLERS

A. Disconnecting: Motor Circuit Protectors shall be supplied in combination starter units where

shown on Drawings.

B. Combination Starters

1. Manufacturers:

a. Allen-Bradley.

b. Cutler-Hammer.

c. Square D.

d. General Electric.

e. Or Approved equal.

2. Magnetic starters and contactors shall be built and sized in accordance with NEMA

standards for industrial control. They shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified. NEMA size

1 shall be the minimum size employed in any magnetic starter or contactor unit.

Contactors to have molded coils, replaceable contacts, and metal mounting plate.

3. Enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel meeting NEMA 4X requirements. Mounting

height shall be 48” from concrete walkway surface to centerline of enclosure.

4. The dielectric for the switching devices shall be air.

5. Magnetic starters are UL certified.

6. Unit control power shall be provided by a control circuit transformer. It shall be mounted

within the unit with a VA of at least twice the total sealed VA of the starter including any

other loads as shown on Drawings. The secondary side of the control circuit transformer

shall be 120V AC and have one leg fused and the other leg grounded. Primary protection

shall be by primary UL Class CC fuses.

7. Control wiring shall be a minimum of #14 AWG, tin plated copper, 90° C, VW-1 Rated.

Power wiring shall be minimum #10 AWG, tinned or bare copper, 90° C, VW-1 Rated.

Control conductor color coding shall be manufacturer's standard with the exception that

all status and alarm signal circuits that will be powered from external sources, including

the process control systems, shall be yellow to indicate the presence of a foreign control

voltage.

8. Each contactor/relay is to be supplied with a surge suppressor on the coil (120V).

9. Starter control wiring arrangement to be per wiring diagrams included with the Contract

Drawings. Motor starters will be controlled via traditional hardwired I/O from an

external PLC panel or via other hardwired controls, as indicated on the Contract

Drawings.

10. Reversing and multi-speed controllers shall have both mechanical and electrical

interlocks between the two contactors.

11. Terminal Blocks shall be mounted within the unit insert located in front for easy

accessibility. Pull-apart terminal blocks shall consist of a male and female part held

together with captive screws on plug-in units for easy removal of the unit from the

structure. The terminals of both portions shall be recessed to isolate them from


accidental contact when withdrawn, terminal marking shall be provided identifying all

terminations.

a. Control terminal blocks shall be pull-apart consisting of a minimum of 18 terminals

rated at 25A.

b. Power terminal blocks shall not be provided.

c. Terminal block rails shall not be mounted in the vertical wireways.

12. Each starter door is to be provided with an external low profile overload relay reset

button. The overload relay is defined elsewhere this Specification.

13. Contactor coils to be a maximum of 120VAC. Machine Tool Type Control relays shall

be used for NEMA #4 and #5 starters to reduce VA required for field and remote devices.

No exceptions. 480 VAC coil circuits shall be fused.

C. Overload Relays

1. Manufacturers: to compliment starter.

a. Allen-Bradley.

b. Cutler-Hammer.

c. Square D.

d. General Electric.

e. Or Approved equal.

2. The solid state overload relays shall provide protection for T-frame and U-frame motors

and shall meet NEMA Class 20 tripping characteristic unless otherwise indicated.

3. The overload relays shall have a tripping time as indicated by their Class under locked

rotor condition and shall be designed to trip within 3-seconds for phase loss conditions.

4. Ambient insensitive - Solid state electronics detect only the current actually going to the

motor and its effect in heating motor windings. The overload is unaffected by changes in

ambient temperature and shall be heaterless construction.

5. Overload trip indication shall be provided.

6. Self-powered - Generates its own low voltage control power through the same current

sensors used to monitor motor current. Control wiring to be similar to a traditional

NEMA starter. Loops of coiled wire to achieve proper ratio shall not be required.

7. Isolated hard contacts: 1 N.C. and 1 N.O. When enclosed in a field-mounted panel,

provide an externally accessible reset push button.

8. Manual reset mode.

9. Overload relays shall contain a wide range of full load currents in the adjustment range.

10. Short Circuit self-protection - In a short circuit, current sensors reach “saturation” and

limit generated voltage well below safe limits of the electronic circuitry so as not to

damage the electronic components in the overload device.

11. Unless noted otherwise, overloads shall be sized from Manufacturer’s overload selection

guide on the basis of TEFC motors with 1.0 service factor, based on listed motor

horsepower and full-load current provided by the CONTRACTOR. All motors are


premium efficiency and have a 1.15 service factor. The 15% is retained as a thermal

margin for differences in the ambient between the starter and motor location.

2.05 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Manufacturers: Allen-Bradley (design basis), or Approved equal.

B. Terminal blocks shall be 600 VAC rated, captive screw with pressure plate type. Terminal

blocks shall be DIN rail compatible and include mounting hardware, end anchors, barriers,

markers, insertion bridges, etc. Allen-Bradley model numbers:

Circuit Breaker (120VAC) 1489-A Series

Terminal Block (120VAC and 24VDC) 1492-J Series (J4 min.)

Grounding Terminal Block (120VAC) 1492-JG Series

Fused Terminal Block (24VDC) 1492-H5

Fused Terminal Block (120VAC) 1492-H4

2.06 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE

A. Manufacturer:

1. Square D – Model SDSA3650.

2. Eaton – Model SP1.


B. General: Surge Protection Device must meet UL 1449 3rd

Edition requirements for a Type 1

SPD.

C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) shall not be less than 115% of the

nominal system operation voltage.

D. Response time shall be no greater than 1 nanosecond for any of the individual protection

modes.

E. The unit shall be UL1283 Listed.

F. The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal

stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal

impedance paths to each matched MOV.

G. Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation

for electric line noise shall be 50 dB or greater at 100 kHz.

H. Each unit shall be equipped with 200 kA IC internal fuses for short-circuit current protection.

The unit shall provide continuous monitoring of the fusing system.

I. Thermal detection shall be provided to monitor for overheating in all modes due to thermal

runaway.

J. Indicator lights shall be provided for each phase and shall indicate whether the circuit is fully

operational or a loss of protection has occurred.

K. The unit shall have a minimum total surge current capacity (8x20 microsecond waveform) of

40 kA per phase.


2.07 PANEL HEATERS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Hoffman/Pentair - DAH-series.


B. Product Description: Electric heater with operator adjustable thermostat range from 0°F to

100°F. Heater shall have aluminum housing, ball bearing fan, terminal strip with clamp

connectors, UL 508A Listed. Number and wattage of heaters shall be calculated and

determined based on the interior size of the completed panel. Power - 120VAC.

2.08 ADDITIONAL CONTROLS

A. Optical Float Switch:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cox Research – Opti-Float.

2. Product Description: Fiber optic-based level floats for explosion-proof areas. Float

activation shall be based on a beam of light from a transmitter in the control panel. The

float shall have no electrical components or metallic wires in the wet well.

3. Float switch shall have a stainless steel beam eclipser contained within a polypropylene

housing. Floats shall operate in liquid temperatures of 0-55°C. Fiber optic cable shall be

integral to the float, factory installed, and shall have sufficient length to be supported

before entering control panel and include 18-24” of slack for termination inside control

panel. Furnish stainless steel cable weights. Model number: OPTI-F1-XX-WT1.

4. Transceivers shall be 12VDC din-rail mounted unit. Provide one transceiver for every

two (2) floats. Refer to Drawings for total number of floats / transceivers required.

Model number: OPTI-TR2. Tranceiver shall include a 120VAC to 12VDC power

supply, Class 2 din-rail mounted. Model number: OPTI-PS1. All electrical components

shall be UL Listed.

PART 3 -EXECUTION



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Control stations and disconnect switches shall be mounted at a height of 36 inches above

finished floor to bottom of enclosure. Install control stations so they are rigidly supported

and located so as not to impair access to equipment for maintenance.

B. Install starters so they are rigidly supported and readily accessible. Provide stainless steel

mounting channel or phenolic spacers to give nominal 1/2-inch separation from concrete

walls in wet or damp locations.

C. After all wiring terminations have been completed, terminals and terminal blocks shall be



D. Level floats shall be hung at appropriate depths using rigid hooks and stainless steel braided

strain relief / support grip. All hooks and mounting material shall be stainless steel. Each

float shall be mounted from an individual hook. Floats shall be marked with permanent

labels inside the wet well. Fiber cables shall not be stretched, kinked, or placed in a bind.

TABLE 1

ELECTRICAL/CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE

Equipment

Designation

Location Enclosure

Type

NEMA

Area Rating

- Panel

Provided

by

M-B-51-0003/04 Pre-Aeration Sump Pumps #1&2 Panel NEMA 4X Contractor

M-B-51-0006 Grit Pump No. 1 LCS NEMA 4X Contractor



M-B-23-0029 Grit Pump No.1/2 Discharge Valve LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-23-0019 Grit Tank 1 Influent Slide Gate LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-23-0020 Grit Tank 2 Influent Slide Gate LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-23-0030 Grit Pump No. 2/3 Discharge Valve LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-23-0031 Grit Pump Discharge Valve to Vortex Separator 1 LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-23-0032 Grit Pump Discharge Valve to Vortex Separator 2 LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-03-0009 Grit Dewatering Conveyor 1 LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-03-0010 Grit Dewatering Conveyor 2 LCS NEMA 4X Eq. Mfr.

M-B-51-0009 Influent Sample Pump LCS NEMA 4X Contractor


VARIABLE FREQUENCY

MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 29 23-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Panel-mounted variable frequency drive motor controllers (VFDs).

B. Scope

1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the quantity and type of Variable Frequency

Drive (VFD) assemblies identified in the Contract Drawings. Also included are

necessary training, spare parts and installation/start-up assistance.

2. The VFD shall be furnished by a single manufacturer and shall be supplied with

accessories; enclosure type, finish and color described, and shall be designed for storage

and service conditions, including ambient, overload and unusual operating conditions, as

specified.

3. Design, construction and testing shall be in strict accord with latest revision of industry

standards and shall include as a minimum the applicable requirements of those listed

below. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining differences in the

listed standards and this Specification and shall bring them to the attention of the CITY.

Where standards or specifications contain different minimum requirements, the more

stringent shall be used.

1.02 REFERENCES






C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 508 / 508A – UL Standard for Industrial Control

Equipment and Control Panels



2. NEMA ICS 1 – General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems

3. NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control and Systems Controllers and Assemblies


1.03 SUBMITTALS

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


A. The following information shall be provided for CITY review, prior to purchasing and

fabrication, in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00:

1. Elevation drawings of enclosure including dimensional information, panel layout, and

conduit entrances.

2. Major component list with unit descriptions, including amperage ratings, enclosure

ratings, fault ratings, nameplate information, etc. as required for approval.

3. Wiring diagrams, including power and control diagrams.

4. Provide manufacturer data sheets and catalog pages for all materials and components,

including panel components such as contactors, circuit breakers and fuses, control power

transformers, pilot devices, and relays.

5. All drawings shall be prepared in accordance with current industry standards and good

industrial practice. All information shall be in the English language, clearly readable,

with IEEE, NEMA and ANSI symbols, device numbers and other requirements.

Dimensions shall be English units (e.g., inches).

6. The drawings are to have CITY’s equipment identification added.

7. Ethernet I/P architectural layout where required.




data sheets for products purchased per Section 01 78 23.


format per Section 01 78 39.



E. Test and Evaluation Reports: Include testing procedures and values obtained.

F. “As Shipped” Drawings

1. CONTRACTOR hall supply a complete set of “As Shipped” drawings.

a. The Drawings shall consist of those previously submitted for review.

b. The Drawings shall be supplied in a time frame not to exceed equipment shipment.

c. Elementary (schematic) diagrams of the VFDs. Diagrams shall match those shipped

with the VFDs, and a copy shall be located within each unit

G. CAD Drawing Format: CONTRACTOR shall supply CITY all drawings in AutoCAD 2007

format on a CD. All Dawings, provided on paper or CD, shall be accompanied with copies

plotted (not scanned) to PDF. This will apply to preliminary through as-built drawing

releases.

H. Instruction Manuals

1. Provide instruction / installation manuals for VFD and Operator Interface.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


2. Contained in as many heavy duty locking type Post Binders with index pages as required.

3. Contains the following minimum materials: Provide in printed and electronic format.

a. Service, set-up and maintenance manuals on drive controllers.

b. Manuals on drive diagnostics.

c. Manuals for individual cards on the drive controllers.

d. Service & Maintenance Manuals.

4. Quantity as indicated in Secification Section 01 33 00.

I. Spare Parts List: Furnish a list of recommended spare parts complete with pricing required

for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment.








B. The MANUFACTURER shall have specialized in the design, manufacture and assembly of

VFDs for a minimum of ten years.

C. The MANUFACTURER is to be ISO 9001 certified for the design and manufacture of VFDs

of this type.

D. All manufactured standard units shall bear the UL label, and CSA certification where

required.

E. Tests called for in this specification shall be made in strict accord with applicable standards.

Certified test reports covering shop testing shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR to the

CITY and provided in the Instruction Manuals.

F. Service Personnel

1. The Manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide service organization, consisting of

factory trained field service personnel dedicated to the start-up, maintenance, and repair

of AC Drives. The organization shall consist of regional and local offices.

2. The Manufacturer shall provide a fully automated national dispatch center to coordinate

field service personnel schedules. One toll-free number shall reach a qualified support

person 24 hours/day, 7 days/week, and 365 days/year. If emergency service is required,

response time shall be 3 hours or less.

G. Replacement Parts Stocking

1. Parts shall be available through an extensive network to ensure around-the-clock parts

availability throughout the country.

2. Recommended spare parts shall be fully stocked by local field service personnel with

back-up available from national parts center and the manufacturing location. The

national parts center Customer Support Parts Coordinators shall be on-call 24 hours/day,

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


7 days/week, and 365 days/year for immediate parts availability. Parts from the national

parts center shall be shipped within 4 hours on the next available flight out and delivered

to the customer's site within 24 hours.

1.06 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT)

A. The manufacturer shall organize and perform a Factory Acceptance Test per Section 01 75 01

– Equipment Factory Acceptance Testing.

B. Testing

1. The VFD panels shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the factory.

After assembly, the complete VFD system shall be tested to ensure the accuracy of the

wiring and the functioning of all equipment.

2. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be shipped with each

assembly.

3. Factory test as outlined above shall be witnessed by the CITY’S representative at the

discretion of the CITY.



the assembly at the factory at no additional expense.

C. Details

1. Download all parameters and configurations for variable frequency drives (VFDs).

2. Full voltage test with a load (motor) for all VFDs.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY in writing of his intent to ship not less than five

days before each shipment. At that time, the following information shall be supplied.

1. The method of shipment and carrier.

2. The estimated date of arrival at job site.

3. The number of packages, the overall dimensions, and shipping weight or each package.

4. The contents and Bill of Lading for each package.

B. The shipping container shall provide the following data with unpacking:

1. CITY's Name, Purchase Order Number and Equipment Number.

2. MANUFACTURER Name.

3. Identification consistent with the Bill of Lading.

C. Provide with the Equipment Shipment, in an obvious place, instructions for lifting, moving

and storage.

D. Equipment shall be suitably packaged for protection against damage, dust, and moisture

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


during transit and for short time outdoor storage.

E. CONTRACTOR shall accept materials on-site and inspect for damage.

F. CONTRACTOR shall store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions and in accordance with Section 01 60 00. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent

condensation.








1.09 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

A. Variable frequency AC motor drive shall be specifically designed for use in stand-alone

enclosures or panels. The same drive model shall be provided for similar horsepower motors

except for constant and variable torque differences, or as specifically indicated otherwise on

the contract drawings. VFDs 100 horsepower and greater shall be 18 pulse drives, unless

specifically indicated otherwise on contract drawings.

B. Each unit shall contain a microprocessor controlled, PWM adjustable frequency drive with a

motor circuit protector or fusible disconnect switch (see drawings) and door mounted Human

Interface Module (HIM).

1. A HIM shall be provided for each drive unit to perform the following basic functions:

a. Backlit LCD display with graphics capability.

b. Allow local or remote operation of drive starting and stopping and selection of

forward or reverse direction.

c. HIM to be capable of being removed and temporarily cable connected for local

operation within distance of cable.

d. Local digital speed setting.

e. Programming parameters.

f. Display Panel for drive status, error messages, and parameter values.

g. Upload / download capability for drive program.

2. Drive Options:

a. NEMA Type 1.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


b. Control circuit transformer with primary & secondary protection.

c. Constant Torque rating

d. English language.

e. HIM programmer/control with digital pot.

f. 120V AC Control – Interface Module.

g. Auxiliary contacts: drive fault and drive run.

h. Isolated analog input and output (4-20mA).

i. Line reactor.

j. Communications interface card – Ethernet/IP

k. Minimum drive HP: ¾

3. Hardware

a. Diode or fully gated bridge on the input.

b. DC bus inductor on all ratings or provide line reactor.

c. MOV protection with jumpers.

d. Common Mode Capacitors with jumpers.

e. Gold-plated plug-in connections on printed circuit boards.

f. Internal Common Mode Cores on drive output.

g. Microprocessor based inverter logic isolated from power circuits.

h. IGBT inverter section.

i. Customer interface common for all HP ratings.

j. Optimized for 4kHz carrier frequency.

k. Status and Power LEDs.

l. Status LEDs for communication status.

4. Control Logic

a. Operate drive with motor disconnected.

b. Controlled shutdown, when properly Protected (fuse or Motor circuit protector), with

no component failure in the event of a phase to phase or to ground short circuit.

c. Thermal manage to provide full protection of the power devices by reducing PWM

frequency, and output speed.

d. Adjustable PWM carrier frequency within a range of 2-10kHz.

e. Selectable vector control or V/Hz.

f. Overload:

i. Rated current continuously.

ii. 110% overload capability for up to 1 minute.

iii. 150% overload capability for up to 30 seconds.

g. Multiple programmable stop modes.

h. Multiple acceleration and deceleration rates.

i. Programmable speed setpoints with input terminals identified.

j. Protection for loss of an input or output phase.

k. Output frequency: 0-400Hz

l. The drive will provide UL listed Class 10 motor overload protection.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


5. Data Communication Interface

a. Single point interface board for data communication through Ethernet/IP link.

b. Interface shall permit discrete transfer of operating and speed control commands to

the VFD.

c. Interface shall permit discrete transfer of VFD operating status to PLC.

d. All VFD programmable setup parameters shall be read/write accessible through the

Ethernet/IP communication interface.

e. Interface board shall have a configurable communication rate.

f. Discrete conditions and status indication for hard-wire control interface shall be

configured to be available for control and monitoring across the Ethernet/IP interface.

C. VFD Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley Powerflex (as supplied by CBT Company, Inc.).

1. Supplier shall be CBT Company; 737 6th Street, Cincinnati, Ohio 45203. Contractor

shall use CBT Company for the base bid. Alternative suppliers would be considered by

the CITY, but they must be listed as a bid substitution with a deduct amount provided for

the bid. The CITY will evaluate the alternate vendor and lower cost provided.

2.02 ENCLOSURES

A. Variable frequency drives shall be mounted in enclosures having a NEMA rating matching

the area being installed, as defined on contract drawings. Cabinets shall be fabricated using

12-gauge (minimum) sheet stainless steel or aluminum. Cabinets shall be provided with an

interior frame or otherwise formed so as to provide a rigid structure.

B. Enclosures shall be front accessible. Enclosures shall be designed for wall mounting or free-

standing applications and shall not require clearance from the back of the panel for

ventilation or other purposes.

C. Enclosure layouts shall be designed for entry and exit of cables, as required.

D. Design for panel controls shall be per Section 26 29 00.

2.03 DISCONNECT

A. Enclosures shall include a door-interlocked disconnect switch or molded case circuit breaker

type motor circuit protector, with an exterior-accessible lockable operator. If a disconnect

switch is provided, fast-acting drive branch circuit fusing shall be installed to protect against

internal faults or external load faults.

B. An auxiliary contact shall be furnished with the disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

for use as a disconnecting means for any external control voltage source within the enclosure,

and to indicate power status to Plant SCADA system.


A. Terminal blocks shall be 600VAC rated, captive screw with pressure plate type. Terminal

blocks shall be DIN rail compatible and include mounting hardware, end anchors, barriers,

markers, insertion bridges, etc.

B. Manufacturers: Allen-Bradley or Approved equal.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


C. Components and Allen-Bradley model numbers:

1. Circuit Breaker (120VAC) 1489-A Series

2. Terminal Block (120VAC and 24VDC) 1492-J Series (J4 min.)

3. Grounding Terminal Block (120VAC) 1492-JG Series

4. Fused Terminal Block (24VDC) 1492-H5

5. Fused Terminal Block (120VAC) 1492-H4

2.05 DOOR MOUNTED CONTROLS

A. Variable Frequency Drives - All devices to be 30.5mm NEMA Type 4/13 watertight/oiltight.

1. On/Off/Remote switch. In “ON” position, the VFD will run as long as there are no faults

and the stop pushbuttons are not pressed. The speed will be determined based on the

speed selected with the HIM. In “Remote” position, the VFD will be started and stopped

based on remote signals from the CITY SCADA system. Include engraved legend plate

“ON/OFF/REMOTE”.

2. HIM mounted in drive door. This device must be capable of: storing drive control

parameters, being removed while drive is operating and writing drive parameters to

another drive.

3. Auto/Manual switch on HIM to allow switching from CITY’s remote control to local

HIM control. Control refers to speed and discrete logic.

4. Red LED transformer type PTT light with engraved legend plate “STOPPED”.

5. Green LED transformer type PTT light with engraved legend plate “RUNNING”.

7. Amber LED transformer type PTT light with engraved legend plate “ALARM”.

8. Additional controls specific to the Manufacturer’s equipment may be added.

B. Interconnecting wiring between door mounted devices and internal devices to route via the

terminal block with the exception of HIM wiring.

2.06 MOTOR TESTING PORTS:

On-Line Motor Monitor External Data Port: New VFDs above 7.5 HP shall be furnished with an

on-line motor data monitoring device as specified herein and as indicated on drawings. On-line

motor monitor data port shall include an on-line motor monitoring interface module, CTs, PTs (as

required), wiring and panel mount connector plug furnished by Baker Instrument Company

division of SKF. The motor monitor interface shall be the Baker/SKF Dynamic Motor Link

EP1000 for use with the Baker Instrument Explorer Series on-line motor testing equipment,

without exception. The EP1000 motor monitoring equipment shall include the EP Box pre-wired

for voltage inputs, current input and mixed signal output port connected to the EP1000 panel data

port with the manufactured supplied cable. The on-line motor monitoring equipment shall be

fully installed and wired in accordance with the manufacturers published instructions and

recommendations.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


2.07 COMMUNICATION – ETHERNET INDUSTRIAL PROTOCOL (ETHERNET/IP)

A. Provide EtherNet/IP communication module connected to VFD.

B. Standard: EtherNet IEEE 802.3, TCP/IP protocol suite, and CIP (Common Industrial

Protocol), the real-time I/O and information protocol.

C. Supports both time-critical (implicit) and non time critical (explicit) message transfer services

of CIP. Exchange of time-critical messages is based on producer/consumer model where a

transmitting device produces data on a network and many receiving devices can consume this

data simultaneously.

D. Refer to Specification 27 21 00 for 600V-rated Ethernet cable.

E. Provide an EtherNet/IP switch in the VFD enclosure.

1. Full duplex capability on all ports.

2. VLAN.

3. 25% SPARE switch inputs.

4. Manufacturer: Hirschmann SPIDER Industrial Ethernet rail switch, 10/100BASE-TX-

ports as required, with Hirschmann RPS-30 24VDC DIN-rail power supply unit.

5. Quantity: (1) switch and (1) power supply per VFD panel.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


Verify existing site conditions prior to beginning Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of variable frequency drives shall be in accordance with the recommendations of

the manufacturer and in accordance with the contract documents.

B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for programming all devices. Copies of all programs to

be electronically provided to the CITY’s representative.



1. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer shall visit

the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment

installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in

operation, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected

and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of CITY.

2. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


equipment has been properly installed; is free from any undue stress imposed by

connecting conduit or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and

that it operated satisfactorily.

3. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price for the number of days

and round trips to the site as required.

B. Field Testing

1. The VFD enclosure shall be completely installed, wired, and adjusted on site. After

installation, the complete system shall be field tested to ensure the accuracy of the wiring

and the functioning of all equipment.

2. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test between live parts and

ground, in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

3. Test as outlined above shall be witnessed by the CITY’S representative at the discretion

of the CITY.



the VFD assembly.

5. Complete field testing of equipment functionality and condition is required.

6. Refer to testing specification Section 26 08 00 for additional testing requirements.

3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide the following services for the system startup of the

Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)

1. Develop plan for checkout and startup activities.

2. Coordinate with plant personal to understand the process each drive is applied on.

3. Coordinate with plant operations and maintenance personal to startup each drive.

4. Startup activities shall include but not be limited to: pre-power check, megger motor

resistances, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground check, verify system grounding,

connections, and drive tuning for system operation.

5. Startup measurements and drive parameters shall be recorded and provided to CITY.

6. Refer to Section 01 75 02 – Equipment Startup and Checkout for additional system

startup requirements.


A. Training for CITY’s personnel: Training Duration

1. Three (3) 2 hour sessions for up to 6 people.

B. Training Type: Certified Training: A portion of the plant electrical maintenance to be trained

and certified to execute any equipment warranty requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall

provide the services of a factory-trained instructor for the purpose of training the CITY's

VARIABLE FREQUENCY


personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the Variable Frequency Drives.

Training shall address the theory of operation, VFD communications systems, testing,

troubleshooting and maintenance of the Variable Frequency Drives, in accordance with

Section 01 79 00. Each session shall cover the same material. Training shall be certified on

Form 44 00 00-B specified in Section 01 33 19.

1. Location: CITY’s plant site.

3.06 ATTACHMENTS

Refer to contract drawings for additional details for the variable frequency drives.

TABLE 1

VFD SCHEDULE

Equipment

Designation

Location Panel Number Motor

HP

NEMA Area

Rating - Panel

Provided by

M-B-03-0009 Grit Dewatering Conveyor 1 M-B-35-0008 0.33 NEMA 12 Eq. Mfr.

M-B-03-0010 Grit Dewatering Conveyor 2 M-B-35-0009 0.33 NEMA 12 Eq. Mfr.


VARIABLE FREQUENCY



LIGHTING 26 50 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 26 50 00

LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Interior Luminaries – Fluorescent

2. Luminaries - LED

3. Emergency Lighting Units

4. Exit Signs

5. Classified Location Lighting – NEMA 7

6. Luminaries – Metal Halide

7. Go / No-Go Lights

8. Incandescent Fixtures

9. Poles

10. Motion Sensors

1.02 REFERENCES





2. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

C. ANSI International (ANSI)

1. ANSI C82.11 – High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

2. ANSI C82.1 – Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast

3. ANSI C78 – Electric Lamps

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. ANSI/UL 935 – Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts




F. National Contractors Association (NECA)

1. NECA Standard of Installation

1.03 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer data sheets, catalog pages, dimensions, ratings,

photometric data and performance data for all fixtures supplied. Information shall be

organized by fixture type.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide installation drawings for review with ENGINEER prior to

installation. Indicate dimensions and components for each lighting fixture that is not a

standard product of the manufacturer.

D. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Submit instructions for storage, preparation, and installation of

lighting fixtures.




data sheets for products purchased. Include replacement parts list.


format of actual locations of each lighting fixture.


All Work shall be performed and materials provided in accordance with NFPA 70 - National











A. General

1. Verify locations of lighting fixtures prior to rough-in.


2. Lighting fixtures are shown on plan drawings in approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Adjust location and mounting to eliminate conflicts with other equipment

and structures at no additional cost to CITY. Install at locations and heights required for

uniform illumination.

1.08 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES – FLUORESCENT [D, T8]

A. Description: Two-lamp high-efficiency electronic fluorescent fixture with instant start

NEMA Premium Efficiency electronic ballast, high PF, Energy efficient, CBM certified.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Holophane – HES series (gasketed).

2. Lithonia – DMW-series (gasketed) / AF-series (open).

3. Columbia Lighting – KL-series (open).

C. Housing - Electrical Rooms [T8]: Metal with white baked enamel finish. Turret style, heavy

duty industrial, 20% up light.

D. Housing - Process areas [D]: Fiberglass body, enclosed and gasketed housing, acrylic lens.

D. Lamps: Two 32W T8 fluorescent tubes, 48” length ea.

E. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60HZ, MVOLT.

F. Mounting: Pendant mount from ceiling.

G. Accessories: Wire guards for all open style fixtures.

2.02 LUMINAIRES – LED [L1, L2, L3, L4]

A. Description: Industrial wet location rated [L1, L3] or Hazardous location rated [L2], LED

fixture, dedicated thermal management, fused.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Holophane – Petrolux LED series (PLED2) or Petrolux LED series (HPLED).


C. Housing: Cast aluminum housing with Type 5 low angle borosilicate glass reflector –

gasketed. Ratings - NEMA 4X, IP66, UL 1598 Listed.

D. Lamps: LED module with 5,000K CCT+/-250 color temperature. Lumens shall be 12,000

[L1] or 18,000 [L3] as identified on Schedule.

E. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60Hz, Auto-sensing. Include 6kV/3kA surge protection. Fault


tolerant design – continues to operate after single LED failure.

F. Mounting: Pendant, ceiling, stanchion mount – as identified on Schedule.

G. Accessories: High-Bay units shall include safety chain kit. Outdoor units shall include

photoelectric cell control.

H. Description: Industrial high mast area lighting [L4], LED fixture, with thermal management.

I. Manufacturers:

1. American Electric Lighting (AEL) – Autobahn Series ATB2.


J. Housing: Cast aluminum housing with enhances corrosion resistant finish option. Rated for

outdoor use, IP66.

K. Lamps: LED modules with 5,000K CCT+/-250 color temperature. Lumens shall be 24,500

minimum as identified on Schedule. Distribution shall be Roadway Type IV.

L. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60Hz, MVOLT. Include IEEE/ANSI C62.41 Category C

(10kV/5kA) or greater surge protection built into housing. Fault tolerant design – continues

to operate after single LED failure.

M. Mounting: Pole. Housing shall be compatible to mount to existing 40’-0” high mast poles at

the Muddy Creek Treatment Plant. Furnish all mounting adapters and hardware required for

mounting to existing poles.

N. Accessories: Outdoor units shall include complete photoelectric cell control, including

photocell and photocontrol receptacle.

2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS [E]

A. Description: Self-contained incandescent emergency lighting unit.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Lithonia – INDX series.

2. Holophane – DeSoto M60 series.

3. Thomas & Betts – E12NN series.

C. Housing: Polyester / thermoplastic, NEMA 4 rated for industrial areas.

D. Lamps: 50W/54W , 12V, 2-head halogen.

E. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60 Hz.

F. Mounting: Wall mount.

G. Battery: Lead calcium.

H. Battery Charger: Current limiting regulated charger.

I. Rated Emergency Power: 90-minute minimum.


J. Accessories: Self-Diagnostics.

2.04 EXIT SIGNS [X]

A. Description: Combination exit sign with 2-head emergency lighting unit, LED sign lights.

B. Manufacturers: Thomas & Betts – SVX Combo series.

C. Housing: Gray / black thermoplastic body.

D. Face: Clear polycarbonate face with red letters.

E. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment.

F. Lamps: Sign – High-efficiency LEDs. Emergency heads – (2) 12-Watt MR-16 halogen

lamps.

G. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60 Hz.

H. Mounting: Wall mount above doorway.

I. Battery: Nickel cadmium.

J. Battery Charger: Continuous charger with periodic pulse charge at battery full capacity,

brownout, over-current, short-circuit protection.

K. Rated Emergency Power: 90-minutes.

2.05 CLASSIFIED LOCATION LIGHTING – NEMA 7 [A4]

A. Description: Wallpack metal halide for hazardous areas, NFPA Class I, Div. 2 rated fixture,

non-cutoff, fused.

B. Manufacturers: Holophane - Wallpack IV Hazardous series or Approved equal.

C. Housing: Cast aluminum reflector housing with borosilicate glass reflector.

D. Lamps: 100W metal halide.

E. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60Hz, MVOLT.


G. Accessories: NEMA decal. Outdoor units shall include photoelectric cell control.

2.06 LUMINARIES – METAL HALIDE [A6]

A. Description: Wallpack metal halide, non-cutoff, fused, standard optics.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Holophane - Wallpack IV series.

2. Lithonia – TWH series.



C. Housing: Cast aluminum reflector housing with borosilicate glass reflector.

D. Lamps: 100W metal halide.

E. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60Hz, MVOLT.


G. Accessories: Outdoor units shall have photoelectric cell control – integral.

2.07 LUMINARIES – GO / NO-GO LIGHTS [G]

A. Description: Tower alarm lights, stackable, 70mm steady LED module.

B. Manufacturers: Allen-Bradley 855T series.

C. Housing: Polycarbonate construction, black base and cap. NEMA 4X rating.

D. Lamps: LED. Colors as indicated on wiring diagrams or fixture schedule.

E. Input Voltage: 120VAC, 60Hz.

F. Mounting: Wall-mount bracket.

G. Accessories: Sound module when specifically noted.

2.08 LUMINARIES – INCANDESCENT FIXTURES [I]

A. Description: Wet location fixture for use with standard incandescent light bulbs.

B. Manufacturers: Cooper Crouse-Hinds – VaporGard VX, or Approved equal.

C. Housing: Aluminum body, glass globe, 1-1/4” hub, housing for A-21 lamp.

D. Lamps: 14W LED bulb. Mfr: Sylvania, Philips.

E. Input Voltage: 120VAC.

F. Mounting: Stanchion mount.

2.09 LUMINARIES – POLES

A. Description: Square straight aluminum pole, 4” square, height as required for fixture height

listed in Schedule. Pole construction per local EPA NON-AASHTO rating. Assembly shall

include hand hole, pole base, nut covers. Satin brush finish. Stainless steel hardware.

B. Manufacturers: Holophane, Lithonia, or Approved equal.

2.10 MOTION SENSORS

A. Description: Fixture mount or ceiling mount self-contained occupancy sensor providing 360

degree lens, low bay (8’ – 25’) coverarge. Sensor shall use passive infrared detection

technology with microprocessor control and operate at line voltage (120V). Sensor model

shall provide square foot coverage adequate for each space identified. Fixture shall have

selectable manual timer settings between 30 seconds and 30 minutes. Color – off-white.


B. Manufacturers: Levition – OSFHU series or ODC series, or Approved equal.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Verify existing conditions before starting Work.

B. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires.

C. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers or chain hangers.

Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. Furnish and install

any support steel required for suspension of luminaires.

C. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with

each other. Secure to prohibit movement.

D. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled.

E. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

F. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets using flexible conduit per Specification 26 05 33,

or as indicated.

G. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions within luminaire.

H. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.

I. Ground and bond interior luminaires and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment

grounding conductor.

J. Exterior luminaries shall not use handrail as part of the support structure – they must be

independently and rigidly supported.

K. Pole lights located in NFPA Classified areas shall have conduit seal fittings located inside

pole – install pole over top of conduit with seal fitting and anchor.

L. Motion sensors shall be mounted to have an unobstructed sensor view of the entire space and

shall be located near the entrance to the space. Sensors shall be rigidly mounted to fixture or

ceiling. Provide all hardware and boxes required for mounting.



B. Testing: Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper


connection and operation.

3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP

Commissioning: Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.


DATA COMMUNICATIONS

NETWORK EQUIPMENT 27 21 00-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 27 21 00

DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Fiber Patch Panels

2. Ethernet Switches

3. Communications Cabling

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 262 – Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables

for Use in Air-Handling Spaces

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 2043 – Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and their

Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.National Electrical Manufacturers

Association (NEMA)

1.03 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer data sheets, catalog pages, dimensions, ratings,

photometric data and performance data for all fixtures supplied. Information shall be

organized by fixture type.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide installation drawings for review with ENGINEER prior to

installation. Indicate dimensions and components for each lighting fixture that is not a

standard product of the manufacturer.

D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection.

E. Fiber Optic Cables: The following additional information is to be included in the submittal:

1. Cut sheets and catalog literature for proposed fiber optic cable, and fiber optic cable

accessories (pigtails, connectors, etc.)

2. Manufacturer specifications and data that clearly shows that the fiber optic cable meets

all requirements specified herein.

3. Sample of the proposed cable.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


4. Physical dimension drawings of all fiber optic accessories.

5. Proposed fiber identification sequence and labeling.

6. Provide a Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL).

7. Provide a list of recommended special tools for fiber installation testing or maintenance.

8. Cable pulling plan that specifies the sequence of work tasks, materials, and equipment.

9. Provide an optical link analysis for each fiber optic link. Calculate point-to-point

(transmit/receive) optical power loss of each fiber link using proposed installed cable

lengths. Include all losses through connectors and patch panels. Submit calculated values

including sketches graphically showing the proposed cable route.

10. Provide a point-to-point interconnection cable diagram clearly depicting and identifying

actual cable routing through all new and existing raceway. Include cables, connectors,

patch panels, and media converters.

F. Network Cabling Schedule: Contractor to submit network cable schedule. Actual cable length

required to be verified in the field by the Contractor.

G. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Submit instructions for storage, preparation, and installation of

lighting fixtures.




data sheets for products purchased. Include replacement parts list.


format of actual locations of each lighting fixture.








B. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum

three years experience, and with service facilities within 50 miles of project. Installing

company to employ Fiber Optic Association (FOA) certified or MSD approved equal

installers.

C. Testing Agency: Company member of International Electrical Testing Association and

specializing in testing products specified in this section with minimum three years

experience.

D. All connections to the CITY's existing network shall be fully coordinated between the CITY

and the CONTRACTOR. Prior to connecting to the existing network, the CONTRACTOR

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


shall provide a written request to the CITY for a CITY representative to be available when

existing systems are disconnected and at the time of any new connections.





1.07 WARRANTY


1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum

three years experience, and with service facilities within 50 miles of project. Installing

company to employ Fiber Optic Association (FOA) certified or MSD approved equal

installers.

C. Testing Agency: Company member of International Electrical Testing Association and

specializing in testing products specified in this section with minimum three years

experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIBER PATCH PANELS

A. Description: Enclosed fiber optic break-out panel with fiber management and media

converters as required. Refer to Contract Drawings for panel count, design layout, and Bill of

Materials.

B. Panel Construction: Panel shall meet the requirements of Section 40 95 13.

2.02 ETHERNET SWITCHES

A. Description: Industrial rail-mounted switch for Ethernet applications, including VFDs,

vendor-furnished PLCs, and programming ports.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Hirschmann SPIDER TX.

2. Or Approved Hirschmann equal.

C. Detail: Switch shall support the quantity of 10/100BaseTX ports to meet the functionality

indicated in this specification and as shown on the Drawings. Switches shall have a

minimum of four 10/100Base-T, RJ-45 ports. A minimum of 20% spare ports shall be

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


provided for the installed system.

D. Environmental: Suitable for installation in industrial environments. Operating Temperature

Range: 0 to 40C.

E. Mounting: DIN-rail mounted suitable for panel installation.

2.03 MEDIA CONVERTERS

A. Description: Fiber optic media converters for all systems requiring conversion from copper

media to fiber optic media.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Hirschmann SPIDER 1TX/1FX EEC with conformal coating for fiber to Ethernet.

2. Phoenix Contact PSI-MOS ControlNet to fiber converter.

C. Description: Ethernet converter shall be industrial-grade DIN-rail mounted 100Base-FX-

Multimode to 100Base-TX media converter. ControlNet converter shall be industrial-grade,

DIN-rail mounted, 5 Mbps coax to 850 nm multi-mode fiber.

D. Power Supply: Furnish 24V DC DIN-rail mounted power supply – Hirschmann RPS 30.

Quantity as required for media converters being furnished.

E. Spares: Furnish one spare media converter for each type provided. Spares shall be furnished

in original packaging to CITY.

2.04 COMMUNICATION CABLING

A. Network Fiber Optic Cable:

1. Heavy duty, loose buffer/dry construction cable with each fiber individually buffered to

900 um buffer diameter and individually strengthened with Aramid yarn strength

members. Cable to be U.L. listed as type OFCP or OFNP and suitable for indoor use and

duct or tray installation.

2. Cable Specifications

a. Fiber Size: 50 micron/125 micron (core/cladding)

b. Fiber Count: 24, 12, or 6 fibers

c. Maximum Short Term Tensile Load: 600 pounds

d. Maximum Long Term Tensile Load: 180 pounds

e. Crush Resistance: 2200 Newton/cm.

f. Operating Temperature: 0 to +70 degrees C.

g. Outside Diameter: 0.40 inches for non-armor 0.92 inches for armor (maximum).

h. Proof Test: 100 kpsi.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Belden Corporation – Multi-mode OM3 50/125 μm

b. Model for Armor: 12 fibers – B9C231

c. Model for Armor: 24 fibers – B9C232

d. Model for Non-Armor: 6 fibers – B9C202

e. Model for Non-Armor: 12 fibers – B9C204

f. Model for Non-Armor: 24 fibers – B9C205

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


B. Fiber Optic Patch Cables:

1. Fiber optic jumper cables shall be furnished and installed for equipment interfacing and

between termination cabinets. The jumpers shall be 50/125 microns as required,

multimode for operation at 1300 nm. They shall be tight-buffered and be protected by

Kevlar-type strength material. The manufacturer of these

C. Terminal Connectors:

1. Provide fiber optic connectors; type ST or STII for connection to ST Patch Panel

Couplers, twist-lock design, with ceramic or zirconia ferrule and strain relief boot.

2. Connector Specifications:

a. Insertion Loss (typical): Less than 0.2 dB.

b. Repeatability: Less than 0.2 dB.

c. Operating Temperature: -40 to +80 degrees C.

d. Body Material: Nickel-plated brass

D. Coaxial “ControlNet” Cable:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Belden Model 3092A.

b. Substitutions: Approved equal.

2. Product Description: Quad-Shield RG-6 cable for use with Allen-Bradley ControlNet

networks.

a. Coaxial 18 AWG, solid bare copper-covered steel

b. Polyethylene insulation, color-coded black

c. 24 AWG stranded tinned copper drain wire

d. 4-layer aluminum foil shield/braid

e. PVC jacket

E. Ethernet Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cable:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Belden Model 1872A – Cat 6 Enhanced Bonded-Pair


2. Product Description: Ethernet cables and connectors shall be provided for as specified, as

required for a complete and working system, and/or as shown on the drawings. Cable for

Ethernet wiring shall be UTP Cat 6 cable.

a. Jacket color coding for cables shall be as follows:

1) Standard Cat-6 SCADA Networks - Blue

2) Standard Cat-6 PLC Networks - White

3) Standard Cat-6 all other networks - Orange or Yellow

4) Crossover cables - Red

b. Cable Requirements:

1) 23 AWG

2) 4 pair solid conductor

3) 100 Ohm impedance

4) 1-350 MHz frequency range

5) Max attenuation 40 dB/350 MHz

6) Min NEXT 37dB/350MHz

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


7) Min PS-NEXT 35dB/350MHz

8) Min return loss 17.0 dB/350 MHz

c. Plenum rated cable shall have FEP insulation jacketing and FEP insulation for

conductors. Non plenum rated cable shall have PVC insulation jacketing and

polyethylene insulation for conductors.

3. Ethernet Patch Cables. Pre-wired and terminated patch cables with RJ-45 connectors and

lever protecting boot shall be furnished for all connections to computers, network

equipment, and controller equipment except where physical conditions (i.e. length over

12 ft. or conduit size) require unterminated wire to be installed. Patch cables shall be Cat-

5e for networks speeds up to 100 Mbps, and Cat-6 for networks speeds greater than 100

Mbps and shall meet the requirements of Cat-5e and Cat-6 cable specified in this section.

Straight through cables shall be wired using the T568-B standard for both connectors as

shown in section 3-1.01. Crossover cables shall be wired using the T568-A standard for

one connector and the T568-B standard for the opposite end.

F. Ethernet Shielded Twisted Pair Cable:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Belden Model 7958A – Cat 5E Data Tuff


2. Product Description: Ethernet cables rated at 600V for use within motor control centers

(MCC) and variable frequency drive (VFD) panels.

a. Jacket color coding for cables shall be as follows:

1) Standard Cat-5E SCADA Networks - Blue

2) Standard Cat-5E PLC Networks - White

3) Standard Cat-5E all other networks - Orange or Yellow

4) Crossover cables - Red

b. Cable Requirements:

1) 24 AWG

2) 4 pair solid conductor

3) 100 Ohm impedance

4) 1-200 MHz frequency range

5) Max attenuation 32.4 dB/200 MHz

6) Min PS-NEXT 27.8dB/200MHz

7) Min PS-ELFEXT 14.7dB/200MHz

8) Min return loss 15.0 dB/200 MHz

c. Outer Shield: Aluminum foil polyester tape with 24AWG tinned copper drain wire.

G. Network Outlet Jacks:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Leviton


c. Hubbell Premise Wiring, IFP Series Faceplates and HXJ Series jacks

d. Phoenix Contact

e. Substitutions: Approved equal.

2. Product Description: Conform to TIA/EIA 568 requirements for cable connectors for

specific cable types. Work station communication outlets shall be of a modular design

consisting of a 1-port or 2-port, single gang, high impact thermoplastic faceplate and data

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


grade RJ45 jacks as shown on the drawings. RJ45 jack contacts shall be beryllium copper

with minimum 50 microinch gold plating. Faceplates shall be provided with screw covers

and machine printed labels. RJ45 jacks shall be color coded to indicate data or voice

communications and shall accept a machine-printed termination position label.

PART 3 -EXECUTION


A. Verify existing conditions before starting Work.

B. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires.

C. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install pathways as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install wire and cable in accordance with all local and national codes.

C. Cables to be pulled in one continuous length. Splicing will not be allowed.

D. Install termination cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner.

E. Install pull string in each empty communication conduit over 10 feet in length or containing

bends.

F. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 27 05 53.

G. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment in accordance with Section 27 05

26.

H. Install fiber optic cable and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. A precision cleaver shall be used and cleaved ends shall be verified for

cleave angle and cleanliness using a microscope.

I. Install terminal connectors for each individual fiber within the cable and terminate at the

patch panel.

J. Install cables in the indicated raceway systems. Inspect raceways prior to pulling cables. Rod

and swab out conduits and ducts prior to installing cables.

K. Pull cables prior to attachment of connectors.

L. Pull cables using an indirect attachment method such as a "Kellems Grip" which distributes

the pulling forces over the outer portion of the cable. Pulls directly on the fiber core will not

be allowed.

M. Do not exceed maximum pulling strength limits of the cable during installation. Monitor

cable pull tensions at all times during the installation of the cable using a remote sensing

puller, strain gauge or running line tensiometer. If electronic tension monitoring equipment is

used, it shall be calibrated or checked for calibration on a daily basis or prior to any cable

pull.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


N. To reduce cable friction and minimize pulling forces during installation, use a polymer-based,

water soluble lubricant when pulling cable.

O. Do not exceed the minimum bend radius of the cable. Tight loops, kinks, knots or tight bends

will not be allowed during installation.

P. For conduit installation, the minimum bending radius (under installation tensile load) shall be

6 inches. Use sweeping elbows at all transitions from horizontal to vertical conduit runs. Use

Mogul type conduit bodies for 45 and 90 degree turns.3.03

Q. Pull the cable in one continuous run. Do not make splices in cable. Provide adequate run

lengths on cable reels to make termination-to-termination runs without splices.

R. Provide junction boxes and pull boxes as required by the cable manufacturer.


A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting,

and balancing.

B. Inspect and test optical fiber cables in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.25.

C. Inspect and test copper cables and terminations in accordance with TIA/EIA 568.

3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Test fiber optic cables before and after field installation. Tests to be performed by an

independent testing firm approved by the CITY and shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER.

The cost of testing shall be included with the lump sum bid of Part 1 (Ref. No. G1).

1. Upon receipt of the fiber optic cable reels, test each fiber separately with an Optical Time

Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) to verify fiber length, attenuation and continuity.

2. After the cable has been installed, visually inspect each fiber termination for out-of-round

conditions and surface defects such as cracks and micro-chips using a 200x inspection

microscope.

3. After connectors have been attached at both ends, test each fiber with an optical power

meter and calibrated light source or OTDR. Tests shall be bi-directional.

B. Furnish certification documents for each test and record the following data. Include printouts

from the OTDR with the certification documents.

1. Installer's company name and address.

2. Installer's name.

3. Testing Company’s name and address.

4. Tester’s name.

5. Date of certification.

6. Attenuation of each fiber link.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS


7. Length of each fiber optic link measured.

8. Equipment used to certify the fiber optic link.

9. Name of person(s) recording the test data.

C. Power meters shall have calibrations traceable to National Institute of Standards and

Technology (NIST) standards.

D. The maximum total loss including connectors and cable attenuation for each fiber optic link

shall not exceed 5 dB.


DATA COMMUNICATIONS



SMOKE DETECTION SENSORS 28 31 46-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 28 31 46

SMOKE DETECTION SENSORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Alarm initiating devices for smoke detection.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

1. UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Stations

1.03 SUBMITTALS





voltage, continuous current), dimensions, and terminal sizes.


panelboards.






format.








General: CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment

shall fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances specified in


1.07 WARRANTY

Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment per the requirements of Section 01 78 36.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Product Description: Smoke detector, conventional, hardwired, 120V AC, self-restoring,

ceiling-mounted on standard single gang electrical box, with plug in electrical connections.

B. Sensor: Ionization or photoelectric.

C. Power Source: 120V AC, 60 Hz

D. Audio Alarm: Minimum 85dB at 10 feet.

E. Temperature Range: 40F to 100F.

F. Signal Output: Relay with minimum one Form C contact, 1A @ 120V AC.

G. Battery Backup: None

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems

B. Kidde

C. Or approved equal.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. One smoke detector shall be installed in each new Electrical Room (total of 1).

B. Smoke detector shall be ceiling mounted in the center of the space.

C. Device shall be mounted firmly in place, with fasteners and supports adequate to support the

required load.

D. Furnish and install wire and conduit to provide 120VAC power for each smoke detector, from

the nearest lighting panel.

E. Furnish and install wire and conduit to connect the smoke detector with each local PLC

panel, as one discrete input. Use (3) - #14AWG for each detector in ¾” conduit.

F. Smoke detectors shall be wired and installed per manufacturer’s requirements, and in

accordance with NFPA 72.


G. Device shall be wired to a single, continuous (non-switched) power source, which is not

protected by a ground fault interrupter.

3.02 TESTING

A. Smoke detector and PLC input alarm shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7.

B. Before energizing device, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground

faults, continuity, and insulation.

C. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.

D. Check installation and operation of smoke detector using the walk test.


CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 31 11 00

CLEARING AND GRUBBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Clearing and grubbing includes, but is not limited to, removing from the Project site, trees,

stumps, roots, brush, structures, abandoned utilities, trash, debris and all other materials found on

or near the surface of the ground in the construction area and understood by generally accepted

engineering practice not to be suitable for construction of the type contemplated. Precautionary

measures that prevent damage to existing features to remain are part of the work.

B. Clearing and grubbing operations shall be coordinated with temporary and permanent erosion and

sedimentation control procedures.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and laws

of local, municipal, state or federal authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. All required

permits of a temporary nature shall be obtained for construction operations by the

CONTRACTOR.

B. Open burning, if allowed, shall first be permitted by the local authority having jurisdiction. The

CONTRACTOR shall notify the local fire department and abide by fire department restrictions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish equipment of the type normally used in clearing and grubbing

operations including, but not limited to, tractors, trucks, and loaders.


3.01 SCHEDULING OF CLEARING

A. The CONTRACTOR shall clear at each construction site only that length of the right of way,

permanent or construction easement which would be the equivalent of one month's pipe laying.

This length shall be determined from the CONTRACTOR's Progress Schedule.

B. The CITY may permit clearing for additional lengths of the pipe line provided that temporary

erosion and sedimentation controls are in place and a satisfactory stand of temporary grass is

established. Should a satisfactory stand of grass not be possible, no additional clearing shall be

permitted beyond that specified above.

C. A satisfactory stand of grass shall have no bare spots larger than one square yard. Bare spots shall

be scattered and the bare area shall not comprise more than one percent of any given area.


3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Clear the construction easement or road right of way only if necessary.

B. Grubbing shall consist of completely removing roots, stumps, trash and other debris from all

graded areas so that topsoil is free of roots and debris. Topsoil is to be left sufficiently clean so

that further picking and raking will not be required.

C. All stumps, roots, foundations and planking embedded in the ground shall be removed and

disposed of. Piling and butts of utility poles shall be removed to a minimum depth of two feet

below the limits of excavation for structures, trenches and roadways or two feet below finish

grade, whichever is lower.

D. Landscaping features shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, fences, cultivated trees,

cultivated shrubbery, property corners, man made improvements, subdivision and other signs

within the right of way and easement. The CONTRACTOR shall take extreme care in moving

landscape features and promptly re establishing these features.

E. Surface rocks and boulders shall be grubbed from the soil and removed from the site if not

suitable as rip rap.

F. Where the tree limbs interfere with utility wires, or where the trees to be felled are in close

proximity to utility wires, the tree shall be taken down in sections to eliminate the possibility of

damage to the utility.

G. Any work pertaining to utility poles shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate utility.

H. All fences adjoining any excavation or embankment that, in the CONTRACTOR's opinion, may

be damaged or buried, shall be carefully removed, stored and replaced. Any fencing that, in the

CITY's opinion, is significantly damaged shall be replaced with new fence material.

I. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise special precautions for the protection and preservation of

trees, cultivated shrubs, sod, fences, etc. situated within the limits of the construction area but not

directly within excavation and/or fill limits. The CONTRACTOR shall be held liable for any

damage the CONTRACTOR's operations have inflicted on such property.

J. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damages to existing improvements resulting from

CONTRACTOR's operations.

3.03 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS

A. The debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing operation shall be hauled to a disposal site

secured by the CONTRACTOR and shall be disposed of in accordance with all requirements of

federal, state, county and municipal regulations. No debris of any kind shall be deposited in any

stream or body of water, or in any street or alley. No debris shall be deposited upon any private

property except with written consent of the property owner. In no case shall any material or debris

be left on the Project, shoved onto abutting private properties or buried on the Project.

B. When approved in writing by the CITY and when authorized by the proper authorities, the

CONTRACTOR may dispose of such debris by burning on the Project site provided all

requirements set forth by the governing authorities are met. The authorization to burn shall not

relieve the CONTRACTOR in any way from damages which may result from CONTRACTOR's

operations. On easements through private property, the CONTRACTOR shall not burn on the site


unless written permission is also secured from the property owner, in addition to authorization

from the proper authorities.


TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 31 23 00

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

This section covers clearing, grubbing, and preparation of the site; removal and disposal of all

debris; excavation and trenching; tunneled (trenchless construction) crossings; the handling,

storage, transportation, and disposal of all excavated material; all necessary sheeting, shoring, and

protection work; preparation of subgrades; pumping and dewatering as necessary; protection of

adjacent property; backfilling; pipe embedment; surfacing and grading; and other appurtenant

work.

1.02 GENERAL

A. With reference to the terms and conditions of the construction standards for excavations set

forth in OSHA "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", Chapter XVII of Title 29,

CFR, Part 1926, CONTRACTOR shall employ a competent person and, when necessary

based on the regulations, a registered Professional Engineer, to act upon all pertinent matters

of the work of this section.

B. All backfill operations shall be in accordance with the City of Cincinnati Supplement to the

State of Ohio (ODOT) Construction and Material Specifications, as shown on MSD Standard

Drawing Acc. No. 49032, except as otherwise noted herein. All requirements of these items

shall be strictly adhered to by the CONTRACTOR and enforced by the CITY.

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Drawings, specifications, and data covering the proposed materials shall be submitted in

accordance with the Submittals section.

B. At least 30 days before starting construction on the sheeting and shoring, the sheeting and

shoring design engineer shall complete and submit to ENGINEER the Protection System

Design Certificate (Figure 2-02202) and the CONTRACTOR shall use the sheeting and

shoring design. A separate certificate shall be submitted for each unique design. The

certificate shall be signed and sealed by the registered professional engineer that designed the

protection system. The professional engineer shall be licensed or registered in the state where

the protection system is located.

1. Filter Fabric Data. Complete descriptive and engineering data for the fabric shall be

submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Data submitted shall include:

a. A 12 inch square [300 mm] sample of fabric.

b. Manufacturer's descriptive product data.

c. Installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS


A. Compacted bank run gravel backfill, meeting the requirements of Section 703.20 of the City

supplement and MSD Standard Drawing 49032, above the “initial backfill” shall be required

for all conduits and trenches under sidewalks, driveway and parking lot pavements.

B. Costs for backfilling, meeting the above requirements, shall be included in the price bid for

all types of conduit specified on the contract plans.

C. Allowable bedding and initial backfill for pipe shall be Class I or Class II as defined below

and applied as per MSD Standard Drawing Accession Number 49032 requirements.

D. Class I – Angular ¼ inch to 1inch graded stone, including a number of fill materials such as

coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, crushed shells, and shells. Where any ungraded (one size

aggregated) crushed stone, coral or slag is used, limit size to 3/4 inch maximum. Use this

material where the depth of cover of the conduit is between fourteen (14) feet and thirty-five

(35) feet.

E. Class II – Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 inch, including various

graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally being granular and

non-cohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class

as further defined in ASTM-D-2487. Use of this material is applicable to conduits when the

depth of cover is fourteen (14) feet or less.

2.02 MATERIALS TESTING

A. Preliminary Review of Materials

1. As required by CITY, all tests for preliminary review of materials shall be made by an

acceptable independent testing laboratory at the expense of CONTRACTOR. Two initial

gradation tests shall be made for each type of embedment, fill, backfill, or other material,

and one additional gradation test shall be made for each additional five-hundred

(500) tons of each material delivered to the site. In addition, one set of initial Atterberg

Limits test shall be made for each fill materials containing more than twenty (20) percent

by weight passing the No. 200 sieve. One additional Atterberg Limits test shall be made

or each additional five-hundred (500) tons of each material delivered to the site.

2. All material testing shall be made by an independent testing laboratory, approved by the

CITY, at the expense of CONTRACTOR under the lump sum bid.

3. Field Testing Expense. All moisture-density (Proctor) tests and relative density tests on

the materials, and all in-place field density tests, shall be made by an independent testing

laboratory, approved by the CITY, and performed on a Time and Materials Basis (Force

Account) against the allowance established for such in Section 01 20 00, Measurement

and Payment. CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the materials and work area and

shall assist the laboratory as needed in obtaining representative samples.

4. Required Tests. For planning purposes, the following guidelines shall be used for

frequency of field tests. Additional tests shall be performed as necessary for job

conditions and number of failed tests. Retesting resulting from failed test shall be at no

cost to the CITY. Test results shall be submitted as indicated in the Submittals section.

a. Two moisture density (Proctor) tests in accordance with ASTM D698 (or, when

required, ASTM D1557), or two relative density tests in accordance with

ASTM D4253 and D4254 for each type of general fill, designated fill, backfill, or

other material proposed.

b. In-place field density and moisture tests at intervals of 1000 feet [300 m] maximum

along the trench.


c. One in-place field density and moisture test for every 200 cubic yards [153 m3] of

backfill.

d. One in-place density and moisture test whenever there is a suspicion of a change in

the quality of moisture control or effectiveness of compaction.

e. At least one test for every full shift of compaction operations on mass earthwork.

f. Additional gradation, Proctor, and relative density tests whenever the source or

quality of material changes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. All clearing shall be performed as necessary for access, stringing of pipeline materials, and

construction of the pipeline and appurtenant structures.

B. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 11 00.

C. Two (2) days prior to clearing and grubbing, the construction limits shall be marked and the

CONTRACTORshall walk the project with CITY’S personnel to locate trees to be saved and

trees to be removed.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be

performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall

excavation faces be undercut for extended footings.

B. Subgrade surfaces shall be clean and free of loose material of any kind when concrete is

placed thereon.

C. Except where exterior surfaces are specified to be damp-proofed, monolithic concrete

manholes and other concrete structures or parts thereof, which do not have footings that

extend beyond the outside face of exterior walls, may be placed directly against excavation

faces without the use of outer forms, provided that such faces are stable.

D. Classification of Excavated Materials: No classification of excavated materials will be made

for payment purposes. Excavation and trenching work shall include the removal and

subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the

work, regardless of the type, character, composition, or condition thereof.

E. Blasting

1. Blasting or other use of explosives for excavation will not be permitted.

2. All rock which cannot be handled, crushed, processed, and compacted as earth shall be

kept separate from other excavated materials and shall not be mixed with backfill or

embankment materials except as specified or directed.

F. Dewatering

1. Dewatering equipment shall be provided to remove and dispose of all surface water and

groundwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Each excavation

shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure

to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein, is completed to the extent that no damage

from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result.

2. All excavations for concrete structures or trenches which extend down to or below


groundwater shall be dewatered by lowering and keeping the groundwater beneath such

excavations. Any Contract specified dewatering depth shall be maintained below the

prevailing bottom of excavation at all times.

3. Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from entering excavations or

trenches to the greatest extent possible without causing damage to adjacent property.

4. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the condition of any pipe or conduit which he

may use for drainage purposes, and all such pipe or conduit shall be left clean and free of

sediment.

5. CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the appropriate agencies and authorities, the

dewatering and stormwater discharge permits required to remove and dispose of

groundwater, surface water, and any other water used in CONTRACTOR's operations.

The permits shall be obtained prior to start of construction.

G. Sheeting and Shoring

1. Except where banks are cut back on a stable slope or other effective trench support is

provided, excavations for structures and trenches shall be supported with steel sheet

piling and shoring as necessary to prevent caving or sliding.

2. Sheet piling or other excavation support systems shall be installed as necessary to limit

the extent of excavations for deeper structures and to protect adjacent structures and

facilities from damage due to excavation and subsequent construction. CONTRACTOR

shall assume complete responsibility for, and shall install adequate protection systems for

prevention of damage to existing facilities.

3. Sheeting, shoring and excavation support systems shall be designed by a Professional

Engineer registered in the state of Ohio.

4. Trench sheeting may be removed if the pipe strength is sufficient to carry trench loads

based on trench width to the back of sheeting. Trench sheeting shall not be pulled after

backfilling. Where trench sheeting is left in place, it shall not be braced against the pipe,

but shall be supported in a manner which will preclude concentrated loads or horizontal

thrusts on the pipe. Cross braces installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be

removed after pipe embedment has been completed. Trench sheeting shall be removed

unless otherwise permitted by CITY. Trench sheeting will not be removed, if in the

opinion of CITY, removal of the sheeting will cause damage to the facility it is

protecting. If left in place, the sheeting shall be cut off 12 inches below finished grade.

The design of the support system shall be such as to permit complete removal while

maintaining safety and stability at all times.

H. Stabilization

1. Sub-grades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense, and

thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall be

sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact under the feet of the workers.

2. Sub-grades for concrete structures or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which

become mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with crushed

rock or gravel as specified for granular fills. The stabilizing material shall be placed in a

manner that no voids remain in the granular fill. All excess granular fill with unfilled

void space shall be removed. The finished elevation of stabilized sub-grades shall allow

for installation of pipes, manholes, etc. to the elevations indicated on the drawings.

3.03 TRENCH EXCAVATION


A. No more trench shall be opened in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the

work. One (1) block or four-hundred (400) feet, whichever is the shorter, shall be the

maximum length of open trench on any line under construction.

B. Except where no dig methods are indicated on the drawings, is specified, or is permitted by

CITY, all trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface and conform to MSD Standard

Drawing 49032.

C. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover

1. The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline shall be fixed and determined from

offset stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint

deflection used in connection therewith, shall be in conformity with requirements of the

section covering installation of pipe.

2. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the contract drawings,

trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of backfill

cover over the top of the pipe of 60 inches over pipes below paved and graded streets

and, of 48 inches over pipes in other locations. Greater pipe cover depths may be

necessary on vertical curves or to provide adequate clearance beneath existing pipes,

conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe

grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of

pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevation, except where future surface

elevations are indicated on the drawings.

D. Fill Section: where the sewer trench is in a fill section and the top of the pipe extends above

the vertical limits of where the fill begins (portions of the trench backfill are in the

constructed embankement) the CONTRACTOR shall refer to ODOT section 603

requirements, and City Supplement requirements thereto, for placement of the embankement

fill prior to beginning the trench excavation.

E. Mechanical Excavation

1. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where its operation

would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, or other existing property, utilities, or

structures above or below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating methods shall

be used.

2. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a type, design, and

construction, and shall be so operated, that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation

can be controlled, and that trench alignment is such that pipe, when accurately laid to

specified alignment, will be centered in the trench with adequate sidewall clearance.

Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain sidewall clearance will not be permitted.

3. In locations where maximum trench widths are required for designated rigid conduits,

mechanical equipment shall be operated so that uniform trench widths and vertical

sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation twelve (12) inches above the top of the

installed pipe to the bottom of the trench.

F. Cutting Concrete Surface Construction

1. Cuts in concrete pavement and concrete base pavements shall be no larger than necessary

to provide adequate working space for proper installation of pipe and appurtenances.

Cutting shall be started with a concrete saw in a manner which will provide a clean

groove at least one and one-half (1-1/2) inches deep along each side of the trench and

along the perimeter of cuts for structures.


2. Concrete pavement and concrete base pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines

shall be removed so that a shoulder not less than 6 inches in width at any point is left

between the cut edge of the pavement and the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the

bottom shall not be greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted.

Pavement cuts shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines

which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the center line of the trench.

3. Pavement removal for connections to existing lines or structures shall not exceed the

extent necessary for the installation.

4. Where the trench parallels the length of concrete walks, and the trench location is all or

partially under the walk, the entire walk shall be removed and replaced. Where the

trench crosses drives, walks, curbs, or other surface construction, the surface construction

shall be removed and subsequently replaced between existing joints or between saw cuts

as specified for pavement.

G. Excavation Below Pipe Sub-grade

1. Except where otherwise required, pipe trenches shall be excavated below the underside of

the pipe, as indicated on Figure 1-02202, to provide for the installation of granular

embedment.

2. Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used for installing pipe.

No part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, trench walls, or

granular embedment when the pipe is jointed.

H. Artificial Foundations in Trenches: Whenever unsuitable or unstable soil conditions are

encountered, trenches shall be excavated below grade and the trench bottom shall be brought

to grade with suitable material.

3.04 TRENCH EMBEDMENTS

A. Trench embedment materials both below and above the bottom of the pipe, classes of

embedment to be used, and placement and compaction of embedment materials shall contain

NO cinders, clay lumps, or other material which may cause pipe corrosion.

B. Groundwater Barrier

1. Continuity of embedment material shall be interrupted by low permeability groundwater

barriers to impede passage of water through the embedment. Groundwater barriers for

sewer lines that contain manholes with cast-in-place bases shall be compacted soil around

each manhole, extending through any granular material beneath the manhole, and

meeting ASTM D2487 soil classification GC, SC, CL, or ML-CL and shall be compacted

to ninety-five (95) percent of maximum density at near the optimum moisture content

(ASTM D698). Material may be finely divided, suitable job excavated material, free

from stones, organic matter, and debris.

2. Groundwater barriers for sewer lines that contain manholes with precast (developed)

bases and for all other pipelines shall be soil plugs of three (3) feet in width, extending

the full depth and width of granular material, and spaced not more than four hundred

(400) feet apart. The soil plugs shall be constructed from soil meeting ASTM D2487

classification GC, SC, CL, or ML, and compacted to ninety-five (95) percent of

maximum density at near the optimum moisture content (ASTM D698).

3.05 BACKFILL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Compacted Backfill: Where CLSM is not required, compacted granular backfill for the full


depth of sewer trench shall conform to requirements of MSD Standard Drawing Accession

Number 49032, in the locations indicated below:

1. Where beneath pavements, surfacings, driveways, curbs, gutters, walks, or other surface

construction or structures.

2. Where in street, road, or highway shoulders.

B. The top portion of backfill beneath established lawn areas shall be finished per section 01 71

33 “Restoration of Improvements”.

C. For backfilling in other areas than indicated in 1 above can consist of local site material with

the following qualifications:

1. No rocks, frozen lumps, or foreign mater and partical in excess of three (3) inches shall

be included.

2. Material does not consist of highly plastic silts, clays, organic silts or peat.

3. No rubbish, muck or unsuitable materials are included, and any stones or shale of up to

one-half cubic (0.5) foot in volume in the backfill are separated for each other and the

pipe by at least six (6) inches of earth or approved site or select backfill.

D. Jetted Backfill

1. In lieu of compacting the bank run gravel backfill in four (4) inch lifts, the bank run

gravel backfill may be compacted by thoroughly jetting with water, in areas outside of

the right of way, provided satisfactory drainage and removal of the free water is provided.

2. The Bank Run Gravel backfill shall be consolidated by thoroughly jetting with water.

For jetting, a hose not smaller than one and one-half (1-1/2) inch diameter and a nozzle

not smaller than one (1) inch diameter and not shorter than two-thirds (2/3) the depth of

the trench carrying a water pressure of forty (40) pounds per square inch (psi) shall be

inserted in a uniform pattern, at five feet maximum spacing, to obtain maximum

consolidation. After the final jetting of the trench, the backfill shall be left to settle and to

permit drainage of impounded water. Typical jetting procedures shall include a water

removal system at intervals not to exceed five huindred (500) lineal feet of trench. Water

removal shall not begin until the water surfaces above the backfill. After jetting is

complete, the area around the jetting hole shall be filled and compacted by the use of the

bucket on the equipment used for excavating. Settled trench surfaces shall then be

brought to grade by filling with Bank Run Gravel backfill and compacted to a density

equal to that of the adjacent ground.

3. Water shall be removed by installing an opening in the manhole or installing a vertical

eight-inch perforated pipe with filter paper adjacent to the manhole. If the vertical pipe

method is used, the vertical pipe shall be filled with #57 (see ODOT specifications) stone

after all water is removed by pumping. All manhole openings shall be plugged and

sealed after jetting and water removal operations are completed.

E. Groundwater barriers specified under pipe embedment shall extend to the top of the graded

gravel backfill.

F. Ordinary Backfill. Compaction of trench backfill above pipe embedment in locations other

than those specified will not be required except to the extent necessary to prevent future

settlement. Contractor shall be responsible for backfill settlement as specified.

G. Ordinary earth backfill material to be placed above embedments shall be free of brush, roots

more than 2 inches [50 mm] in diameter, debris, cinders, and any corrosive material, but may


contain rubble and detritus from rock excavation, stones, and boulders in certain portions of

the trench depth.

H. Backfill material above embedments shall be placed by methods which will not impose

excessive concentrated or unbalanced loads, shock, or impact on installed pipe, and which

will not result in displacement of the pipe.

I. Compact masses of stiff clay or other consolidated material more than 1 cubic foot [0.03 m3]

in volume shall not be permitted to fall more than 5 feet [1.5 m] into the trench, unless

cushioned by at least 2 feet [600 mm] of loose backfill above pipe embedment.

J. No trench backfill material containing rocks or rock excavation detritus shall be placed in the

upper 18 inches [450 mm] of the trench, nor shall any stone larger than 8 inches [200 mm] in

its greatest dimension be placed within 3 feet [900 mm] of the top of pipe. Large stones may

be placed in the remainder of the trench backfill only if well separated and so arranged that

no interference with backfill settlement will result.

K. Water-Settled Earth Backfill. Settlement or consolidation of trench backfill using water

jetting or ponding shall not be performed.

3.06 DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE

Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other trafficways adjacent to drainage ditches or

watercourses shall not be backfilled prior to completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream

side of the trafficway, to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid. Bridges and

other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches shall be

constructed and maintained by CONTRACTOR. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not

accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. All material deposited in roadway ditches or

other watercourses crossed by the line of trench shall be removed immediately after backfilling is

completed, and the original section, grades, and contours of ditches or watercourses shall be

restored. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary.

3.07 FINAL GRADING

A. After other outside work has been finished, and backfilling and embankments completed and

settled, all areas which are to be graded shall be brought to existing grade and slope at the

indicated elevations, slopes, and contours.

B. Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of

slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to manual methods. All surfaces shall

be graded to secure effective drainage.

C. Final grades and surfaces shall be smooth, even, and free from clods and stones, weeds,

brush, and other debris.

D. Seeding and other restoration activities shall comply with section 01 71 33 “Restoration of

Improvements”.

3.08 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Disposal of excess material from other trench excavation sites shall be as follows. Except as

otherwise permitted, all excess excavated materials shall be disposed of away from the site.

B. Broken concrete and other debris resulting from pavement or sidewalk removal, excavated

rock in excess of the amount permitted to be installed in trench backfill, debris encountered in

excavation work, and other similar waste materials shall be disposed of away from the site.


3.09 SETTLEMENT

A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all settlement of trench backfill which may occur

within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions.

B. CONTRACTOR shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary

by settlement within thirty (30) days after notice from CITY.


DEWATERING 31 23 19-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 31 23 19

DEWATERING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This Section shall apply to all excavations. CONTRACTOR shall submit to CITY a dewatering

plan detailing every aspect of the dewatering portion of the work including but not limited to

pumps, pump installation, well construction, power plan, sediment control facilities, emergency

plans for equipment, power or natural causes, decommissioning and restoration.

B. Construct all permanent work in areas free from water. Design, construct and maintain all wells,

pumps, vacuum systems, sumps, dikes, levees, cofferdams and diversion and drainage channels as

necessary to maintain the areas free from water and to protect the areas to be occupied by

permanent work from water damage. Remove temporary works after they have served their

purpose.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the stability of all temporary and permanent slopes,

grades, foundations, materials and structures during the course of the Contract. Repair and

replace all slopes, grades, foundations, materials and structures damaged by water, both surface

and subsurface, to the lines, grades and conditions existing prior to the damage, at no additional

cost to the CITY.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for completing and filing the Well Log and Drilling

Report form with the Ohio Department of Natural Resources, Division of Water for any well, well

point, pit or other device used for the purpose of removing ground water from an aquifer in

accordance with the Ohio Revised Code.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY immediately if the dewater systems for all sources have

the capacity to remove more than 100,000 gallons per day of ground water. CITY must register

with the Ohio Department of Natural Resources, Division of Water, within 3 months after

completion of dewatering facility.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


Filter bags shall be manufactured by US Fabrics Inc. or Carthage Mills or Equal.

2.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

Filter bags used for treating water discharged from dewatering operations shall be made from non-

woven needle punched geotextile material sewn with high strength, double stitched “J” type

seams. The opening size shall be of 80 US Std Sieve.

2.03 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A suitable means of accessing the bag with machinery required for disposal purposes must be


provided. Filter bags shall be replaced when they become half full. Spare bags shall be kept

available for replacement of those that have failed or filled.

Bags shall be located in a well vegetated (grassy) area, and discharge on to stable erosion resistant

areas. On locations, where this is not possible, a geotextile flow path shall be provided. Filter bags

shall not be placed on slopes greater than 5%.

The pump discharge hose shall be inserted into the bags in the manner specified by the

manufacturer and securely clamped.

The pumping rate shall be no greater than 750 gpm or half the maximum specified by the

manufacturer whichever less is.

Filter bags shall be inspected daily. If any problem is detected, pumping shall cease immediately

and not resume until the problem is corrected.


3.01 CARE OF WATER

A. Except where the excavated materials are designated as materials for permanent work, material

from required excavation may be used for dikes, levees, cofferdams and other temporary backfill.

B. Furnish, install, maintain and operate necessary pumping and other equipment for dewatering the

various parts of the work and for maintaining the foundation and other parts free from water as

required for constructing each part of the work.

C. Install all drainage ditches, sumps and pumps to control excessive seepage on excavated slopes, to

drain isolated zones with perched water tables and to drain impervious surfaces at final excavation

elevation.

D. Dewater by means which will insure dry excavations, preserve final lines and grades, do not

disturb or displace adjacent soil.

E. All pumping and drainage shall be done with no damage to property or structures and without

interference with the rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians, vehicular traffic

or the work of other contractors, and in accordance with all pertinent laws, ordinances and

regulations.

F. Do not overload or obstruct existing drainage facilities.

G. After they have served their purpose, remove all temporary protective work at a satisfactory time

and in a satisfactory manner. All diversion channels and other temporary excavations in areas

where the compacted fill or other structures will be constructed shall be cleaned out, backfilled

and processed under the same Specifications as those governing the compacted fill. Fill or grout

all temporary dewatering wells unless otherwise directed by the CITY.

3.02 DEWATERING

A. By the use of well points, pumps, tile drains or other approved methods, the CONTRACTOR

shall prevent the accumulation of water in excavated areas. Should water accumulate, it shall be

promptly removed.


B. Excavations shall be continuously dewatered to maintain a ground water level no higher than three

to four feet below the lowest point in the excavation. Dewatering systems shall be designed to

allow for localized variations in the depth of excavations required to reach a suitable foundation.

Dewatering shall be accomplished well enough in advance of excavation to ensure that

groundwater is already lowered prior to completing the final excavation to finish subgrade.

C. All destabilized subgrade conditions caused by inadequate or untimely dewatering operations shall

be undercut and backfilled with suitable backfill material at no additional cost to the CITY.

D. Piezometric observation wells are required to monitor the ground water level to insure proper

dewatering prior to excavation below the static water table. The number of wells required will

vary depending on the size and depth of structures.

E. Any well, well point, pit, or other device installed for the purpose of lowering the ground water

level to facilitate construction of this project shall be properly abandoned in accordance with the

provisions of Ohio EPA.

F. All dewatering flows are to be directed through filter bags before discharge to stabilized sites such

as rivers, streams or storm sewers; not onto exposed soils, stream banks, or any other site where

the flow could cause erosion.


EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION

CONTROL 31 25 00-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 31 25 00

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

The work specified in this Section consists of providing and maintaining temporary and permanent

erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the Drawings. This Section also specifies the

subsequent removal of temporary erosion and sedimentation controls.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these

Specifications.

B. Prior to any construction activity, the CONTRACTOR shall submit, for the CITY's approval, a

schedule for the accomplishment of temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control

work. No work shall be started until the erosion and sedimentation control schedule and methods

of operation have been approved by the CITY.

1.03 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN

A. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for submitting a Sedimentation and Erosion Control

Plan to the CITY prior to the initiation of any construction work. The plan shall be submitted

within two weeks following the Notice of Award of the Contract. Once approved, the plan shall

be used by the CONTRACTOR throughout the Project. Deviations from the approved plan shall

be submitted to the CITY three weeks prior to the change for the CITY’s consideration.

B. Work shall be scheduled to expose areas subject to erosion for the shortest possible time, and

natural vegetation shall be preserved to the greatest extent practical. Temporary storage and

construction buildings shall be located, and construction traffic routed, to minimize erosion.

Temporary fast-growing vegetation or other suitable ground cover shall be provided as necessary

to control runoff.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to check the Mitigative Measures installed on a weekly

basis and correct any deficiencies found or identified by the CITY throughout the entire Project.

D. The plan shall be used to address the environmental concerns shown on the Contract Drawings

and the Mitigative Measures of these Specifications. It shall also include sound creek crossing

techniques, location of access/haul roads, location of staging and stockpile sites, type and location

of erosion control devices, as well as to specify a person responsible for overseeing the

implementation of the Sedimentation and Erosion Control Plan.

E. The following shall be used as a guide to develop the Erosion Control Plan:

1. Staging/Stockpile Sites- Identify location of potential site.

2. Erosion Control Devices - Identify type of erosion control device (silt fence, stream bates,

rock check dams, etc.); show location of devices (stream crossings, sloping areas, etc.); timing

and method of permanent stabilization and re-vegetation.


CONTROL 31 25 00-2 JULY 2013


A. The temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures shown on the

Drawings are minimum requirements. Any additional erosion and sedimentation control measures

required by the CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques and sequence of operation will be

installed by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the CITY.

B. Perform all work under this Section in accordance with all pertinent rules and regulations

including, but not necessarily limited to, those stated in these Specifications. Where provisions of

pertinent rules and regulations conflict with these Specifications, the more stringent provisions

shall govern.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 SILT FENCE

Silt fence shall be polymer type netting with a built-in cord running throughout the top edge of the fabric.

Posts shall be either steel or pressure treated fir, southern pine or hemlock and shall be spaced not more

than six feet on center. Silt fence shall be provided with netting to provide reinforcing when necessary.

Silt fence shall have an Equivalent Opening Size (EOS) of 40 to 100. Silt fence fabric shall have a

maximum permeability of 40 gallons per minute per square foot. Silt fence fabric must be on the OHIO

DOT Qualified Product List.

2.02 HAY BALES

Hay bales shall be clean, seed free cereal hay type.

2.03 INLET PROTECTION FOR CATCH BASINS IN UNPAVED AREAS

Inlet protection for catch basins in unpaved areas shall consist of filter fabric fence with a securely nailed

2” x 4” wood frame. Use filter fabric conforming to 712.09 Type C as referenced by ODOT Standards.

2.04 INLET PROTECTION FOR CATCH BASINS IN PAVED AREAS

Inlet protection for catch basins in paved areas shall consist of wire mesh galvanized 11 gage or plastic

mesh with geotextile fabric and surrounded by AASHTO # 57 stone gravel installed as shown in

drawings.


Provide all materials and promptly take all actions necessary to achieve effective erosion and

sedimentation control in accordance with ODOT requirements, local enforcing agency guidelines and


All Temporary Erosion Control measures and devices shall be installed as indicated on the approved

plans and working Drawings, shall be maintained until no longer needed, and shall then be removed.

Deteriorated hay bales and dislodged filter stone shall be replaced with new materials. Detention ponds,

if constructed, shall be maintained in a condition ensuring that unfiltered water will not leave the pond.


CONTROL 31 25 00-3 JULY 2013

Temporary erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be installed and maintained from the initial

land disturbance activity until the satisfactory completion and establishment of permanent erosion control

measures. At that time, temporary devices shall be removed.



CONTROL 31 25 00-4 JULY 2013


SITE PIPING 33 05 11-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 33 05 11

SITE PIPING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct and disinfect (if

required) all piping and appurtenances located outside the buildings and structures and test as

shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Site piping covered under this section shall begin at the outside face of structures and buildings,

except where there is no joint at the outside face, then site piping shall begin not more than two

feet beyond the face of the structure or building.

C. Site piping shall include piping in utility vaults and manholes.

D. Site piping shall include all aerial piping.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Complete shop drawings and product data on all piping and accessories shall be submitted to the

Engineer in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Shop drawings shall indicate piping layout in plan and/or elevations and shall include a complete

schedule of all pipe, fittings, specials, hangers and supports. Special castings shall be clearly

detailed showing all pertinent dimensions. Special coatings shall be clearly identified.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the CITY with lists of all pieces of pipe and fittings in each

shipment received. These lists shall give the serial or mark number, weight, class, size and

description of each item received.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit written evidence to the CITY that the products furnished

under this section will conform with the material and mechanical requirements specified herein.

Certified copies of independent laboratory test results or mill test results from the pipe supplier

may be considered evidence of compliance provided such tests are performed in accordance with

the appropriate testing standards by experienced, competent personnel. In case of doubt as to the

accuracy or adequacy of mill tests, the CITY may require that the CONTRACTOR furnish test

reports from an independent testing laboratory on samples of pipe materials.


If ordered by the CITY, each pipe manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent factory

representative to supervise and/or inspect the installation of pipe. This service will be furnished for a

minimum of five days during initial pipe installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP)

Ductile iron pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be as specified in Section 40 05 13.53 of these

Specifications.

A. Ductile Iron Pipe


1. Ductile iron pipe shall be utilized for all piping where shown on the Drawings.

2. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151. All pipe, except

specials, shall be furnished in nominal lengths of 18 to 20 feet. Sizes will be as shown on

the Drawings. All pipe shall have a minimum pressure rating as indicated in the following

table, and corresponding minimum wall thickness, unless otherwise specified or shown on

the Drawings:

Pipe Sizes (inches) Pressure Class (psi)

4 - 12 350

14 - 18 350

20 300

24 250

30 - 54 200

60 - 64 200

B. Fittings and Accessories

1. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10 with a

minimum rated working pressure of 150 psi.

2. Flanged elbow fittings shall be ANSI pattern using short radius elbows except where noted

differently on the Drawings. Special fittings, cast iron and ductile iron wall pipes and

sleeves shall conform to the dimensions and details as shown on the Drawings.

3. Thrust Collars: Thrust collars shall be welded-on ductile iron body type capable of

withstanding a thrust due to 250 psi internal pressure on a dead end from either direction on

that pipe size. Weld-on collars shall be continuously welded to the pipe by the pipe

manufacturer.

4. Solid Sleeves: Solid sleeves shall permit the connection of plain end ductile iron pipe and

plain end PVC pipe. Solid sleeves shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110 and

have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi. Solid sleeves shall have a mechanical or

restrained joint as specified in this section and as shown on the Drawings. Solid sleeves

shall be provided with gaskets suitable for the type of pipe to be connected. Solid sleeves

shall be used only in locations shown on the Drawings or at the direction of the ENGINEER.

Solid sleeves shall be manufactured by ACIPCO, U.S. Pipe or McWane (Clow).

C. Joints for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

1. General

a. Joints for ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be mechanical joint, flanged joint, restrained

joint, push-on joint or grooved-end joint as shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

b. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, specified or directed, all ductile iron pipe laid

underground shall be joined using push-on type joints.

c. In all cases, gaskets shall be made of material that will not be damaged by the fluid

being transported nor by the environment in which the pipe is installed.

d. Provide the necessary bolts for connections. All bolts and nuts shall be threaded in


accordance with ANSI B1.1, Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A external and 2B internal

fit. All bolts and nuts shall be made in the U.S.A.

2. Mechanical Joints

a. Joints shall conform to AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11.

b. Bolts and nuts shall be Tee Head Bolts and nuts of high strength low-alloy steel in

accordance with ASTM A 242 to the dimensions shown in AWWA C111/ANSI

A21.11.

c. Gaskets shall be in accordance with AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11 and shall be

constructed of plain rubber.

d. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron.

3. Push-On Joints: Push-on joints and gaskets shall conform to AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11.

Details of the joint design shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice

such as ACIPCO “Fastite”, McWane (Clow) “Bell-Tite”, or U.S. Pipe “Tyton” joints.

4. Restrained Joints

a. Restrained joints shall be ACIPCO FLEX-RING or “LOK-RING”, McWane (Clow)

“SUPER-LOCK” or U.S. “TR-FLEX” or “LOK-TYTE”.

b. Restraining gaskets shall be ACIPCO “Fast-Grip” or U.S. Pipe “Field-Lok Gasket”.

c. Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

d. Gaskets shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Linings: All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be ceramic epoxy lined except for NPW ductile

iron piping. All ductile iron NPW pipe and fittings shall be double cement lined.

E. Wall Sleeves

1. Where piping passes through concrete structures, furnish and install wall sleeves unless wall

pipes or other provisions are specifically shown on the Drawings. Wall sleeves shall be

accurately located and securely fastened into position before concrete is poured.

2. Wall Sleeves

a. For pipe sizes smaller than 3-inches, wall sleeves shall be steel oversize sleeves

furnished with a full circle, integral, or continuously welded waterstop collar. The

sleeve seal shall be the mechanically expanded, synthetic rubber type. Provide all

associated bolts, seals and seal fittings, pressure clamps, or plates necessary to achieve a

watertight installation. Sleeves shall extend the full thickness of the concrete. Sleeves

and seal shall be Link Seal.

b. For larger pipe sizes, wall sleeves shall be statically cast ductile iron mechanical joint

wall sleeves. Unless specified or shown otherwise for a specific situation, wall sleeves

shall be mechanical joint bell-plain end type with waterstop/thrust collar. The collar

shall be capable of withstanding a thrust force caused by a 250 psi dead end load from

either direction on that size pipe. Sleeves shall be constructed with studs and

mechanical joint retainer gland on the air side of the concrete structure. Where the

concrete structure is exposed to dirt on one side and is wet on the other side, construct

with studs and glands on the dirt side. Wall sleeves shall be equal to ACIPCO A-10771.

F. Flange Adapters: Flange adapters shall permit the connection of unthreaded, ungrooved,

open-ended, ductile iron pipe to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges. Flange adapters shall

meet the test requirements of ANSI/ASME B16.1 for Class 125 flanges. The adapter shall be a

ductile iron casting incorporating a flange with extended throat, set screws and gasket. The

gasket shall provide a compression seal between the adapter, the pipe and the adjacent flange.


Flange adapters are to be used only in locations specifically shown on the Drawings or at the

direction of the ENGINEER, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Flange adapters shall be manufactured by McWane, Uni-Flange (Series 400) or EBAA Iron.

2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SEWER OR DRAIN PIPE

A. Polyvinyl chloride gravity sewer or drain pipe shall be as specified as below

B. Acceptability of PVC pipe for gravity pipelines is indicated in the following table:

Standard

Minimum Thickness

Type PVC (as

specified in ASTM

D 1784)

Wall

Acceptable

Manufacturers

< 6

8 to

15

18

21

24

30 to 48

ASTM D 3034

SDR 35

12454B

Solid Open

Certainteed

J-M Pipe

Yes Yes No No No No

C. All pipe shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi at five percent deflection as determined by

ASTM D 2412.

D. PVC gravity sewer or drain pipe shall be supplied in lengths not longer than 13 feet.

E. Fittings

1. Fittings 15-inches in diameter and less shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D

3034. PVC compound shall be 12454B or 12454C as specified in ASTM D 1784.

a. For sizes 8-inches and less in diameter, fittings shall be molded in one-piece with no

solvent welded joints. Minimum socket depths shall be as specified in ASTM D 3034,

Table 2.

b. For sizes 10-inches and larger in diameter, fittings shall be fabricated from pipe

conforming to ASTM D 3034 using solvent welding. No field fabrication of fittings

will be allowed. All such fabrication shall be performed at the factory and the fittings

shall be delivered ready for use.

2. Fittings 18-inches in diameter and larger shall be fabricated from pipe conforming to ASTM

F 679 using solvent welding. No field fabrication of fittings will be allowed. All such

fabrication shall be performed at the factory and the fittings shall be delivered ready for use.

F. Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be of the integral bell and spigot type with a confined

elastomeric gasket having the capability of absorbing expansion and contraction without leakage,

when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3212. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM

F 477. The joint system shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be identical for

pipe and fittings.

G. Manhole Connections

1. Solid Wall and Closed Profile Wall Pipe: The sewer shall be connected to manholes

utilizing a standard pipe section.

2. Open Profile Wall Pipe: The sewer shall be connected to manholes with an adapter piece.

The adapter piece shall have an open profile pipe bell and a solid wall pipe spigot for

penetrating the manhole wall.

H. Acceptance: Acceptance will be on the basis of the CITY's inspection and the manufacturer's


written certification that the pipe and fittings were manufactured and tested in accordance with

the applicable standards.

2.03 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) GRAVITY SEWER OR DRAIN PIPE

A. Resin: The manufacturer shall use only polyester or vinyl ester resin systems designed for

the service intended.

B. Filler: Silica sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33, except that the

requirements for gradation shall not apply.

C. Additives: Resin additives, such as curing agents, pigments, dyes, fillers and thixotropic

agents, when used, shall not be detrimental to the pipe.

D. Fiber-Glass Reinforcement: Fiberglass filaments and chop rovings shall be commercial grade

glass fibers with a finish compatible with the resin used. For sewer applications ECR-glass

shall be used.

E. Pipe: The filament wound fiberglass pipe must be manufactured using a continuous

advancing mandrel process utilizing continuous glass fiber reinforcements in the

circumferential direction. Both continuous glass fiber rovings and chopped roving will be

incorporated for high hoop strength and axial reinforcement. A sand fortifier shall be used to

provide increased stiffness with placement near the neutral axis in the core. Pipe shall be

manufactured in accordance with either ASTM D3517 or ASTM D3754. Pipe shall be

supplied in nominal lengths of 10 to 40 feet. Actual lay length shall be nominal ±2 inch.

Special short lengths may be used where surface geography or installation conditions require

shorter lengths. The average wall thickness of the pipe shall not be less than the nominal wall

thickness published in the manufacturer’s literature, and the minimum wall thickness at any

point shall not be less than 87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. All points around each end

of a pipe unit shall fall within 1/4 inch or 0.5% of the nominal diameter of the pipe,

whichever is greater, to a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.

F. Fittings: Elbows, reducers, tees, wyes, laterals and other fittings shall be of the same

structural design as adjoining pipe. Fittings shall be manufactured with mitered sections of

pipe and joined by fiber-glass overlay.

G. Layup Joint: Joint shall be made from glass fiber reinforcements impregnated with polyester

resin.

H. Acceptable Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall be U.S. Composite Pipe South, or equal.

2.04 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE



3.01 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

A. The Drawings indicate utilities or obstructions that are known to exist according to the best

information available to the CITY. The CONTRACTOR shall call Ohio Utility Protection

Service and all utilities, agencies or departments that own and/or operate utilities in the vicinity

of the construction work site at least 72 hours (three business days) prior to construction to verify

the location of the existing utilities.

B. Existing Utility Location: The following steps shall be exercised to avoid interruption of


existing utility service.

1. Provide the required notice to the utility owners and allow them to locate their facilities.

Field utility locations are valid for only 10 days after original notice. The CONTRACTOR

shall ensure, at the time of any excavation, that a valid utility location exists at the point of

excavation.

2. Expose the facility, for a distance of at least 200 feet in advance of pipeline construction, to

verify its true location and grade. Repair, or have repaired, any damage to utilities resulting

from locating or exposing their true location.

3. Avoid utility damage and interruption by protection with means or methods recommended

by the utility owner.

4. Maintain a log identifying when phone calls were made, who was called, area for which

utility relocation was requested and work order number issued, if any. The CONTRACTOR

shall provide the CITY an updated copy of the log bi-weekly, or more frequently if required.

C. Conflict with Existing Utilities

1. Horizontal Conflict: Horizontal conflict shall be defined as when the actual horizontal

separation between a utility, main, or service and the proposed piping does not permit safe

installation of the piping by the use of sheeting, shoring, tieing-back, supporting, or

temporarily suspending service of the parallel or crossing facility. The CONTRACTOR

may change the proposed alignment of the piping to avoid horizontal conflicts if the new

alignment remains within the available right-of-way or easement, complies with regulatory

agency requirements and after a written request to and subsequent approval by the

ENGINEER. Where such relocation of the piping is denied by the ENGINEER, the

CONTRACTOR shall arrange to have the utility, main, or service relocated.

2. Vertical Conflict: Vertical conflict shall be defined as when the actual vertical separation

between a utility, main, or service and the proposed piping does not permit the crossing

without immediate or potential future damage to the utility, main, service, or the piping. The

CONTRACTOR may change the proposed grade of the piping to avoid vertical conflicts if

the changed grade maintains adequate cover and complies with regulatory agencies

requirements after written request to and subsequent approval by the ENGINEER. Where

such relocation of the piping is denied by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall

arrange to have the utility, main, or service relocated.

D. Electronic Locator: Have available at all times an electronic pipe locator and a magnetic locator,

in good working order, to aid in locating existing pipe lines or other obstructions.

E. Water and Sewer Separation

1. Potable water mains should maintain a minimum 10 foot edge-to-edge separation from

sewer lines, whether gravity or pressure. If the main cannot be installed providing the 10

foot separation, the separation may be reduced, provided the bottom of the water main is a

minimum of 18-inches above the top of the sewer. Should neither of these two separation

criteria be possible, the potable water main shall be installed below the sewer with a

minimum vertical separation of 18-inches and the water main shall be encased in concrete

with a minimum depth of 6-inches.

2. Where water mains cross the sewer, the pipe joint adjacent to the pipe crossing the sewer

shall be cut to provide maximum separation of the pipe joints from the sewer.

3. No water main shall pass through, or come in contact with, any part of a sanitary sewer

manhole.


3.02 LOCATION AND GRADE

A. The Drawings show the alignment of the piping and the location of other appurtenances.

B. Construction Staking

1. The location of principal components of the work is shown on the Drawings. The

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing all survey work required for

construction, including the establishment of base lines and any detailed surveys and bench

marks adjacent to the work. Base lines shall be defined as the line to which the location of

the work is referenced, i.e. edge of pavement, road centerline, property line, right-of-way or

survey line.

2. The level of detail of survey required shall be that which the correct location of the site

piping can be established for construction.

3.03 LAYING AND PIPE ASSEMBLY

A. Installation

1. Proper implements, tools and facilities shall be provided for the safe performance of the

work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be lowered carefully into the trench by

means of slings, ropes or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent

damage to piping materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances

shall piping materials be dropped or dumped into the trench.

2. All pipe, fittings, valves, and other appurtenances shall be examined carefully for damage

and other defects immediately before installation. Defective materials shall be marked and

held for inspection by the CITY, who may prescribe corrective repairs or reject the

materials.

3. All lumps, blisters and excess coating shall be removed from the socket and plain ends of

each pipe, and the outside of the plain end and the inside of the bell shall be wiped clean and

dry and free from dirt, sand, grit or any foreign materials before the pipe is laid. No pipe

containing dirt shall be laid.

4. Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the

trench. No debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe at any time.

5. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe

brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill

material.

6. Applying pressure to the top of the pipe, such as with a backhoe bucket, to lower the pipe to

the proper elevation or grade, shall not be permitted.

7. Provide mylar detection tape and tracer wire for all non-metallic pipe. Detection tape shall

be buried 4 to 10-inches deep. Should detection tape need to be installed deeper, the

CONTRACTOR shall provide 3-inch wide tape. In no case shall detection tape be buried

greater than 20-inches from the finish grade surface. Tracer wire shall be a 19 gauge, tin

coated, copper conductor with green, polyethylene insulation (Item Number RT1803W).

Core material shall be comprised of high-tenacity, woven polyester with water blocking

yarns encapsulated in a 30 mil, HDPE jacket providing corrosion resistance, flexibility,

impact strength and 1800 lbs. tensile strength. Tracer wire shall not conduct an electrical

current when struck by lightning and shall be designed for direct bury and directional

boring applications. Tracer wire shall be Trace-Safe Water Blocking Tracer wire,

manufactured by NEPTCO and produced in the United States of America, or equal.


B. Alignment and Gradient

1. Lay pipe straight in alignment and gradient or follow true curves as nearly as practicable.

Do not deflect any joint more than the maximum deflection recommended by the

manufacturer.

2. Maintain a transit, level and accessories on the job to lay out angles and ensure that

deflection allowances are not exceeded.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall check the invert elevation for gravity sewer or drain pipe at each

manhole at least three times daily, start, mid-day and end of day. Elevations shall be

checked more frequently if more than 100 feet of pipe is installed in a day or if the pipe is

being constructed at minimum slope.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall check the horizontal alignment of the pipeline at the same

schedule as for invert elevations.

C. Expediting of Work: Excavate, lay the pipe, and backfill as closely together as possible. Do not

leave unjointed pipe in the trench overnight. Backfill and compact the trench as soon as possible

after laying and jointing is completed. Cover the exposed end of the installed pipe each day at

the close of work and at all other times when work is not in progress. If necessary to backfill

over the end of an uncompleted pipe or accessory, close the end with a suitable plug, either

push-on, mechanical joint, restrained joint or as approved by the ENGINEER.

D. Joint Assembly

1. Push-on, mechanical, flange and restrained type joints shall be assembled in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Each restrained joint shall be inspected by the CONTRACTOR to ensure that it has been

“homed” 100 percent.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall internally inspect each pipe joint to insure proper assembly for

pipe 24-inches in diameter and larger after the pipe has been brought to final alignment.

4. Field welding of steel pipe joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C206. All

welding shall be performed by persons meeting the qualification requirements of

ANSI/AWS D1.1.

E. Cutting Pipe: Cut ductile iron pipe using an abrasive wheel saw. Cut PVC pipe using a suitable

saw; remove all burrs and smooth the end before jointing. The CONTRACTOR shall cut the

pipe and bevel the end, as necessary, to provide the correct length of pipe necessary for installing

the fittings, valves, accessories and closure pieces in the correct location. Only push-on or

mechanical joint pipe shall be cut.

F. Lining Repair: Repair linings and recoat spigot ends of cut pipe with a product equal to Protecto

101 or Madewell 1104 coal tar epoxy in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

and as specified below:

1. Remove all burrs and areas of loose lining materials by sanding or scraping to bare metal.

2. Remove oil and lubricants used during field cutting.

3. Lining shall be stripped back a minimum of 1-inch from the spigot end into well adhered

lined areas.

4. Roughen 1 to 2-inches of good lining with a rough grade (40 grit) emery paper, rasp or small

chisel, to allow an overlap between new and existing lining.

5. Apply lining repair material in the number of coats required to match the thickness


requirements as specified in Part 2 of this section and in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

3.04 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPING

A. Make connections to existing pipe lines as shown on the Drawings.

B. Location: Before laying pipe, locate the points of connection to existing piping and uncover as

necessary to confirm the nature of the connection to be made.

C. Interruption of Services: Make connections to existing piping only when system operations

permit. Operate existing valves only with the specific authorization and direct supervision of the

CITY.

D. Connections Using Solid Sleeves: Where solid sleeves are shown on the Drawings, the

CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials and labor necessary to make the connection using a

solid sleeve to the existing pipe line.

E. Connections Using Flange Filler: Flange filler shall be used only where shown on the Drawings

or approved by the ENGINEER to make up minor differences in pipe length less than 3-inches.

Joint bolt length shall be increased by the thickness of the flange filler.

F. Connections Using Mechanical Pipe Couplings: Where pipe couplings are shown on the

Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials and labor necessary to make the

connection using a pipe coupling to the existing pipe line, including all necessary cutting,

plugging and backfill.

G. Connections to Pressure Mains

1. Connections to ductile iron pipe pressure mains shall be by the direct tap method or service

clamp, as detailed on the Drawings in full accordance with AWWA requirements.

2. Connections to polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be made using a full body service clamp.

3. Pressure ratings for connections shall be the same as the pressure rating for the pipe.

3.05 THRUST RESTRAINT

A. Provide restraint at all points where hydraulic thrust may develop.

B. Retainer Glands: Provide retainer glands where shown or called for on the Drawings and all

associated fittings, valves and related piping. Retainer glands shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations, particularly, the required torque of the set screws.

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a torque wrench to verify the torque on all set screws which

do not have inherent torque indicators.

C. Harnessing

1. Provide harness rods only where specifically shown on the Drawings or directed by the

ENGINEER.

2. Where possible, harness rods shall be installed through the mechanical joint bolt holes.

Where it is not possible, provide 90 degree bend eye bolts.

D. Concrete Blocking

1. Where shown on the Drawings, provide concrete blocking for all bends, tees, valves, and

other points where thrust may develop, except where other exclusive means of thrust

restraint are specifically shown on the Drawings.


2. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications.

3. Form and pour concrete blocking at fittings as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the

ENGINEER. Pour blocking against undisturbed earth. Increase dimensions when required

by over excavation.


All pressure and leakage testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section

33 08 13 of these Specifications.

3.07 INSULATION AND HEAT TRACING

Provide insulation and heat tracing in accordance with Section 40 41 13 of these Specifications.

3.08 DISINFECTION

All potable water lines shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 22 11 00B of these

Specifications.


PIPING TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 33 08 13-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 33 08 13

PIPING TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to perform tests of

gravity pipelines and perform integrity and leakage tests of pressure and vacuum piping.

Cost for all testing shall be included in the lump sum bid and is not part of the testing

allowance.

B. The testing requirements covered under this section shall apply to all piping systems covered

under Section 33 05 11 of these Specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications and shall

include a description of the testing procedures to be employed and the report form to be

furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST MEDIUMS

The CITY will provide the necessary water required for testing the work. The CONTRACTOR

shall furnish all other test mediums. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all equipment, necessary

piping and required labor to transport water from its source to the test location for use in testing.

2.02 TEST EQUIPMENT

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor and equipment, including required pumps with

regulated bypass meters and gauges, for conducting of the piping tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The entire length of all pressurized piping and gravity lines shall be field tested for tightness

by a test as described in this section.

B. The timing and sequence of testing shall be scheduled by the CONTRACTOR, subject to the

approval of the CITY. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the CITY with a minimum of 24

hours notice prior to the start of any test. All tests must be observed by the CITY.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall repair any leaks discovered during the initial filling of the piping

and during the testing sequence. All known and visible leaks shall be repaired, whether or

not the leakage rate is within allowable limits.

3.02 MAJOR PIPING

A. All piping not listed under Article 3.03 or 3.04 shall be tested in accordance with Article

3.02. This shall include gravity and pressure pipelines. Storm drains shall be exempted from

testing required by this section.


B. Clean and test lines before requesting final acceptance. Where any obstruction is met, clean

the lines by means of rods, swabs, or other instruments. When requested by the CITY, flush

out lines and manholes before final inspection.

C. Gravity Pipelines

1. Pipe lines shall be straight and show a uniform grade between manholes. Correct any

discrepancies discovered during inspection.

2. Pipe joints for pipelines 30-inches in diameter and larger shall be air tested individually.

The joint tester assembly shall be placed over the joint and shall pressurize the joint area

to 4 psi. The pressure shall not drop more than 2 psi in 10 seconds. The joint tester

assembly shall be equal to that as supplied by Cherne Industries, Inc.

3. Infiltration Tests: Use only when groundwater is two feet above the top of the pipe.

a. Install suitable weirs in manholes selected by the CITY to determine the leakage of

ground water into the sewer. Measure leakage only when all visible leaks have been

repaired and the ground water is two feet above the top of the pipe. If leakage in any

section of the pipeline exceeds 100 gpd/inch/diameter/mile, locate and repair leaks.

Repair methods must be approved by the CITY. After repairs are completed, re-test

for leakage.

b. Furnish, install and remove the necessary weirs, plugs and bulkheads required to

perform the leakage tests. Where continuous monitoring of low level is required, the

CONTRACTOR shall provide and operate monitoring equipment.

4. Exfiltration Tests: Choose one of the following when groundwater is not two feet above

the top of the pipe.

a. Hydrostatic Test

i. Test pipe between manholes or structures with a minimum of 10 feet hydrostatic

pressure, measured at the center of the pipe at the upstream manhole or structure.

ii. The ends of the pipe in the test section shall be closed with suitable watertight

bulkheads. Inserted into the top of each bulkhead shall be a 2-inch pipe nipple

with an elbow. At the upper end of the test section, a 12-inch riser pipe shall be

connected to the 2-inch nipple. The test section of pipe shall be filled through the

pipe connection in the lower bulkhead which shall be fitted with a valve, until all

air is exhausted and until water overflows the riser pipe at the upper end. Water

may be introduced into the pipe 24 hours prior to the test period to allow

complete saturation. House service lines, if installed, shall also be fitted with

suitable bulkheads having provisions for the release of air while the test section is

being filled with water.

iii. During the test period, which shall extend over a period of 2 hours, water shall be

introduced into the riser pipe from measured containers at such intervals as are

necessary to maintain the water level at the top of the riser pipe. The total

volume of water added during the test period shall not exceed that specified for

infiltration.

b. Low-Pressure Air Test

i. Prior to air testing, the section of pipeline between manholes or structures shall

be thoroughly cleaned and wetted. Immediately after cleaning or while the pipe

is water soaked, the sewer shall be tested with low-pressure air. At the

CONTRACTOR's option, pipelines may be tested in lengths between manholes

or in short sections (25 feet or less) using Air-Lock balls pulled through the line


from manhole to manhole. Air shall be slowly supplied to the plugged sewer

section until internal air pressure reaches approximately 4.0 psi. After this

pressure is reached and the pressure allowed to stabilize (approximately two to

five minutes), the pressure may be reduced to 3.5 psi before starting the test. If a

1.0 psi drop does not occur within the test time, then the line has passed the test.

If the pressure drops more than 1.0 psi during the test time, the line is presumed

to have failed the test, and the CONTRACTOR will be required to locate the

failure, make necessary repairs and retest the line. Minimum test time for

various pipe sizes, in accordance with ASTM C 828 is as follows:

Nominal Pipe Size, inches T (time) Min/100 Feet

8 1.2

10 1.5

12 1.8

14 2.0

15 and 16 2.1

18 2.4

21 3.0

24 3.6

27 4.2

30 4.8

36 6.0

39 6.6

42 7.3

48 8.6

ii. Required test equipment, including Air-Lock balls, braces, air hose, air source,

timer, rotometer as applicable, cut-off valves, pressure reducing valve, 0-15 psi

pressure gauge, 0-5 psi pressure gauge with gradations in 0.1 psi and accuracy of

+ two percent, shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.

iii. The CONTRACTOR shall keep records of all tests made. Copy of such records

will be given to the CITY. Such records shall show date, line number and

stations, operator and such other pertinent information as required by the CITY.

iv. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned to observe proper safety precautions in

performance of the air testing. It is imperative that plugs be properly secured and

that care be exercised in their removal. Every precaution shall be taken to avoid

the possibility of over-pressurizing the line.

5. HDPE, FRP, GRP and PVC Deflection Test: Test HDPE, FRP and PVC gravity

pipelines for excessive deflection as specified in the City of Cincinnati Supplement to the

State of Ohio, Department of Transportation, Construction and Material Specifications.

Maximum limit for vertical deflection shall be 5% of the pipe inside diameter.


Deflection tests shall be conducted thirty (30) days after placing backfill.

CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace sewers failing the deflection tests at no cost to

CITY.

D. Pressure Pipelines

1. All sections of pipeline subject to internal pressure shall be pressure tested in accordance

with AWWA C600. A section of line will be considered ready for testing after

completion of all thrust restraint and backfilling.

2. Each segment of pipeline between line valves shall be tested individually.

3. Test Preparation

a. For pipelines less than 24-inches in diameter, flush pipeline section thoroughly at

flow velocities greater than 2.5 feet per second, adequate to remove debris from pipe

and valve seats. For pipelines 24-inches in diameter and larger, the main shall be

carefully swept clean and mopped, if directed by the Engineer. Partially operate

valves and hydrants to clean out seats. Provide correctly sized temporary outlets in

number adequate to achieve flushing velocities.

b. Provide temporary blocking, bulkheads, flanges and plugs as necessary, to assure all

new pipe, valves and appurtenances will be pressure tested.

c. Before applying test pressure, air shall be completely expelled from the pipeline and

all appurtenances. Unless permanent air vents are in place, insert temporary

corporation stops at highpoints to expel air as line is filled with water.

d. Fill pipeline slowly with water. Provide a suitable pump with an accurate water

meter to pump the line to the specified pressure. Differential pressure at valves and

hydrants shall equal the maximum possible, but shall not exceed manufacturer's

pressure rating. Where necessary, provide temporary back pressure to meet the

differential pressure restrictions.

e. Valves and hydrants shall not be operated in either the opening or closing direction at

differential pressures above their rated pressure.

4. The test pressure shall be measured at the lowest point in the test segment and shall be

maintained for a minimum of two hours. Test piping in accordance with the minimum

test pressures shown in 40 01 20.59.

5. The test pressure shall not vary by more than 5 psi for the test duration. Should the

pressure drop more than 5 psi at any time during the test period, the pressure shall be

restored to the specified test pressure. Provide an accurate pressure gage with graduation

not less than 5 psi.

6. Leakage: Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be pumped into the

test section equal to the sum of the water, to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the

specified test pressure for the test duration plus water required to return line to test

pressure at the end of the test. Leakage shall be the total cumulative amount measured on

a water meter.

7. Test Results: No test section shall be accepted if the leakage exceeds the limits

determined under Section 5 of AWWA C600. The leakage test shall be repeated until the

test section is accepted. All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of leakage test

results.

8. Completion: After a pipeline section has been accepted, relieve test pressure. Record

type, size and location of all outlets on record drawings.


9. Should any discrepancies arise on pipe testing pressures between various specification

sections, most stringent requirements will govern.

3.03 MAJOR AIR PIPING

A. All air piping, 4-inches and larger, subject to internal pressure not listed under Article 3.03 of

this section shall be tested in accordance with this Article.

B. Each segment of pipeline between line valves shall be tested individually.

C. Test Preparation

1. For pipelines less than 24-inches, the pipeline shall be cleaned using a pig or swab to

remove all dirt and debris. For pipelines 24-inches in diameter and larger, the pipeline

shall be carefully swept. Partially operate valves to clean out seats.

2. Provide temporary blocking, bulkheads, flanges, and plugs as necessary to assure all new

pipe, valves, and appurtenances will be pressure tested. Provide an air tap as required for

filling the pipeline.

3. Test equipment to be provided by the CONTRACTOR shall include Air-Lock balls,

braces, air hoses, air source, timer, cut-off valves, 30 psi pressure gauge with minimum

graduations of 02. psi and an accuracy of 2 percent.

4. Fill the pipeline slowly with air until the test pressure has been reached. Allow the

pressure to stabilize for 15 minutes.

D. Test the pipeline at a test pressure of 25 psi for one hour. If a measurable pressure drop is

observed by the end of the test period, the pipeline has failed the test. All leaks shall be

located and repaired and the system retested until no measurable pressure drop is observed.

E. Completion: After a pipeline has been accepted, relieve the test pressure. Submit a copy of

the test results to the CITY for review and approval.

3.04 VIDEO TAPING OF INSTALLED SEWERS

A. CONTRACTOR to furnish videotaping of installed sewers, meeting the requirements of Item

603.059 of the City Supplement to the State of Ohio (ODOT) Construction and Material

Specifications and according to the following current requirements:

1. Current Pipeline Assessment Certification Program PACP certification of all CCTV

operators will be required for all CCTV work.

2. Database shall be an unmodified NASSCO-PACP Certified Access Database.

3. CCTV Software shall be NASSCO-PACP certified.

B. Initial Survey Television Inspection

1. The CONTRACTOR shall televise the sewer and shall inspect the upstream and

downstream manholes of each sewer segment televised and document all observations.

2. Sewer sections and manholes shall be inspected by means of remote CCTV. If a

blockage cannot be removed and hampers the videotaping of the sewer in one direction,

then the CONTRACTOR shall attempt to complete the section by televising from the

other manhole to complete the section. This reversal must immediately follow the initial

direction on the same survey and report. The CONTRACTOR must immediately report

the obstruction to the CITY.

3. The recorded video must show the entire circumference of the sewer. Any flow control


to remove standing water and debris shall be incidental to this item. The

CONTRACTOR must also consider weather conditions to obtain the best video image of

the sewer. This may require the CONTRACTOR to delay any video work until after

major rain events to allow the system to return to lower dry weather flow.

4. Perform all CCTV inspections in accordance with NASSCO’s PACP. CCTV inspections

will be conducted entirely in digital format. The entire inspection survey shall be

recorded in MPEG-1 format written to DVD and submitted with digital links to the

survey. All cleaning and television inspection reports shall be with-in +/- 2 feet of the

measured linear footage between manholes along the existing sewer centerline from the

center of the manhole.

5. The documentation of the work shall consist of PACP CCTV Reports, Unmodified PACP

database, logs, electronic reports, etc. noting important features encountered during the

inspection. The speed of travel shall be slow enough to inspect each pipe joint, tee

connection, structural deterioration, infiltration and inflow sources, and deposits, but

should not, at any time, be faster than thirty (30) feet per minute. The camera must be

centered in the pipe to provide accurate distance measurements to provide exact locations

of important features in the sewer and these footage measurements shall be displayed and

documented on the video. The completed DVD will become the property of the CITY.

6. Every section of sewer (manhole to manhole) shall be identified by audio and

alphanumeric on the video display and shall include Project name, municipality, street

name, CAGIS manhole numbers (CONTRACTOR shall request the eight digit manhole

numbers assigned by CITY for all proposed and existing manholes included in video),

inspector’s name, sewer diameter and length, and date of inspection. Important features

shall be identified by audio and on PACP log to include all manholes, active and inactive

service connections, structural defects, maintenance problems, grease, roots, infiltration,

obvious inflow sources, etc. All video must be continuously metered from manhole to

manhole. In addition to televising the sewer, all manholes shall be panned with the video

camera and visually inspected.

3.05 REPAIRS

If the leakage exceeds the specified allowable limits, the point or points of leakage shall be

sought out and remedied by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the CITY. Repair

methods must be approved by the CITY.

3.06 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

The systems shall not be used, except for chemical cleaning, until the CITY has been assured that

cleaning has been accomplished.

3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. No pipeline installation shall be accepted until all known and visible leaks have been

repaired, whether or not the leakage is within the maximum allowable limits.

B. The CONTRACTOR will certify that all required tests have been successfully completed

before the work is accepted.


PIPING AND EQUIPMENT CLEANING AND TESTING 40 01 20.59-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 40 01 20.59

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT CLEANING AND TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This Section specifies the general procedures to be followed in cleaning and testing piping.

B. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, tools, and equipment required for this work.

C. The CITY's Representative shall be notified in advance of equipment/system cleaning and

testing.

D. Cleaning method, test medium and test pressure are defined for each service on the attached

Cleaning and Testing Index. See Part 3 of this Specification for complete description of

cleaning methods and test procedures.

1.02 REFERENCES


Documents:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and American Water Works Association

(AWWA)

2. Standard Mechanical Code

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The proposed testing procedures, including test medium and pressure, line segments and

equipment included in the test, methods of isolating test from rest of system, and pressure

monitoring techniques, shall be approved by the CITY's Representative prior to

commencement of the test.

B. A detailed report of pressure tests on piping and equipment shall be forwarded in duplicate to

the CITY. This report shall show date of test, lines tested, test medium, length of time test

pressure was held, pressure drop or rise, and extent of venting or repressurizing.

C. The CONTRACTOR may submit a test procedure or cleaning specification in lieu of this

Specification to the CITY for approval. Any deviations from this Specification must be

approved in writing by the CITY before any such deviation is instituted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Detergents, solvents, and other cleaning materials shall be compatible with the materials of

fabrication of the systems in which they are used. They shall not adversely affect the

materials or mechanisms in the systems and they shall be acceptable to equipment

manufacturers. Detergents, solvents, and other cleaning agents shall also be compatible with

the process streams to be handled by the systems in which they are used.

B. Materials in blinds, gaskets, bolts, etc. used in isolating segments of systems shall be

compatible with the systems being cleaned and/or tested.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CLEANING

A. General

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install necessary temporary connections, strainers

and other equipment to thoroughly clean the piping systems before start-up. The

CONTRACTOR shall dispose of cleaning agents and remove temporary connections and

strainers after cleaning is complete.

2. Piping shall be cleaned just prior to installation and/or plant start up whenever possible.

Cleaned piping material shall be protected against contamination by sealing open ends

with clean plastic sheet or metal foil.

3. Cleaning procedures will be approved by the CITY, or his designated Representative, and

completed to his satisfaction.

4. Cleaning shall be otherwise completed according to the schedule in Table 1 "Cleaning

and Testing Index".

B. Cleaning Methods

1. Cleaning Method "A"

a. Prior to erection:

i. Hammer, brush, etc., to loosen sand, dirt, scale, or other contaminants when

necessary.

ii. Blow with air, or hose with clean water, and visually inspect for contaminants.

iii. On pipes stored before erection, dry and seal the ends to prevent contamination

during storage.

b. After erection thoroughly flush the system with clean water or steam to remove all

foreign material and blow free of water with dry oil-free air.

2. Cleaning Method "B"

a. Carefully handle fabrication and installation to avoid all unnecessary contamination

of these lines.

b. Thoroughly flush with clean water after installation.

c. Purge with dry, oil-free air until lines are completely dry before placing in service.

3.02 TESTING

A. General

1. Test pressure shall be as defined in the attached Testing and Cleaning Index. Final test

pressure for each test shall be maintained for a sufficient length of time to facilitate a

complete inspection of all joints and connections, but no less than that specified by the

applicable testing procedure. When it is necessary, for practicality, to include a vessel or

other equipment, the test pressure shall not exceed the allowable cold limit of the

equipment.

2. Detected leaks shall be repaired. Piping systems shall be retested if revisions or repairs

are made in piping or pressure equipment.

3. Since the risk of failure, with the attendant possibility of injury, is appreciably greater

during testing, all safety measures required by codes or ordinances applicable to the


situation shall be taken.

4. Equipment or piping to be pressure tested shall not be insulated, covered, painted or

concealed prior to test. Compression joint underground piping may be backfilled prior to

pressure test except that joints shall remain exposed until after the test. Tie rods, clamps,

and all other restraints, shall be in place and fastened.

5. These tests shall not be used to establish pressure ratings.

6. Protect all piping and equipment against over-pressure collapse from vacuum and

hydraulic shock during the filling, testing, and draining procedures. Seats of iron valves

shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum cold working pressure of

the valve. Pressure tests against other closed valves shall not exceed the manufacturer's

cold pressure limit. Note that where significant differences in elevation exist, there is a

risk of over-pressure in the lower portions of the system in order to attain test pressure in

the upper portion of the system.

7. Apply test pressure only after the system and test medium are at approximately the same

temperature, preferably not less than 60F. Note that some applicable codes require

testing above a specified minimum temperature. Water temperature shall not exceed

125F.

8. Test, including the inspection of all joints, shall be made to the satisfaction of the CITY's

Representative. Following the completion and approval of the test, restore all

components of the system to normal operating condition. This includes removing the

temporary provisions installed for the test.

9. Testing shall be otherwise completed according to schedule in Table 1 "Cleaning and

Testing Index".

B. Preparatory Work

1. Remove from the system all pumps, turbines, traps, shock arresters, expansion joints,

instruments, control valves, safety valves, rupture discs, filters, orifice plates, etc., which

might be damaged by the test, or are designated by the CITY's Representative. Also

remove all items such as orifice plates which might trap air in a system to be

hydrostatically tested. Disconnect all instrument supplies.

2. Open but do not backseat all valves including bypass valves. Lines containing check

valves shall have the source of test pressure on the upstream side.

3. Clean system prior to testing.

4. Systems may be separated into sub-systems for testing if such action will expedite or

simplify the testing.

C. Testing Methods

1. Test Procedure T1 (Hydrostatic Test)

a. Only filtered water shall be used as test media.

b. No hydrostatic testing shall be done when the ambient temperature is 40F or lower

unless special cold weather provisions are approved by the CITY.

c. Provide vents and drains as required.

d. All lines shall be thoroughly cleaned before testing. See Article 3.01 for cleaning

procedures.

e. Items which are not to be subjected to the hydrostatic test shall be either removed or


blanked off. Short sections of piping removed to permit the installation of blinds or

blanks shall be tested separately.

f. The test pump hook-up for hydrostatic test shall permit applying the pressure

gradually under close control. A valve shall be provided for isolating the piping from

the pressure source during the test period. The system should be filled with water

through a low connection point, care being taken that air is completely vented so that

there are no air pockets remaining. The pressure shall be applied gradually and held

at the specified value for the time required to visually check each weld, connection,

joint, flange, etc., but not less than a minimum of one hour. Test readings may be

taken at the lowest point of the line or system of lines with static head added to the

minimum hydrostatic test pressure. Care shall be taken to insure that at no point a

dangerous over-pressure is experienced.

g. The hydrostatic test shall be considered satisfactory if no visible leakage, cracks or

other signs of distress are discovered on the piping or at any joints. There is no

requirement for minimum pressure drop during the test period; however, the cause of

any pressure loss other than that due to temperature change or similar reasons shall

be justified to the satisfaction of the CITY's Representative.

h. Minor leaks in screwed or flanged joints may be repaired without retesting subject to

the approval of the CITY's Representative.

i. Any welded joint found leaking shall be repaired in accordance with the original

welding procedure and completely retested.

j. After completion of hydrostatic testing, the system shall be completely drained at all

low points in such a way as to accomplish thorough flushing of the system. Test

blinds, temporary supports, test equipment, etc., shall be removed, and any valves,

orifice plates, short sections of piping, miscellaneous in-line equipment or

instruments that were removed prior to testing shall be re-installed and the line left

ready for service. New gaskets shall be used when re-installing flanged items.

k. Care shall be taken to insure the complete removal of all water from the line or

system after testing. If there is any danger of contamination or freezing, blowing out

the fluid with air is necessary.

2. Test Procedure T2 (Leak Test for Drains and Vents - Piping and Equipment)

a. Fill the system with water and visually inspect for leaks.

b. No pressure shall be applied by pump, by supply line, or other external source. The

test crew shall be responsible for filling the system at a rate low enough to prevent

pressurizing due to restricted outflow of air.

c. The test will be considered completed when the CITY, or his designated

Representative, is satisfied that all joints are reasonably tight.

3.03 INSPECTION

A. The CITY’s Representative reserves the right to make any inspections. The CONTRACTOR

shall give the CITY’s Representative free access to his work, and whenever requested, shall

furnish him with full information as to progress of the work and its various parts at place of

fabrication or on the job site. Such inspection shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from full

responsibility for the quality and correctness of his work.

B. If the Specification, CITY’s Representative’s instructions, ordinances, law, or any other

public authority require any special tests or approval, the CONTRACTOR shall give the

CITY’s Representative timely notice of his readiness for inspection. If the inspection is by an


authority other than the CITY’s Representative, the CITY’s Representative shall be informed

as to the place and date fixed for such inspections.

C. Inspections shall be made in accordance with the American Standard Code for Pressure

Piping, ANSI B31.3 unless another code is specifically applicable to the system being tested.

D. Should any discrepancies arise on pipe testing pressures between various specification

systems, most stringent requirements will govern.

TABLE 1

CLEANING AND TESTING INDEX

Symbol

Service

Specification

Section

Material

Test

Test

Pressure

Test

Procedure

Cleaning

Method

NPW Non-Potable

Water 40 05 13.33 Copper Hydrostatic 75 psig T1 A

PVC Influent Sampler 40 05 13.73 PVC Hydrostatic 50 psig T1 A

GR-DIP Grit Slurry

Piping 40 05 13.53 DIP Hydrostatic 120 psig T1 A

PD-DIP Grit Drain

Piping 40 05 13.53 DIP Hydrostatic

4 psig or as

noted in

Section 33 08

13P

T1 A


DUCTILE IRON PIPE 40 05 13.53-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 40 05 13.53

DUCTILE IRON PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct all ductile iron pipe

and appurtenances located inside and under buildings and structures, and test as shown on the

Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Ductile iron pipe and appurtenances covered under this section shall include all interior pipe and

accessories to the outside face of structures and buildings, except where there is no joint at the

outside face. Where there is no joint at the exterior face, this section shall include all ductile iron

pipe and accessories within two feet of the exterior face of the structure or building.

C. This section includes piping and fittings in utility vaults and manholes.

D. This section includes buried pressure pipe and fittings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Complete shop drawings and product data on all piping and fittings shall be submitted to the

CITY in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Shop drawings shall indicate piping layout in plan and/or elevations and shall include a complete

schedule of all pipe, fittings, specials, hangers and supports. Special castings shall be detailed

showing all pertinent dimensions. Special coatings shall be clearly identified.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the CITY with lists of all pieces of pipe and fittings in each

shipment received. These lists shall give the serial or mark number, weight, class, size and

description of each item received.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit written evidence to the CITY that the products furnished under

this section will conform with the material and mechanical requirements specified herein.

Certified copies of independent laboratory test results or mill test results from the pipe supplier

may be considered evidence of compliance provided such tests are performed in accordance with

the appropriate testing standards by experienced, competent personnel. In case of doubt as to the

accuracy or adequacy of mill tests, the CITY may require that the CONTRACTOR furnish test

reports from an independent testing laboratory on samples of pipe materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP)

A. Ductile iron pipe shall be utilized for all piping where shown on the Drawings.

B. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151. All pipe, except

specials, shall be furnished in nominal lengths of 18 to 20 feet. Sizes will be as shown on the

Drawings. All pipe shall have a minimum pressure rating as indicated in the following table, and


corresponding minimum wall thickness, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings:

Pipe Sizes (inches) Pressure Class (psi)

4 –24 350

C. Flanged pipe minimum wall thickness shall be equal to Special Thickness Class 53. Flanges shall

be furnished by the pipe manufacturer.

D. Flexible Joint (Ball Joint) Pipe: Flexible, restrained joint pipe shall be minimum Thickness Class.

Appropriate transition pieces shall be utilized on each end of run of flexible joint pipe.

E. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be coated with ceramic epoxy lining, unless otherwise

noted.

2.02 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10 with a minimum

rated working pressure of 250 psi.

B. Flanged elbow fittings shall be ANSI pattern using short radius elbows except where noted

differently on the Drawings. Special fittings, ductile iron wall pipes and sleeves shall conform to

the dimensions and details as shown on the Drawings.

C. All grooved end fittings shall conform to the laying length requirements of AWWA C110/ANSI

A21.10 end preparation requirements of AWWA C606, and wall thickness requirements of

AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10.

D. Welded-on Outlets: Welded-on outlets shall be ductile iron body type and shall be faced and

tapped for AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10 flange or mechanical joint connection. All welding,

fabrication and outlet hole drilling shall be performed by the manufacturer. Outlets shall be free

of burrs. Sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The outlets shall be welded on minimum

Special Thickness Class 51 ductile iron pipe greater than 12-inches and Special Thickness Class

52 for smaller pipe.

E. Thrust Collars: Thrust collars shall be welded on ductile iron body type capable of withstanding a

thrust due to 250 psi internal pressure on a dead end from either direction on that pipe size. The

welded on collars shall be continuously welded to the pipe by the pipe manufacturer.

F. Solid sleeves shall permit the connection of plain end ductile iron pipe. Solid sleeves shall meet

the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110 for pattern and have a minimum pressure rating of 250

psi. Solid sleeves shall have mechanical or restrained joints as specified in this section and as

shown on the Drawings. Solid sleeves shall be used only in locations shown on the Drawings or

at the direction of the CITY.

G. Tapping Saddles: Tapping saddles shall be ductile iron body type with O ring gasket and alloy

steel straps. Connection shall be flanged or mechanical joint as detailed on the Drawings.

Tapping saddles shall be equal to ACIPCO A 10920 for mechanical joint and ACIPCO A 30920

for flanged joints.

H. Restrained Flange Adapter (RFA): The RFA shall permit the connection of unthreaded,

ungrooved, open ended ductile iron pipe to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges. The RFA


shall meet the test requirements of ANSI/ASME B16.1 for Class 125 flanges. The RFA shall be a

ductile iron casting incorporating gripping wedges and gasket. The gasket shall provide a

compression seal between the RFA, the pipe and the adjacent flange. RFAs are to be used only in

locations specifically shown on the Drawings and shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. The RFA shall be EBAA Iron Megaflange-Flange Adapter

Series 2100, or Star Pipe Products StarFlange Series 3200.

I. Service Clamps: Service clamps shall be ductile iron, double strap clamps equal to Mueller.

2.03 JOINTS

A. General

1. Unless shown or specified otherwise, joints for buried service shall be push on or restrained

joint type for pipe and standard mechanical, push on or restrained joints for fittings. Joints for

exposed service shall be flanged for pipe and fittings, unless shown otherwise.

2. Provide the necessary bolts for connections. All bolts and nuts shall be threaded in

accordance with ANSI B1.1, Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A external and 2B internal fit. All

bolts and nuts shall be made in the U.S.A.

3. In all cases, gaskets shall be made of material that will not be damaged by the fluid being

transported nor by the environment in which the pipe is installed.

B. Push On and Mechanical Joints

1. Joints shall conform to AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11.

2. Bolts and nuts shall be Tee Head bolts and nuts of high strength low alloy steel in accordance

with ASTM A 242 to the dimension shown in AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11.

3. Gaskets shall be in accordance with AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11 and shall be constructed of

plain rubber unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Gaskets shall be Viton for air service.

4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron.

C. Flanged Joints

1. Flanged joints shall conform to AWWA C115/ANSI A21.15. Flanges shall be ductile iron

and shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer.

2. Flanged joints shall be bolted with through stud or tap bolts of required size as directed. Bolt

length and diameter shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C115 for Class 125 flanges shown in

ANSI/ASME B16.1.

a. Bolts for exposed service shall be zinc plated, cold pressed, steel machine bolts

conforming to ASTM A 307, Grade B. Nuts for exposed service shall be zinc plated,

heavy hex conforming to ASTM A 563. Zinc plating shall conform to ASTM B 633,

Type II.

b. Bolts for submerged service shall be stainless steel machine bolts conforming to ASTM A

193, Grade B8. Nuts shall be heavy hex, stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 194,

Grade 8.

3. Gaskets shall be made of 1/8 inch thick, Neoprene. Gaskets may be ring type or full face type.


4. For 16-inch and larger flanged joints use gaskets equal to American “Toruseal” or US Pipe

“Flange Tyte”.

5. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall have flanges cast solidly or threaded to the pipe barrel. Pipe

threads shall be of such length that with flanges screwed home, the end of the pipe shall

project beyond the face line of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be machined to give a

flush finish to the pipe and the flange and surface shall be normal to the axis of the pipe.

Ductile iron flanges shall be of such design that the flange neck completely covers the

threaded portion of the pipe to protect same against corrosion. All pipe with threaded type

flanges shall be assembled, faced, and drilled at the point of manufacture, unless otherwise

approved by the ENGINEER.

6. Flange filler shall conform to AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10. Joint bolt length shall be

increased by the thickness of the flange filler.

7. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped accordingly.

D. Restrained Joints

1. Restrained joints: Restrained joints shall be manufactured restrained joint or restraining

gasket joint as specified below.

a. Manufactured restrained joints shall be American FLEX RING or LOK RING, U.S. Pipe

TR FLEX or HP LOK, Griffin SNAP-LOK or Clow SUPER LOCK.

b. Restraining gasket joints shall be assembled with American Fast-Grip gaskets or US Pipe

FIELD LOK gasket.

c. Retainer glands on a mechanical joint may be used as a restrained joint only where

retainer glands are specifically shown on the Drawings or where specifically specified.

d. Where retainer glands are allowed, in lieu of retainer glands specified elsewhere, the joint

may be assembled with US Pipe MJ FIELD LOK gasket.

e. No field welding for manufactured restrained joint pipe assembly will be permitted.

Where field cutting of restrained joint pipe is required, the joint may be assembled with

American Field Flex-Rings or US Pipe TR FLEX GRIPPER Rings.

2.04 WALL SLEEVES

A. Where piping passes through concrete structures, furnish and install wall sleeves unless wall pipes

or other provisions are specifically shown on the Drawings.

B. Wall Sleeves

1. For pipe sizes smaller than 3-inches, wall sleeves shall be steel oversize sleeves furnished

with a full circle, integral or continuously welded waterstop collar. The sleeve seal shall be

the mechanically expanded, synthetic rubber type. Provide all associated bolts, seals and seal

fittings, pressure clamps or plates necessary to achieve a watertight installation. Sleeves shall

extend the full thickness of the concrete. Sleeves and seal shall be Link Seal.

2. For larger pipe sizes, wall sleeves shall be statically cast ductile iron mechanical joint wall

sleeves, unless shown otherwise. Unless specified or shown otherwise for a specific situation,

wall sleeves shall be mechanical joint bell-plain end type with waterstop/thrust collar. The

collar shall be capable of withstanding a thrust force caused by a 250 psi dead end load from

either direction on that size pipe. Sleeves shall be constructed with studs and mechanical joint


retainer gland on the air side of the concrete structure. Where the concrete structure is

exposed to dirt on one side and is wet on the other side, construct with studs and glands on the

dirt side.

2.05 COATINGS

The exterior of pipe and fittings for buried service shall be factory coated with an asphaltic coating

conforming to AWWA C151/ANSI 21.51 for ductile iron pipe, AWWA C115/ANSI 21.15 for flanged

pipe and AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 for fittings. Pipe and fittings which shall be exposed or

submerged shall be factory coated with a general purpose rust inhibitive primer compatible with the

type of paint which will be field applied in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 91 00 of


2.06 LININGS

A. All Pipe and fittings shall be ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with AWWA C104/ ANSI A21.4,

standard thickness, unless specified otherwise. No lining shall be provided for ductile iron pipe

and fittings used for air service.

B. Linings shall cover all exposed surfaces of pipe and fittings subject to contact with sewer liquid or

gas. The lining of the pipe barrel shall extend from spigot end through the socket to the edge of

the gasket sealing area or recess for pipe using push on gaskets, and to the edge of the gasket seat

for mechanical joints. The lining shall also cover the exterior of the spigot end from the end of the

pipe to beyond the gasket sealing area. The lining in fittings shall cover the interior surfaces

including the socket areas as defined above. All linings shall be hermetically sealed at the ends.

C. Ceramic Epoxy Lining

1. Lining Material: The lining material shall be Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy, an amine cured

novalac epoxy containing at least 20 percent by volume of ceramic quartz pigment. The

material shall meet the following minimum requirements:

a. A permeability rating of 0.00 when tested according to Method A of ASTM E-96-66,

Procedure A with a test duration of 30 days.

b. The following test shall be run on coupons from factory lined ductile iron pipe:

i. ASTM B-117 Salt Spray (scribed panel) – Results to equal 0.0 undercutting after two

years.

ii. ASTM G-95 Cathodic Disbondment 1.5 volts @ 77 F. Results to equal no more

than 0.5 mm undercutting after 30 days.

iii. Immersion Testing rated using ASTM D-714-87.

1) 20% Sulfuric Acid – No effect after two years.

2) 140 F 25% Sodium Hydroxide – No effect after two years.

3) 160 F Distilled Water – No effect after two years.

4) 120 F Tap Water (scribed panel) – 0.0 undercutting after two years with no

effect.

c. An abrasion resistance of no more than 3 mils (.075 mm) loss after one million cycles

using European Standard EN 598: 1994 Section 7.8 Abrasion Resistance.

2. Surface Preparation: Surface preparation shall consist of the ductile iron surface to a near-

gray blast finish. This degree of cleanliness is comparable to a SSPC-SP10 for steel with the


exception that ductile iron attains a gray color when blast cleaned. The blast cleaning

operation shall remove 95% of all surface contaminants, including tightly adhered annealing

scale. The anchor tooth pattern, resulting from the blasting operation, shall have a minimum

height of 3.0 mils.

3. Applicators: The lining shall be applied using a centrifugal lance applicator by applicators

certified by the lining manufacturer. The workers shall be experienced and competent in the

surface preparation, application and inspection of the lining to be applied.

4. Lining: After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation, the interior of

the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of Protecto 401. Minimum

thickness shall be 30 mils. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient

temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface shall be dry and dust free. If flange

pipe or fittings are lined, the lining shall not be used on the face of the flange.

5. Bell Sockets and Spigot Ends: The gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the

end of the spigot end shall be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum, using Protecto

Joint Compound. The Joint Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care

should be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket seat

or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and spigot ends shall be performed after the

application of the lining.

6. Number of Coats: The number of coats of lining material applied shall be as recommended

by the lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied above the dry

thickness per coat recommended by the lining manufacturer in printed literature. The

maximum or minimum time between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining

material manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material shall be used for

lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself without roughening of the surface.

7. Touch-Up and Repair: Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch-up or repair in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

8. Lining Holiday Test: At the manufacturer’s facility, the lining shall be tested over 100% of

the pipe barrel surface with a high-voltage spark tester as recommended by ASTM

Designation G-62 Method B. If holidays are found in the lining by the above test at the

manufacturing plant, the holiday shall be repaired per the lining manufacturer’s

recommendation. The holiday detector shall be a commercially available detector available

from holiday detection equipment manufacturers such as SPY, TINKER AND RASOR, and

ZORELCO.

9. All pipe linings shall be checked for thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge.

Thickness testing shall be performed in accordance with SSPC-PA-2.

10. Each pipe joint and fitting shall be marked with the date of application of the lining system

and with the numerical sequence of application of that date.

11. Certification: The pipe or fitting manufacturer shall supply a certificate attesting to the fact

that the applicator met the requirements of this Specification, and that the material used was

as specified.

12. Handling: Protecto 401 lined pipe and fittings shall be handled only from the outside of the

pipe and fittings. No forks, chains, straps, hooks, etc. shall be placed inside the pipe and

fittings for lifting, positioning, or laying.


2.07 RETAINER GLANDS

Retainer glands for ductile iron pipe shall be Megalug Series 1100, as manufactured by EBAA Iron,

Uni-Flange Series 1400, as manufactured by Ford Meter Box Company, or Star Pipe Products

StarGrip Series 3000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CUTTING

A. When new or existing pipe is required to be cut, the pipe shall be cut in such a manner as to leave

a smooth end normal to the axis of the pipe.

B. All cutting of ductile iron pipe shall be performed with a cutting saw. All burrs shall be removed

from the inside and outside edges of all cut pipe. All damaged linings and coatings shall be

repaired.

C. Lining Repair: Repair epoxy linings and recoat spigot ends of cut pipe with Protecto 101 or

Madewell 1104 coal tar epoxy in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as

specified below:

1. Remove all burrs and areas of loose lining materials by sanding or scraping to bare metal.

2. Remove oil and lubricants used during field cutting.

3. Lining shall be stripped back a minimum of 1 inch from the spigot end into well adhered lined

areas.

4. Roughen 1 to 2 inches of good lining with a rough grade (40 grit) emery paper, rasp or small

chisel, to allow an overlap between new and existing lining.

5. Apply lining repair material in the number of coats required to match the thickness

requirements as specified in Part 2 of this section and in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

3.02 JOINT ASSEMBLY

A. General: Ductile iron pipe shall be assembled in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600.

B. Push On Joints: The inside of the bell and the outside of the pipe from the plain end to the guide

stripe shall be wiped clean immediately before assembling the pipe joint. Then the rubber gasket

shall be inserted into a groove or shaped recess in the bell. Both the bell and spigot ends to be

joined shall be wiped again to ensure they are thoroughly clean. A liberal coating of special

lubricant furnished by the pipe manufacturer shall be applied to the outside of the pipe. The plain

end shall be centered in the bell and the spigot pushed home.

C. Mechanical Joints

1. The surfaces with which the rubber gasket comes in contact shall be brushed thoroughly with

a wire brush just prior to assembly to remove all loose rust or foreign material which may be

present and to provide clean surfaces which shall be brushed with a liberal amount of soapy

water or other approved lubricant just prior to slipping the gasket over the spigot end and into

the bell. Lubricant shall be brushed over the gasket prior to installation to remove loose dirt


and lubricate the gasket as it is forced into its retaining space.

2. Joint bolts shall be tightened by the use of wrenches and to a tension recommended by the

pipe manufacturer. When tightening bolts, the gland shall be brought up toward the pipe bell.

If effective sealing is not attained at the maximum torque indicated above, the joint shall be

disassembled and reassembled after thorough cleaning. Overstressing of bolts to compensate

for poor installation shall not be permitted.

3. After installation, bolts and nuts in buried piping shall be given two heavy coats of a

bituminous paint. Bolts and nuts for exposed or submerged service shall be coated in

accordance with the requirements of Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications.

D. Flanged Joints

1. All flanges shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. Flanges shall be cleaned of

all burrs, deformations, or other imperfections before joining. Flanged joints shall be installed

so as to ensure uniform gasket compression. All bolting shall be pulled up to the specified

torque by crossover sequence. Where screwed flanges are used, the finished pipe edge shall

not extend beyond the face of the flange, and the flange neck shall completely cover the

threaded portion of the pipe.

2. Connections to equipment shall be made in such a way that no torque is placed on the

equipment flanges. Connecting flanges must be in proper position and alignment and no

external force may be used to bring them together properly.

3. After installation, bolts and nuts for exposed or submerged service shall be coated in


4. Flanged filler shall be used only where shown on the Drawings or approved by the

ENGINEER to make up minor differences in pipe length, less than 3 inches. Joint bolts shall

be increased in length by the thickness of the flange filler.

3.03 DRILLING AND TAPPING

A. Wherever required ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be drilled and tapped to receive any other

piping. All holes shall be drilled accurately at right angles to the axis of any pipe or fitting.

Where plugs are drilled, holes shall be at right angles to the face of the plug.

B. Unless shown otherwise, small diameter pipes, less than 2 inches, shall be connected to ductile

iron pipe using one of the following methods:

1. Direct tap.

2. Direct tap with service clamp.

3. Direct tap boss.

4. Tapped plug or flange on tapping saddle.

C. In no case shall the effective number of threads be less than 4

3.04 CONSTRUCTING BENEATH AND BEYOND STRUCTURES

A. Construct beyond buildings and structures in accordance with Section 31 23 00 of these


Specifications.

B. All ductile iron pipe installed under buildings or basins shall be encased and backfilled in

accordance with Section 31 23 00 of these Specifications.

C. All ductile iron pipes entering buildings or basins shall be adequately supported between the

structure and undisturbed earth to prevent damage resulting from settlement of backfill around the

structure.

3.05 CONSTRUCTING WITHIN STRUCTURES

A. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for safe and convenient handling and laying of pipe and

fittings shall be used. Care shall be taken to prevent the pipe coating from being damaged,

particularly cement linings on the inside of the pipes and fittings. Any damage shall be remedied

as directed by the ENGINEER.

B. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined by the CONTRACTOR for defects just before

installing and no pipe or fitting shall be installed if it is defective. If any defective pipe or fitting

is discovered after having been installed, it shall be removed and replaced in a satisfactory manner

with a sound pipe or fitting by the CONTRACTOR at CONTRACTOR's own expense.

C. All pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are installed and shall be kept clean

until they are used in the completed work. Open ends of pipe shall be kept plugged with a

bulkhead during construction.

D. All elbows, tees, brackets, crosses, and reducers in pressure piping systems shall be adequately

restrained against thrust.

E. Wall pipe and wall sleeves shall be accurately located and securely fastened in place before

concrete is poured. All wall pipe and sleeves shall have wall collars properly located to be in the

center of the wall where the respective pipes are to be installed. Pipe passing through the sleeve

shall extend no more than three feet beyond the structure without a piping joint.

F. Wall pipe and wall sleeves shall be constructed when the wall or slab is constructed. Blocking out

or breaking of the wall for later installation shall not be permitted.

G. Cutting or weakening of structural members to facilitate pipe installation shall not be permitted.

All piping shall be installed in place without springing or forcing.

H. Exposed ductile iron piping shall be supported as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section


3.06 FIELD PAINTING

Field painting of exposed and submerged pipe shall be in accordance with the requirements of

Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications.


All testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 01 20.59 of these Specifications.


PLASTIC PIPE 40 05 13.73-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 40 05 13.73

PLASTIC PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct all polyvinyl

chloride pipe and appurtenances located inside buildings and structures, and test as shown on the

Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Complete shop drawings and product data on all piping and fittings shall be submitted to the

CITY in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Shop drawings shall indicate piping layout in plan and/or elevations and shall include a

complete schedule of all pipe, fittings, specials, hangers and supports.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the CITY with lists of all pieces of pipe and fittings in

each shipment received. These lists shall give the serial or mark number, schedule or class,

size and description of each item received.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit written evidence to the CITY that the products furnished

under this Section will conform with the material and mechanical requirements specified

herein. Certified copies of independent laboratory test results or mill test results from the

pipe supplier may be considered evidence of compliance provided such tests are performed in

accordance with the appropriate testing standards by experienced, competent personnel. In

case of doubt as to the accuracy or adequacy of mill tests, the CITY may require that the

CONTRACTOR furnish test reports from an independent testing laboratory on samples of

pipe materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE

A. Schedule Pipe

1. Unless specified or shown on the Drawings otherwise, use schedule polyvinyl chloride

pipe for all interior polyvinyl chloride pipe.

2. Piping: PVC

a. Schedule 80 in accordance with ASTM D 1785.

b. Fittings: Solvent weld socket type, same schedule as piping, ASTM D 2466 or D

2467.

c. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.02 WALL SLEEVES AND WALL PIPES

A. Wall Sleeves: For pipe sizes 3-inches and smaller, wall sleeves shall be steel oversize sleeves

furnished with a full circle, integral, or continuously welded waterstop collar. The sleeve seal

shall be the mechanically expanded, synthetic rubber type. Provide all associated bolts, seals

and seal fittings, pressure clamps, or plates necessary to achieve a watertight installation.


Sleeves shall extend the full thickness of the concrete. Sleeves and seal shall be Link Seal.

Bolts shall be stainless steel.

For larger pipe sizes, wall sleeves shall be ductile iron mechanical joint wall sleeves. Unless

specified or shown otherwise for a specific situation, wall sleeves shall be mechanical joint

bell-plain end type with waterstop/thrust collar. The waterstop collar shall be capable of

withstanding a thrust force caused by a 250 psi dead end load from either direction on that size

pipe. Sleeves shall be constructed with studs and mechanical joint [retainer] gland on the air side

of the concrete structure. Provide retainer gland where shown on the Drawings. Where the

concrete structure is exposed to dirt on one side and is wet on the other side, construct with studs

and glands on the dirt side. Wall sleeves shall be equal to ACIPCO A-10771.

2.03 RESTRAINED FLANGE ADAPTERS

A. The RFA shall permit the connection of unthreaded, ungrooved, open-ended polyvinyl

chloride pipe to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges. The RFA shall meet the test

requirements of ANSI/ASME B16.1 for Class 125 flanges. The RFA shall be a ductile iron

casting incorporating a flange with a serrated edge, clamping bolts, and gasket. The gasket

shall provide a compression seal between the RFA, the pipe and the adjacent flange. RFAs

are to be used only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The RFA shall

be Uni-Flange, EBAA Iron, or Star Pipe Products.

B. Bolts and Nuts

1. All bolts and nuts shall be made in the U.S.A. Bolts and nuts shall be threaded in

accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.1, Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A external and Class

2B internal fit.

2. Bolts for submerged and exposed service shall be stainless steel machine bolts

conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8. All nuts shall be heavy hex, stainless steel

conforming to ASTM A 194, Grade 8.

2.04 RETAINER GLANDS

Retainer glands shall be ductile iron and shall be equal to EBAA Iron 1100 PV or Uni-Flange

Model 1300.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CUTTING

A. When new or existing pipe is required to be cut, the pipe shall be cut in such a manner as to

leave a smooth end normal to the axis of the pipe.

B. All cutting of polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be performed with a cutting saw. All burrs shall

be removed from the inside and outside edges of all cut pipe. All damaged linings and

coatings shall be repaired.

3.02 JOINT ASSEMBLY

A. Push-On Joints: The inside of the bell and the outside of the pipe from the plain end to the

guide stripe shall be wiped clean immediately before assembling the pipe joint. Then the

rubber gasket shall be inserted into a groove or shaped recess in the bell. Both the bell and

spigot ends to be joined shall be wiped again to ensure they are thoroughly clean. A liberal

coating of special lubricant furnished by the pipe manufacturer shall be applied to the outside


of the pipe. The plain end shall be centered in the bell and the spigot pushed home.

B. Mechanical Joints:

1. The surfaces with which the rubber gasket comes in contact shall be brushed thoroughly

with a wire brush just prior to assembly to remove all dirt or foreign material which may

be present and to provide clean surfaces which shall be brushed with a liberal amount of

soapy water or other approved lubricant just prior to slipping the gasket over the spigot

end and into the bell. Lubricant shall be brushed over the gasket prior to installation to

remove loose dirt and lubricate the gasket as it is forced into its retaining space.

2. Joint bolts shall be tightened by the use of wrenches and to a tension recommended by

the pipe manufacturer. When tightening bolts, the gland shall be brought up toward the

pipe bell. If effective sealing is not attained at the maximum torque indicated above, the

joint shall be disassembled and reassembled after thorough cleaning. Overstressing of

bolts to compensate for poor installation shall not be permitted.

C. Flanged Joints

1. All restrained flange adapters shall be installed true and perpendicular to the axis of the

pipe. Flanged joints shall be installed so as to ensure uniform gasket compression. All

bolting shall be pulled up to the specified torque by crossover sequence. The finished

pipe edge shall not extend beyond the face of the flange.

2. Connections to equipment shall be made in such a way that no torque is placed on the

equipment flanges. Connecting flanges must be in proper position and alignment and no

external force may be used to bring them together properly.

D. Solvent-Welded Joints: All solvent-welded joints shall be in accordance with ASTM 2855.

3.03 CONSTRUCTING WITHIN STRUCTURES

A. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for safe and convenient handling and laying of pipe

and fittings shall be used. Any damage shall be remedied as directed by the CITY.

B. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined by the CONTRACTOR for defects just

before installing and no pipe or fitting shall be installed if it is defective. If any defective

pipe or fitting is discovered after having been installed, it shall be removed and replaced in a

satisfactory manner with a sound pipe or fitting by the CONTRACTOR at CONTRACTOR's

own expense.

C. All pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are installed and shall be kept

clean until they are used in the completed work. Open ends of pipe shall be kept plugged

with a bulkhead during construction.

D. All elbows, tees, brackets, crosses, and reducers in pressure piping systems shall be

adequately restrained against thrust.

E. Wall pipe and wall sleeves shall be accurately located and securely fastened in place before

concrete is poured. All wall pipe and sleeves shall have wall collars properly located to be in

the center of the wall where the respective pipes are to be installed. Pipe passing through the

sleeve shall extend no more than three feet beyond the structure with a piping joint.

F. Wall pipe and wall sleeves shall be constructed when the wall or slab is constructed.

Blocking out or breaking of the wall for later installation shall not be permitted.

G. Cutting or weakening of structural members to facilitate pipe installation shall not be

permitted. All piping shall be installed in place without springing or forcing.


H. Exposed polyvinyl chloride piping shall be supported as specified in Section 22 05 29 of



All testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 01 20.59 of these

Specifications.


VALVES 40 05 23-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 40 05 23

VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to complete and make ready

for operation, all valves and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. This Section does not include valves for combustible or flammable liquids or gases.

C. The equipment shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Gate Valves

2. Plug Valves

3. Bronze Ball Valves

4. Stainless Steel Ball Valves

5. Check Valves

6. PVC Ball Valves

7. PVC Ball Check Valves

8. Pressure Regulators

9. Solenoid Valves

10. Seal Water Control Panels

11. Valve Boxes

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the CITY, within 30 days after execution of the Contract, a list of materials to be

furnished, the names of the suppliers, and the date of delivery of materials to the site.

B. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to the CITY for

approval in accordance with Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications. Clearly indicate make,

model, location, type, size and pressure rating.

C. Operating and maintenance data for all valves shall be furnished in accordance with Section



Valves and all associated accessories shall be stored and protected in accordance with the

requirements of Section 01 60 00 of these Specifications.


The manufacturer shall provide written certification to the CITY that all equipment furnished


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible.

B. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on the outside of

the valve body.

C. All exposed bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel.

D. Length Tolerance. Unless otherwise specified, the actual length of valves shall be within

± 1/16 inch of the specified or theoretical length.

2.02 SHOP PAINTING

A. All exterior ferrous metal surfaces of exposed or submerged valves and appurtenances shall

receive a coating of rust-inhibitive primer compatible with the finish paint specified in


B. The exterior of all buried valves shall have a factory applied, two coat coal tar epoxy coating

system. The coal tar epoxy shall be Tnemec Tneme-Tar 46-413, Indurall Ruffstuff 2100 Coal

Tar Epoxy or KopCoat Bitumastic No. 300-M. Each coating shall have a dry film thickness

of 8-10 mils.

C. All interior ferrous metal surfaces of valves, except for finished or bearing surfaces, and

appurtenances shall be provided with two coats, interior epoxy coating conforming to the

requirements of AWWA C550 and NSF 61. The coating shall be equal to Tnemec Series 20

Pota Pox, Valspar Series 78 Hi-Build Epoxy, or KopCoat Hi-Gard Epoxy. The coating

system shall have a dry film thickness of 4 - 6 mils.

2.03 GATE VALVES (GV)

A. Valves 3-Inches in Diameter and Smaller: Gate valves shall be bronze, heavy duty, rising

stem, wedge type with screwed or union bonnet. Valve ends shall be threaded or solder type

as appropriate. Valves shall have a minimum 200 psi working pressure for water and 125 psi

working pressure for steam. Valves shall be made in the U.S.A. Gate valves shall be equal

to Crane No. 428 (threaded) or Crane No. 1334 (solder end).

B. Valves 4-Inches Through 12-Inches in Diameter: Gate valves 4 through 12-inches shall be

resilient wedge type conforming to the requirements of AWWA C509 rated for 200 psi

working pressure.

1. Valves shall be provided with two O-ring stem seals with one O-ring located above and

one O-ring below the stem collar. The area between the O-rings shall be filled with

lubricant to provide lubrication to the thrust collar bearing surfaces each time the valve is

operated. At least one anti-friction washer shall be utilized to further minimize operating

torque. All seals between valve parts, such as body and bonnet, bonnet and bonnet cover,

shall be flat gaskets or O-rings.

2. The valve gate shall be made of cast iron having a vulcanized, synthetic rubber coating,

or a seat ring attached to the disc with retaining screws. Sliding of the rubber on the

seating surfaces to compress the rubber will not be allowed. The design shall be such

that compression-set of the rubber shall not affect the ability of the valve to seal when

pressure is applied to either side of the gate. The sealing mechanism shall provide zero

leakage at the water working pressure when installed with the line flow in either

direction.

3. All internal ferrous surfaces shall be coated with epoxy to a minimum thickness of 4 mils.


The epoxy shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to the water and shall conform to AWWA

C550, latest revision.

4. Gate valves 4 through 12-inches shall be manufactured by American RxD, American

Flow Control, or Mueller

C. Valves 16-Inches in Diameter and Larger: Valves shall be double-disc type conforming to

the requirements of AWWA C500. Valves shall be designed for horizontal installation with

tracks and rollers, bypass valves, and bevel gear type actuator. Valves shall be rated for 150

psi working pressure.

D. Valve ends shall be mechanical joint type except where flanged or restrained joint ends are

shown. Flanged joints shall meet the requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125.

E. Operators

1. Manually operated valves, including geared valves, shall be non-rising stem type having

O-ring seals.

2. Valves for buried service shall have a nut type operator and shall be equipped with a

valve box and extension stem as specified in this Section unless access to the operator is

provided by a manhole.

3. Valves for non-buried service shall be equipped with a handwheel operator. Valves six

feet or more above the operating floor shall be equipped with a chainwheel operator and

chain for operation from floor level.

4. Valves shall be provided with motorized operators where shown on the Drawings and as

specified in this Section.

2.04 PLUG VALVES (PV)

A. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and shall be

furnished with end connections as shown on the Drawings. Design of the valve shall provide

that contact between the seat and the plug shall only occur in the final degrees of plug

movement. Valves shall be suitable for throttling service and service where valve operation

is infrequent.

B. Valves shall provide drip-tight shut-off up to the full pressure rating with pressure in either

direction. Pressure ratings shall be established by hydrostatic tests conducted in accordance

with ANSI B16.1. Valves shall be rated at a minimum of 150 psi.

C. Valves shall have a port area equal to at least 80 percent of the full pipe area.

D. Bodies shall be cast-iron, conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B (carbon steel for 2-inch

valves). Mechanical joint valves shall have bell ends conforming to applicable requirements

of AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11. Flanged joints shall meet the requirements of ANSI B16.1,

Class 125. Flanged valves with flange-to-MJ adapters shall not be acceptable in lieu of MJ

valves. Grooved ends shall be per AWWA C-606. Screwed ends shall be to the NPT

standard. All external nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel. The valve body shall have two

coats of asphalt varnish applied to the valve interior.

E. Bodies in 4” and larger valves shall be furnished with a 1/8” welded overlay seat of not less

than 90 percent pure nickel. Seat area shall be raised, with raised surface completely covered

with weld to insure that the plug face contacts only nickel. Screwed-in seats shall not be

acceptable.

F. The plug shall be of ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron. The plug shall have a cylindrical


seating surface eccentrically offset from the center of the plug shaft. The interference

between the plug face and body seat, with the plug in the closed position, shall be externally

adjustable in the field with the valve in the line under pressure. Plug shall be Chloroprene

(CR). Valves utilizing ball shaped plugs or round shaped ports are not acceptable.

G. Valves shall have sleeve type metal bearings and shall be of sintered, oil impregnated

permanently lubricated type 316 ASTM A743, Grade CF8M in ½ - 36" sizes. In valves

larger than 36", the upper and lower plug journals shall be fitted with ASTM A-240 type 316

stainless sleeves with bearings of ASTM B30, Alloy C95400 aluminum bronze. Non-

metallic bearings shall not be acceptable. Top and bottom journal areas shall be supplied

with standard Alemite grease fittings. The bearings must be grooved to provide equal

distribution of grease throughout the entire circumference. The bottom grease fitting shall

not be located directly under the valve for improved access.

H. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type and shall be externally adjustable and

repackable without removing the actuator or bonnet from the valve under pressure. When

supplied with gear actuators, an actuator mounting bracket shall be provided to allow for a

physical separation between the valve and actuator and for visual inspection and clearance to

adjust the packing. All valves shall have a cast iron packing gland follower required to

facilitate packing adjustment. Pre-spaced packing shims are not an acceptable alternative and

valves utilizing O-ring seals or non-adjustable packing shall not be acceptable.

I. Pressure ratings shall be 175 psi on sizes ½ - 12" and 150 psi for 14 - 72". Every valve shall

be given a hydrostatic and seat test with test results being certified.

J. Actuators

1. Manual valves shall have lever or gear actuators and tee wrenches, extension stems,

floorstands, etc., as indicated on the plans. All valves 6" and larger shall be equipped

with gear actuators. All gearing shall be enclosed in a cast iron housing and be suitable

for running in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt and

water into the actuator. The actuator shaft and the quadrant shall be supported on

permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actuators shall clearly indicate valve position

and an adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque and to provide adjustment

to compensate for change in pressure differential or flow direction change. All exposed

nuts, bolts and washers shall be stainless steel.

2. Motorized actuators shall be provided where shown on the Drawings and as specified in

Section 40 92 43. G-Series cylinder actuators shall be equipped with an operating nut to

allow manual valve operation in case of supply failure.

3. Valves and operators for submerged or buried service shall have seals on all shafts and

gaskets on valve operator covers to prevent the entry of water. Operator mounting

brackets for buried or submerged service shall be totally enclosed and shall have gasket

seals. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, and washers shall be stainless steel.

K. Operators

1. Valves for non-buried service, six feet or more above the operating floor shall be

furnished with a chainwheel operator and chain for operation from floor level. All other

valves shall be equipped with a handwheel operator unless noted otherwise.

2. Valves shall be equipped with pedestal type operators where shown on the Drawings.

L. Limit Switches

1. Where shown on the P&IDs, provide open/close limit switches indicating the open/close


position of the valves.

M. Plug valves shall be manufactured by DeZURIK or approved equal.

2.05 BRONZE BALL VALVES (3-INCHES AND SMALLER)

A. Ball valves shall have a single piece, bronze body construction. Valves shall have threaded

ends and lever operator. Ball shall be 316 stainless steel with TFE seats and packing. Valves

shall be pressure rated for 400 psi at 68 degrees F.

B. Valves shall be Apollo Series 70-100, Neles-Jamesbury Series 300, Watts No. B-6400, or

Nibco T580.

2.06 STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVES (3-INCHES AND SMALLER)

A. Ball valves 2-inches in diameter and smaller shall be 2-piece, full port and stainless steel

body construction. Valve shall have threaded ends and a lever operator or motorized

operator as shown on the Drawings. Ball shall be 316 stainless steel with TFE seats and

packing. Valve shall be pressure rated for minimum WOG pressure rating of 1,500 psi.

B. Ball valves shall be manufactured by Watts Series S-FBV-1, Apollo Series 76-100, or equal.

2.07 CHECK VALVES (CV)

A. Swing Disc Type, Cushioned (M-B-23-0033; M-B-23-0034; M-B-23-0035)

1. Check valves shall be hinged disc type with cast iron body and bronze or bronze-fitted

disc. Valves shall be designed for the operating head indicated and shall not slam shut on

pump shutdown. The valve shall be set to close at a differential operating pressure of 1

psi. Valves shall be equipped with a 1/2-inch stop cock at the high point of the valve for

bleeding air from the line.

2. Valves shall be outside weight and lever cushioned type. The cushion chamber shall be

attached to the side of the valve body externally and constructed with a piston operating

in a chamber that will effectively prevent water hammer at the pump discharge heads

specified. The cushioning shall be by air, and the cushion chamber shall be so arranged

that the closing speed will be adjustable to meet the service requirements.

3. Valve ends shall be flanged, meeting the requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125.

4. Valves shall be manufactured by APCO or GA Industries.

B. Swing Disk Type, Spring and Lever Type

1. Check valves shall be hinged disc type with cast iron body and bronze or bronze-fitted

disc. Valves shall be designed for the operating head indicated and shall not slam shut on

pump shutdown. The valve shall be set to close at a differential operating pressure of 1

psi. Valves shall be equipped with a 1/2-inch stop cock at the high point of the valve for

bleeding air from the line.

2. Valves shall be spring and lever type.

3. Valves shall be spring and lever type.

4. Valves shall be manufactured by Mueller or M & H Valve.

2.08 PVC BALL VALVES

Ball valves shall be non-shock thermoplastic of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with O-ring stem seal and


Teflon ball seat. O-ring seals shall be Viton. Valves shall withstand 150 psi pressure. Valves

shall have union connections at each end. Valves shall be Hayward "Safe Block", or Chemtrol

TU Series, or Spears (True Union 2000 Industrial).

2.09 PVC BALL CHECK VALVES

Ball check valves shall be non-shock thermoplastic type of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with O-ring ball

seal. O-ring seals shall be Viton. The valve shall have a true union connection for easy removal.

The valve shall operate in the vertical or horizontal position. Valve shall be Hayward "True

Check" or Chemtrol BC Series, or Spears (True Union 2000 Industrial).

2.10 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Regulators shall be of a cast bronze body, stainless steel seat ring with 1/2 to 2-inch NPT

threaded connections.

B. Provide regulator with separate "Y" type strainer with 20 mesh stainless steel screen and

removable plug. Attach strainer at the inlet end of regulator with bronze nipple.

C. Unless otherwise noted, pressure regulator shall be factory set at [45] psi and have an

adjustable range of 25 to 84 psi using an external adjusting screw. Valve shall be rated for

150 psig minimum inlet water pressure.

D. Valves shall be manufactured by Watts No. 25AUB or Mueller H-9300 Series.

2.11 ‘Y’ TYPE STRAINER

A. ‘Y’ Type Strainer shall be of flanged type and 20 mesh stainless steel screen and removable

plug.

B. Manufacturer: Eaton Model 85Y or approved equal.

2.12 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Solenoid valves shall have packless construction without packing box or sliding seal.

B. Solenoid coils for AC service shall be 115 volts, 60 hertz, encapsulated, Class F, for

continuous duty at rated voltage ± 10 percent and 40°C ambient, in a NEMA Type 4

enclosure, with a conduit knockout.

C. Solenoid coils for DC service shall be 125 volts, Class H, for continuous duty at rated voltage

± 10 percent and 40°C ambient, in a NEMA Type 4 enclosure, with a conduit knockout.

D. Valves shall be normally closed unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.

Normally open solenoid valves shall close when energized and normally closed solenoid

valves shall open when energized.

As indicated

on drawings

Type

Body/Bonnet

Trim

Seals

Disc

Stem

Bonnet Gasket

Spring

End Connection

Temp. Limitations

Valve Operator

2-Way, pilot operated

Brass or bronze

Buna-N or Teflon

Buna-N or Teflon

Manufacturer’s standard



Threaded

32 to 104°F

Integral


Manufacturers ASCO “8210 Series”

2.13 MOTORIZED ACTUATORS

Motorized actuators shall be as specified in Section 40 92 43 of these Specifications.

2.14 SEAL WATER CONTROL PANELS

A. Seal water control panels shall monitor and control water pressure and seal water flow.

Panels shall be for provided for single mechanical seals as specified below and shown on the

Drawings.

B. Single Mechanical Seals.

1. Unit shall include 1 inlet and 1 outlet port. Ports shall be 3/8” compression fitting ports.

The inlet ports shall consist of a seal water supply port and the outlet port shall be the

mechanical seal supply port.

2. The unit shall have a pressure reducing valve, flow rotameter, manual flow control valve,

low flow sensor/switch, purge outlet and mounting bracket. The unit shall be capable of

measuring and controlling seal water flows between 2 and 50 GPH. Unit shall have a

pressure rating of 160 psig.

3. All metal components shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Unit body shall be

polyoxymethylene(POM) or PVC.

4. The low flow sensor shall operate on a 10-55 DC volts with a switching frequency of 100

Hz.

5. The unit shall be a SP50 as manufactured by Chesterton or equal product offered by John

Crane.

2.15 VALVE BOXES (VB)

A. All valves shall be equipped with valve boxes. The valve boxes shall be cast iron two-piece

screw type with drop covers. Valve boxes shall have a 5.25-inch inside diameter. Valve box

covers shall weigh a minimum of 13 pounds. The valve boxes shall be adjustable to 6-inches up

or down from the nominal required cover over the pipe. Valve boxes shall be of sufficient length

that bottom flange of the lower belled portion of the box is below the valve operating nut.

Ductile or cast iron extensions shall be provided as necessary. Covers shall have "WATER

VALVE", "SEWER", "AIR", or "WATER" cast into them. Valve boxes shall be manufactured

in the United States.

B. Valve boxes shall be manufactured by Tyler or Opelika.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings, true to

alignment and properly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the

satisfaction of the CITY before they are installed.

3.02 FIELD PAINTING

All exposed, non-buried or submerged valves and appurtenances specified herein except for


stainless steel shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications.


Following installation, operating tests will be performed to demonstrate to the CITY that all

equipment and accessories will function in a satisfactory manner. The CONTRACTOR shall

make, at CONTRACTOR's own expense, all necessary changes, modifications and/or

adjustments required to ensure satisfactory operation.

3.04 CLEANING

Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials,

equipment and related areas in accordance with Section 01 74 00 of these Specifications.


SLIDE GATES 40 20 10-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 40 20 10

SLIDE GATES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

The work covered by this section includes furnishing all labor, equipment and materials required

to install Stainless Steel Channel Gates and operators as shown on the Drawings and/or specified

herein.

1.02 GENERAL

A. Equipment provided under this Section shall be fabricated, and assembled in full conformity

with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the

equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by ENGINEER.

B. Gates and actuators shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on

the Drawings, specified, or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation

and shall be the latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the

production of sluice gates.

1. The Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section shall apply to all equipment

furnished under this Section. If requirements in this Specification differ from those in the

Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section, the requirements specified herein shall

take precedence.

2. Permanent Number Plates: Gates that have been assigned a number on the Drawings or

in the Gate Schedule shall be provided with a permanent number plate. The location of

number plates and the method of fastening shall be acceptable to CITY. Numerals shall

be at least 1 inch high and shall be black baked enamel on anodized aluminum plate.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and engineering data in accordance with the requirements of Section


B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements

of Section 01 78 23 of these Specifications.

C. Shop drawings shall be prepared and assembled by the listed gate manufacturers. Shop

drawings prepared and assembled by manufacturer's sales representatives, distributors,

dealers, fabrication shops or other than the listed gate manufacturers will not be accepted.


Gates and plates shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 01

60 00 of these Specifications.


A. The manufacturer shall provide written certification to the CITY that all equipment furnished


B. The gate manufacturer shall provide unit responsibility for all items specified in this section.


Unit responsibility shall require that all items be products of, or warranted by, the gate

manufacturer. The gate manufacturer shall be responsible for all coordination between

components and provide all submittals, installation and start-up assistance, and certification

on the equipment as a unit.

1.06 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Slide gates shall be manufactured by Rodney Hunt, Hydro Gate, Waterman or Whipps, Inc.


A. Slide gates shall be reinforced as required for a maximum deflection under the design head of

not more than 1/360 of the span of the gate. Gates wider than seven feet shall be designed for

deflection of less than 1/720 of the span of the gate under the designed head. The frame,

yoke, stem guides, slide, and stem extension shall be 316L stainless steel, ASTM A-240.

B. The gate frame shall be constructed of structural members or formed plate. The frame shall

be suitable for mounting on a concrete wall (CW) at the end of a channel, embedded inside a

channel (FE) or mounted on the channel surface (EC). The guide slot shall be of UHMWPE

(ultra high molecular weight polyethylene, ASTM D-4020). The frame configuration shall be

of the flush-bottom type. Gasket between frame and wall shall be EPDM ASTM 1056.

C. The gate seat and angle frame shall be an integral extrusion. The gate frame shall form

guides for the slide and holes shall be provided for anchor bolts. The angle frame shall be

sufficiently long to retain at least one-half of the vertical height of the slide in the fully open

position. The frame shall be suitable for embedding in concrete, unless otherwise shown on

the Drawings.

D. Fasteners: All anchor bolts, assembly bolts and nuts shall be of ample section to safely

withstand forces created by operation of the gate. Quantity and size shall be recommended

by the manufacturer. Anchor bolts shall be furnished with two nuts each to attach gates to

concrete. Fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM F593 and F594, GR2.

F. Slide gates shall incorporate replaceable, ultra-high molecular weight bearing bars to reduce

the friction between the slide and the gate seat.

G. Guides and Seals: Guides shall be made of UHMWPE (ultra high molecular weight

polyethylene) and shall be of such length as to retain and support at least two thirds (2/3) of

the vertical height of the slide in the fully open position. Side seals shall be made of

UHMWPE (ultra high molecular weight polyethylene) of the self-adjusting type and shall not

allow any metal to metal contact. Side seals shall extend to the top of the frame. A

compression cord (Nitrile ASTM D-2000, M6BG 708, A14, B14, E014, E034) shall ensure

contact between the UHMWPE guide and the gate in all positions. The sealing system shall

maintain efficient sealing in any position of the slide and let the water flow only in the open

part of the gate. Seals shall maintain the specified leakage rate in both seating and unseating

conditions. A solid rubber flush bottom seal, made of resilient neoprene (ASTM D 2000,

Grade 2 BC-510), shall be securely fastened to the bottom cross member of the frame with a

retainer and threaded fasteners. The top surface of the seal shall be flush with the invert of

the gate opening. The seal shall be replaceable without gate disassembly.


H. Operators and Stems

1. Operating stems shall be of a size to safely withstand, without buckling or distortion, the

stresses induced by normal operating forces. The stems shall be designed to transmit, in

compression, at least twice the rated output of the floor stand or bench stand with a 40

pound effort on the crank or handwheel.

2. The threaded portion of the stem shall have machined cut threads of the Acme type.

3. Stems of more than one section shall be joined by bronze couplings, threaded and keyed

or bored and pinned to the stems. All threaded and keyed couplings of the same size

shall be interchangeable. The couplings shall be of greater strength than the stem.

4. Manually operated rising stem gates shall be provided with an adjustable, bronze stop

collar on the stem above the floor stand lift nut.

5. All stems shall be fabricated from 316 stainless steel, ASTM A-276, and shall not be less

than 1-1/2-inches in diameter.

6. Provide a clear, plastic stem (polycarbonate ASTM D-3935) cover with mylar position

indicator strip.

7. Gates having width equal to or greater than two times their height shall be provided with

two lifting mechanisms connected by a tandem shaft.

8. Rising stem gates shall be provided with a clear polycarbonate stem cover. The stem

cover shall have a cap and condensation vents as well as a clear mylar position indicating

tape. The tape shall be field applied to the stem cover after the gate has been installed

and positioned.

I. Manual Operators

1. Manual operation shall be by handwheel, minimally 24-inches in diameter or

crank-operated floor stands or bench stands as shown on the Drawings. Handwheel

operated type shall be without gear reduction; crank-operated type shall have either a

single or double gear reduction, depending upon the lifting capacity required. Each type

shall be provided with a threaded, cast bronze lift nut to engage the operating stem. Each

manual operator shall be designed to operate the gate under the maximum specified

seating and unseating heads by using a maximum effort of 40 lbs. (178 N) on the crank or

handwheel and shall be able to withstand, without damage, an effort of 80 lbs. (356 N).

2. Tapered roller bearings or ball thrust bearings shall be provided above and below a flange

on the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts.

3. Floor stands shall operate the gates with not greater than 40 pound pull on the crank or

handwheel. Gears, where required, shall be steel or cast iron with machine cut teeth

designed for smooth operation. The pinion shafts on crank-operated floor stands, either

single or double, shall be supported on tapered roller bearings or needle bearings. All

components shall be totally enclosed in a cast iron case and cover. Positive mechanical

seals, to retain lubricant and exclude moisture and dirt, shall be provided on the operating

nut and the pinion shafts where they extend from the cast iron case or gear box.

Lubricating fittings shall be provided for the lubrication of all gears and bearings.

4. The removable crank shall be cast iron with a revolving brass or iron grip. Floor stands

shall include a cast iron pedestal design to position the input shaft approximately

36-inches above the operating floor.

J. Motorized Operators


Electric actuators shall be as specified in Section 40 92 43.

2.03 SHOP PAINTING

A. All iron and steel surfaces, except machined surfaces, shall be shop cleaned by blasting in

accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and finish painted with an

epoxy or epoxy/polyurethane coating system. Non-submerged components shall be painted

with two coats of epoxy paint having a total dry film thickness of at least 10 mils and one

topcoat of polyurethane having a dry film thickness of at least 2 mils. All components

subject to submergence shall be painted with three coats of epoxy paint having a total

combined dry film thickness of at least 15 mils [375 μm]. Finish color shall be medium gray,

except for handwheels, levers, and other operating devices, which shall be safety red. Field

painting of gates, actuators, and appurtenances, other than touchup painting, will not be

required. A sufficient quantity of additional coating materials shall be furnished by the gate

manufacturer to permit field touchup of damaged coatings.

2.04 PERFORMANCE

A. Gates shall be substantially watertight under the design head conditions. Leakage shall not

exceed 0.05 U.S. gallon per minute per foot (0.60 l/min per meter) of seal periphery under the

design seating head and unseating head.

B. The slide gates shall be designed to withstand the maximum design head (maximum design

head shall be taken as the height of the slide unless otherwise shown in the schedule).

C. The gate's sealing system should have been tested through a cycle test in an abrasive

environment and should show that the leakage requirements are still obtained after 25,000

cycles with a minimum deterioration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Slide gates and stop plates shall be installed as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and

in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Slide gate and stop plate frames and plates shall be checked, prior to installation, for

projections or warpage that would promote excessive leakage. Defective gates and plates

shall be removed and replaced.

C. Slide gate and stop plate frames shall be installed true to the lines and elevations shown and

accurately aligned. Frames shall be internally braced and adequately supported during

concrete placement and/or installation.


Following installation, operating tests will be performed to demonstrate to the Engineer that all

slide gates, weir gates and stop plates will perform in a satisfactory manner. The Contractor shall

make, at Contractor's expense, all necessary modifications, changes and/or adjustments required

to ensure satisfactory operation.

3.03 CLEANING

Prior to acceptance of the work of this section, thoroughly clean all installed materials and related

areas in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 74 00 of these Specifications.


TABLE 1 - GATE SCHEDULE

Gate No.

Opening

Direction

Size

W x H,

inches* Operator

Maximum Head, feet

Frame

Thimble

Type Seat Unseat Operating

M-B-23-0019 Upward to

open

2- Feet 8 –

Inch x 7-

feet 4-Inch

Motor

Actuator

5.34-

Feet

4.29-

Feet

5.29- Feet EM No


open

2- Feet 8 –

Inch x 7-

feet 4-Inch

Motor

Actuator

5.34-

Feet

4.29-

Feet

5.29- Feet EM No


open

4- Feet x 6-

Feet 2

Inches

Manual -- 4.26-

Feet

4.26- Feet SMF No

*Operating or nominal size without allowance for frame. CONTRACTOR to field verify opening

dimensions.

Frame Types

FL = Flange Back

FT = Flat Back, Surface-Mounted

FB = Flush Bottom

EM = Embedded Sides and Bottom

SMF= Self-Contained In-Channel Surface Mounted Frame Slide Gate

NOTES:

1. "Seat" under "Maximum Head (feet)" in the Gate Schedule shall be defined as feet of water as

measured from the approximate gate disc centerline to water surface that exerts a seating

pressure of gate disc onto seals or seats.

2. "Unseat" under "Maximum Head (feet)" in the Gate Schedule shall be defined as feet of water

as measured from the approximate gate disc centerline to water surface that exerts an unseating

pressure to move the gate disc away from the seals, or seats.

3. "Operating" under "Maximum Head (feet)" in the Gate Schedule shall be defined as feet of

water under which the gate must be opened or closed.

4. The information shown within the Gate Schedule does not substitute or relieve the

manufacturer from examining the Drawings for fit and/or interferences with size of the

manufacturer's structural gate frames and members that the manufacturer shall use.


STEEL, ALLOY, AND COPPER PIPING 40 27 13-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 40 27 13

STEEL, ALLOY, AND COPPER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this section includes furnishing all labor, equipment and materials required

to furnish, install and test steel pipe, alloy pipe, stainless steel pipe and copper tubing, including

all fittings, sleeves, unions and accessories, as specified herein and/or shown on the Drawings.

B. The CONTRACTOR's attention is called to the fact that all steel and alloy piping or copper tubing

is not necessarily shown completely on the Drawings, which are more or less schematic.

However, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all pipe and fittings and do all piping work

indicated or required for the proper operation of all equipment and services requiring such piping.

1.02 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. All such work shall be done by competent workers in a thorough workmanlike manner according

to best practice and in compliance with all codes and applicable regulations, with proper

provisions for uncoupling, draining, expansion and contraction.

B. Process piping furnished as an integral part of an item of equipment shall conform to the

requirements of the latest edition of ANSI B16.3, Code for Petroleum Refining Piping or ANSI

B16.4, Code for Refrigeration Piping, as applicable.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Complete shop drawings and engineering data on fabricated piping shall be submitted to the CITY in



A. Piping and accessories shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements of


B. All piping and tubing and accessories shall be stored above ground fully supported so as not to

bend or deflect excessively under their own weight. Piping shall be stored with slope so as to be

free draining.


Prior to its incorporation into the work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the CITY written

evidence that the pipe furnished under this section is in conformance with the material and mechanical

requirements specified herein. Certified copies of independent laboratory test results or mill test

results from the pipe supplier may be considered evidence of compliance provided such tests are

performed in accordance with the appropriate ASTM or AWWA testing standards by experienced,

competent personnel. In case of doubt as to the accuracy or adequacy of mill tests, the CITY may

require that the CONTRACTOR furnish test reports from an independent testing laboratory on

samples of pipe materials.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS


A. General

1. Unless otherwise shown or specified on the Drawings, all piping 2-1/2-inches and smaller

shall be copper tubing, except that Schedule 40 red brass threaded nipples with 125 pound

forged bronze threaded fittings per ANSI B16.15 are acceptable for short branches to pressure

gauges and drains. Unless otherwise shown or specified, pipe 3-inches and larger shall be

galvanized alloy pipe or cast iron or ductile iron pipe. Carbon steel pipe shall be used only

where approved by the ENGINEER or where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

2. No broken, cracked, deformed, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or defective pipe or

fittings shall be used. All such materials shall be removed from the site.

B. Stainless Steel Pipe

1. Stainless steel pipe in sizes 10-inches and smaller shall be seamless stainless steel pipe

conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 312, Type 304.

2. Unless otherwise specified or shown, stainless steel pipe 1-1/2-inches and smaller shall be

screwed, Schedule 40S. Steel pipe in sizes 2 through 10-inches shall be welded, Schedule

10S.

3. Screwed fittings and unions 1-1/2-inches and smaller shall be 3,000 pound forged stainless

steel conforming to ASTM A 182, Grade F304 and ANSI B16.11.

4. Welded fittings shall be of the butt-welded type of wrought stainless steel conforming to

ASTM A 403, Grade WP304 and ANSI B16.9. Reducing branch connections shall be made

using threadolets or weldolets.

5. Flanges shall be 150 pound, forged stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 182, Grade 304

and ANSI B16.5. Bolts shall be heavy hex conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8. Nuts

shall be heavy hex conforming to ASTM A 194, Grade 8. Gaskets shall be red rubber,

1/16-inch thick, conforming to ANSI B16.21. Gaskets for piping operating at temperatures in

excess of 150 degrees F shall be compressed asbestos or soft corrugated metal.

C. Copper Pipe

1. Exposed copper tubing for water or gas shall be seamless harddrawn copper tube conforming

to the requirements of ASTM B 88, Type L. Buried copper tubing shall be seamless,

annealed copper tube conforming to the requirements of ASTM B 88, Type K. Annealed

copper tube may be furnished in straight lengths or coils. All fittings shall be soldered, except

at valves which may be flared, compression types or threaded type supplied with solder socket

by threaded adaptors. Fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.18 or ANSI/ASME B16.22.

Where required for connection to equipment, valves, and accessories, ANSI B16.24, Class

150, cast bronze, brazed joint.

2. Copper tubing for instrument air service in sizes 5/8-inch O.D. and smaller shall be coated,

seamless, bright annealed copper tube conforming to ASTM B 68, Type DHP. Wall

thickness of copper tube shall be as follows:


Tube O.D. Wall Thickness

1/4" 0.030"

3/8" 0.032"

1/2" 0.035"

5/8" 0.040"

3. Instrument air tubing shall be factory coated with a layer of black PVC meeting the

requirements of ASTM D 1047, IPCEA S-61-402, and applicable UL standards. Minimum

coating thickness shall be 0.032-inch. Unless otherwise shown, minimum size of instrument

air tubing shall be 3/8-inch O.D.

4. Fittings for copper tube shall be wrought copper conforming to ASTM B 75 and ANSI

B16.22 for silver brazed joints. Fittings for annealed copper tube in instrument air service

shall be of the flareless, compression type, Hoke "Gyrolok", Crawford "Swagelok" or Parker

"Trible-Lok", conforming to ASTM B 16 or B 124.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing

1. Stainless steel tubing for sample and process leads shall be seamless, bright annealed stainless

steel tube conforming to ASTM A 269, Type 316 with minimum 3/8-inch O.D. and

0.035-inch wall thickness.

2. Fittings for stainless steel tubing shall be of the flareless, compression type of 316 stainless

steel.

3. Where process leads or sample tubing are specified to be heat traced, furnish pre-insulated

factory traced and jacketed tubing with 4 watts per foot, parallel, self-regulating, electric

tracing, glass fiber, insulation and black, 105 degree PVC jacket overall. Tubing shall

conform to Article 2.06, Paragraph A above. Product shall be factory mutual approved for

Class I, Division 2 locations and shall operate on 120 volt, 60 Hz, single phase power. All

necessary termination and splicing accessories shall be furnished by the tubing manufacturer.

E. Unions: Unions shall be of the ground joint type. Unions in carbon steel and alloy steel piping

shall be 300 pound galvanized malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 197 and ANSI B16.3 with

bronze to iron seats. Unions in stainless steel piping shall be 3,000 pound forged stainless steel

conforming to ASTM A 182, Grade F304 and ANSI B 16.11. Unions in copper piping shall be

cast red bronze with bronze to bronze seats.

F. Pipe Dope

1. All threaded connections shall be made up using Teflon pipe dope applied to the male threads

only.

2. Virgin Teflon thread tape shall be Hercules Packing Company "Herculon", 3-M Company

"Scotch No. 48" or Crane Packing Company "Teflon Thread Tape".

3. Teflon thread paste may be used in place of tape on very large or very small joints.

G. Expansion Couplings

1. Expansion couplings for steel and alloy pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 22



2. Expansion couplings shall be furnished where shown on the Drawings, required, or directed

by the ENGINEER.

H. Linings

1. Where shown or specified, piping shall be furnished with a coal tar enamel lining or coal tar

epoxy lining as described herein.

2. Coal tar enamel linings shall consist of a primer and a hot-applied lining of coal tar enamel.

Pipe to be coated shall be given a solvent cleaning followed by a commercial blast cleaning in

accordance with SSPC SP-6. Primer shall be applied immediately after blasting. Thickness

of coal tar enamel lining shall be 3/32-inch. Except for specials and welded field joints all

pipe shall be lined in the shop by mechanical means. Coal tar enamel lining shall conform to

the requirements of AWWA C203.

3. Coal tar epoxy linings shall consist of a two-component inhibitive epoxy primer and a

two-component high build, polyamide cured coal tar epoxy lining. Pipe to be coated shall be

given a solvent cleaning followed by a near white blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC

SP-10. Primer shall be applied immediately after blasting to a minimum dry film thickness of

1.5 mils. Coal tar epoxy finish shall be applied in two coats having a minimum dry film

thickness of 10 mils per coat. Finished lining shall have a dry film thickness of 20-25 mils.

Except for specials and welded field joints, all pipe shall be lined in the shop by mechanized

means. Coal tar epoxy linings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C210.

4. The manufacturers of the lined pipe and field lining materials shall furnish the CITY written

certifications that the pipe lining systems conform to all applicable requirements of AWWA

C203 or AWWA C210, as appropriate.

I. Coatings

1. Where shown or specified, buried piping shall be furnished with a coal tar enamel coating or

cold-applied, plastic tape wrap coating as described herein.

2. Coal tar enamel coatings shall consist of a primer, a hot-applied coating of coal tar enamel, a

bonded wrap of coal tar saturated asbestos felt, and a protective wrapping of 75 pound Kraft

paper. Pipe to be coated shall be given a solvent cleaning followed by a commercial blast

cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP-6. Primer shall be applied immediately after blasting.

Except for specials, fittings and field joints, all pipe shall be coated in the shop by mechanical

means. Coal tar enamel coatings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C203.

3. Cold-applied, plastic tape wrap coatings shall consist of a primer, a cold-applied wrap of

laminated polyethylene tape, and a protective wrapping of 90 pound Kraft paper or 50-50-50

pound laminated Kraft paper. Pipe to be coated shall be given a solvent cleaning followed by

a commercial blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP-6. Primer shall be applied

immediately after blasting. Laminated tape wrap shall have an overall thickness of not less

than 1/2-inch. Except for specials, fittings and field joints, all pipe shall be coated in the shop

by mechanical means. Cold-applied plastic tape wrap coatings shall comply with the

requirements of AWWA C209 and C214. Plastic tape coatings and materials shall be as

manufactured by the Tapecoat Company, Republic Steel Corporation or Polyken Division of

Kendall Company, subject, however, to the requirements of these Specifications.


4. The manufacturers of the coated pipe and field coating materials shall provide the CITY with

written certifications that the pipe coating systems conform to all applicable requirements of

AWWA C203, C209, C210 or C214, as appropriate.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. All exposed piping shall be firmly anchored and supported by pipe supports or anchors as

shown or required. Pipe supports shall be furnished as shown on the Drawings or in

accordance with the requirements of Section 22 05 29 of these Specifications. All pipe shall

be carefully placed to the proper lines and grades as shown on the Drawings.

2. Full lengths of pipe shall be used wherever possible. Short lengths of pipe with couplings

will not be permitted. Pipe shall be cut to exact measurement and shall be installed without

forcing or springing.

3. Lines which slope shall have the right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

Offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes shall be made as required to maintain

proper head room, slope, etc.

4. Piping shall be installed in such manner and at such times as will require a minimum of

cutting and repairing of building structures. In case any such cutting or repairing is necessary,

it shall be done only with the permission of the ENGINEER. Cutting and repairing shall be

performed by craftsmen of the trade which originally executed the work, and repairs shall

match the original condition.

5. Except for annealed tubing, all changes in direction in piping systems shall be made with

suitable fittings. Annealed tubing shall be bent using suitable bending tools.

6. When storing and installing pipe, care shall be taken to prevent damage to the pipe coatings.

Steel pipe with an exterior bituminous or plastic coating or wrapping shall be handled using

rubber or canvas slings. All damaged coatings shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.

7. A liberal number of unions and/or flanged joints shall be used to permit the ready removal of

any section. Unions shall be installed in all piping connections to equipment, to regulating

valves, and wherever necessary to facilitate the dismantling of piping and removal of valves

and other items requiring maintenance. Flanges on equipment may be considered as unions.

8. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation of or accessibility to doors and/or

windows, shall not encroach on aisles, passageways and equipment, and shall not interfere

with the servicing or maintenance of any equipment.

9. The interior of all piping shall be free from obstructions and protrusions. All burrs shall be

removed from the inside and outside edges of all cut pipe by reaming. Cutting shall be done

in such a manner so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to pipe threads. Tool marks and

unnecessary pipe threads shall be avoided. Cuttings and other foreign material shall be

removed from the inside of the pipe prior to installation.


10. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, piping and tubing laid underground shall have a

minimum cover over the top of the pipe as follows:

a. Located in Roadway: 48-inches

b. Located in Other Paved Areas: 36-inches

c. Water, Gas and Drain Piping, 4-inch I.D. and Larger: 30-inches

d. Water, Gas and Drain Piping, 3-1/2-inch I.D. and Smaller: 24-inches

e. Located Under Building: 6-inches

11. Suitable galvanized steel pipe sleeves of adequate inside diameter shall be provided where

piping or tubing passes through walls and floors of buildings and structures. Inside diameter

of sleeve shall be approximately 1/2-inch larger than outside diameter of pipe or insulation. A

welded steel plate waterstop with a minimum dimension 4-inches larger than outside diameter

of sleeve shall be furnished for use in underground walls. Sleeves shall be built into the

concrete or masonry wall or floor. Under no circumstances will blocking out or breaking of

walls be permitted for later insertion. After installation of piping, the space between the pipe

and the sleeve shall be caulked air and watertight. Caulking shall be oakum and lead in

concrete and masonry construction and rope asbestos in wood or plaster construction.

12. After installation, the interior of all piping shall be cleaned as necessary to remove flux, slag,

scale, rust, dirt, oil, and other foreign material. As piping is installed, open ends shall be

covered or plugged as necessary to prevent the entrance of foreign matter and to maintain the

required cleanliness.

13. Piping laid underground shall be fully supported along its entire length by a compacted layer

of select earth backfill or sand in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 20 00 of

these Specifications. Select earth backfill (or sand, in the case of coated or wrapped steel

pipe) shall also be placed and compacted around the piping to provide a cover of not less than

12-inches over the top of the pipe.

14. Piping and tubing shall be supported as shown on the Drawings and/or specified in Section 22


15. Changes in pipe size shall be made using reducing fittings, not bushings. If centerline

elevation is not specified, use eccentric reducers in horizontal piping. On liquid lines,

eccentricity shall be down with top of pipe level. On vapor and gas lines, eccentricity shall be

up with bottom level.

16. Indicated locations and sizes of equipment connections are approximate; exact locations and

sizes of piping, valves, etc., shall conform to approved shop drawings. Connection sizes shall

not be smaller than scheduled size or equipment outlet size, whichever is larger.

B. Installation of Steel and Alloy Piping

1. Pipe threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe and shall conform to ANSI B2.1.

When threading stainless steel pipe, dies shall have 20 to 30 degree hook. Finished joints

shall have no more than three threads exposed. Before assembly, pipe ends and threads shall

be inspected and any defective pieces replaced. All joints shall be properly aligned before

connection to prevent thread damage. Pipe dope shall be used on the male threads of all

threaded connections. Teflon thread tape shall be applied two threads back from the end of

the pipe of fitting to prevent shredding. Excess pipe dope shall be trimmed or cleaned off to

provide adherence for paints or coatings. After joining, exposed threads in underground


piping shall be given a heavy coat of bituminous paint or other suitable protective compound

prior to backfilling.

2. All flanges shall be faced and drilled and shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of the

pipe. Flanges shall be cleaned of all burrs, deformations or other imperfections before

joining. Flanged joints shall be installed so as to ensure uniform gasket compression. All

bolting shall be pulled up to the specified torque by crossover sequence. Where screwed

flanges are used, the pipe edge shall not extend beyond the face of the flange, and the flange

neck shall completely cover the threaded portion of the pipe. Where slip-on flanges are used,

the distance from the end of the pipe to the gasket face of the flange shall not exceed "t" plus

1/4-inch, where "t" is the pipe wall thickness. Unless otherwise required, bolt holes shall

straddle the vertical and horizontal axes of the pipe. Connections to equipment shall be made

in such a way that no strain is placed on the equipment flanges.

3. For flanged connections between steel or alloy piping and cast or ductile iron piping or

valves, steel flanges shall be flat faced and furnished with full-face gaskets, insulating

bushings, and, when buried, stainless steel bolts.

4. Where steel or alloy pipe is connected to copper tubing, insulating bushings or couplings shall

be used to prevent galvanic corrosion.

C. Installation of Copper Tubing

1. Annealed copper tubing shall be cut square, and ends reamed using suitable tools. Bending

tools shall be used in making bends. Minimum bend radii shall be 1-inch for 1/4-inch O.D.

tubing and 1-1/2-inches for 3/8-inch O.D. and larger. Compression fittings shall be installed

in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. Plastic coatings shall be cut back only

far enough to permit installation of fittings. When a section of tubing is cut from a coil, the

end of the unused portion shall be crimped closed.

2. Hard drawn copper tubing and fittings shall be assembled using silver brazing alloy and flux

as recommended by the manufacturers. Tubing shall be properly cut square, ends reamed,

and both fitting and tubing polished with steel wool before fluxing. Joints shall be properly

heated, care being taken not to overheat. After the brazing alloy has been run in, the joint

shall be wiped clean. Brazing wire shall be fluxed before using. Unless otherwise specified,

copper tubing shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3. Dielectric Protection: Copper tubing or fittings shall not be permitted to come in contact with

steel piping, reinforcing steel, or other steel at any location. Electrical checks shall be made to

ensure no contact is made between copper tubing and steel elements. Wherever electrical

contact is demonstrated by such tests, CONTRACTOR shall provide dielectric protection.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING

All ferrous piping not specified to be galvanized or otherwise coated shall be cleaned and shop primed

or coated in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications.

3.03 FIELD PAINTING

Following installation and testing, all exposed piping shall be field primed and painted in accordance

with the requirements of Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications.



A. After all piping has been placed and backfilled between the joints, each run of newly laid pipe, or

any valved section thereof, shall be tested by the CONTRACTOR in the presence of the CITY,

and tests shall be continued until all leaks have been made tight to the satisfaction of the CITY.

B. All piping carrying liquids under pressure shall be subjected to a hydrostatic gauge pressure of

150 percent of the maximum expected operating pressure or 150 psig, whichever is greater, based

on the elevation of the lowest point of the section under test, corrected to the elevation of the

pressure gauge. All piping carrying low pressure air shall be subjected to a hydrostatic gauge

pressure of at least 150 percent of the maximum expected operating pressure or 15 psig,

whichever is greater.

C. All testing shall be in accordance with the procedures outlined in Section 04 01 20.59 of these

Specifications.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions necessary to protect any equipment that might be

damaged by the pressures used in the tests. Delicate equipment shall be valved off, removed or

otherwise protected.

E. All piping shall be securely anchored and restrained against movement prior to application of test

procedures. Prior to the pressure test, pipe laid in trenches shall be partially backfilled adequately

to secure the pipe during the test. All joints, fittings and valves will be left open where possible.

All exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be carefully examined during the pressure test.

F. Before applying the specified test pressure during a test using water as the pressurizing medium,

all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If hydrants, blowoffs, or air release valves are not available

at the high places, the CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary taps at points of highest

elevation before the test is made and insert plugs after the test has been completed.

G. Subject welded joints to hammer tests while under pressure.

H. Any leakage developing during the test shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR's expense by

tightening, replacing packing or gaskets, or replacing defective portions of the piping system. No

caulking will be permitted. If the defective portion cannot be located, the CONTRACTOR, at

CONTRACTOR's expense, shall remove and reconstruct as much of the original work as

necessary to obtain a piping system tested without leakage.

I. After all tests on any section have been completed to the satisfaction of the CITY, the

CONTRACTOR shall carefully clean, blow out, and drain the line of all water to prevent freezing

of the same. The CONTRACTOR shall also demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CITY that any

and all lines are free from obstructions and foreign material.

J. The CONTRACTOR shall bear the complete cost of the tests, including set up, labor, temporary

piping, blocking, gauges, bulkheads, water, air, soap solutions, and other materials required to

conduct the tests.


HEAT TRACING OF PIPING 40 41 13-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 40 41 13

PROCESS PIPING HEAT TRACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish, install, test

and place in satisfactory operation a Heat Trace System to prevent the freezing of process

piping as specified herein, the requirements of Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for

Electrical and shown on the drawings.

B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in this

Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but is not

necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.

1. Section 01 66 00, Material and Equipment.

2. Section 01 75 01, Equipment Startup and Verification Sequence.

3. Section 01 78 23, Equipment Operating and Maintenance Manual.

4. Section 01 79 00, Training.

5. Section 09 91 00, Protective Coatings.

6. Division 26, Applicable Sections on Electrical.

7. Division 40, Applicable Sections on Instrumentation and Controls.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the

following codes and standards (using the latest editions), except as otherwise shown or

specified.

National Fire Protection Association.

Uniform Building Code and local administrative authorities.

Uniform Fire Code.

Uniform Mechanical Code.

Model Energy Code.

U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Safety and

Health Standards (29 CRF 1910) (OSHA).

National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Industrial Control and Systems - 1,

General Requirements.

Factory Mutual Research Corp. (FM)


Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), Standard 515.

U.S. National Electric Code (NEC)

Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Standard 746B

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

Federal Specification HH-1-558B, Insulation Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving, Pipe

Fitting Covering.

ASTM C 547, Mineral Fiber Preformed Insulation.

ASTM E 84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

B. Manufacturer shall have at least five years of experience of producing substantially similar

equipment, and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory

operation for at least five years.

C. Insulation Design Criteria

1. Insulation systems including covering, mastics, adhesives, sealers and facings shall have

the following fire hazard classifications:

a. Flame spread: 25 maximum.

b. Fuel contributed: 50 maximum.

c. Smoke developed: 50 maximum.

2. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests and inspections at the factory:

a. Flame spread.

b. Fuel contributed.

c. Smoke developed.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that system has been tested at the factory and meets or

exceeds code and specification requirements.

E. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as needed prior to installation to ensure

proper fitting of Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:

1. Complete layout and installation drawings for the heat tracing system showing mounting

details, dimensions, fitting locations, materials of construction, including Manufacturer's

literature, catalog cuts and specifications for the equipment and accessories, showing

performance data, electrical wiring and point-to-point connection drawings.

2. Panel layout and dimensional drawings, wiring diagrams, power requirements for each

location / panel, limits of supply, and Bill of Materials.


3. Insulation: Submit Manufacturer’s catalog information for approval including the

following:

a. Thermal properties

b. Physical Properties

c. Fire Hazard Ratings

d. Facing information

e. Fabrication information for pipe fittings and valve insulation and coatings.

C. Field Test Results: Provide final documentation submittal that system has been tested in the

field after installed, and operation has been verified correct.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test reports,

maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts information.

2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of

Section 01 78 23.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Conform with

requirements of Section 01 60 00.

B. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the

site. CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY if any loss or damage exists to equipment or

components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition, in accordance with

Manufacturer's instructions.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off

the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged

materials from corrosion and deterioration.

D. Protect insulation materials at all times from moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER

A. Provide one of the following:

1. Chromalox: Model SRL.

2. Tyco Thermal Controls: Raychem BTV.

3. Thermon: Model BSX.

4. Or approved equal.

2.02 SERVICE AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General


1. Operating Temperature: Ambient at 0°F to 105°F, outdoor installation.

2. Hazardous Locations: Where noted on drawings (NEMA 7), heating tracing system shall

be fully rated for NFPA Class I, Div. 2 service.

3. Heat Traced Pipe: As shown on the Drawings.

2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Self-regulating Heating Cables

1. Heating cable shall consist of self-limiting, parallel circuit construction that controls

power output so that the cable can be used directly on plastic or metallic pipes with a

continuous inner core of conductive material between two 16 AWG or larger copper bus

wires.

2. Self-regulating heating cable shall vary its power output relative to the temperature of the

surface of the pipe.

3. The cable shall be designed such that it can be crossed over itself and cut to length in the

field.

4. Self-regulating heating cable shall be designed for a useful life of 20 years or more with

“power on” continuously.

5. Continuous exposure temperature rating: 150 °F

6. Power supply: 120 volt AC, single phase, 60 Hz power.

7. Heating cable shall be provided with a fluoropolymer outer jacket suitable for exposure

to those chemicals as noted above.

8. Thermal rating: Minimum 5 W/ft, as required for application.

9. All cables shall be capable of passing a 1.6 kV dielectric test for one minute after

undergoing a 10 ft-lb impact (IEEE test 515-2004).

10. Cables shall have a temperature rating (T-rating) without the use of thermostats as

follows:

Heating Cable T-rating Maximum Temperature

3 W/ft T6 185 °F

5 W/ft T6 185 °F

8 W/ft T5 212 °F

10 W/ft T4A 248 °F

11. The heating cable shall have a tinned copper braid with a resistance less than 8mΩ/ft as

determined by metallic covering conductivity test (IEEE 515-2004).

12. In order to provide rapid heat up and prevent overheating of fluids and plastic pipe, the

heating cable shall have the following minimum self-regulating indices:

Heating Cable S.R. Index (W/°F)

3 W/ft -0.020

5 W/ft -0.045

8 W/ft -0.058


10 W/ft -0.071

13. The self-regulating index is the rate of change of power output in watts per ° Fahrenheit

as measured between temperatures of 50 °F and 100 °F and confirmed by the type test

and published data sheets.

14. In order to facilitate longer circuit lengths and smaller breaker sizing the heating cable

shall have the following maximum inrush current at 50 °F.

Heating Cable Maximum Inrush at

time = 1sec (mA/ft)

Maximum Inrush at

time = 10 sec (mA/ft)

Maximum Inrush at

time = 300 sec (mA/ft)

3 W/ft, 120 V 58 54 41

5 W/ft, 120 V 155 128 66

8 W/ft, 120 V 210 180 83

10 W/ft, 120 V 432 319 123

15. In order to ensure that self-regulating heating cable does not increase power output when

accidentally exposed to high temperatures resulting in thermal runaway and self-ignition,

the cable shall produce less than 10 percent of rated power when energized and heated to

300 °F for 30 minutes. After this test, if the cable is allowed to cool to 50 °F and is

reenergized, it must not have an increasing power output leading to thermal runaway.

16. In order to confirm useful life, the self-regulating heating cable shall maintain between 75

and 110 percent of its original power output after having been cycled 500 times between

50 °F and 150 °F, allowing no more than 12 minutes of dwell time at each temperature.

17. The heating cable shall have the following third party approvals:

a. UL Listed for: Ordinary Areas

b. FM approved for:

i. Ordinary Areas

ii. Class I, Division 2 groups B, C, D

iii. Class II, Division 2 groups F, G

iv. Class III, Division 2

B. Locations

1. A ground fault protection device set at 30 mA, with a nominal 100 ms response time shall

be used to protect each circuit.

2. The temperature identification number (T-rating) of the cable shall comply with FM

requirements as applicable.

3. Connection methods used with the cable shall be suitable for use in all site locations.

C. Termination for Self-Regulating Cables

1. All connection components used to terminate self-regulating heating cables, including

power connectors, splices, tees and connectors, shall be approved for the respective area

classification and approved as a system with the particular heating cable in use.

2. Under no circumstances shall terminations which are manufactured by a vendor other

than the cable manufacturer be used.


3. Components shall be rated NEMA 4X, unless located within a NEMA 7 area.

D. Power Supply: Each circuit of heating cable shall be powered and controlled by an integrated

power supply/thermostat unit. The unit shall be provided in a molded NEMA 4X watertight

enclosure. Each circuit shall be provided with a signal light wired to the terminating end that

indicates when the tracer tape is energized.

E. Power Supply/Thermostat Box: The power supply/thermostat box shall provide power

connections and control of the heat trace system. The thermostat shall sense the pipeline

temperature. The unit has the following characteristics:

1. Power Supply: 120 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz.

2. Switch Rating: 22 Amps at 120 VAC.

3. Control Temperature Range: -40 °F to 160 °F.

4. Scale Division: 10 °F.

5. Sensor Material: Stainless Steel.

6. Maximum Exposure Temperature: 450 °F.

7. Operating Temperature Setting: 60 °F.

8. Enclosure Rating / Material: NEMA 4X, stainless steel.

9. Assemblies and panels shall be UL listed.

10. PLC control / status: Provide general alarm solid-state relay for contact output to plant

SCADA system – open on alarm. General alarm shall consist of the following alarms:

a. Low / High Temperature.

b. Low / High Current.

c. Low / High Voltage.

d. Ground Fault Alarm.

F. Pipe Insulation:

1. Fiberglass Insulation:

a. Type: Heavy density sectional pipe insulation with vapor barrier and self-sealing lap.

b. Density: Four pounds per cubic foot.

c. R-Value Minimum 4.0 hr.-ft2-°F/BTU.

d. Fittings: Molded fiberglass.

e. Jointing Materials: Manufacturer’s recommended adhesives and tape.

f. Valve Insulation: Miter cut nesting size covering segments of same thickness as

pipeline, for insulation of valves. Valve stems of insulated valves shall be of

sufficient length to allow normal operation of the valve with the insulation installed.

g. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

i. Owens Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Fiberglas 25ASJ/SSL.

ii. Certain-Teed Products Corporation.


2. Weatherproof Insulation Jacket:


a. Type: Smooth embossed aluminum metal jacket.

b. Thickness: 0.016-inches.

c. Moisture Barrier: Polycraft.

d. Fastening: Pre-formed "Z"-lock seam with 2-inch butt strap with sealant.

e. Bands: 1/2-inch aluminum bands with wing seals.

f. Fittings:

i. Type: Pre-fabricated aluminum fittings.

ii. Thickness: 0.016-inches.

g. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

i. Certain-Teed Products Corporation.

ii. Childers Products Company, Lock-On and Slip-On.


2.04 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE

A. Furnish and deliver the following spare parts carefully boxed or packaged and plainly marked

for reordering:

1. One (1) coil of heat trace cable (100 feet).

2. One (1) thermostat.

3. Two (2) junction box connector kits.

4. Two (2) cold lead connection kits.

5. Two (2) end seal kits.

B. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings

and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the CITY.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. CONTRACTOR to ensure all piping sections to be insulated have been completed before

applying any heat tracing and insulation materials.

B. Follow Manufacturer’s instructions for all materials needed to prepare the piping for heat

trace runs and pipe insulation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. CONTRACTOR shall install all components of the Heat Trace System in accordance with the

approved Shop Drawings and the Manufacturers’ instructions and recommendations.

CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the pipe insulation contractor during the work.

B. Tracing should be placed along the bottom run of the pipe. Wrap heat trace cable around

valves, instruments, etc. located in the piping system, as per manufacturer’s instructions.


C. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings, except where walls or

floors are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resisting rating.

D. Where hangers are in direct contact with piping, the hanger and supporting rod shall be

wrapped with foil-faced blanket insulation and vapor sealed. Hanger rod insulation and

vapor barrier shall extend up to the rod a minimum distance equal to the diameter of the pipe.

E. Install insulation to make surfaces smooth, even, and substantially flush with adjacent

insulation.

F. Follow Manufacturer's application instructions for all materials used.

G. Provide insulation protection shields for insulated piping supported by pipe hangers.

H. Install and coat insulation in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.

I. Weatherproofing for Outdoor Pipe and Equipment Insulation:

J. Piping: Apply field applied jacket with moisture barrier around pipe or equipment and slip

edge into preformed Z lock position to shed water. Place preformed 2-inch butt strap with

sealant over the seam and secure with 1/2-inch aluminum band and wing seal.

K. Fittings: Apply prefabricated metal fittings identical in composition to pipe jacketing.


A. Equipment Checks

1. Ensure that piping is dry when heat trace cables are installed, and before the application

of the outer prefabricated metal jacket and fittings.

2. Ensure that all heat tracing circuits are tested and verified correct, before applying the

outer prefabricated metal jacket and fittings.

3. Refer to Schedule below for minimum thickness of pipe insulation:

Pipe Size (inches) Minimum Insulation Thickness (inches)

2 1

3 1

4 1

6 1.5

Exterior Piping Provide a weatherproof jacket

B. Where part of existing piping is removed, the remaining piping shall be capped watertight

and covered with insulation. Any existing piping insulation damaged shall be patched. All

insulation material applied in one day shall have the vapor barrier applied the same day and

any exposed ends shall be temporarily protected with moisture barrier sealed to the pipe.

C. Start-up and Test: The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CITY

that all components of the Heat Trace System meet the functional requirements specified and

that the System is properly calibrated.

D. Field Performance Testing: Calibration of instrumentation and the control system shall

conform to the requirements of Division 40, Instrumentation and Controls. Documentation of

instrument calibration and check out of the heat trace control loops shall be submitted to the

CITY for record purposes.


3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

A. A factory-trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, startup and test

services, and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall

make three (3) visits to the site and each visit shall be a minimum of two hours. The first

visit shall be for assistance in the installation of the equipment. The second visit shall be for

checking the completed installation and startup of the system. The third visit shall be as

described under Section 01 79 00, Training. Manufacturer’s representative shall test operate

the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and CITY and verify that the heat trace

equipment conforms to requirements. Manufacturer’s representative shall revisit the jobsite

as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory.

B. All costs including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be considered as included in

the CONTRACTOR’S bid price.

TABLE 1

HEAT TRACING SCHEDULE

LOCATION SIZE OF PIPE

(INCHES)

LENGTH OF

PIPE (FT.)

NUMBER OF

VALVES

PIPING

REFERENCE

Grit Building Vortex Separator 1 Drain /

Dumpster Drain 3, 4, 6 15, 50, 85 0 HT-0401

Grit Building Vortex Separator 2 Drain /

Dumpster Drain 3, 4, 6 15, 50, 85 0 HT-0402

Grit Building Pump Room Floor Drain 4 50 0 HT-0403

Note: Lengths provided above are approximate. Actual piping lengths shall be verified against

construction.


PROCESS CONTROLS – SCOPE OF

WORK AND LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 90 00-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 40 90 00

PROCESS CONTROLS – SCOPE OF WORK AND LOOP DESCRIPTIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. This Section includes a description of all materials, labor, and installation for all facets of the

control system and its associated devices. The intent is to give a general description of the

requirements for a complete construction of the instrumentation and controls for this Project

as specified or indicated on the Drawings.

B. If this Specification conflicts with any of the referenced documents or with good engineering

practice, the CONTRACTOR shall refer the conflict immediately to the CITY or the CITY’s

representative for resolution.

1.02 CODES, STANDARDS, AND PERMITS

A. All work shall be performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with the

following standards where applicable:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

4. Federal, State, and Local Codes.

5. Instrument Society of America (ISA)

6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

7. American Wire Gauge (AW6).

8. Federal Specification (Fed Spec).

9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).

12. Insulated Power Cable Engineer’s Association (IPCEA).

13. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).

14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

15. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

16. Factory Mutual (FM).

17. Tubing – American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM).

1.03 INSPECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements of local inspection authority.

B. Schedule inspections with the local inspection authority so that no new work is concealed



prior to required inspections.

C. If required by the local authority having jurisdiction, upon completion of installation, a

nationally recognized third-party testing laboratory shall inspect the enclosure and provide

written certification verification that each unit assembly meets all local requirements.

Inspection shall be acceptable to local authority having jurisdiction. All costs associated with

the inspection shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Any modifications required

to be performed by third party inspection shall be included on the as-built record documents

and submitted to the CITY.

1.04 INTENT OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings indicate approximate desired position of equipment, panels, and instrumentation

devices. Minor deviations in panel locations to suit field conditions are acceptable. Major

changes in the location of panels must be approved. Locations of panels must be coordinated

with piping, mechanical, and all other contractors to avoid interference.

B. It is the responsibility of the selected CONTRACTOR to coordinate the mounting locations

for all panels.

C. Mounting locations for in-line instrumentation devices will be coordinated with the piping,

mechanical or HVAC contractor.

D. Mounting of remote transmitters, or any devices, which are not directly installed in process

lines, shall be installed in order to allow ease of access and maintenance.

E. Actual conduit routings are to be field determined. The plan drawings are intended to show

“home-runs” from a specific control panel only.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, for approval, all CONTRACTOR furnished

instrumentation, panels, and valves before purchase.

B. Upon Completion of Job, submit the following:

1. Supply "as-built" drawings: Marked-up red line drawings.

2. Give the CITY’s representative all manufacturers’ literature upon completion of job.

1.06 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included

1. Provide and install instruments and provide instrument supports.

2. Provide process-sensing piping / tubing, fittings and supports from process isolation

valve to instrument.

3. Provide instrument cabling / wiring, raceways, cable trays, fittings and supports between

control room, control panels, junction boxes and field instruments.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials required for the proper installation of all

sensors, final control elements, and process control system equipment.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall perform testing and provide adequate documentation, making

adjustments as necessary, to ensure proper performance of the sensors and final control

elements provided as part of process and mechanical systems.



6. Set Control Panels or Field Junction Boxes.

7. Provide supervision and labor that has been qualified by training and experience, to

perform the specific activities.

8. Issue instrumentation for installation by other contractors as required.

9. Initiate a documented request for all work which is not included in the current authorized

contract and design documents.

10. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the work shown on the P&ID and instrument

drawings. CONTRACTOR shall become familiar with reference drawings and those

drawings assigned to other CONTRACTORS.

11. Receive and inspect instruments and control panels. Notify the CITY immediately of any

signs of damage or if discrepancies exist between the packing slip and the items being

received.

12. Maintain field records indicating date for receipt of instruments and control panels on

site.

13. Store all instruments, control panels, and junction boxes in a clean and dry area that

provides shelter from the rain and mechanical abuse. Provide heating / cooling to

maintain an ambient temperature between 32 degrees and 72 degrees F.

14. Note: All computer consoles, cabinets and peripheral equipment must be stored, handled,

moved and installed in an upright position only.

15. Ensure that all miscellaneous items such as special cabling, mounting brackets, etc., are

stored with the associated instruments or control panels.

16. Protect all instrument flange faces, diaphragm seal surfaces, capillary tubing and threaded

connections from mechanical abuse.

17. Ensure that plugs and caps are not removed from instrument openings / connections

during storage.

18. The CONTRACTOR shall insure that each instrument is provided with a permanently

attached tag. The tags shall be 2” diameter round phenolic plastic, black on both sides

with 5/16” engraved white lettering centered on tag. The tag shall be attached to the

instrument using stainless steel wire rope. Ferrules are to be stainless steel. In the event

that the instrument manufacturer does not provide instrument tags meeting these

requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall provide these tags.

19. The CONTRACTOR shall protect the internal components of any control panel when

drilling, installing conduit openings, and similar construction activities. This is typically

done by enclosing the components in plastic wrap. Any metal shavings and other loose

debris shall be promptly removed after modifications to the control panel. After final

terminations, vacuum the control panel.

20. Specification 40 95 13 (Control Panels) shall be the primary guiding document to be used

when fabricating a new control panel, or modifying an existing one. This Specification,

in conjunction with the control panel layout design, bill of materials and nameplate

schedules are required for a quality fabrication.

21. Specification 40 94 43 (Programmable Logic Process Controllers) describes the control

system requirements and contains the I/O list.



B. Related Work Not Included In This Section

1. Installation of in-line instruments and control valves. (But the wiring and pneumatic

terminations of such are included.)

2. Fabrication of Custom Control Panels.

3. Instrumentation and controls furnished with vendor skid units.

1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Process instrumentation requirements are shown and described on the flow sheets, instrument

list and coordination schedule, instrument wiring drawings, wiring / pneumatic and

communication conduit plans, conduit schedules and installation details.

B. In general, the facility consists of Allen Bradley PLC Control Logix or Compact Logix

control systems with various remote I/O panels, and associated field and panel-mounted

instrumentation.

C. For PLC peer-peer communications, as well as SCADA communications to the PLC control

systems, Ethernet is the standard. Fiber shall be run for distances greater than one hundred

meters.

D. For PLC communications with Remote I/O control panels, Control Net shall be the standard.

1.08 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS

A. CITY-Installed Equipment

1. CONTRACTOR shall acknowledge the right of the CITY, or other of his contractors, to

place or install any equipment during the progress of the work as required.

2. CONTRACTOR shall agree that such placing and installation of equipment shall not, in

any way, signify the completion of the work or any portion of it, nor shall it signify the

CITY's acceptance of the work or any portion of it.

1.09 SEQUENCING / SCHEDULING

It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to sequence and schedule all work. The

CONTRACTOR will coordinate with all other disciplines and trades to schedule all work. Any

re-work caused by inadequate coordination with other trades will be the responsibility of the

CONTRACTOR.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Inspections and Reports: Inspect the work of other contractors which precedes your work

and upon which your work depends. Report to the CITY any deviations from the contract

documents. Failure to make an inspection and report shall constitute an acceptance of the

other contractors' work.

B. Delays: Notify the CITY of any existing or foreseeable causes for delay in the work.

1.11 DRAWING CONFLICTS

Lay out your work first, before you start, and report all drawing conflicts to the CITY. The CITY

will not assume responsibility for cost incurred by the CONTRACTOR because of lack of

preparation.



PART 2 – INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

2.01 HEAD CELL INFLUENT GATE ACTUATORS (Quantity = 2) GENERAL CONTRACTOR

TO PROVIDE

A. The automatic gate actuators shall be as specified in Specification 40 92 43.

B. Option “OC” is required. Eight (8) interposing relays are part of the actuator’s control.

C. 4-20 mA position feedback is required.

2.02 GRIT PUMP SUCTION HEADER VALVE ACTUATORS (Quantity = 2) GENERAL

CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE




2.03 GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE ACTUATORS (Quantity = 3) GENERAL CONTRACTOR

TO PROVIDE




2.04 GRIT PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE ACTUATORS (Quantity = 3) GENERAL CONTRACTOR

TO PROVIDE




2.05 GRIT PUMP DISCHARGE HEADER VALVE ACTUATORS (Quantity = 4) GENERAL

CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE




PART 3 – LOOP DESCRIPTIONS FOR BUNDLE PROJECT

3.01 SCOPE

A. In general, simple analog and discrete control, logic and indication requirements are depicted

on the Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) supplied as part of this package.

Where additional information is necessary, it is included in the descriptions that follow.

B. The items described in Paragraph 3.02, are general loop requirements for typical plant unit

operations. It is intended that these general requirements shall be followed where applicable.

C. The items described in Paragraph 3.03, are loop descriptions for typical plant unit operations.



It is intended that these descriptions, in conjunction with the P&IDs, provide sufficient

system configuration information for the majority of simple control systems. Where

additional descriptions are necessary or where control logic deviates from the general and

typical descriptions, it is described in the Paragraph.

D. Software Alarms

1. All analog inputs to the plant control system shall have low and high software alarms.

Where low and/or high software alarms are not specified elsewhere in this Specification,

they shall initially be turned off or set for 0% (low alarm) and 100% (high alarm) of the

signal range. This will help eliminate nuisance alarms during checkout and start-up.

2. All software alarms shall be reviewed with the plant superintendent, or his designee,

during programming or panel checkout and again during field checkout or start-up. The

System Manufacturer shall change all software alarm setpoint values as instructed by the

plant superintendent. For critical alarms, the System Manufacturer shall configure the

associated graphic symbol to flash or change color when in an alarm condition.

3.02 LOOP DESCRIPTIONS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment protection interlocks and safety interlocks (motor temperature and moisture

switches, emergency stops, low-low level shutdowns, etc.), shall be hardwired and shall not

reside in the plant control system. Hardwired equipment protection interlocks and safety

interlocks shall be functional at all times, regardless of operating mode (HAND, AUTO,

LOCAL, REMOTE, etc.) Equipment protection circuits shall be fail-safe, the circuit shall

open to stop equipment.

B. All motor control logic in the plant control system shall include COMMAND DISAGREE

logic. The plant control system shall generate a COMMAND DISAGREE alarm to alert the

operator that a fault has occurred for any of the following conditions:

1. When a motor is called to run by the control system and no run feedback is received by

the plant control system within a preset, adjustable period of time. This shall only be

applied to those motors which have run feedback to the plant control system.

2. When a motor is running based on a manual command generated through the plant

control system, or based on an automated sequence in the plant control system, and run

feedback is lost by the plant control system for a preset, adjustable period of time. This

shall only be applied to those motors which have run feedback to the plant control

system.

3. When a motor is called to run based on a manual command generated through the plant

control system, or based on an automated sequence in the plant control system, and the

feedback from a LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE or similar field-mounted switch indicates that

the unit is not in the REMOTE mode. This shall only be applied to those motors which

have UNIT IN REMOTE feedback to the plant control system.

C. All control valve logic in the plant control system shall include COMMAND DISAGREE

logic. The plant control system shall generate a COMMAND DISAGREE alarm to alert the

operator that a fault has occurred for any of the following conditions:

1. When a motorized actuator is called to open, based on a SCADA command generated

through the plant control system, and the feedback from a ZSO has not been detected for

a predetermined and adjustable amount of time, this constitutes a FAIL-TO-OPEN

command disagree alarm (FAILOP).

2. When a motorized actuator is called to close, based on a SCADA command generated



through the plant control system, and the feedback from a ZSC has not been detected for

a predetermined and adjustable amount of time, this constitutes a FAIL-TO-CLOSE

command disagree alarm (FAILCL).

3. When a motorized actuator is called to stop, based on a SCADA command generated

through the plant control system, and the position (gate percent opened or closed) is not

constant after a predetermined and adjustable amount of time, this constitutes a FAIL-

TO-STOP command disagree alarm (FAILST).

D. All analog inputs shall be monitored by the plant control system to identify out of range

signals (less than 4 mA DC or more than 20 mA DC). When the control system detects an

out of range signal which continues for more than five minutes, an alarm shall be generated

by the plant control system. The alarm shall identify the particular analog signal which is out

of range.

3.03 LOOP DESCRIPTIONS – TYPICAL TAGGING CONVENTIONS

A. Typical Motor Status Monitoring – Constant Speed Motors

1. Motor run (typically designated XI and annotated RUN) and overload (typically

designated XA and annotated OVERLOAD) status will be indicated in the plant control

system.

2. Where conditions other than motor overload are sensed in the MCC (e.g., motor

temperature or moisture switch activated), the fault condition is combined with motor

overload and the resulting fault (typically designated ZA and annotated FAULT) status

will be indicated in the control system.

3. Total unit run time (typically designated KQI and annotated RUNTIME) will be provided

for the motor in the plant control system.

B. Typical Motor Status Monitoring – Variable Speed Motors

1. Motor run (typically designated XI and annotated RUN) and combination VFD fault and

motor overload (typically designated ZA and annotated FAULT) status will be indicated

in the plant control system.

2. Where conditions other than VFD fault and motor overload are sensed in the MCC (e.g.,

motor temperature or moisture switch activated), the fault condition is combined with

motor overload and VFD fault and the resulting fault (typically designated ZA and

annotated FAULT) status will be indicated in the control system.

3. Total unit run time (typically designated KQI and annotated RUNTIME) will be provided

for the motor in the plant control system.

4. Variable speed drives generally have a LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch mounted on the

drive cabinet for starting or stopping the drive a LOCAL-REMOTE switch for speed

control. Unless otherwise stated in the project specific loop descriptions, a REMOTE

contact from each switch shall be wired in series to provide an indication in the control

system. Where UNIT IN REMOTE feedback (typically designated YN and annotated

UNIT IN REMOTE) is required for a control loop, it will be shown on the P&IDs.

C. Typical Motor Control Loop – Local/MCC HAND-OFF-AUTO Switch

1. When the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch is in the HAND mode, the equipment will run

continuously regardless of the automatic control logic. In the HAND mode, personnel

protective and equipment protective interlocks shall be enabled to shut down the

equipment. In the HAND mode, the equipment will run even in the event of PLC or



control system failure. The operator assumes control responsibility in HAND mode.

2. When the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch is in the OFF mode, the equipment will not run

under any circumstances.

3. When the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch is in the AUTO mode, the equipment will run in

response to a single automatic contact from PLC or hardwired logic functions.

4. Where UNIT IN AUTO feedback (typically designated XI and annotated UNIT IN

AUTO) is required, it will be shown on the P&IDs.

D. Typical Motor Control Loop – Local/MCC LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE Switch

1. When the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch is in the LOCAL mode, the equipment will run

continuously regardless of the remote control logic. In the LOCAL mode, personnel

protective and equipment protective interlocks shall be enabled to shut down the

equipment. In the LOCAL mode, the equipment will run even in the event of PLC or

control system failure. The operator assumes control responsibility in LOCAL mode.

2. When the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch is in the OFF mode, the equipment will not run

under any circumstances.

3. When the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch is in the REMOTE mode, the equipment will

run in response to a single remote contact from PLC or hardwired logic functions.

4. Where UNIT IN REMOTE feedback (typically designated YN and annotated UNIT IN

REMOTE) is required for a control loop, it will be shown on the P&IDs.

E. Typical Motor Control Loop – Local START-STOP Switch

1. The START-STOP switch is typically set up for three-wire momentary control logic.

2. In the event of loss of power, the motor must be manually restarted.

3. Hardwired START-STOP switches shall operate equipment even in the event of PLC or

control system failure.

F. Typical Valve Control Loop – Local OPEN-STOP-CLOSE Switch

1. The OPEN-STOP-CLOSE switch is completely hardwired in the motor control circuit.

2. The LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch needs to be in LOCAL in order for there to be

manual control from the OPEN-STOP-CLOSE switch.

3. Hardwired OPEN-STOP-CLOSE switches shall operate equipment even in the event of

PLC or control system failure.

G. Typical Software Control Switches

1. Where an automatic control strategy is implemented in software and it is necessary to

disable the automatic operation, a software MANUAL-OFF-AUTO switch (typically

designated HS and annotated MANUAL-OFF-AUTO) may be provided on the P&IDs.

In the AUTO mode, the automatic control logic operates the control system output. In

the OFF mode, the control system output remains open. In the MANUAL mode, the

output contact remains closed or is controlled by a software START-STOP switch.

2. Where no automatic control strategy is implemented in software, but it is necessary to

disable the automatic operation elsewhere, a software ENABLE-OFF switch (typically

designated HS and annotated ENABLE OFF) may be provided on the P&IDs. In the

OFF mode, the output contact from the control system remains open. In the ENABLE

mode, the output contact remains closed.



3. Where a software START-STOP switch (typically designated HS and annotated START-

STOP) is shown on the P&IDs, the control system shall provide one normally open

contact which closes for an adjustable time period to start the equipment and one

normally closed contact which opens for an adjustable time period to stop the equipment.

Where an automatic control sequence interfaces with a hardwired START-STOP

momentary logic circuit, the control system shall provide one normally open contact

which closes for an adjustable time period to start the equipment and one normally closed

contact which opens for an adjustable time period to stop the equipment.

4. When a software RUN-STOP switch (typically designated HS and annotated RUN-

STOP) is shown on the P&IDs, the control system shall provide one normally open

contact which closes for as long as the control system logic calls for the equipment to

run.

5. Where a software OPEN-CLOSE switch (typically designated HS and annotated OPEN-

CLOSE) is shown on the P&IDs, the control system shall provide one normally open

contact which closes when the control system logic calls for the valve to open and

another normally open contact that closes when the control system logic calls for the

valve to close. The outputs remain closed until the valve has reached its new position, as

confirmed by the valve limit switches.

a. When the valve is fully closed, the valve closed indicator in the plant control system,

ZIC, shall be on. When the valve is fully closed, the valve open indicator in the plant

control system, ZIO, shall be off.

b. When the valve is fully opened, the valve open indicator in the plant control system,

ZIO, shall be on. When the valve is fully opened, the valve closed indicator in the

plant control system, ZIC shall be off.

c. When the valve is neither fully opened (ZIO) nor fully closed (ZIC), the valve “In

Transition” indicator graphic in the plant control system shall be on.

H. Typical Analog Loop – Indication and Alarm

1. Analog values (designated LI, PI, etc.), will be indicated in the plant control system.

Readouts for pressure, temperature, flow and analytical loops shall be in engineering

units based on the field transmitter range. Readouts for special analog loops, analog

signals from equipment not supplied, will be listed in the Initial Software Settings list

attached to this Section or described in the Project specific loop descriptions.

2. Required software alarm functions (designated LAL, TAH, AAL, etc.), derived from

analog variables are shown on the P&IDs. Initial setpoints for software switches will be

listed in the Initial Software Settings list attached to this Section (if applicable) or

described in the Project specific loop descriptions.

I. Typical Analog Loop – Control and Alarm

1. All software PID (proportional, integral, derivative) controllers (designated LIC, PIC,

FIC, AIC, PDIC) must show setpoint, process variable, and manipulated variable and

allow access to tuning parameters from the operator interface software package. Any

software controller shall have the capability of being placed in MANUAL mode and have

the capability of manually adjusting the output in MANUAL mode from the operator

interface software package. Indicator readouts for software PID controllers shall conform

to the requirements given in the Typical Analog Loop – Indication and Alarm description

above.

2. Required software alarm functions (designated LALL, TAH, AAL, etc.), derived from



analog variables are shown on the P&IDs. Initial setpoints for software switches will be

listed in the Initial Software Settings list attached to this Section (if applicable) or

described in the Project specific loop descriptions.

J. Manual Analog Control Setting: A software manual analog control (designated HIC) input is

shown on the P&IDs. Initial control ranges will be set at 0% - 100% of the gate open

position for automated actuators.

K. Timer Control

1. A software time control function (designated KIC or KC) is shown on the P&IDs. Initial

time settings will be listed in the Initial Software Settings list attached to this Section (if

applicable) or described in the Project specific loop descriptions.

2. Where times are used for cycle/duration control logic, the controlled unit will remain off

for a preset, adjustable cycle time (designated KIC or KC and annotated CYCLE). At the

end of the cycle time, the controlled unit will turn on for an adjustable duration time

(designated KIC or KC and annotated DURATION). At the end of the duration time, the

cycle timer resets and starts again.

3.04 PROJECT-SPECIFIC LOOP DESCRIPTIONS

A. Head Cell Influent Gate Actuators: There are a total of Two Influent gates, and all will

require automatic actuators. They are identified as follows:

LOOP NUMBER GATE IDENTIFIER DESCRIPTION

140019 M-B-23-0019 HEAD CELL #1 INLET GATE

140020 M-B-23-0020 HEAD CELL #2 INLET GATE

1. Discrete Input Signals are as follows:

a. Local-Off-Remote in Remote (Field HS, SCADA YN)

b. Torque Switch Opened (Field WSO, SCADA WAO)

c. Torque Switch Closed (Field WSC, SCADA WAC)

d. Gate Switch Opened (Field ZSO, SCADA ZIO)

e. Gate Switch Closed (Field ZSC, SCADA ZIC)

f. In Service (JS)

g. Fault (MFA)

2. Discrete Output Signals are as follows:

a. Command to Open (Field HSO, SCADA OPEN_PB)

b. Command to Close (Field HSC, SCADA CLOSE_PB)

c. Command to Stop (Field HSS, SCADA STOP_PB)

3. Analog Input Signal

a. Gate travel will be transmitted as 0% closed (ZIC) to 100% opened (ZIO) represented

by the Gate Position Feedback (Field ZIT, SCADA ZI).

b. Program logic shall be provided that determines whether the gate is in motion or is

stationary. This is required for COMMAND DISAGREE alarming.

4. Operating Strategy



a. In REMOTE, the gate can be opened or closed from SCADA. SCADA controls will

have a command to OPEN, and a command to CLOSE. The position feedback (ZI)

will give the operator position indication from SCADA.

b. In LOCAL, the SCADA is disabled. The local OPEN and CLOSE switches can

manipulate the gate via the operator in LOCAL mode. In LOCAL, the operator will

place the OPEN-STOP-CLOSE selector to STOP to complete the gate movement.

LOCAL, OPEN, STOP and CLOSE are all hardwired in the motor control circuit.

c. Status Indications – SCADA will display the open (ZIO) and closed (ZIC) of each

gate travel position switch. SCADA will display the actuator “In Service” status (JS).

SCADA will display the REMOTE (YN) selector position.

d. Alarm Indications – SCADA will display command disagree alarms Fail-To-Open

(FAILOP), Fail-To-Close (FAILCL) and Fail-To-Stop (FAILST).

e. SCADA will display actuator fault alarm (MFA). This alarm occurs when the gate

actuator is In Service (JS), and the monitor relay on the actuator is tripped.

f. SCADA will display torque alarm in open (WAO) and torque alarm in closed (WAC)

signals.

B. Grit Pump Selection PLUG Valve Actuators: There are a total of Twelve Path Selection Plug

Valves, and all will require automatic actuators. They are identified as follows:

LOOP NUMBER GATE IDENTIFIER DESCRIPTION

140021 M-B-23-0021 HEAD CELL #1 OUTLET PLUG VALVE

140022 M-B-23-0022 HEAD CELL #2 OUTLET PLUG VALVE

14023 M-B-23-0023 GRIT SUCTION #1 PLUG VALVE



14026 M-B-23-0026 GRIT DISCHARGE #1 PLUG VALVE







1. Discrete Input Signals are as follows:

a. Local-Off-Remote in Remote (Field HS, SCADA YN)

b. Torque Switch Opened (Field WSO, SCADA WAO)

c. Torque Switch Closed (Field WSC, SCADA WAC)



d. Valve Switch Opened (Field ZSO, SCADA ZIO)

e. Valve Switch Closed (Field ZSC, SCADA ZIC)

f. In Service (JS)

g. Fault (MFA)

2. Discrete Output Signals are as follows:

a. Command to Open (Field HSO, SCADA OPEN_PB)

b. Command to Close (Field HSC, SCADA CLOSE_PB)

c. Command to Stop (Field HSS, SCADA STOP_PB)

3. Analog Input Signal

a. Valve travel will be transmitted as 0% closed (ZIC) to 100% opened (ZIO)

represented by the Valve Position Feedback (Field ZIT, SCADA ZI).

b. Program logic shall be provided that determines whether the gate is in motion or is

stationary. This is required for COMMAND DISAGREE alarming.

4. Operating Strategy

a. In REMOTE, the valve can be opened or closed from SCADA. SCADA controls will

have a command to OPEN, and a command to CLOSE. The position feedback (ZI)

will give the operator position indication from SCADA.

b. In LOCAL, the SCADA is disabled. The local OPEN and CLOSE switches can

manipulate the gate via the operator in LOCAL mode. In LOCAL, the operator will

place the OPEN-STOP-CLOSE selector to STOP to complete the valve movement.

LOCAL, OPEN, STOP and CLOSE are all hardwired in the motor control circuit.

c. Status Indications – SCADA will display the open (ZIO) and closed (ZIC) of each

valve travel position switch. SCADA will display the actuator “In Service” status

(JS). SCADA will display the REMOTE (YN) selector position.

d. Alarm Indications – SCADA will display command disagree alarms Fail-To-Open

(FAILOP), Fail-To-Close (FAILCL) and Fail-To-Stop (FAILST).

e. SCADA will display actuator fault alarm (MFA). This alarm occurs when the gate

actuator is In Service (JS), and the monitor relay on the actuator is tripped.

f. SCADA will display torque alarm in open (WAO) and torque alarm in closed (WAC)

signals.

3.05 CONTROL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS FOR BUNDLE PROJECT

A. Control System Communications

1. Control Net Fine Screens Building to Grit Building - General: Refer to Drawing I-603.

CONTRACTOR to provide and install conduit, Control Net cable and cable fittings and

Fiber Spur Patch Down Panels and connectors.

a. Control Net originates in panel M-20-F01. The Control Net taps are existing for

Node 01 through Node 06. Verify the terminating resistor is installed in panel M-20-



F02.

b. Install Fiber Spur Patch Down Panel Assembled IAW Drawing E-502-04, near panel

M-20-F02. Route C-Net Coax from near Node 06 to Fiber Spur Patch Down Panel

and connect.

c. Install Fiber Spur Patch Down Panel Assembled IAW Drawing E-502-04, near panel

M4-14-R01. Route C-Net Coax from Node 07 to Fiber Spur Patch Down Panel and

connect.

d. Route conduit and fiber from Media Converter to Fiber Spur Patch Down Panel near

M4-14-R01.

e. Connect cable to Node 07 of panel M-20-F03 via the Control Net tap.

f. Connect cable to Node 08 of panel M4-14-R01. Remove Terminating Resistor from

Node 06 and install C-Net cable to Node 06. Install terminating resistor at Node 08.


INSTRUMENTATION DEVICES 40 91 00-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 40 91 00

INSTRUMENTATION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Primary Elements

B. Transmitters

C. Receivers

D. Analytical instruments


A. System consists of all field and panel mounted instrumentation devices as noted, complete

with all necessary signal converters, isolators, amplifiers, power supplies, and other

appurtenances necessary for interfacing with other components.

B. Except as noted, scale all indicators in engineering units.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data.

B. Operating and maintenance data shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 78 23 of

these specifications.

1.04 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DISSOLVED OXYGEN / pH ANALYZER / TRANSMITTER

A. Type: Continuous-reading microprocessor based electronics unit incorporating diagnostic

capabilities. Display shall be two rows of sixteen alphanumeric digits. Mounting shall be

corrosion resistant stainless steel, fiberglass or thermoplastic.

B. Range: 0-5 mg/l dissolved oxygen.

0-14 Ph

C. Output: 3 Isolated 4 to 20 mADC proportional to measurement range. Provide three

independently configurable alarm outputs for high limit, low limit, and fault output, rated 3

amps, 120 VAC.

D. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, stainless steel, Polycarbonate, and aluminum . For outdoor

applications, provide thermostatically controlled space heater as required to maintain

operating temperatures.

E. Power Supply: 120 VAC.

F. Calibration: Unit shall have one-touch, automatic calibration.


G. Schedule

Tag Mounting Area Classification

AIT140044 SURFACE Non Classified

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Hach sc200.

2.02 DISSOLVED OXYGEN SENSOR – UNION MOUNT

A. Type: Continuous-reading dissolved oxygen probe with microprocessor based electronics

unit incorporating diagnostic capabilities. Unit shall be supplied with automatic temperature.

B. Sensor: The sensor shall use the Clark principle for measurement of dissolved oxygen.

Sensor shall be contained in a sealed enclosure and shall be non-repairable requiring no

special tools for replacement and shall be installed in an 11-inch diameter ball float if floating

is required in the table below. Mounting shall be union mount of corrosion resistant stainless

steel, fiberglass or thermoplastic.

C. Range: 0-5 mg/l dissolved oxygen.

D. Output: Digital to Controller

E. Enclosure: NEMA 4x, stainless steel, fiberglass, aluminum or thermoplastic. For outdoor



F. Power Supply: N/A.

G. Calibration: From Controller

H. Area Classification: Sensor shall be supplied with intrinsically safe barriers, in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations, for mounting in hazardous areas if required in the

table below.

I. Schedule

Tag Mounting Area Classification

AE-140044B SURFACE Non Classified

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Hach LDO MODEL2 and 9257000 Union Mount.

2.03 pH SENSOR – UNION MOUNT

A. Type: Continuous-reading pH probe with microprocessor based electronics unit incorporating

diagnostic capabilities. Unit shall be supplied with automatic temperature. Mounting shall

be union mount of corrosion resistant stainless steel, fiberglass or thermoplastic.

B. Range: 0-14 Ph.

C. Output: Digital to Controller

D. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, stainless steel, Polycarbonate, and aluminum. For outdoor



E. Power Supply: N/A

F. Calibration: From Controller

G. Schedule


Tag Service Mounting Area Classification

AE-140044A WASTEWATER SURFACE Non Classified

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Hach DPD1P1 and 6131300 Union Mount.

2.04 FLOW TRANSMITTER – MAGNETIC

A. Type: Pulsed DC coil

1. Flanged Type (for line sizes 8” and up).

2. Wafer Type (for line sizes less than 8”).

B. Body

1. Flanged Type: Short form design, 304 stainless steel flow tube, carbon steel ANSI 150

flanges.

2. Wafer Type: Designed to mount between ANSI 150 flanges (provided by others). Flow

tube housing shall be manufacturer’s standard material of construction.

3. Flow tube must meet submersible rating IP68 or NEMA 6P.

C. Linear Material: As required by schedule.

D. Electrode Material: As required by schedule.

E. Grounding Rings Material: As required by schedule.

F. Transmitter

1. Power: 120 VAC.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 4, coated cast aluminum or fiberglass.

3. Mounting Remote, 2-inch pipe.

4. Local Indicator: Integral.

5. Cabling: Sufficient to connect flow tube and transmitter.

6. Output: Isolated 4 to 20 mADC.

7. Accuracy: + 1.0 percent of flow rate.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB, Endress+Hauser, Foxboro, Krohne, Rosemount.

2.05 FLOW INDICATOR – ROTAMETER

A. Type: Direct reading, variable area type with glass metering tube.

B. Tube: Borosilicate glass, 250 mm nominal length, minimum.

C. Connections: NPT – size suitable for application.

D. Materials of Construction: 316 stainless steel, Viton and glass for all wetted parts. Stainless

steel, anodized aluminum, polycarbonate and CPVC for non-wetted materials of construction.

E. Rangeability: 10:1 minimum.

F. Accuracy: 10 percent of full scale flow for flows from 10 to 100 percent of full scale flow.

G. Schedule


Tag Calibrated

Range

Mounting

Configuration

Needle Valve Size

FI-070001 0-60 GPM VERTICAL N/A 1” NPT

FI-070002 0-60 GPM VERTICAL N/A 1” NPT

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB, Brooks, King.

2.06 LEVEL TRANSMITTER – RADAR – OPEN AIR LIQUIDS

A. Type: Loop powered liquid level transmitter based upon open air radar technology.

B. Sensor: Horn Antenna plastic 80mm

C. Transmitter

1. Output: Isolated 4 to 20 mADC.

2. Power: Two-wire, 24 VDC.

3. Mounting: See Schedule

4. Cabling: N/A.

5. Enclosure: Plastic, NEMA 4X.

6. Local Indication: Two-line, 8 character LCD with 4-button keypad.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Vega Vegapuls 61

2.07 PRESSURE REGULATOR 3” AND LARGER

A. Type: Direct operated water pressure reducing valve. Self contained, requires no control

lines.

B. Material Cast Iron.

C. Pressure Rating: 200 psi.

D. Diaphram and disc: Elastomer.

E. Spring Range: 30 – 80 psi.

F. Max Temperature: 150ºF

Tag Pressure Setting Line size Fluid

PRV-400009 50 psig 4” Water

PRV-070001 50 psig 3” NPW

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Watts Series 2300.

2.08 GAS DETECTOR – COMBUSTIBLE

A. Type: Dual wavelength, with reflector panel, to measure percent LEL of petroleum or methane

vapors as indicated below.

B. Sending Power: 24 VDC.

C. Receiver Power: 24 VDC.


D. Power Supply: 24 VDC power supply.

E. Transmitter Output: 0 to 20 mADC with 4 to 20 mADC being proportional to 0 to 5 LEL per

meter. Unit shall produce a 1 to 3 mADC signal to indicate beam block and a signal less than 1

mADC to indicate a fault.

F. Calibration: Factory calibrated for methane or propane. Consult with the manufacturer prior to

ordering the unit. Routine calibration is normally not required.

G. High Gas Level Alarm: The alarm set point shall be set at 10% full scale, which equals 0.5

LEL/m.

H. Operating Distance: Distances up to 100 feet between the transmitter/receiver unit and the

reflector panel. Provide all hardware and devices required for setup and aligning.

I. Classification: Provide intrinsically safe barriers for the transmitter and receiver, per the

manufacturer’s recommendations, to meet Class I, Division 1 locations.

J. Mounting: Manufacturer supplied mounting bracket to support both the transmitter and receiver

as a single unit. The reflector panel shall be mounted per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

All support hardware shall be stainless steel. Consult the manufacturer prior to installing the

unit. Consult with the manufacturer prior to mounting the unit.

K. Operating Temperature Range: -10 to +40° C.

L. Manufacturer Services: Include 4 hours of set-up/start-up assistance and 2 hours of training,

performed by manufacturer’s factory-trained personnel. The manufacturer’s contact is Russ

Kinsey at 865-281-2810.

M. Tag Number: AE/AT- (factory calibrate for methane).

N. Acceptable Manufacturer: MSA ULTIMA X-Series.

Tag Service Location

AIT-140042 Methane LEL Monitor and Alarm Light Grit Bldg. Top Floor Snail room.

AIT-140043 Methane LEL Monitor and Alarm Light Grit Bldg. Bottom Level.

2.09 LEVEL SWITCH – FLOAT

A. Type: Submersible impact and corrosion resistant ABS body; non-mercury switch, contact

rated 13 A / 120 VAC; SPDT contact configuration. Mercury float switches are unacceptable.

B. Cable: 16 gauge, 2 or 3 conductor, SJOW oil resistant, CPE. Provide sufficient length for

mounting at the elevations indicated.

C. Junction Box: Provide MENA 4X stainless steel junction box, mounted near the switch (must

be mounted outside hazardous area) for terminating vendor supplied cable and discrete

control wiring to control panel.

D. Switch Mounting: The system manufacturer shall provide ¾ or 1 inch Schedule 40, 316

stainless steel pipe or ¼-inch cable for mounting the floats for a particular tank or well. The

pipe shall extend from two feet above the highest switch setting (up to the top of the vessel)

to two feet below the lowest level setting (down to the vessel bottom) for the vessel or well

and allow for adjustment of the switch or switches anywhere along the length of the pipe. The

method for fixing the float to the pipe shall be easily adjustable and shall provide for

protection and strain relief for the float switch cable. Provide a minimum of two mounting


brackets for fixing the pipe to the vessel wall while maintaining appropriate standoff distance.

The system manufacturer shall ensure mounting is in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

E. Intrinsic Safety Barriers: Provide manufacturer’s recommended intrinsic safety barriers for

hazardous areas where scheduled below.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: ITT Flygt ENM-10 or equal.

2.10 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER

A. Type: Transmitter complete with platinum RTD.

B. Accuracy: + 0.20 percent of calibrated span.

C. Output: Isolated, 4 to 20 mA DC, linear with temperature into loop loads of 0 to 500 ohms.

D. Power Supply: 24 VDC (two wire).

E. Enclosure: Plastic for Interior use.

F. Schedule

Tag Calibrated

Range

Indicator Scale

Units

“U” Length Location / Area

Classification

TT-140038B 40 to 90 ºF N/A N/A UNCLASS

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: KeleST-T91K or equal, Minco, Burns, Emerson.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Locate field instruments so they are accessible for maintenance and orient so that indicators

are readily visible. Unless otherwise indicated, mount instruments 36 to 60-inches above

work surface. Provide 2-inch diameter, 304 stainless steel, Schedule 10 pipe welded to a 10-

inch square by ¼-inch thick stainless steel base plate for support unless wall or other

mounting arrangement is indicated. Space instruments at least ½-inch off concrete walls by

stainless steel channels or phenolic spacers.

B. Provide stainless steel or aluminum sun screens or shades for all electronic instruments

located outdoors.

C. Provide stainless steel identification tags attached with stainless steel wire or screws for all

field instruments.

3.02 TESTS AND CALIBRATION

A. Perform continuity tests on instrumentation conductors.

B. Calibrate each instrument to its published accuracy. Submit calibration sheets including the

instrument tag number or name, the date, name of individual performing calibration,

procedures and equipment used, and results obtained.


INFLUENT AUTO SAMPLER 40 91 23.63-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 40 91 23.63

INFLUENT AUTO SAMPLER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials

required to install, test and place into satisfactory operation the wastewater sampler as shown

on the Drawings and described herein.

B. The sampler shall be complete with refrigerator and all accessories necessary for installation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Complete shop drawings and engineering data shall be submitted to the CITY in accordance

with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

B. Submit complete operation and maintenance manuals for the sampler and accessories in



Sampler and accessories shall be stored and protected in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.


The manufacturer shall furnish a written certification to the CITY that all equipment furnished


1.05 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

The wastewater sampler shall be equal to Hach Sigma 1600 Sampler.

2.02 WASTEWATER SAMPLER

A. The refrigerated composite wastewater sampler shall be engineered for outstanding corrosion

resistance and shall be suitable for use over a wide range of sampling applications. The

refrigerated composite sampler shall be capable of collecting repeated sample increments and

depositing them into a single container. The collected sample shall be stored in a

refrigerated enclosure capable of maintaining a sample temperature of 39 degrees F (4

degrees C) in ambient temperature of 120 degrees F (49 degrees C).


B. The refrigerator shall include sensing devices for ambient air temperature, evaporator plate

temperature, and interior air temperature. The unit shall be self-defrosting and shall use a

forced air condensing coil with filtered frontal ventilation to allow zero clearance

installation. A compressor with a minimum rating of 1/6 HP shall be used.

C. The copper refrigeration lines shall be protected with polyester tubing and phenolic paint.

The condenser coil shall be coated with polyurethane for added corrosion resistance. The

refrigerator evaporator plate shall be aluminum with a food grade epoxy coating to resist

corrosion. The exterior and base of the refrigerator shall be constructed of reinforced

fiberglass plastic with a UV resistant gel coat. The interior of the refrigerator shall be food

grade ABS plastic for easy cleaning and to inhibit bacterial growth. The refrigerator shall

include 1-1/2-inches of rigid foamed-in-place insulation to aid in sample preservation. The

refrigerator shall have a hinged, reinforced fiberglass plastic controller enclosure which is

capable of being locked. The temperature control knob shall be located under this enclosure.

The refrigerator door shall also have hasps capable of accepting a padlock to prevent

unauthorized tampering with the sample compartment contents. A magnetic gasket shall be

used to seal the refrigerator door. The refrigerator power supply and solid state thermostat

shall be contained in a sealed, NEMA 4 equivalent, aluminum enclosure inside the

refrigerator base. All other exposed metal components shall be either anodized or irradiated

aluminum, stainless steel, or galvanized steel.

D. The refrigerator shall be provided with an adjustable, weight activated mechanism to

automatically terminate sampling at a predetermined level; no contact with the sample liquid

shall be acceptable in determining the shut-off level. An exterior indicator light shall be

provided to indicate when the container is full.

2.03 SAMPLING PROGRAM

A. The sampling cycle shall be established using a 2 and 4-digit thumbwheel switch, with the

optional use of the sampler delay mode. Sampling Modes, Start, Reset, Test and Sampling

Complete indicators are also available on the control panel.

B. The sampler shall have two modes of operation: composite time and composite flow. In the

time mode, the interval between samples shall be adjustable between 1 and 9,999 minutes in

one minute intervals. The sampler shall also have an independent time delay to the first sample,

adjustable from 1 to 9,999 minutes in 1 minute intervals. In the flow mode, the sampler shall be

capable of collecting samples proportional to a remote 4-20 mA analog signal. The flow

increment between samples shall be adjustable in one unit increments from 1 to 9,999 signals

from the external flow measuring device.

C. Sample volume shall be electronically controlled by counting actual pump revolutions to ensure

repeatable sample size. Direct calibration of sample volume shall also be provided to allow for

precise volumetric determination or to allow for the use of extra long suction lines or special

modes such as suction line precondition. The total number of individual samples to be

delivered to the composite sample container shall be selectable over a range of 1 to 9,999. A

control shall be provided to allow for the manual collection of a sample, along with controls to

allow for the manual operation of the sampler's pump.

2.04 SAMPLE COLLECTION

The samples shall be collected using a dipper arm assembly that takes samples directly from the


flow through chamber. The sampler collects samples on a timed-cycle basis or in proportion to

flowrate when used in conjunction with a flow meter. The flow through chamber receives a

continuous flow of wastewater supplied by a pump or gravity flow. Gravity flows the wastewater

out of the sampler chamber through a 3 in. diameter outlet. To prevent suspended solids from

settling, the flow rate through the sampler chamber can be 5–30 gallons per minute. The rotating

cam operated dipper arm cycle takes a repetitive 25 mL sample from the chamber’s wastewater

flow.

2.05 CONTROLS AND ENCLOSURE

All of the sampler's electronic circuitry and mechanical components shall be contained within a

totally sealed controller. The controller enclosure shall be submersible, watertight, dust-tight, and

corrosion resistant. A clear plastic cover for the controller shall be available as an additional

option. All of the sampler's logic circuitry shall be contained in a single, easily replaceable circuit

board assembly.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

The sampler shall be provided with one 3 gallon polyethylene sample containers with lids and

polypropylene screw caps. To aid in cleaning, the sample containers shall have a wide mouth and

contain no inaccessible corners.

2.07 ELECTRICAL

The unit shall be capable of operation on 120 volt AC, 60 Hz, 4.8 amp power. The controller shall

contain an internal lithium battery to provide the sampler with a continuous memory. This battery

shall have a minimum typical life of five years, and shall maintain the sampler's program settings

when the sampler is turned off and in the event of an external power interruption.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations

in the location shown on the Drawings.


ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40 92 43-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 40 92 43

ELECTRIC ACTUATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope

1. This section includes materials and installation of electric motor actuators for valves and gates

that were not expressly described in other sections.

2. This Specification covers electric actuators for valves and gates which shall include related

operator appurtenances as shown on the Drawings.

3. Powered actuators shall be sized, furnished, installed, tested and commissioned by the

Supplier, as specified in this section.

B. Coordination

1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of

items that must be installed with, or before the electric actuators Work.

2. Notify the City and other contractors in advance of the installation of the electric actuators to

provide them with sufficient time for operational coordination and the installation of items

included in their contracts that must be installed with, or before, the electric actuators Work.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 40, Applicable Sections on Instrumentation and Controls.

2. Division 26, Electrical.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:

1. ASTM A519, Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing

2. ASTM B584, Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

3. National Electrical Code, (NEC).

4. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association, (NEMA).

5. NEMA ICS-2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

6. Underwriters Laboratory (UL).


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Electric Actuators shall be the product of one manufacturer.


B. Component Supply and Compatibility

1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from

a single electric actuator manufacturer.

2. The electric actuator manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and

other submittals for all components furnished under this Section.

3. All components shall be specifically designed for the specified service and shall be integrated

into the overall assembly by the electric actuator manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Contract Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 –

Submittals. Additional and specific information to be included in the submittal are described

herein.

B. Product literature to consist of the most recent printed product instructions, product information

and product specifications for all equipment supplied. Identify product used when more than one

product is described on a page.

C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog data showing motor actuator parts and materials of construction,

referenced by AISI, ASTM, SAE, or CDA specification and grade. Identify coatings.

D. Show the maximum torque required to open and close each actuator. Show maximum torque

shall include sating or unseating torque, bearing torque, dynamic torque, and hydrostatic torque.

Assume that the differential pressure across the valve is equal to the valve pressure rating.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit the following:

1. Fabrication, assembly and installation diagrams including dimensions and weights.

2. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other

anchorages.

3. Wiring diagrams specific for electric actuators being furnished. General wiring diagrams are

not acceptable.

4. Complete nameplate data for electric actuators.

5. Deviations from the Contract Documents.

F. Shop Test Results: Supplier shall submit Test procedures and test documentation forms for

review and acceptance by the CITY at least two (2) weeks before the proposed Test date.

G. Field Test Results: Submit a written report giving the results of the field tests required.

H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in

conformance with the requirements of Section 01 78 23, Equipment Operating, and Maintenance

Manual Information. Submit complete Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals

including, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts

information.



A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 for delivery and handling requirements.

B. Storage and Protection

1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off

the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged

materials from corrosion and deterioration.

2. Store all mechanical equipment in covered storage off the ground and prevent condensation.

C. Acceptance at Site: All boxes, crates, and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon

delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to

equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. CONTRACTOR shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in material and

workmanship for a minimum of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. Refer to

Specification 01 78 36 for warranty requirements.

B. The warranty shall cover all parts and labor for onsite preventive maintenance and onsite demand

maintenance, providing replacement components and/or parts, and replenishment of onsite spare

parts. The following spare parts are required:

1. Fuses (quantity 3 of each type)

2. Bulbs (quantity 3 of each type)

3. Others as recommended by Vendor

C. Furnished spare parts shall be stored onsite for usage during the warranty period. At the

completion of the warranty period deliver the spares to the CITY.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Provide equipment of the following:

1. AUMA SA series.

2. Limitorque MX series multiturn or QX series quarterturn.

2.02 OPEN/STOP/CLOSE AND MODULATING ACTUATORS

A. Large Motorized Actuators

1. Open/Stop/Close and Modulating Actuators:

a. Application Criteria:

i. Ambient Temperature Rating: -22 to + 140F.

ii. Ambient Humidity: 100 percent.


iii. Power Supply: 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

iv. Control Voltages: Furnish internal control transformer with 120 VAC, single phase,

60 Hz, for PLC contact outputs and secondary transformer at 24V for internal

controls as required. Control transformers shall include short circuit and overload

protection.

v. Torques: Electric motor operator shall be capable of providing not less than 1-1/2

times the required operator torque for opening and closing of its associated device.

b. Duty Cycle, unless otherwise specified:

i. Minimum 60 starts per hour rating for open/close actuators

ii. Minimum 1,200 starts per hour or continuous rated for modulating actuators.

c. All externally-exposed nuts, bolts and other fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

Fasteners shall be installed with appropriate anti-seize compound to allow subsequent

disassembly.

d. General:

i. Conform to AWWA C540, Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates,

and as specified herein.

ii. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating torque requirements with

motorized actuator manufacturer.

e. Electric Motor: General:

i. For open/close/stop actuators, provide reversible type motors suitable for OPEN-

CLOSE-STOP service of high torque characteristics. For modulating actuators,

provide reversible type motors suitable for modulating service of high torque

characteristics.

ii. Motor shall be high torque, with sufficient power to operate the gate through one

complete cycle, open-close-open or close-open-close under the maximum unbalanced

head when voltage to terminals is within 10% of specified voltage.

iii. Motor shall have copper windings.

iv. The motor starting torque shall be equal to 2-1/2 times the running torque.

f. Motor Construction:

i. Enclosure: Shall be in conformance with Division 26. Unless otherwise specified,

motor and all electrical enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X. Operators located in

hazardous areas shall be provided with NEMA 7 enclosures. All external fasteners

shall be non-corrosive stainless steel.

ii. TENV motor with Class F insulation for unclassified areas and explosion proof type

for Class I, Division 1, areas as indicated in the schedule.

iii. Service Factor: 1.15

iv. Power Supply: 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz, unless otherwise specified.

v. Efficiency: High-efficiency conforming to NEMA MG 1.

vi. Bearings: Anti-friction with a minimum B-10 life of 100,000 hours, lifetime pre-

lubricated and sealed.

vii. Horsepower: As required

viii. Overcurrent protection: provide winding thermostats.

ix. Built-in thermostat and condensation heater, if indicated on the Drawings.

g. Actuator Gearing:


i. Housing: Die-cast aluminum.

ii. Close coupled to electric motor, 90 degree gear operator, double reduction.

iii. Input Shaft Gearing: Spur, bevel, helical gear and pinion or single stage worm gear

drive assembly.

iv. Output Shaft Gearing: Self-locking worm gears with minimum gear backlash.

v. All gearing shall be hardened alloy steel or a combination of hardened alloy steel and

alloy bronze, accurately cut by hobbing machine.

vi. Lubrication: Grease or oil bath. Motor shall have the capability of removal without

the need of draining oil from the actuator gearbox.

vii. Bearings: Ball or roller with a minimum B-10 life of 100,000 hours, lifetime pre-

lubricated and sealed.

viii. Input Shaft: Hardened alloy steel.

ix. Provide mechanical stops adjustable to ± 5 degrees at each end of travel.

x. Provide mechanical position indicator.

xi. For rising stem actuators it shall be possible to remove the stem from the top without

removing the actuator from the valve, disconnecting any electrical wiring, or

disassembling any of the gearing. All gearing shall be designed to withstand a 100

percent overload.

h. Dry Contacts (Limit Switches): Dry contacts selectable and configurable as normally

open or normally closed, rated at least 5A at 250VAC or 30VDC shall be provided. The

contacts shall indicate any position of the associated device and any of the following

functions:

i. Device Open and Close status.

ii. Off Selected.

iii. Local Selected.

iv. Remote Selected.

v. Lost Main Power Phase.

vi. Internal Failure Detected / Actuator Fault.

vii. Thermostat Tripped.

viii. High Torque on Open / Close.

ix. Loss of power

i. In the event of a (main) power (supply) loss or failure, the four position contacts must be

self-latching to maintain interlock capabilities.

j. The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be

designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to at least 1.1 KV.

k. Open and close limit switches shall be geared to the drive mechanism and in step at all

times, whether the unit is operated electrically or manually and whether or not the

actuator is powered by the 3-phase power supply. Friction devices or setscrew

arrangements shall not be used to maintain the setting.

l. Provide driven mechanism totally enclosed to prevent entrance of foreign matter or loss

of lubricant.

m. Opened and closed limit switches for all gates, unless otherwise shown or specified shall

be set to 100% and 0% of travel.

n. Actuators shall be provided with 4-20mA analog position output.


2. Torque Switches:

a. Provide adjustable torque switches with each associated gate or valve.

b. The torque switches shall operate during the complete gate or valve cycle without the use

of auxiliary relays, linkages, latches or other devices.

c. Factory set torque switches to satisfy the calculated value corresponding to the maximum

operating conditions. Furnish detailed instructions by manufacturer for final setting after

installation.

d. It shall be possible to select the torque switches to control the open and close limit

positions in either direction of gate or valve travel.

e. Torque and turns limitation to be adjustable as follows:

i. Position Setting Range: Multiturn 1 to 500 or 10 to 5,000 turns, with resolution to

7.5° of actuator output. 1/4 turn – 90 degrees + or – 5 degrees at each end.

ii. Torque Setting: 40% to 100% rated torque.

iii. Torque sensing must be affected directly electronically. Extrapolating torque from

mechanically measured motor speed is not acceptable due to response time. Torque

measurement shall be independent of variations in frequency, voltage, or

temperature.

iv. “Latching” to be provided for the torque sensing system to inhibit torque off during

unseating or during starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads.

v. The electric circuit diagram of the actuator should not vary, remaining identical

regardless of whether the gate is to open or close on torque or position limit.

vi. Provide integral keypad, manufacturer’s wireless handheld keypad, or setting tool

required for non-intrusive calibration and interrogation of the actuator.

f. Hand wheel and Chain wheel Operation:

i. Furnish the actuator with a hand wheel for manual operation, so connected that

operation by the motor will not cause the hand wheel to rotate.

ii. Provide integral declutching mechanisms to disengage motor and motor gearing

mechanically.

iii. Should power be returned to the motor while the hand wheel is in use, design of the

unit shall prevent transmission of the motor torque to the hand wheel.

iv. The hand wheel shall require an effort of no more than 80 pounds on the rim for

seating or unseating load, or 60 pounds on running load.

v. The hand wheel shall have an arrow and the word OPEN or CLOSE indicating

required rotation. The hand wheel shall operate in the clockwise direction to close.

vi. Operators more than 6 feet-0 inches above the operating floor level shall be equipped

with chain operators.

g. Controls: Provide the following in a separate compartment integral with the actuator.

i. Starter: Reversing magnetic starter for open/close actuators and reversing solid-state

starter for modulating actuators.

ii. Control Power Transformer: Provide a transformer to transform the rated 3-phase, 60

Hz power to 120 volts, single phase. The transformer shall be rated for no more than

80% of the load and complete with a grounded and fused secondary and dual primary

fuses.

iii. Control Power Transformer: Provide a 120V transformer to power the solid-state

electronics for the modulating actuators.


h. Provide the following control devices integral to the actuator:

i. Provide Local-Off-Remote selector switch. The local position provides operation

from open-close-stop pushbuttons (or switches) on the actuator. The Off position

disables all operation. The remote position enables control from a remote source.

ii. Open-Close-Stop pushbuttons (or switches) with hold-to-run or momentary contact

selection.

iii. Open-Close indicating lights, Fault indicating light, motor running in Open or Closed

direction, and 0 to 100 percent position indication on a liquid crystal display or via

mechanical indication. Open shall be green. Closed shall be red. Intermediate valve

position shall be indicated by both the red and green lights being illuminated at the

same time.

i. Provide thermal overload and single phasing protection of the motor.

j. Actuator circuit boards shall be rated for high temperature service, minimum 55C.

k. External signal interface interposing terminals shall be of sufficient size to accommodate

#12 AWG solid conductors. Interposing terminals shall be clearly designated to indicate

signal type and termination details.

l. Actuator shall have an internal watertight and dustproof O-ring seal between the internal

electrical elements of the actuator and the terminal compartment to protect from ingress

of dust when the terminal cover is removed for wiring.

m. Motorized actuators shall be of the non-intrusive design housed in a double sealed

watertight enclosure rated to IEC Publication 529, IP68 (6 meters, 48 hours).

n. Testing: Test each actuator in the shop in conformance with AWWA C540.

o. Diagnostics/Configurations Features: Actuators shall include provisions to view and

modify actuators configuration parameters as well as receive diagnostic information for

faults.

B. Small, Medium Duty, Motorized Actuators, Open/Close or Modulating

1. Actuator shall be a reversible electric motor driven gear reducer with integral controls for

motorized operation of small diameter, non-rising stem, quarter-turn operated PVC ball valves

and small butterfly valves. The actuator shall be provided and sized by the valve manufacturer

to meet the maximum torque and control requirements of the valve.

2. The actuator shall operate the valve from full open to full closed as shown in Table 2 of this

section.

3. The actuator shall operate on the power supply as shown in Table 2 of this section.

4. The actuators and controls shall be rated for weatherproof service as shown in Table 2.

5. The actuator shall have the following options:

a. Two limit switches

b. Manual override

c. Adjustable 5 second - 14 minute cycle length control

d. Mechanical brake

e. Local/Remote Selector switch to allow for remote operation.

f. Where Modulating control is needed and indicated in Table 2, provide capability to receive

a 4-20 mA signal.


6. The actuators shall be Flowserve-Worcester 75 or equal.

2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING

A. Clean, prime coat, and finish coat ferrous metal surfaces of equipment in the shop in to conform

with aggressive process environments in wastewater treatment plants. Actuator shall be painted

with a high-solids epoxy primer and finish painted with a polymer powder coat.

B. Coat machined, polished and non-ferrous surfaces bearing surfaces and similar unpainted surfaces

with corrosion prevention compound, which shall be maintained during storage, and until

equipment begins operation.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Shop Tests

1. Test each electric actuator fully assembled in the vertical position for proper seating.

2. Fully open and close gate disc in its guide system to ensure that it operates freely.

3. Operate and test floor stands, bench stands, and motor operators to ensure proper assembly

and operation.

B. Start up and Field Tests: Refer to section 3.2A

2.05 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS

A. When integrated actuator controls are not accessible from grade (greater than 60” Above Finished

Floor) due to installation requirements, a remote-mounted Local Control Station shall be provided

with the actuator.

B. Local Control Stations shall have the following functions:

1. Local-Off-Remote selector switch

2. Open-Stop-Close selector switch

3. OPENED green indicating light

4. FAULT amber indicating light

5. CLOSED red indicating light

C. Local Control Stations can be a manufacturer standard remote unit with umbilical cable or a

stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosure. If manufacturer design remote unit, furnish cabling required

to connect actuator to remote control unit. If enclosure, devices shall be per Section 26 29 00. All

Local Control Stations shall be no larger than 10” wide by 6” deep.

D. Dewatering Conveyor Slide Gate Control Panel shall contain control stations for four (4) actuators

enclosed in a single NEMA 4X panel having dimension limits of 16” wide x 20” high. Device

requirements per 26 29 00. Dewatering Conveyor Slide Gate Control Panel is shown on Contract

wiring diagrams.

E. Regardless of local control configurations, actuator must still provide dry fault contacts for

SCADA interface, in addition to requirements for control stations noted above.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All wires and cables shall be tagged with legible permanent tags that shall be per the designations

provided in the Specifications and Drawings.

B. All components mounted inside and outside of the actuator shall be tagged per the designations

(including terminal blocks, termination units, and power supplies) provided in the documents and

instructions provided herein. Tagging shall be firmly affixed permanent non-corrosive labels.

C. Powered actuators shall be located so that they are readily accessible for operation and

maintenance. Powered actuators shall not be mounted where shock or vibration will impair their

operation. Support systems shall not be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical

equipment

D. Powered actuators shall have their manual operating accessory, where possible, located between

36 to 48 inches above the floor or a work platform or pedestal. Each powered operator shall be

provided with a 16-gage stainless steel identification tag. Identification tags shall bear the

complete equipment number of the actuator, as specified. Characters shall be ¼ inch, die-

stamped. Identification tags shall be securely attached to the actuator in a readily visible location

using stainless steel screws or wire.

3.02 START-UP AND FIELD TESTS

A. Start-up and Field Testing

1. Field test and calibrate equipment to demonstrate to the CITY's representative that all

equipment will satisfactorily perform the functions and criteria specified in Part 2.

2. Provide all test apparatus required at no extra cost to CITY.

3. Follow testing procedures recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the CITY.

4. Perform field tests, to be witnessed by the CITY, to verify operation under field conditions.

The objective of these tests shall be to demonstrate that the overall system, including actuators

and controls, meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.

5. Each actuator shall be field-tested and individual test certificates shall be furnished. Each test

certificate shall record gear ratios for both manual and automatic drive, closing direction and

wiring diagram code number.

6. Field testing shall record the following parameters:

a. Current at maximum torque setting

b. Torque at maximum torque setting

c. Actuator Output speed or Operating time

7. Supplier shall provide installation oversight for the connectivity between the powered actuator

and the control system. Supplier shall perform the required power and signal interface

checkout to confirm signal interface connectivity to the control system.

8. Once all installation activities have been completed, Supplier shall certify in writing that the

installation is satisfactory and the equipment and system will perform as required.


9. Supplier shall perform on-site testing in compliance with Section 01 75 07 – Operational

Testing.

B. Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel:

1. Comply with Section 01 79 00, Training.

2. Instruction Course: After equipment is fully operational, and before CITY will assume

responsibility for the operation of electric actuators. Electric Actuator manufacturer’s

operating specialists shall instruct the CITY's operating personnel in the care, maintenance,

and proper operation of the equipment. Two training sessions shall be required. One shall

consist of two (2) hours devoted to operations training and one shall consist of two (2) hours

devoted to maintenance training.

3. All training sessions may be videotaped by CITY.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Report: Prepare manufacturer's installation reports and submit within

30 days after completion of field-testing and operation instruction. The reports shall be prepared

in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 78 23, Equipment Operating, and Maintenance

Manual Information, and shall include the following:

1. Field tests, including and not limited to operational test reports.

2. Description of installation deficiencies not resolved to the CITY's satisfaction.

3. Description of problems or potential problems.

4. Names of CITY personnel who attended the operations and maintenance training sessions.

5. Record copy of materials used for the training sessions including an outline summary of the

course.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Required Manufacturer’s Services: Retain qualified factory-trained representatives of the electric

actuators manufacturer for a minimum period of 24 hours (total) to perform the following services.

The manufacturer’s representatives shall check and approve their respective portions of the

installation, supervise initial operation and testing in the presence of the CITY and instruct the

CITY's personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment.

1. Equipment Installation:

a. Oversee installation of the equipment and accessories specified herein. Several field trips

may be required.

b. Inspect the completed installation and note deficiencies.

2. Start-up and Field Testing:

a. Be present and assist CONTRACTOR during start-up, adjusting, and field-testing of

completed installation, as outlined in 3.2.A.

b. Furnish test forms and procedures for field-testing.

c. The manufacturer’s representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all

trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory to the CITY.

3. Instruction of Operation and Maintenance Personnel: Provide Operation and Maintenance


training as outlined below.

B. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals, and incidentals, for additional visits and field retests

shall be at no additional cost to the CITY.

C. Diagnostic Equipment: Supplier personnel providing the onsite installation and warranty service

under this contract shall:

1. Be individual(s) normally assigned to the geographic area. Out of area personnel assigned to

commission and service the systems shall be approved by the CITY prior to any fieldwork.

2. Have been factory-trained at the actuator manufacturer’s facility.

3. Be a full-time employee of the actuator manufacturer.

4. Have at least 2 years of experience in maintaining the actuator and systems being provided.

5. Be recertified by the manufacturer via a testing program once every two years.

6. Furnish Diagnostic software (qty 2), cable (qty 2) and one (1) hand held programming/setting

tool to allow configuration and diagnostic information review, analysis and reconfiguration.

TABLE 1

LARGE MOTORIZED ACTUATOR SCHEDULE

Gate Designation Location Type of

Gate or

Valve

Size, WxH

or Inches

Type of

Actuator

Open/Close

Time (s)

NEMA Area

Rating

M-B-23-0019 Grit Tank 1 Influent Slide Gate 2’-8”x7’-4” Multi-Turn 300 NEMA 4X

M-B-23-0020 Grit Tank 2 Influent Slide Gate 2’-8”x7’-4” Multi-Turn 300 NEMA 4X

M-B-23-0021 Grit Pump Suction from Grit Tank 1 Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X

M-B-23-0022 Grit Pump 1 Suction Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X



M-B-23-0025 Grit Pump Suction from Grit Tank 2 Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X

M-B-23-0026 Grit Pump 1 Discharge Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X



M-B-23-0029 Grit Pump 1/2 Discharge Header Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X

M-B-23-0030 Grit Pump 2/3 Discharge Header Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X

M-B-23-0031 Grit Pump Discharge to Vortex Sep 1 Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X

M-B-23-0032 Grit Pump Discharge to Vortex Sep 2 Plug Valve 6” Quarter-Turn 30 NEMA 4X


PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC

PROCESS CONTROLLERS 40 94 43-1 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 40 94 43

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes programmable controllers and accessories.

B. Section includes scope of services for System Programmer SUBCONTRACTOR to

ENGINEER.

C. Related Sections

1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

3. Section 40 90 00 – Scope of Work, Loop Descriptions

4. Section 40 95 13 – Control Panels

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA IA 2.2 - Programmable Controllers-Equipment Requirements and Tests.

2. NEMA IA 2.3 - Programmable Controllers - Programming Languages.

3. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Control and Systems: Factory Built Assemblies.

4. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.


A. Configuration: Networked programmable controllers for controlling the Muddy Creek

Wastewater Treatment Plant processes.

B. Drawings: Supplementing this Section, the Drawings indicate the number and sizes of PLCs,

and locations of PLCs. All hardware, including power supplies, special cables, and other

appurtenant equipment, shall be provided to meet the functional requirements described

herein and indicated on the Drawings. The CONTRACTOR will provide electrical

schematics showing all interconnection of PLC equipment and field devices.

C. I/O List: An input/output (I/O) field device signal listing is included as an Appendix attached

to this Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements, including

layout of completed assemblies with bill of materials, interconnecting cabling and complete

field wiring, dimensions, weights, external power requirements, and power wiring

schematics.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog data for each component specified showing electrical

characteristics and connection requirements.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified factory and field testing and

inspection.

E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, adverse findings, and

recommendations.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controller cabinets and input and

output devices connected to system. Include interconnection wiring and cabling information,

and terminal block layouts in controller cabinets. Include copy of manufacturer's certified as-

built drawings and red-line scanned copies of field-verified Contract Drawings.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit bound copies of operating and programming

instructions, and include card replacement, adjustments, and preventive maintenance

procedures and materials.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley ControlLogix and CompactLogix families of Programmable

Logic Controllers.

B. Supplier: CBT Company; 737 6th Street, Cincinnati, Ohio 45203.

C. Contractor shall use CBT Company for the base bid. Alternative suppliers would be

considered by the CITY, but they must be listed as a bid substitution with a deduct amount

provided for the bid. The CITY will evaluate the alternate vendor and lower cost provided.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Conform to specified service conditions during and after installation of programmable

controllers. Maintain area free of dirt and dust during and after installation of products.

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service.

B. Furnish service and maintenance of programmable controllers for one year from Date of

Substantial Completion.

1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance

products.

B. Retain all documentation pertaining to the receipt of devices or instrumentation. Provide this

documentation and transfer ownership to the CITY.

1.10 MISCELLANEOUS

Delivery, Storage and Shipping: Delivery, storage and shipping shall be as required in Section 01

60 00 – Delivery, Storage, and Handling.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND QUALITY

A. Material shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. Each type of

instrument, instrument accessory, and device shall be by the same manufacturer throughout

the work.

B. Interchangeability: All programmable logic controller systems shall be products of the same

manufacturer and of the same series or product line. Processors, local and remote

input/output hardware, communications Module Types, and specialty Module Types such as

coprocessors and ASCII Module Types shall be interchangeable among all I/O panels and

systems. PLC Module Types and hardware by other manufacturers will be acceptable only if

the PLC manufacturer does not offer suitable Module Types and hardware for the same

functions and as approved by ENGINEER.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: The PLCs shall be Allen-Bradley ControlLogix or

CompactLogix as detailed below, no exceptions, to match the CITY’s existing equipment. If

a newer version of a component is available at the time of construction, the newer version

shall be offered as an option to the CITY. CONTRACTOR must ensure full compatibility of

newer component with the overall system design. The CITY will make the final decision on

which version is preferred. Each PLC I/O rack shall have redundant power supplies. All

PLC CPU racks shall be redundant.

D. Appurtenances: The PLC processor and I/O hardware shall be provided as complete systems,

as shown on the system architecture drawings. The PLCs shall include all necessary

hardware for a complete working system. All special rack or panel mounted power supplies,

special interconnecting and programming cables, special grounding hardware, or isolation

devices shall be furnished as required for proper operation of the equipment. Signal

converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special

grounding, intrinsically safe relays and current repeaters, surge suppression devices, and

isolation devices shall be furnished and installed as required for proper operation of the

equipment.

E. PLC Arrangement: The PLCs shall be distributed and arranged as indicated on the system

architecture diagram and panel arrangement drawings.

F. System Enclosures: Programmable logic controllers and input/output hardware shall be

housed in shop-assembled panels as indicated on the drawings and as described in Section 26

24 16.

G. Configuration Software: CONTRACTOR shall provide all required software to configure

and program all PLC systems provided under this Contract licensed to and shipped to the

CITY no later than three weeks from the approval of the FIRST STAGE SUBMITTAL.

2.02 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

A. Manufacturers

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Family.

2. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix Family.

3. Substitutions: Not Permitted.

B. Processors

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-L71

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC




4. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-L43

5. Substitutions: Not Permitted

C. Ethernet Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-EN2T

2. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1768-ENBT


D. ControlNet Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-CN2B

2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-CNBR

3. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: Not Required


E. Redundancy Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-RM



F. Rack Power Supplies

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix – I/O Racks: 1756-PA75R

2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix – CPU Racks: 1756-PA75

3. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-PA2


G. 120 Vac Input Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Non-Isolated): 1756-IA16

2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Isolated): 1756-IA16I

3. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-IA16


H. 24 Vdc Input Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-IB16

2. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-IQ16


I. 120 Vac Output Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Non Isolated): 1756-OA16

2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Isolated): 1756-OA16I

3. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-OA16

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



J. 120 Vac High Current Output Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (High Current): 1756-OA8E



K. Contact Output Module Type (Not to be used as a substitute for interposing relays when used

for motorized actuators, VFD and motor control circuits, due to leakage issues)

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (N.O Only): 1756-OW16I

2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Form C): 1756-OX8I

3. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-OW16


L. 4 – 20 mA Analog Input Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Non Isolated): 1756-IF16

2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-IF8H

3. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Isolated): 1756-IF6I

4. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1756-IF4

5. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1756-IF4I


M. 4 – 20 mA Analog Output Module Type

1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix (Isolated): 1756-OF6CI

2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 1756-OF8H

3. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-OF4

4. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix: 1769-OF4I


N. PanelView Plus HMI

O. UPS – SOLA/Hevi-Duty SDU500 w/RELAY CARD-SDU accessory for remote monitoring

of “UPS on Battery” and “UPS Fault”.

P. Enclosure: All PLC equipment will be housed in NEMA 12 type enclosures or as shown on

the Drawings.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Test programmable controller in accordance with NEMA IA 2.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned programmable controller components as shown on the

Drawings.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


B. Extend existing programmable controller installations using materials and methods

compatible with existing installations as shown on the Drawings.

C. Clean and repair existing programmable controllers to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Connect input and output devices.

B. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with the Drawings.

C. Equipment shall be located so that it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance.

D. Ground and bond programmable controllers and their enclosures in accordance with Section

26 05 26.


Perform operational testing on control systems to verify proper operation and field wiring

connections.

3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

Prepare and start up programmable controller.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Furnish 16 hours of instruction each for two people to be conducted by manufacturer's

representative at the representative’s training facility.

3.06 INPUT/OUTPUT SCHEDULE

Device Tag (Service): An I/O Listing is provided as an Appendix to this section.

3.07 PLC HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Muddy Creek Bundle Project Upgrades – Grit Facilities Remote I/O Panel: Refer to Drawing

I-613-04 for Bill of Materials of Remote I/O Panel, Racks 1&2.

B. Muddy Creek Bundle Project Upgrades – Grit Facilities Remote I/O Panel Modifications:

Refer to Specification 40 90 00, Paragraph 3.05 for hardware and modification requirements

for existing PLC panel.

3.08 SCOPE OF SERVICES

A. Work provided under this Division includes final system design implementation, furnishing

all components, system installation services, required support services, and complete

documentation for the additions to the Plant Control System (PCS) to be completed under this

Project. This work is limited to the SCADA system configuration for the new equipment

installations that are included in this Project and shown on the Drawings. All other SCADA

system configuration related to this work shall include all materials, labor, and tools required

to fabricate, deliver, unload, handle, erect, adjust, field calibrate, and test a complete and

operable, and fully integrated addition to the PCS, as indicated on the Drawings and

Specifications. Install all panels and designated instrumentation devices and provide all

mechanical and pneumatic interconnections between the various components and their local

sources of supply.

B. The intent of these Specifications is to provide a complete and operational and fully

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


integrated addition to the PCS. Additional items of equipment, materials, or labor not

specifically called for by these Specifications, which may reasonably be considered to make

the system complete and operational, shall be supplied as part of this work.

C. Responsibility for provision of this system shall be split as follows:

1. CONTRACTOR - The CONTRACTOR and/or his designated subcontractor shall be

responsible for the procurement of the required field instrumentation, the required Digital

hardware to include PLCs, Remote I/O, and the panels to house and provide operational

support for said digital hardware.

Furthermore, the CONTRACTOR and/or his designated subcontractor shall be

responsible for the proper connection of all digital controls equipment as designated in

the electrical drawings and the P&IDs and submitting all PLC and I/O schematics to

provide a fully functional system.

Purchase and supply of all hardware and software specified by the system programmer,

as limited and directed by this Specification, necessary for the proper construction and

operation of the Controls, shall be done by the CONTRACTOR.

Purchase, supply mounting, calibration, and commissioning and testing of all field

resident instrumentation, starters, drives, and control stations shall be the responsibility of

the CONTRACTOR and/or his designated subcontractor, or selected equipment vendor.

The CONTRACTOR and/or his designated subcontractor shall be responsible for testing

of all systems connected by them and demonstrating at an acceptance test that the devices

and the communication between devices is functioning properly.

All vendor-supplied PLCs shall be programmed by the equipment vendor, per MSDGC

SCADA standards. The grit dewatering system PLC will be provided and programmed

by the equipment vendor.

2. ENGINEER - ENGINEER shall provide a City-approved subcontractor (System

Programmer) to be responsible for programming and or configuring the Programmable

Logic Controllers (PLCs) and the Human Machine Interface (HMI), to provide a fully

integrated addition to the Plant Control System (PCS).

The ENGINEER and their System Programmer shall hold a preliminary design workshop

with the CONTRACTOR and/or their designated subcontractor, and the CITY, for the

purpose of definition of Project standards for programming, documentation, and panel

fabrication. CITY plant standards shall serve as the basis of the Project standards. The

System Programmer will define his software needs with regard to the existing HMI software

for the PCS and its applicability to the new additions to the PCS.

The ENGINEER shall exercise oversight of the System Programmer.

3. The System Programmer – The System Programmer shall be a subcontractor to the

ENGINEER and shall be responsible for configuration of the Plant Control System (PCS)

hardware and software into a fully operational addition to the PCS. The vendor-supplied

PLC will be programmed by the equipment vendor, per the MSDGC SCADA standards.

The system programming and detailed Specification of digital hardware, and software

configuration, as directed by these Specifications and Drawings, shall be accomplished

by the System Programmer.

Paragraph 4 describes the scope of the System Programmer, who is a subcontractor to the

ENGINEER.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


4. System Programmer Task Description

a. Prepare an Application Software development task Progress Plan.

b. Prepare for and attend Application Software Development/Review meetings. This

includes a maximum of 4 meetings (2 during development and 2 during

implementation and commissioning).

c. Receive and set-up application software development system(s) provided by the

CITY to include PLC system, HMI system, and related peripheral devices specified

under this Project only.

d. Review control strategies provided by the ENGINEER, I/O lists, and resolve/finalize

missing data base points and related parameters. Develop a database listing for the

PLC and HMI systems. Submit control strategies to the CITY and ENGINEER for

review.

e. Develop HMI software for process graphics utilizing process graphic conventions as

defined in the most current CITY SCADA standards; develop an initial set of process

graphics display and control screens for the iFIX HMI system in accordance with the

most current CITY SCADA standards; submit a PDF file of the process graphics to

CITY for review at the 75% level. Finalize graphics based on CITY’s comments.

Perform functional testing of the process graphics screens. Install process graphics

on “target” HMI systems.

f. Develop PLC programming for process control, including verification of PLC I/O

system partitioning; develop software configuration for control logic and alarms; and

pre-test, document, and install process control logic configuration.

g. Conduct a Hardware Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) at the Electrical

CONTRACTOR’s facility following successful completion of the Electrical

CONTRACTOR’s factory acceptance tests. The application specific FAT will

include the graphic screens, the HMI database, the PLC logic, and a simulation of the

communication links. I/O will be tested with simulated inputs from the interface

terminal blocks in the PLC enclosures to the HMI subsystems. Develop and submit

copies of completed test forms and a punch list of open items.

h. Perform checkout and start-up for the application software programming for the

PLC-based Process Instrumentation and Control System. The Electrical

CONTRACTOR will be responsible for the calibration and setup of all field devices,

including but not limited to: switches, transmitters, valve actuators, drives, and all

other field equipment. Programmer will not begin the application software checkout

until CONTRACTOR has fully completed the setup, calibration, and checkout of all

I/O for the Project and has provided signed checkout sheets to the CITY. Equipment

vendors must be scheduled by the CONTRACTOR for support during the application

programming system checkout.

i. Prepare for and provide application software orientation and training for CITY staff,

including formal classroom presentation and hands-on exposure for the PLC and

HMI application software. Up to four, two-hour training sessions will be provided at

Muddy Creek WWTP at times selected by CITY. Up to 8 sets of training materials

will be provided by Programmer.

j. Provide final documentation for application software. Up to two hard copy sets of

the final application software documentation and an electronic copy will be provided

by the Programmer.

k. Prepare and submit a final punch list for outstanding items related to application

software and system integration tasks and resolve all reasonable items within

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


Programmer’s control on final punch list.


PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


Appendix – PLC I/O Listing

Tag Rack Slot Point Type Description P&ID

ZIT-140019 1 1 0 AI Head Cell GATE #1 POSITION I-601-04

ZIT-140020 1 1 1 AI Head Cell GATE #2 POSITION I-601-04

ZIT-140021 1 1 2 AI GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR #1 VALVE POSITION I-602-04

ZIT-140022 1 1 3 AI GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR #2 VALVE POSITION I-602-04

ZIT-140023 1 1 4 AI GRIT PUMP #1 SUCTION VALVE POSITION I-602-04



ZIT-140026 1 2 1 AI GRIT PUMP #1 DISCHARGE VALVE POSITION I-602-04



ZIT-140029 1 2 4 AI GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCHARGE HDR POSITION I-603-04

ZIT-140030 1 2 5 AI GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCHARGE HDR POSITION I-603-04

ZIT-140031 1 3 0 AI GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX SEP 1 VALVE POSITION I-603-04

ZIT-140032 1 3 1 AI GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX SEP 2\ VALVE POSITION I-603-04

AIT-140042 1 3 2 AI METHANE DETECTOR #1 I-602-04

AIT-140043 1 3 3 AI METHANE DETECTOR #2 I-603-04

- 1 3 4 AI SPARE -

- 1 3 5 AI SPARE -

AIT-140044A 1 4 0 AI GRIT SYSTEM INFLUENT Ph I-601-04

AIT-140044B 1 4 1 AI GRIT SYSTEM INFLUENT DO I-601-04

TT-140044 1 4 2 AI GRIT SYSTEM SAMPLE TEMP I-601-04

TT-140038B 1 4 3 AI GRIT BUILDING ELECTRICAL ROOM TEMPERATURE MI-601-04

- 1 4 4 AI SPARE -

- 1 4 5 AI SPARE -

XI-100019 1 5 0 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 IN REMOTE I-601-04

ZSO-100019 1 5 1 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 OPEN I-601-04

ZSC-100019 1 5 2 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 CLOSED I-601-04

JS-100019 1 5 3 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 IN SERVICE I-601-04

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



ZA-100019 1 5 4 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 ACTUATOR FAULT I-601-04

WA-100019 1 5 5 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 TORQUE ALARM I-601-04

- 1 5 6 DI SPARE I-601-04

- 1 5 7 DI SPARE I-601-04

XI-100020 1 5 8 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 IN REMOTE I-601-04

ZSO-100020 1 5 9 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 OPEN I-601-04

ZSC-100020 1 5 10 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 CLOSED I-601-04

JS-100020 1 5 11 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 IN SERVICE I-601-04

ZA-10020 1 5 12 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 FAULT -

WA-10020 1 5 13 DI HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 TORQUE ALARM -

- 1 5 14 DI SPARE -

- 1 5 15 DI SPARE -

XI-140021 1 6 0 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #1 IN REMOTE I-602-04

ZSO-140021 1 6 1 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #1 OPEN I-604-04

ZSC-140021 1 6 2 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #1 CLOSED -

JS-140021 1 6 3 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #1 IN SERVICE -

ZA-140021 1 6 4 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #1 FAULT -

WA-140021 1 6 5 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #1 TORQUE ALARM I-602-04

- 1 6 6 DI SPARE I-602-04

- 1 6 7 DI SPARE I-602-04

XI-140022 1 6 8 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #2 IN REMOTE I-602-04

ZSO-140022 1 6 9 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #2 OPEN I-602-04

ZSC-140022 1 6 10 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #2 CLOSED I-602-04

JS-140022 1 6 11 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #2 IN SERVICE I-602-04

ZA-140022 1 6 12 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #2 FAULT I-602-04

WA-140022 1 6 13 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTIN HDR VALVE #2 TORQUE ALARM I-602-04

- 1 6 14 DI SPARE I-602-04

- 1 6 15 DI SPARE I-602-04

XI-140023 1 7 0 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #1 IN REMOTE I-602-04

ZSO-140023 1 7 1 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #1 OPEN I-602-04

ZSC-140023 1 7 2 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #1 IN CLOSED I-602-04

JS-140023 1 7 3 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #1 IN SERVICE I-602-04

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



ZA-140023 1 7 4 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #1 FAULT I-602-04

WA-140023 1 7 5 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #1 TORQUE ALARM I-602-04

WA-140023 1 7 6 DI SPARE I-602-04

- 1 7 7 DI SPARE I-602-04

- 1 7 8 DI SPARE I-602-04

XI-140024 1 7 9 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #2 IN REMOTE I-602-04

ZSO-140024 1 7 10 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #2 OPEN I-602-04

ZSC-140024 1 7 11 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #2 IN CLOSED I-602-04

JS-140024 1 7 12 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #2 IN SERVICE I-602-04

ZA-140024 1 7 13 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #2 FAULT I-602-04

WA-140024 1 7 14 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #2 TORQUE ALARM I-602-04

WA-140024 1 7 15 DI SPARE I-602-04

JS-140025 1 8 0 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #3 IN REMOTE I-602-04

ZA-140025 1 8 1 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #3 OPEN I-602-04

WA-140025 1 8 2 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #3 IN CLOSED I-602-04

XI-140025 1 8 3 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #3 IN SERVICE I-602-04

ZSO-140025 1 8 4 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #3 FAULT I-602-04

ZSC-140025 1 8 5 DI GRIT PUMP SUCTION VALVE #3 TORQUE ALARM I-602-04

- 1 8 6 DI SPARE I-602-04

- 1 8 7 DI SPARE I-602-04

WA-140026 1 8 8 DI #REF! I-602-04

XI-140026 1 8 9 DI GRIT PUMP #1 DISCH VALVE IN REMOTE I-602-04

ZSO-140026 1 8 10 DI GRIT PUMP #1 DISCH VALVE OPEN I-602-04

ZSC-140026 1 8 11 DI GRIT PUMP #1 DISCH VALVE IN CLOSED I-602-04

JS-140026 1 8 12 DI GRIT PUMP #1 DISCH VALVE IN SERVICE I-602-04

ZA-140026 1 8 13 DI GRIT PUMP #1 DISCH VALVE FAULT I-602-04

- 1 8 14 DI GRIT PUMP #1 DISCH VALVE TORQUE ALARM I-602-04

- 1 8 15 DI SPARE I-602-04





PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC




WA-140027 1 9 5 DI GRIT PUMP #2 DISCH VALVE TORQUE ALARM I-603-04

- 1 9 6 DI SPARE I-603-04

- 1 9 7 DI SPARE I-603-04






WA-140028 1 9 13 DI GRIT PUMP #3 DISCH VALVE TORQUE ALARM I-603-04

- 1 9 14 DI SPARE I-603-04

- 1 9 15 DI SPARE I-603-04

WA-140029 1 10 0 DI GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH VALVE IN REMOTE I-603-04

XI-140029 1 10 1 DI GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH VALVE OPEN I-603-04

ZSO-140029 1 10 2 DI GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH VALVE IN CLOSED I-603-04

ZSC-140029 1 10 3 DI GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH VALVE IN SERVICE I-603-04

JS-140029 1 10 4 DI GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH VALVE FAULT I-603-04

ZA-140029 1 10 5 DI GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH VALVE TORQUE ALARM I-603-04

- 1 10 6 DI SPARE I-603-04

- 1 10 7 DI SPARE I-603-04

WA-140030 1 10 8 DI GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH VALVE IN REMOTE I-603-04

XI-140030 1 10 9 DI GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH VALVE OPEN I-603-04

ZSO-140030 1 10 10 DI GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH VALVE IN CLOSED I-603-04

ZSC-140030 1 10 11 DI GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH VALVE IN SERVICE I-603-04

JS-140030 1 10 12 DI GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH VALVE FAULT I-603-04

ZA-140030 1 10 13 DI GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH VALVE TORQUE ALARM -

- 1 10 14 DI SPARE -

- 1 10 15 DI SPARE -

XA-400010 2 1 0 DI UTILITY POWER OK I-613-04

XA-400011 2 1 1 DI RACK 1 REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY OK I-613-04

XA-400012 2 1 2 DI UPS BATTERY LOW I-613-04

XA-400013 2 1 3 DI RACK 2 REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY OK I-613-04

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



XA-400014 2 1 4 DI UPS POWER OK I-613-04

XA-4000115 2 1 5 DI 24VDC POWER OK I-613-04

TAH-300001 2 1 6 DI PANEL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM I-613-04

- 2 1 7 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 8 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 9 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 10 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 11 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 12 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 13 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 14 DI SPARE -

- 2 1 15 DI SPARE -

JI-140003 2 2 0 DI SUMP PUMP #1 IN SERVICE I-603-04

XI-140003 2 2 1 DI SUMP PUMP #1 IN AUTO (REMOTE) I-603-04

YN-140003 2 2 2 DI SUMP PUMP #1 RUNNING I-603-04

XA-140003 2 2 3 DI SUMP PUMP #1 OVERLOAD ALARM I-603-04

FAL-140003 2 2 4 DI SUMP PUMP #1 SEAL WATER FLOW ALARM I-603-04

- 2 2 5 DI SPARE -

IS-140037 2 2 6 DI GRIT PUMP ROOM EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MI-601-04

LAH-140005 2 2 7 DI SUMP HIGH LEVEL ALARM I-603-04

JI-140004 2 2 8 DI SUMP PUMP #2 IN SERVICE I-603-04

XI-140004 2 2 9 DI SUMP PUMP #2 IN AUTO (REMOTE) I-603-04

YN-140004 2 2 10 DI SUMP PUMP #2 RUNNING I-603-04

XA-140004 2 2 11 DI SUMP PUMP #2 OVERLOAD ALARM I-603-04

FAL-140004 2 2 12 DI SUMP PUMP #2 SEAL WATER FLOW ALARM I-603-04

- 2 2 13 DI SPARE -

- 2 2 14 DI SPARE -

- 2 2 15 DI SPARE -

XI-140031 2 3 0 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 1 IN REMOTE -

ZSO-140031 2 3 1 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 1 OPEN -

ZSC-140031 2 3 2 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 1 CLOSES -

JS-140031 2 3 3 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 1 IN SERVICE -

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



ZA-140031 2 3 4 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 1 FAULT -

WA-140031 2 3 5 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 1 TORQUE ALARM I-601-04

- 2 3 6 DI SPARE -

- 2 3 7 DI SPARE -

XI-140032 2 3 8 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 2 IN REMOTE -

ZSO-140032 2 3 9 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 2 OPEN -

ZSC-140032 2 3 10 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 2 CLOSES -

JS-140032 2 3 11 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 2 IN SERVICE -

ZA-140032 2 3 12 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 2 FAULT -

WA-140032 2 3 13 DI GRIT PUMP DISCH VLV TO VRTX SEP 2 TORQUE ALARM -

YN-140044 2 3 14 DI SPARE -

- 2 3 15 DI SAMPLE PUMP RUN STATUS -

- 2 4 0 DO HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 OPEN COMMAND -

HS-140019A 2 4 1 DO HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 CLOSE COMMAND I-601-04

HS-140019B 2 4 2 DO HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #1 STOP COMMAND I-601-04

HS-140019C 2 4 3 DO HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 OPEN COMMAND -

HS-140020C 2 4 4 DO HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 CLOSE COMMAND I-601-04

HS-140020C 2 4 5 DO HEAD CELL GATE VALVE #2 STOP COMMAND I-601-04

HS-140020C 2 4 6 DO #REF! I-601-04

- 2 4 7 DO SPARE PRIMARY






HS-140021A 2 4 13 DO GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR VALVE #1 OPEN COMMAND -

HS-140021B 2 4 14 DO GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR VALVE #1 CLOSE COMMAND I-602-04

HS-140021C 2 4 15 DO GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR VALVE #1 STOP COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100022A 2 5 0 DO SPARE I-602-04

HS-100022B 2 5 1 DO GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100022C 2 5 2 DO GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100022C 2 5 3 DO GRIT PUMP SUCTION HDR VALVE STOP COMMAND I-602-04

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



HS-100023A 2 5 4 DO GRIT PUMP #1 SUCTION VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100023B 2 5 5 DO GRIT PUMP #1 SUCTION VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100023C 2 5 6 DO GRIT PUMP #1 SUCTION HDR VALVE STOP COMMAND I-602-04







HS-100026A 2 5 13 DO GRIT PUMP #1 DISCH VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100026B 2 5 14 DO GRIT PUMP #1 LDISCH VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100026C 2 5 15 DO GRIT PUMP #1 DICSH VALVE STOP COMMAND I-602-04

- 2 6 0 DO GRIT PUMP #2 DISCH VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100027A 2 6 1 DO GRIT PUMP #2 LDISCH VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100027B 2 6 2 DO GRIT PUMP #2 DICSH VALVE STOP COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100027C 2 6 3 DO GRIT PUMP #3 DISCH VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100028A 2 6 4 DO GRIT PUMP #3 LDISCH VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100028B 2 6 5 DO GRIT PUMP #3 DICSH VALVE STOP COMMAND I-602-04

HS-100028C 2 6 6 DO GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH HDR VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100029A 2 6 7 DO GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH HDR VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100029B 2 6 8 DO GRIT PUMP #1/2 DISCH HDR VALVE STOP COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100029C 2 6 9 DO #REF! I-603-04

HS-100030A 2 6 10 DO GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH HDR VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100030A 2 6 11 DO GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH HDR VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100030B 2 6 12 DO GRIT PUMP #2/3 DISCH HDR VALVE STOP COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100030C 2 6 13 DO GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX #1 SEP VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100031B 2 6 14 DO GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX #1 SEP VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100031C 2 6 15 DO GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX #1 SEP VALVE STOP COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100032A 2 7 0 DO GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX #2 SEP VALVE OPEN COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100032B 2 7 1 DO GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX #2 SEP VALVE CLOSE COMMAND I-603-04

HS-100032C 2 7 2 DO GRIT PUMP DISCH TO VRTX #2 SEP VALVE STOP COMMAND -

HS-140044 2 7 3 DO SAMPLE PUMP RUN COMMAND -

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



- 2 7 4 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 5 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 6 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 7 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 8 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 9 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 10 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 11 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 12 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 13 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 14 DO SPARE -

- 2 7 15 DO SPARE -

End Of Appendix – PLC I/O Listing

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC



CONTROL PANELS 40 95 13-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 40 95 13

CONTROL PANELS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. This guideline defines the design, fabrication, and workmanship requirements for all types of

custom manufactured enclosures used by the CITY. The term control panels includes the

enclosure, back panels, side panels, swing out panels, racks, access windows and accessories

used for the housing of processors, electrical equipment, instruments and operator interfaces.

B. All control panel fabrication/wiring shall conform to this Specification and CITY’s drawings.

The control panels shall also comply with industry standard Good Manufacturing Practices

(GMPs) as specified by the National Electric Code (NEC), and National Fire Protection

Agency (NFPA) standard #79. The panel fabricator must also be certified in accordance with

UL 508A standards label, and as required per NEC 409.110. The CONTRACTOR and

his/her panel fabricator (Vendor) shall review this document and applicable portions of the

above codes to ensure compliance.

C. No deviations from this Specification, CITY’s drawings, or any of the above mentioned

standards/codes shall be permitted without written consent from the CITY. Any request to

deviate from the mentioned documents shall be made in writing by the CONTRACTOR to

the CITY. Approvals in writing from the CITY shall only be considered as authorization to

proceed with the requested deviation. The CITY reserves the right to deviate from the above

mentioned documents at his/her own discretion.

D. Any conflict between the above mentioned documentation shall be brought to the attention of

the CITY by the CONTRACTOR and must be resolved in writing before proceeding with

fabrication/wiring of the control panel. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR

to identify such conflicts during fabrication/wiring of the control panels. There shall be no

monetary compensation to the CONTRACTOR by the CITY from failure of the

CONTRACTOR to identify such conflicts.

E. It is not the intent of this Specification to completely specify all details of design and

construction of the control panels. All suggestions and recommendations from the

CONTRACTOR that improves the quality, performance, maintainability and/or cost of the

control panel are welcomed by the CITY and shall be made in writing by the

CONTRACTOR.

F. For each applicable equipment packages, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a completely

functional control system with control panels and all required instrumentation. These

systems will be performance tested as fully functional and complete systems at the Vendor's

facility.

G. Bill of Material (BOM) provided on each enclosure’s assembly drawing. The

CONTRACTOR shall provide all devices listed in the “Supplied By” column of the BOM as

“Vendor”.

H. All enclosures shall be fabricated and wired to meet all requirements as detailed on the panel

and wiring drawings submitted.

I. All devices required for the construction of enclosures are either specified on the respective

typical assembly drawings or are referred to within this Specification. The CITY must


approve any changes to these components.

J. In order to provide a fully functional system, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish any material

or equipment required for fabrication that is not specifically mentioned in this Specification.

The selection of all accessories, materials, and methods of fabrication not mentioned in this

Specification and/or the CITY’s drawings, but which are necessary to complete the

fabrication of the control panel, shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall

be carried out in accordance as stated by the NEC, and the NFPA.

K. All custom-fabricated enclosures in outdoor areas shall be constructed to meet NEMA 4X

requirements unless otherwise specified. Sloped “watershed” enclosures are required for

clean areas.

L. All panels shall be either free standing, equipment mounted or wall mounted type enclosures.

Freestanding enclosures are required to have sanitary legs at least 12” from finished floor to

bottom of enclosure. All wall mounted type enclosures shall have a means to anchor the

enclosure to a wall and/or process equipment/skid.

M. The enclosures shall be completely wired, tested and contain all components, (including

components supplied by the CITY) prior to shipment. The panels shall be ready for

installation and subsequent start up upon arrival at the CITY’s site.

N. The CONTRACTOR shall provide supervision and labor that has been qualified by training

and experience, to perform the specific activities.

O. The CONTRACTOR shall issue panel components or associated instrumentation for

installation by other contractors as required.

P. The CONTRACTOR shall initiate a documented request for all work, which is not included

in the current authorized contract and design documents.

Q. The CONTRACTOR shall receive and inspect control system equipment, instruments,

control panels, junction boxes and miscellaneous components. Notify the CITY, or the

CITY’s Representative, immediately of any signs of damage or if discrepancies exist between

the packing slip and the items being received.

R. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain field records indicating date for receipt of control system

equipment, instruments, control panels and junction boxes on site.

S. The CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation of all control panel components including

model numbers, serial numbers and spare parts listings.

T. The CONTRACTOR will store all control system equipment, instruments, control panels,

junction boxes and instruments in a clean and dry area that provides shelter from the rain and

mechanical abuse. Provide heating/cooling to maintain an ambient temperature between 32

degrees and 72 degrees F.

U. The CONTRACTOR will ensure that all miscellaneous items such as special cabling,

mounting brackets, etc., are stored with the associated control system equipment, instruments

or control panels.

V. The CONTRACTOR will protect all instrument flange faces, diaphragm seal surfaces,

capillary tubing and threaded connections, relating to the control panel, from mechanical

abuse and ensure that plugs and caps are not removed from device openings or connections

during storage.

W. No equipment will be shipped to the CITY’s facility without a Factory Acceptance Test and

written authorization by the CITY or the CITY’s representative.


X. Equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL, or by a nationally recognized third

party testing laboratory. All unit assemblies (skid mounted packages, panel assemblies, or

enclosures of assemblies of components where at least one component is required to be

singularly UL listed) shall be either UL listed or listed by another testing organization

acceptable to the governing authority (authority having jurisdiction). All costs associated

with obtaining the certification of listing shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

If no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing, an independent test shall be

performed at CONTRACTOR’s expense. Before the test is conducted, CONTRACTOR shall

submit a copy of the testing procedure to be used for approval by the governing authority.

1.02 CONTROL SYSTEM DETAIL

A. Exact control panel components and configurations will vary per equipment package.

Typical custom control systems contain:

1. An equipment mounted Remote I/O cabinet containing Allen Bradley I/O modules,

terminal blocks and miscellaneous instrumentation. All instrumentation is wired to and

controlled from this enclosure. More than one cabinet may be required based on device

locations.

2. Floor or wall mounted HMI (SCADA) enclosures.

3. A free standing or wall mounted cabinet housing the Allen Bradley PLC or processor.

1.03 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION

A. Installation of instruments and components outside the package boundaries.

B. Instrumentation and controls furnished with HVAC systems.

C. Work indicated as "existing" or "NIC" on the Drawings.

1.04 APPROVAL DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these

specifications. The following Drawings and documents shall be submitted to the CITY for

review and approval:

1. Enclosure layout, including overall dimensions for enclosure, back panel, side panel,

swing out panel and/or rack.

2. Panel layouts, including orientation and dimensional requirements for component

mounting.

3. Front panel layouts, including orientation and dimensional requirements of all

components to be mounted on the panel.

4. Wiring schematics, including power distribution details, control circuits and/or point to

point details.

5. Computer communication details.

6. Itemized list of components for front panel mounting including manufacturer and model

number.

7. Itemized list of components for back, side and/or swing out panel mounting including

manufacturer and model number.

8. Instrument nameplate schedules.


9. The panel fabricator shall be located within a 150 mile radius of Cincinnati.

10. Instrument loop drawings shall be submitted with control panel shop drawings.

11. All items shall be properly identified on drawings, which shall include labeling of all

wires, connectors, contact and relay coil terminals, devices, splices, splice boxes, and

terminal strips.

B. Substitutions of itemized components as listed on the BOM can only be made with approval

from the CITY. Substitutions will only be accepted if procurement of preferred components

adversely affects the delivery schedule.

C. Any drawing/documentation to be developed by the CONTRACTOR shall be submitted to

the CITY or the CITY’s representative for approval. The CITY reserves the right to request

any additional information and/or clarification deemed necessary for the fabrication/wiring of

the control panel at no additional cost to the CITY. No fabrication/wiring is to proceed

without the approval of the appropriate drawings/documentation.

D. The CITY shall be given an allowance of four weeks from date of receipt of

drawings/documentation for review.

E. Drawings shall be developed on AutoCAD (latest release) unless otherwise specified or

permitted by the CITY. Files of the drawings will also be delivered to the CITY on CD-

ROM, or other approved storage media. Electronic copies of the typical drawings will be

made available prior to development, if required.

F. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall provide copies of all additional drawings or sketches

generated to facilitate construction or fabrication.

G. All documentation received by the CONTRACTOR from component suppliers is considered

property of the CITY and shall be turned over to the CITY at the time of shipment of the

enclosures.

H. Operating and maintenance data shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 78 23 of

these specifications.

1.05 SCHEDULE

A. Delay in shipment of control panel by vendors, insufficient manpower or any delay caused by

unforeseen circumstances will not be considered by the CITY as reasons for a delay in

schedule.

B. The CONTRACTOR’S bid shall comply with the listed Bill of Materials. Any deviations

must be identified at time of bid.

1.06 INSPECTION/TESTING

A. The CITY reserves the right to inspect all control panels prior to shipment. The

CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY at least ten days prior to the readiness of the control

panel for inspection. The CONTRACTOR’S control panel fabricator is expected to have

completed their own inspection to satisfy themselves that the fabrication is completed and

correct to the best of their knowledge prior to the inspection by the CITY. Any rejections

and/or comments based on the inspection will be corrected/resolved by the CONTRACTOR

prior to shipment of the control panel at no cost to the CITY. The approval of the inspection

of the control panel by the CITY in no way releases the CONTRACTOR from guarantees as

to materials, apparatus, workmanship and performance of the entire control panel.

B. The CITY reserves the right to conduct specific Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT) prior to


the shipment of the panels from the Vendor’s facility. The CITY will provide input to the

CONTRACTOR developed FAT documentation to ensure verification of the enclosure

functionality.

C. The CONTRACTOR agrees to support the FAT by providing the panels, a place to conduct

the testing and adequate utilities required to operate and test the panels as a complete system.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall correctly complete the required equipment qualification

documents furnished by the CITY prior to final Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT).

E. The CITY reserves the right to be present at any FAT and to inspect the work at any time

during fabrication.

F. Prior to the inspection of the control panel by the CITY, the CONTRACTOR shall

completely inspect and test the control panel fabricators work for the following, but not

limited to:

1. All nameplates and tags are in the correct arrangement, good appearance, correct

inscriptions and spelling and proper attachment.

2. All equipment/instruments are checked mechanically for proper arrangement, installation,

assembly and compliance with the Specification and Drawings.

3. All electrical circuits are checked for continuity, operability and compliance with the

Specification and Drawings.

4. All pneumatic tubing/piping is checked for continuity, operability and compliance with

the Specification and Drawings.

G. Prior to the FAT, the CONTRACTOR should perform a power on test to ensure proper

wiring.

H. The CONTRACTOR is liable for back charges to correct any items found not in compliance

with the Specification and/or Drawings after the initial inspection of the control panel by the

CITY.

I. The CITY reserves the right to waive the control panel inspection prior to shipment of panel

by the control panel fabricator. Such action by the CITY in no way releases the

CONTRACTOR from guarantees as to materials, apparatus, workmanship and performance

of the entire control panel, and still holds the CONTRACTOR liable for back charges to

correct any items found not in compliance with the Specification and/or Drawings.

1.07 SHIPPING

A. Preparation

1. All external pneumatic connections are to be capped (tubing fittings) or plugged (pipe

fittings).

2. Cushion all glass and fragile surfaces, at points of contact with the crate. Use crepe

cellulose or other suitable nonabrasive material.

3. Secure and restrain from movement all loose components and accessories.

4. Utilize interior protectors and braces as necessary.

5. Use plastic or waterproof paper to cover panels to prevent water damage during transit

and required "on-site" storage.

6. The CONTRACTOR is to provide two days notice to the CITY or the CITY’s


representative before shipping.

B. Crating

1. If additional protection, e.g., wooden crate, is required depending upon type of transport,

the CONTRACTOR is to make this determination and provide such protection.

2. The CONTRACTOR is to provide crate and packing materials to meet all applicable

regulations and codes.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall ship the panels to the destination listed in the purchase order.

4. Prior to accepting shipment, the CITY reserves the right to inspect all panels for damage

during shipment. If any damage is evident, the shipment shall not be accepted. The

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for settling any claims with the carrier.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall provide shipping weight to the CITY before enclosures are

shipped.

1.08 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1.01 2.01 ENCLOSURE RATINGS

A. Control panels enclosure ratings shall match the environment that they are installed.

B. NEMA 12: For Indoor areas in non-classified areas.

C. NEMA 4 or 4X: Stainless Steel or Fiberglass for Outdoor areas.

D. NEMA 7: Explosive Gas/Vapors

E. NEMA 9: Explosive Fibers/Flyings

F. Panel Wall Thickness: 14 or 16 Gauge

2.02 SUB-PANELS

A. Material of Construction: Cold or Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Painted White.

B. Material Thickness: 12 or 14 Gauge

2.03 PUSH BUTTON STATIONS AND OPERATOR DEVICES

A. Push button station enclosure and operators shall adhere to NEMA ratings per Section 2.01

above and requirements of Section 26 29 00.

B. Use Allen Bradley 800H or 800T 30.5 mm push buttons, selectors, pilot lights, etc.

C. Use 800H-W series for nameplates.

2.04 PLC HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Specification 40 94 43 for detailed requirements of a programmable controller

system.

B. Allen Bradley Control Logix is the client standard.


C. Use Allen Bradley Compact Logix in lieu of Control Logix only with approval from the

client.

D. The use of redundant PLC power supplies are required to protect the PLC processor.

E. The use of Flex I/O (Bulletin 1794) is generally not permitted.

F. Provide 20% installed spare I/O capacity in PLC and Remote I/O panels. This includes I/O

modules AND terminations.

2.05 WIRING

A. See Specification 40 95 73 for specific wiring details.

B. All wire type and size shall be in accordance with the NEC. The Vendor is responsible for

properly selecting the size of wire to be used in accordance with all applicable codes.

Preferred wire types for typical applications are listed in Specification 40 95 73.

C. The color of the wire used shall be in accordance with the Wire Color Code Table in

Specification 40 95 73 unless prior permission is obtained from the CITY.

D. Use only pre-printed wire markers. The use of hand written markers is not permitted. Heat

shrink type wire markers are preferred, however, adhesive type markers are acceptable with

approval from the CITY. All wires and cables are to be properly labeled per the schematic

drawings.


A. Reference the respective panel schematic wiring drawing, and the Panel Drawing Bill of

Material List for preferred types and models.

B. All terminal blocks shall be rated IP20 or IP30.

2.07 CIRCUIT PROTECTION

A. Fuse or Circuit Breaker sizing shall be in accordance with the applicable article of the NEC.

B. Reference the respective panel schematic wiring drawing and the panel drawing Bill of

Material (B.O.M.) list for preferred types and models of circuit protection devices.

C. The use of current-limiting fuses (example Bussman LPJ) for each incoming 120 VAC feed

is required so that the control panel’s SCCR (short circuit current rating) may be maximized.

D. Use a finger-safe fuse holder for each incoming 120VAC fuse (example Bussman

JTN60030).

E. Circuit breakers are primarily used on branch 120 VAC circuits. UL 489 listed breakers are

preferred.

F. Fused terminal blocks for branch circuits shall be provided with fuse-blown indications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

A. Construction

1. All edges of the enclosure shall be ground and polished to standard radius bends.

2. Welding materials and procedures shall be as required to assure structural integrity.


Grind all welds smooth and flush with the surrounding metal. Seams shall be

continuously welded and ground smooth.

3. Stiffeners shall be provided as required on the interior of the surfaces to maintain the

enclosure’s flatness. Generally, no evidence of fastening means shall appear on the face

of the finished enclosure. Exceptions to this shall require prior CITY approval.

4. Interior mounting studs for the sub-panel shall be provided. These studs shall be

constructed of material compatible with the panel enclosure, and shall have sufficient

strength and location to support the sub-panel and all the devices mounted thereon.

These studs shall be permanently affixed to the sides or back of the enclosure, and have

no evidence of fastening means appear on the face of the finished enclosure.

5. Panel shall be constructed and assembled to meet the requirements of UL 508A.

B. Sub-Panels

1. Each sub-panel shall have sufficient mounting holes in number and size to correspond

with the sub-panel mounting studs on the interior of the enclosure.

2. Each sub-panel will be shipped mounted within the enclosure complete with all devices

specified in the BOM.

C. Doors

1. All edges of the panel doors shall be ground and polished to standard radius bends.

2. Stiffeners shall be provided as required on the rear surfaces to maintain the Panel Door

flatness. No evidence of fastening means shall appear on the face of the finished

enclosure.

3. All panel doors shall be attached to the enclosure by means of a continuous hinge (or

hinges). No evidence of fastening means shall appear on the face of the finished

enclosure.

4. All panel doors shall have sufficient latching mechanism(s) placed appropriately such

that the panel doors will properly seal to meet the NEMA 4X enclosure rating for

Outdoor enclosures.

5. No distortion of the panel doors is permitted as a result of machining cutouts or mounting

instruments and devices.

6. When specified by the assembly drawings, the devices mounted in the door or sides of

the enclosure shall be sealed to maintain a positive purge air pressure within the panel.

D. Surface Preparation

1. A smooth brushed finish is acceptable.

2. Remove weld spatter and sharp weld edges.

3. Clean with a solvent to remove grease and oil deposits.

3.02 DEVICE MOUNTING

A. All equipment/instruments shall be mounted as per manufacturer’s instruction with no

obstructions preventing easy access for maintenance or removal of equipment/instrument

without the need for removal of the entire panel.

B. All equipment/instruments shall be properly spaced for proper ventilation and wiring as per

manufacturer’s instruction.


C. All heat generating equipment/instruments shall be mounted near to the bottom of the control

panel as possible. If deemed necessary muffin fans shall be installed for circulation of air

within the enclosure.

D. Power conditioners shall be provided for all microprocessor controllers and computer

hardware.

E. Internal receptacles shall be mounted in control panels that house processors, which require

configuration/programming with a laptop plug-in terminal. Receptacles shall be individually

fused, with the fuse rated for the proper ampacity protection as recommended by the laptop

manufacturer.

F. Free standing control panels shall contain an individual fluorescent lamp mounted at the top

of the control panel. Light shall be individually fused and be equipped with an on/off toggle

switch, and a door limit switch.

G. All devices and electrical equipment not DIN rail mounted shall be rigidly mounted to the

sub-panel by using drilled and tapped mounting holes. Use the appropriate mounting

hardware.

H. When assembling Allen Bradley PLC or Remote I/O panels, adhere to the minimum spacing

requirements of Allen Bradley PLC components, chassis and power supplies as required.

I. Locate all devices per the respective panel layout drawing. Changes in the layout require

prior CITY approval.

J. Where required, devices may be mounted to the door utilizing the appropriate mounting

hardware while maintaining the existing NEMA integrity rating. External receptacles and

programming ports are required for enclosures containing processors.

3.03 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Control panel shall be provided with a dedicated disconnecting means for each individual

incoming supply circuit. The disconnecting means shall be manually operable and plainly

indicate whether it is in the closed (on) or open (off) position.

B. The disconnecting means shall be mounted within the control panel enclosure, at the top of

the enclosure (must be within human reach) with no other equipment mounted above it.

Proper space shall be allocated for wire bending as required per the NEC.

C. All components in a control panel shall be UL listed, in accordance with achieving UL508A

certification.

D. Finger-safe devices shall be employed for all devices. When this is not possible, appropriate

guarding shall be used. This ensures that there will not be a shock hazard.

E. Control Panel Wiring

1. All wiring shall be in accordance with the applicable articles of the NEC. Reference

Section 409573 for specific wiring details. Conductors shall be properly sized for the

correct amperage per the NEC and NFPA #79 codes/standards.

2. Conductors shall have a minimum of 600V, THHN/THWN or MTW insulation.

3. Where possible, run wiring between devices and terminal blocks in wire ducts with

covers. When this is not practical, wire runs shall be neatly arranged, supported, bundled

with nylon tie-wraps, and secured to the sub-panel. Ensure that there is enough slack to

act as a strain relief.


4. Vented flame-retardant plastic wire way with covers shall be provided for wire bundle

runs of greater than 1 inch in diameter. Wire way will be sized such that the combined

cross-sectional area of all conductors and cables shall not exceed 60% of the interior

cross sectional area of the wire way.

5. Wire way shall be mounted at a preferred distance of 2 inches from terminals and

equipment/instruments. Only where overall enclosure dimensions are critical will

distances less than 2 inches be acceptable, and must be approved by CITY or CITY’s

representative.

6. Provide flexible PVC spiral wrap for protection of each wire bundle that passes across the

door hinge. Allow sufficient slack in the wiring bundle(s) to allow the door to fully open.

7. Mark each wire and cable at both ends with pre-printed labels per the respective

schematic wiring drawings and the appropriate CADD Detail Drawing. The tag shall

grip the wire/cabling insulation to prevent slippage.

8. The use of wire splices or tee taps is not permitted. Wiring terminations are not

permitted within wire ducts.

9. AC power and discrete control wiring shall be routed separately from DC discrete control

and analog and communications wiring.

10. Cross A.C. and D.C. signals only at right angles.

11. Thermocouple and RTD shielded cables shall be permitted to be routed only with analog

shielded wiring.

12. All field I/O wiring shall be terminated to terminal blocks or prefabricated cable/terminal

systems to I/O modules unless otherwise specified. Allow no more than two wires per

terminal. If more than two wires must be terminated, panel terminals can be utilized,

provided the maximum limit is two wires. For wireway I/O mounting, a ground bar used

for terminating analog shield cabling should be mounted directly below the I/O module.

This method is preferred over using additional panel terminals.

13. I/O field wiring to enclosures without I/O module terminals shall be terminated to

terminal blocks.

14. The use of current limiting fuses for incoming 120 VAC feeds into the control panel, are

preferred over other means of circuit protection. The intent is to increase the control

panels overall SCCR (short circuit current rating), as part of the UL508A requirements,

and in accordance with NEC 409.110.

15. Supply voltages for powering of all instruments shall be protected by fuses or circuit

breakers, and will be sized appropriately. AC/DC power supplies shall be circuit-

protected on both the primary and secondary circuits.

16. Terminals and fuses shall be arranged to receive field wiring on a dedicated field side and

panel wiring on a dedicated panel wiring side.

17. Where terminal strip jumpers are required, use only insulated jumper strips designed for

that particular terminal strip. The use of jumper wires is not permitted, unless otherwise

indicated or approved in advance.

18. Terminals for analog wiring shall be arranged in a manner to provide for a shield

termination on every third terminal. All analog wiring shields shall be grouped and

grounded to instrument ground at a single dedicated connection. All floating shields shall

be pulled back and encased in heat shrink tubing.


F. Terminal Block Installation

1. Terminals shall be provided for all field control wiring connections. Control wiring

terminals shall be grouped separately from power distribution terminals. Terminals shall

be strip DIN rail mounted to the back panel and shall contain approximately 20% spare.

Separate terminal strips shall be dedicated for AC and DC wiring and shall be

individually and clearly labeled.

2. Terminals shall be screw type and rated for a minimum of 15 amps, or as indicated

otherwise on drawings. Each terminal shall be clearly labeled to correspond with

markings on the electrical drawings, by use of terminal marking strips.

3. Locate all terminal blocks per the respective panel layout drawing. Changes in the layout

require prior CITY approval.

4. All terminal strips and individual terminals shall be labeled per the respective schematic

wiring drawings and the appropriate CADD Detail Drawing.

5. Ground circuits shall use grounded terminal blocks unless prior approval is obtained from

the CITY. Ground terminals are color-coded with green, yellow, or both colors.

6. The manufacturer’s restrictions on wire size for multiple wire terminations on one

terminal block shall be followed. However, no more than two wires shall be terminated

on one side of one terminal block.

7. Fuse blocks shall be provided with DIN rail mounting and contain an integral fuse pull

mechanism. Control panel shall contain 20% spare fuses. No inline wire fuses shall be

allowed. Each individual fuse block shall be clearly labeled to correspond with markings

on the electrical drawings.

8. Terminals and fuse block shall be mounted with unobstructed access to them. There shall

be no internal or external wiring crossing over the terminals or fuse blocks.

G. Grounding

1. Grounding shall be in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC with the exception that the

use of metallic armored cabling and/or rigid metal conduit, as a grounding path, is not

acceptable. A separate conductor shall be provided.

2. The secondary side of all control power transformers or power supplies shall be grounded

to the equipment/instrument ground.

3. Provide grounding bars for the appropriately sized wire as required.

4. Each enclosure shall have an individual equipment ground which shall be referenced to

earth ground. The equipment ground shall be clearly labeled. The connection to earth

ground shall be via a grounding conductor. Reliance on metal conduit or armored

cabling connections is not permitted.

5. The control panel shall contain a common equipment and instrument ground busbar

(copper). The ground busbar will be clearly labeled and bonded to the enclosure.

6. All analog signal wiring shields shall be grouped and terminated to the instrument ground

as well as all instruments/devices.

7. Each sub-panel shall be grounded to the equipment ground. Connection of ground to

sub-panels and side panels shall not be permitted through the panel bolts. A separate

appropriately sized grounding conductor is required.

8. The enclosure door shall always be grounded to the equipment/instrument ground. This


requirement is applicable even if there are no electrical devices mounted in the door. An

appropriately sized grounding conductor is required and shall be routed to allow

unrestricted opening/closing of the door. The use of the door hinge as a grounding path

is not acceptable. The door grounding conductor shall be enclosed in flexible spiral wrap

to provide protection against pinching and/or snagging of wire by the door. The door

grounding conductor may be attached to mounting hardware used to mount devices in the

door provided that there is a suitable metal to metal connection. If a suitable connection

is not possible, a grounding lug that is welded to the door shall be provided. No evidence

of fastening means shall appear on the face of the finished enclosure.

9. Use ground terminal blocks, which are designated as green/yellow in color, and make

physical metal-metal contact with the DIN rail.

10. For ground bars, ground lugs, and similar panel grounds, remove the painting of the sub-

panel in the area where the grounding device is to be located.

H. Control Panel Nameplates

1. Nameplates shall be 1/16 inch in thickness and constructed of white laminated phenolic

plates with black core color. Letter height shall be a minimum 1/8 inch unless otherwise

noted.

2. Nameplates with inscriptions shall be provided for the control panel.

3. The nameplates shall be held into place using adhesive, General Electric RTV Silastic or

equal.

4. All internal panel mounted equipment/instruments shall have a nameplate as described

above. Nameplates should be easily viewable.

5. All door mounted switches, lights and pushbuttons shall be labeled with manufacturer

supplied labels and/or white phenol engraved nameplates as specified by the CITY. Door

mounted indicators and displays shall be labeled with nameplates as per schedules. All

door mounted equipment shall also have backside mounted nameplates.

6. Do not mount nameplates on removable covers unless there is no other practicable

method.


INSTRUMENT SIGNAL AND

POWER WIRING 40 95 73-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 40 95 73

INSTRUMENT SIGNAL AND POWER WIRING

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. All requirements of Specification 40 90 00 form a part of this Section.

B. Perform the following work as part of Electrical Construction Specifications, indicated as

required in Division 26 Specifications.

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Work shall comply with:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

4. Federal, State, and Local Codes.

5. Instrument Society of America (ISA)

B. Provide new materials and equipment that meet the requirements of:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

3. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

5. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

6. Factory Mutual (FM).

1.03 INSPECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements of local inspection authority.

B. Schedule inspections with the local inspection authority so that no new work is concealed

prior to required inspections.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Upon Completion of Job, submit the following:

1. Supply "as-built" drawings: Marked-up red lines.

2. Give CITY's representative all manufacturers' literature upon completion of job.

1.05 DRAWING CONFLICTS

Lay out your work first, before you start, and report all Drawing conflicts to the CITY. The

CITY will not assume responsibility for cost incurred by the CONTRACTOR because of lack of

preparation.



1.06 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included

1. CITY furnished instruments are listed in the Instrument List and coordination Schedule.

Field instruments are furnished with mounting brackets and air supply regulator if

applicable.

2. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the installation of all control panels, junction

boxes, and any other control enclosures required for the complete installation of this

system.

3. Wiring and terminations of all instrument devices associated with this Project is the

responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

4. Provide cabling and/or wiring necessary to wire the following CITY or CONTRACTOR

furnished items:

a. Instruments

b. Control Panels

c. Remote I/O Panels

d. Field Termination Boxes

5. Provide raceway, fittings and supports.

6. Provide cable tray accessories and supports, as required.

7. Provide power wiring to field instrument requiring 120 VAC power.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

Refer to Division 26, Electrical Basic Materials and Methods of the Electrical Specifications for

all products.

2.02 CABLE REQUIREMENTS (MINIMUM)

A. Conductors shall be properly sized for the correct amperage per the NEC and NFPA #79

codes/standards. Conductors shall be stranded soft-annealed copper. Single conductors shall

be XHHW insulation.

1. 120VAC Conductors shall be color coded in the following manner:

a. BLACK - AC line, load, and hardwired control circuits in line voltage.

b. WHITE - AC Neutral

c. GREEN - Ground

d. YELLOW - Any AC conductor within a control panel from an external power source

that remains live after the control panel disconnect is opened.

e. RED - All 120 VAC Control and I/O Wiring

2. 24VDC Conductors shall be color coded in the following manner:

a. DARK BLUE - DC Control Circuits (positive)

b. DARK BLUE with White Stripe - DC Control Circuits (negative or common)

c. LIGHT BLUE - Intrinsically safe circuits

d. YELLOW - Any DC conductor within a control panel from an external power source



that remains live after the control panel disconnect is opened.

3. Twisted shielded pair conductors for analog wiring:

a. BLACK Positive (+24V)

b. CLEAR Negative (COM)

c. SHIELD Shield (SHLD)

B. Cable types are specified as follows. Other types may be used only with approval.

CABLE TYPE USAGE CABLE

DESCRIPTION/SIZE

Belden 8719 Analog I/O 1 Twisted Pair #18 AWG,

Shield

XHHW AC/DC Discrete I/O – Field Wiring #14 AWG minimum

XHHW AC/DC Discrete I/O – Panel Wiring #16 AWG minimum

XHHW AC/DC Control Power – Field Wiring #12 AWG minimum

XHHW AC/DC Control Power – Panel Wiring #14 AWG minimum

Belden 9366 Temperature 1 Triad

Belden 3092A ControlNet Quad-Shielded RG6 Coaxial

Belden 11872A Ethernet Category 6

Belden B9C231 Optical Fiber Cable Armor – 12 Fibers

Belden B9C232 Optical Fiber Cable Armor – 24 Fibers

Belden B9C202 Optical Fiber Cable Non-Armor – 6 Fibers



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide supervision and labor that has been qualified by training and experience to perform

the activities.

B. Ensure the physical mounting of an instrument is complete, prior to terminating conduit and

wiring at the instrument.

C. Reference Specification Division 26 Electrical Specifications for installation methods not

listed.

3.02 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES

A. Separate systems consisting of conduit and wire shall be provided for the following types of

applications:

1. Analog signals (4-20 mA DC), Thermocouple Wire and Resistance Temperature Devices

(RTDs)

2. 24 VDC Discrete signals; 24 VDC Power



3. 120 VAC Discrete signals; 120VAC power distribution

4. Remote I/O Communications (other than Ethernet, if applicable)

5. Ethernet Communications

6. Communication cables (i.e., RS-485, RS-232, ControlNet)

7. Intrinsically Safe Signals

B. Instruments on process equipment which require field calibration (RTDs, pressure

transmitter, etc.), must have a minimum of three feet of sensor cable coiled at the instrument

to allow for field calibration of the instrument while it is still connected to the control system.

This cable will be left coiled at the instrument during normal system operation.

C. Instrument signals from field devices shall be grouped by type and routed to their respective

field panels.

D. Field conduit runs begin at the individual field control panels. The “home-run” conduits are

identified on the Instrument Plans where applicable.

E. Industrial cabling is the preferred method for connecting instruments that are directly

mounted on process piping or process equipment.

F. Do not splice wires in conduit runs, only continuous lengths of wire or cabling is permitted.

Wire nuts and in-line splicing of any kind is not permitted.

G. All wires and cables shall be labeled at both ends with markers per the electrical schematic

drawings. Use only pre-printed wire markers. The use of hand written markers is not

permitted. Heat shrink type wire markers are required. The tag shall grip the wire/cable

insulation preventing slippage. Individual conductors must be labeled with pre-printed

markers as indicated on the associated schematic drawings. The cable shall be labeled at the

point where the jacket is cut and heat shrink tubing is applied.

H. Multi-conductor cables shall have an appropriately sized heat shrink boot covering the point

where the jacket is cut. In the case where analog shield wires are not to be terminated, this

shield shall be wrapped around the cable jacket before the heat shrink material is applied.

Analog drain wire to be in heat shrink tubing.

I. Ground shields only at one end of the cable. Typically, this will be the control panel end.

Cut and tape the shield wires at the instrument end.

J. Ground wires shall only be connected at designated ground terminals or ground bars.

Typically, these grounding devices shall be located in the control panel.

K. Conduit shall not be located above or in front of manways, maintenance pull spaces, control

valve actuator pull spaces, handwheels, or within 7 feet above walkways.

3.03 DOCUMENTATION

A. The following documents must be accessible to the CONTRACTOR to perform the

installations as applicable:

1. Schematic Diagrams.

2. Control Panel Layout Drawings.

3. Field Termination Diagrams.

4. Power Distribution Diagrams



5. Communication Detail Drawings

3.04 HAZARDOUS AREA INSTALLATIONS

A. Some areas of the facility have a hazardous classification rating. Be familiar with these area

boundaries prior to starting the work. See the Division 26 Specifications for conduit and

other electrical component requirements.

B. Electrical conduits entering hazardous locations will use appropriate conduit seals and XP

conduit as required. A seal is required at the boundary between the hazardous area and the

non-hazardous area. Another seal is required in close proximity to the end device (panel,

instrument, etc.) Use approved sealant material.

C. Electrical enclosures shall be rated per the hazardous area classification.

D. Flexible conduit may be used in hazardous areas, provided it is rated for the area

classification. The maximum length allowable is 18 inches.

3.05 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Provide 18 inches maximum length of flexible conduit at the instrument to facilitate easy

removal of instrument, without the need to dismantle the conduit system.

B. Flexible conduit shall be used for movable equipment. The conduit shall enter the bottom of

the panel.


GRIT PUMPS 43 21 13.25-1 AUGUST 2014

SECTION 43 21 13.25

GRIT PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE (M-B-51-0006, M-B-51-0007 AND M-B-51-0008)

CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide

recessed impeller centrifugal pumps complete and operational with motors, control equipment and

accessories as shown and specified. Anchor bolts are included in this Section.

1.02. RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Section 01 79 00, Instructions of Operations and Maintenance Personnel.

C. Division 3, Concrete

D. Section 26 05 83, Electric Motors.

E. Division 40, Sections on Instrumentation and Controls.

F. Division 26, Electrical.


A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience in the production of recessed

impeller centrifugal pumps and shall show evidence of satisfactory service in at least five

installations.

B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following,

except as otherwise shown or specified.

1. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute.

2. National Electric Code.

3. Standards of National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

5. American National Standards Institute.

6. Standards of American Water Works Association.

C. Shop Tests

1. Pump casings shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the discharge head or 1-1/2 times the

shutoff head, whichever is greater.

2. Certified Factory Test

a. Pump assembly shall be operated from zero to maximum capacity as shown on the approved


curve.

b. Results of the test shall be shown in a plot of test curves showing head, flow, horsepower,

efficiency, and current.

c. Readings shall be taken at a minimum of five evenly spaced capacity points including shut-

off, design point and minimum head for which pump is designed to operate.

3. Peak-to-peak vibration amplitude for shop testing shall not exceed 3.0 mils in all directions and

at all frequencies when measured at each pump and driver bearing housing.

4. Each test shall be witnessed by a Registered Professional Engineer, who may be an employee of

the manufacturer. He shall sign and seal all copies of curves and shall certify that hydrostatic

tests were performed.

5. Tests shall be conducted in conformance with applicable methods described in Hydraulic

Institute Standards.

6. Pumps shall not be shipped until the ENGINEER has approved the test reports.

1.04 SUBMITTAL

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:

1. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications, paint certification and engineering data

including: dimensions, materials, size, weight, performance data and curves showing overall

pump efficiencies, required net positive suction head, allowable suction lift, flow rate, head,

brake horsepower, motor horsepower, speed and shut-off head.

2. Shop Drawings Showing: Fabrication, assembly, installation and wiring diagrams.

3. Four copies of certified pump tests.

4. Motor tests and data as described in Part 2, below.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including copies of all

approved Shop Drawings, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation

and spare parts information.

2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section

01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.


Pumps shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 60 00 of these

Specifications.


A. The manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility for all items specified in this section. Unit

responsibility shall require that all items be products of, or warranted by, the manufacturer. The

manufacturer shall be responsible for all coordination between components and provide all

submittals, installation and start-up assistance and certifications on the equipment as a unit.


B. The manufacturer shall provide written certification to the CITY that all equipment furnished


1.07 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. WEMCO Model C by Weir Specialty Pumps. (Base Bid)

B. Hayward Gordon

C. Or equal.

D. Basis of design is WEMCO. Contractors proposing alternate manufacturers shall be responsible

for all costs for revisions associated with system including redesign engineering, structural,

mechanical, electrical, civil, and I&C.

2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Pumps shall be recessed impeller, horizontal, belt-driven centrifugal type. They shall be specially

designed, constructed, and installed for the service intended and shall comply with the following

minimum conditions:

Design Conditions Pump Tag No:

M-B-51-0006

Pump Tag No:

M-B-51-0007

Pump Tag No:

M-B-51-0008

Location Grit Pump Room Grit Pump Room Grit Pump Room

Static Head (ft) 12.59 12.59 12.59

Duty Point 1:

Design Flow (g.p.m.) 300 300 300

Design TH (ft) 31.15 31.15 31.15

Duty Point RPM 790 790 790

Efficiency @ Duty Point (%) 31 31 31

Pump Suction Specific Speed 2265 2265 2265

Duty Point Pump

Horsepower (HP) 8 8 8

Duty Point 2:

Design Flow (g.p.m.) 400 400 400

Design TH (ft) 45.49 45.49 45.49

Duty Point RPM 960 960 960

Efficiency @ Duty Point (%) 33 33 33

Pump Suction Specific Speed 3178 3178 3178

Duty Point Pump HP 14 14 14


Design Conditions Pump Tag No:

M-B-51-0006

Pump Tag No:

M-B-51-0007

Pump Tag No:

M-B-51-0008

Maximum Speed (rpm) 1,500 1,500 1,500

Sphere Diameter (in.) 4 4 4

Suction Size (in.) 4 4 4

Discharge Size (in) 4 4 4

Liquid Pumped Wastewater and

Grit Slurry

Wastewater and

Grit Slurry

Wastewater and

Grit Slurry

Temperature (°F) 85 85 85

Drive Type Belt Belt Belt

Motor Horsepower 25 25 25

Motor Volts/Phase/ Hertz 480/3/60 480/3/60 480/3/60

B. Maximum allowable pump suction specific speed shall be 9500.

2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Pump Materials and Construction

1. Pump frame shall be of heavy duty cast iron construction, accurately machined to assure

alignment of bearings and pump shaft. Frame shall have cast feet, with bolting holes for

attachment to the baseplate. The lower section of the backhead casting shall form a reservoir to

catch and contain seal leakage, with a plugged NPTF discharge connection.

2. Casing:

a. The pump casing shall be a two-piece radially split type, with a separate and removable

suction piece designed so that the impeller can be withdrawn without the need to remove the

discharge casing. To insure a liberal wear allowance, the casing and suction piece shall be

constructed as follows:

Discharge

Diameter

Casing

Minimum

Suction Piece at

Wear Area

4 In. 3/4 In. 1-1/4 In.

b. High-Chrome Iron material conforming to ASTM Designation A532-75 Class iii, Type A

and be a minimum of 650 Brinell hardness.

c. A removable wearplate of High-Chrome Iron shall be provided in back of the impeller.

d. The packing housing shall be a separate piece bolted to the bearing housing for ease of

removal.

e. Wearplates that incorporate a stuffing box are not acceptable.

3. Impeller:

a. Pump impeller shall be cup-type, configured such that there is not impingement wear

imposed on the pump casing at the impeller periphery. Impeller shall be keyed to the shaft,

and retained with a high strength nut. The impeller shall be such that the deepest portion of

the vane is not located at the vane tips and the tips are surrounded by a thickened sectioned

rim of the following thickness:


Pump Size Minimum Impeller

Dia. @ Outside Rim

Minimum Rim Thickness

@ Wear Area

Minimum Vane Thickness

@ Wear Area

4 In. 16 In. 1-5/8 In. 7/8 In.

b. The impeller shall be constructed of High-Chrome Iron, ASTM A532-75 Class iii, Type

Aand be a minimum of 650 Brinell hardness.

4. Shaft Sleeve: Stainless steel, conforming to ASTM A 582 Type 416.

5. Shaft: Shaft shall be machined straight and true, polished over the entire length, and with the

drive end keyed for a sheave or coupling. Impeller end shall be keyed and threaded for impeller

hub and retaining nut. Sleeve shall be sealed and mechanically locked to the shaft to preclude

intrusion of the process fluid and slippage of the sleeve on the shaft. Shaft material shall be

Grade 1141 steel or equal, conforming to ASTM A108.

6. Seals: Shaft seal shall be spit mechanical type with a water flush system.

a. All components shall be split in half except for seal faces. Seal faces may be solid (un-

split) for initial installation at rotating equipment manufacturers only.

b. The non-shaft elastomers must incorporate a ball and socket to provide easier handling

during installation. No glue is to be applied to the elastomers.

c. The seal shall be installed outside of the sealing chamber/stuffing box.

Repair/replacement of the seal shall be accomplished without any rotating equipment

disassembly.

d. The seal shall be of stationary, hydraulically balanced, o-ring design to reduce heat

generation, face wear and minimize horsepower consumption. The design will seal both

positive pressure and vacuum.

e. The seal shall be mechanically loaded with multiple springs. The springs will be isolated

from the pumped product to eliminate corrosion or clogging problems.

f. A universal adjustable gland shall be provided to fit most popular pumps. Two flush

ports with standard 3/8” NPT tapped connections shall be provided in the gland.

g. The rotary holder shall have a drive pin to ensure positive drive of rotating parts.

h. The seal shall be capable of sealing up to 28 inches of vacuum to 400 PSIG dependent

upon size and materials.

i. To minimize on-going maintenance costs, the mechanical seal must be field repairable

utilizing a spare parts kit of wearable elements only. Spare parts kit shall include split

rotary and stationary faces, springs, elastomers, gaskets and fasteners.

j. Gland and rotary holder shall be 316 stainless steel.

k. Springs shall be Elgiloy to prevent chloride stress corrosion.

l. The rotary face shall be solid silicon carbide or alumina ceramic.

m. The stationary seal face shall be solid silicon carbide or carbon.

n. Elastomers shall be Viton, EPR, or Aflas.

o. Flush water flow rate of 0.5-0.8 GPM (gallons per minute).

p. Mechanical Seal shall be AW Chesterton 442 or approved equal.

7. Rotating equipment will be equipped with a throat bushing that:

a. On initial flooding of the horizontal equipment, releases entrapped air from the seal chamber

through an integral self-cleaning air vent in top of the bushing.


b. Creates fluid exchange and improved circulation in the seal chamber that reduces frictional

heat accumulation around the mechanical seal.

c. Positions particulate matter/contaminants for removal by conveying them from the bore to

the shaft by means of an integral machined spiral.

d. Removes particulate matter/contaminants from the seal chamber to the impeller for

expulsion.

e. Reduces or eliminates flush water requirements depending on pumped fluid.

f. Bushing shall be 316 stainless steel, 416 stainless steel, bronze, glass filled PTFE, carbon

graphite filled PTFE or titanium, as recommended by the manufacturer.

f. Throat bushing will be a Spiral Tractm

Version D, Type A as provided by AW Chesterton

USA or EnviroSeal Ltd of Nova Scotia, Canada.

8. Bearings: Anti-friction, grease or oil lubricated with a minimum B-10 life of 100,000 hours.

9. Baseplate: Structural steel or cast iron provided with means for collecting and draining oil and

water.

10. Furnish with 125 pound ANSI connection flanges and handhole.

11. Coupling:

a. Shall have a minimum 1.5 service factor based on the drive rated horsepower and protected

with an OSHA approved guard.

b. Belts and sheaves shall be furnished and installed to drive the pump at the speed necessary

to meet the rated design conditions.

c. Belt guard must be able to be removed by one person and be hinged for viewing of the

belts.

12. Anchor bolts and inserts shall be furnished under this Section and shall be sized and installed in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The anchor bolts shall be Type 316

stainless steel.

13. Brass or stainless steel nameplates giving the manufacturer's model and serial number, rated

capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data shall be attached to the pump.

B. Motors

1. Motors shall conform to the requirements of Section 26 05 83, Electric Motors.

2. TEFC, solid shaft, ball bearing type.

3. Motors shall be in accordance with all current applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, AFBMA,

NEC, and ANSI.

4. Motors shall be normal starting torque, normal slip, squirrel cage induction type.

5. Motors shall be capable of carrying full load current continuously without injurious temperature

rise in an ambient temperature of 50C.

6. Motors shall be provided with a service factor of 1.15.


7. Motors shall be of sufficient size so that there will be no overload on the motor above rated

nameplate horsepower under any condition of operation from shut-off to zero head, unless

otherwise specifically permitted in this Section.

8. Motor thrust bearings shall be adequate to carry continuous thrust loads under all conditions of

pump operation from zero head to shut-off.

9. Locked rotor currents shall be as specified in NEMA standards.

10. Lubrication may be grease or oil type.

C. Power Transmission

1. Pump shall be driven by the motor through a sheave and belt configuration, utilizing

adjustable ratio sheaves. Belt and sheave system shall have a 1.5 safety factor based on the

motor nameplate horsepower.

2. Drive components shall be enclosed in an OSHA-compliant protective steel guard. Guard

shall have removable components allowing access to the belts and sheaves for maintenance.

3. The pump manufacturer shall provide a common pump and motor base, constructed of

minimum 3/8-inch thick fabricated steel, suitably reinforced to support the full weight of the

pump, motor, belt drive, and guards.

a. The pump manufacturer shall furnish and install a separate, adjustable motor base with

hand wheel adjustment so that the motor can be easily moved for V-belt tensioning and

adjustment, TB Woods type MC 3B, modified with a welded steel gusset, or equal.

b. The pump manufacturer shall supply and install belts and sheaves to drive the pump at

the speed necessary to meet the rated conditions.

i. The drive shall be of the stationary control variable speed TB Woods type “SVS” or

equal, which allows a speed change by means of an adjustment to the motor sheave

when the drive is not in operation.

c. An approved fiberglass or thermoplastic belt guard shall be provided to safely enclose the

belt drive. If metal guards are furnished, they shall be of all Type 316 stainless steel

construction with suitable lifting eyes and handles to aid in removal.

D. Instrumentation and Controls

1. Local Control Stations are specified and detailed in Specification Section 40 90 00.

2. Programming of the PLC for operation of the Grit Pumps is the responsibility of the Grit

Removal Equipment manufacturer. The operation of the Grit Pumps and associated

equipment shall be as detailed in Specification Section 40 90 00.

3. The Grit Pump manufacturer must coordinate with the Grit Removal Equipment manufacturer

and the Systems Integrator during programming development, pre-commissioning testing and

startup to deliver an approved working system.

2.04 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Each pump shall be furnished with the following:

1. One shaft sleeve


2. One Suction Piece

3. One Set of V-Belts

4. One impeller nut or bolt.

5. Mechanical Seal Spare Parts Kit.

6. Special tools required for maintenance or operation.

B. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings and

shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the CITY at the conclusion of the

Project.

C. From shaft end, Pumps M-B-51-0006 and M-B-51-0007 are clockwise and M-B-51-0008 is

counter clockwise rotation. CONTRACTOR shall provide spare parts for each pump such that it is

suited for the respective pump’s rotation.

2.05 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING

A. Motors, drives and appurtenances shall receive shop primer and shop coating conforming to

requirements of Section 09 91 00, Painting. If any damage to the paint system occurs, the

equipment shall be repainted as directed by the CITY.

B. Surface preparation and painting shall conform to the requirements of Section 09 91 00, Painting.

C. All gears, bearing surfaces, machined surfaces and other surfaces which are to remain unpainted

shall receive a heavy application of grease or other rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be

maintained during storage and until the equipment is placed into operation.

D. Contractor shall certify, in writing, that the shop primer and shop coating system is compatible

with the finish coating system in accordance with Section 09 91 00, Painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in complete accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations.

B. Installing Pump Bases

1. All pumping units shall be installed on concrete bases and secured with anchor bolts in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown.

2. The concrete bases shall be poured up to 1-inch below the metal bases or soleplates.

3. Concrete work and grout are in Division 03, Concrete.

4. The base with the equipment mounted thereon, or the soleplate, shall then be accurately

shimmed to grade and the spaces between filled with an approved nonshrink grout.

5. After the grout has reached its initial set, exposed edges shall be cut back 1/2-inch and the edges

neatly finished with 1 to 2 cement mortar.


6. Where channel baseplates are used, the void inside the channel shall be filled with nonshrink

mortar and the open ends plastered with 1 to 2 cement mortar.

C. Neatly placed 1-inch hard copper pipe shall be provided on each pump to convey leakage to

nearest drainage inlet.

D. Installation shall include furnishing and applying an initial supply of grease and oil, recommended

by the manufacturer.

E. Support piping independent of pump.

F. Check and align pump, motor and shafting.

3.02 START-UP AND TEST

A. Verify that structures, pipes and equipment are compatible.

B. Make adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition.

C. Furnish the services of a factory representative for one, 8 hour day during the installation phase of

the equipment. The factory representative shall have full knowledge and experience in the

installation of the type of equipment being installed.

D. Furnish the services of a factory representative for one, 8 hour day who has complete knowledge

of proper operation start-up procedure and maintenance requirements to inspect the final

installation and supervise a test run of the equipment.

E. Furnish the services of a factory representative who has complete knowledge of the operational

and maintenance requirements of the system. The factory representative shall instruct the CITY's

personnel in the proper operation of the equipment in accordance with Section 01 79 00.

F. Substituting a service representative from the local representative organization is not acceptable

unless approved by the CITY, based on documented training on the subject equipment. Decision

of the CITY is final.

G. The schedule of all services provided shall be in accordance with a schedule approved by the

CITY.

H. A manufacturer's representative shall check and approve the installation before operation.

Manufacturer’s representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the CITY and verify

that the pumps conform to requirements, and instruct plant personnel on care and maintenance of

the equipment. He shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and

the installation is entirely satisfactory.

I. Peak-to-peak vibration amplitude for field testing shall not exceed 3.0 mils in all directions and at

all frequencies when measured at each pump and driver bearing housing.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. A factory trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up and test

services, and operation and maintenance personnel training services.

B. The representative shall make four visits to the site


1. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment at Grit Pumps M-B-51-

0006, M-B-51-0007 and M-B-51-0008.

2. The second visit shall be for checking the completed installation and start-up of the system at

Grit Pumps M-B-51-0006, M-B-51-0007 and M-B-51-0008.

3. The third and fourth visits shall be as described under Section 01 79 00, Instruction of

Operations and Maintenance Personnel.

C. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals shall be considered as included in the

CONTRACTORS’s lump sum bid price.

3.04 CLEANING

Prior to the acceptance of the work of this section, thoroughly clean all installed materials, equipment

and related areas in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 74 00 of these Specifications.


INFLUENT SAMPLE PUMP 43 21 39.16-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 43 21 39.16

INFLUENT SAMPLE PUMP

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide pump(s) as described herein. Install equipment in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions and these Specifications.

B. The pump(s) shall be totally submersible and electric driven.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and engineering data in accordance with the requirements of Section

01 33 00 of these Specifications. Indicate the following:

1. Manufacturer's name, pump size and model number and description bulletin of the pump

furnished.

2. Outline dimension of the pump.

3. Pump characteristic curves showing head, capacity, horsepower, minimum head, rated

and shut-off conditions.

4. Motor manufacturer's name, motor horsepower, rpm, frame size and motor descriptive

information. Include motor features and data sheet.


of Section 01 78 23 of these Specifications. Include address and telephone numbers

pertinent to nearest service locations and for ordering parts.


Pump(s) shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 60 00 of



Provide a manufacturer's written certification to the CITY that furnished equipment complies

with all applicable requirements of these Specifications.

1.05 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



Provide pump(s) equal to EBARA Model 50 DVU or Approved Equal.

2.02 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

A. Pump(s) shall operate in domestic wastewater having a pH range of 6.5 to 8.5.

B. Capacity: 5-30 gpm

C. RPM:1,800

D. TDH, feet: 15


A. Furnish cast iron motor and terminal housing.

B. Provide stainless steel motor shaft sealed by a double mechanical seal in a separate oil filled

chamber.

C. Provide built-in, automatic, thermal protection that prevents failure caused by clogging,

overloading, dry running and voltage drop.

D. Provide cast iron impeller and casing with large passageway to prevent clogging. The

impeller shall have a minimum Brinell hardness of 200.

E. Provide rubber-lined suction cover and stainless steel fasteners.

F. Provide float switch assembled to pump for on-off operation.

2.04 MOTOR

A. Data

1. RPM: 1,800.

2. Horsepower: 1.

3. Power: 3 Phase, 208/230/460V, 60 Hz.

4. Duty: Continuous.

B. Furnish motor in an air filled housing with permanently lubricated sealed bearings.

2.05 CONTROLS

A. Pump is for continuous run, sample pump use and manual on-off from the Influent Pump

Station control panel (INF-LCP).

B. Float switch described in 2.03 F serves to stop the pump should water level drop and permits

the pump to run with adequate water level.

2.06 CABLE

A. Provide cable suitable for submersible pump applications with cable code or legend

embossed on the cable.


B. Size cable to conform to NEC specifications for pump and service intended.

C. Provide pump with 33 feet of cable.

D. Furnish cable installed to pump such that cable stress is relieved and

watertight/moisture-tight seal is obtained.

2.07 SHOP PAINTING

All materials specified under this section shall be shop primed as part of the work under this

section. Surface preparation and paint shall be as specified in Section 09 91 00 of these

Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Install pump to piping and in the location shown on the Drawings.

3.02 PAINTING

All shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned and painted as specified in Section 09 91 00 of these

Specifications.


GRIT REMOVAL EQUIPMENT 46 23 54-1 JULY 2013

SECTION 46 23 54

GRIT REMOVAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work required under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all equipment and

materials required to provide the plant grit removal equipment, as shown on the Drawings

and/or as herein specified.

B. The plant grit removal equipment shall be a complete grit removal, washing and dewatering

system consisting of, but not limited to, the following major system components and\or

assemblies:

1. Two 12-foot diameter Grit Concentrator units (Headcell) with inlet chute, supports and

connections (M-B-03-0005, M-B-03-0006).

2. Two grit washing\classification units (Grit Vortex Separators, M-B-03-0007 and M-B-

03-0008).

3. Two grit snail grit dewatering\escalator units (M-B-03-0009 and M-B-03-0010).

4. Three grit slurry pumps – centrifugal with recessed impeller (M-B-51-0006, M-B-51-

0007, and M-B-51-0008). Refer to Spec Section 43 21 13.25-1.

5. One system control panel (M-B-49-0004) and two grit dewatering conveyor electrical

panels (M-B-35-0008 and M-B-35-0009)

6. Two Headcell influent sluice gates (M-B-23-0019 and M-B-23-0020) and one main

influent channel sluice gate (M-B-23-0039). Refer to Spec Section 40 20 10.

7. Two 1-inch flow meters and associated valves on the NPW fluidizing lines for the grit

concentrator units.

8. One rotameter, three pressure gages and two electrically operated solenoid valves for

each vortex separator/ grit dewatering conveyor units.

9. One grit dewatering/conveyor supply water rotameter for each dewatering/conveyor unit.

10. Two grit dewatering/conveyor, flexible reinforced rubber discharge chutes.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install all components, bolts, gaskets, fasteners, anchor

bolts, and electrical equipment required for a complete operating system as herein specified

and\or shown on the Drawings.

D. The basis of design for the grit removal equipment described herein is Hydro International, Inc.

The CONTRACTOR will be allowed to submit an alternate system as provided for in Section 00

41 03A, Material and Equipment Offerings. The CONTRACTOR proposing alternate system

shall be responsible for all costs for the alternate system including but not limit to, redesign

engineering and construction, including all costs to the Part 2, 3, and 4 CONTRACTORS.

1.02 RELATED SECTION

A. Slide Gate - 40 20 10

B. Grit Slurry Pump – 43 21 13.25-1


C. Control Panel, Controls and Instrumentation – 40 95 13

D. Painting – 09 91 00

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Each Settleable Solids Concentrator (Headcell) shall be designed and be capable of meeting

the below criteria when receiving flows from screened domestic wastewater. Each Settleable

Solids Concentrator shall have a hydraulic capacity of 17.5 mgd.

Plant Influent

Flow (mgd)

Number of

Units

Flow per One

Headcell (mgd) 95% Grit Removal of

the Below Size Particle

(micron) @2.65 s.g.

Headloss

(inches)

35 2 17.5 150 12”

15 2 7.5 80 3”

15 1 15 125 9”

B. The Grit Concentrator unit shall be placed in a concrete tank and receive the incoming

screened flow. The Grit Concentrator shall provide sufficient surface area to remove the

specified grit particles from the specified peak flow and concentrate the grit in a sump at the

bottom of the unit. The de-gritted effluent from the Grit Concentrator shall be weir

discharged as shown on the drawings.

C. The Grit Concentrator shall be all-hydraulic, self-activating and shall not require internal

moving parts.

D. The Grit Pump shall convey the concentrated grit slurry from the underflow of the Grit

Concentrator to the Grit Washing unit.

E. The Grit Washing unit shall receive the underflow from the Grit Concentrator. The unit shall

be mounted above and discharge the concentrated and washed grit slurry to the Grit

Dewatering Escalator. The de-gritted overflow shall be discharged upstream of the Grit

Concentrator.

F. The Grit Dewatering Escalator shall receive the underflow from the Grit Washing unit and

allow the washed grit to settle in its integral clarifier. A slow moving belt shall carry the grit

to the point of discharge allowing it to dewater during transport. The washed and dewatered

grit shall be discharged to a dewatered grit receptacle with a drain supplied by OTHERS.

G. The de-gritted overflow shall be discharged upstream of the primary grit removal equipment.

H. The Grit Removal system and all appurtenances shall be supplied by a single supplier.

I. The system to be furnished hereunder shall be made by a manufacturer regularly engaged in

such work and who has furnished similar installations and had them in successful and

continuous operation for a minimum period of ten years.

J. Data on performance testing, service history and operation of existing installations using the

submitted equipment shall be made available to the CITY, upon request, for use in

determining that the Grit Removal System offered meets the intent of the Contract,

performance requirements and criteria stated in these Specifications.


K. The Grit Concentrator technology shall be designed utilizing Computational Fluid Dynamics

(CFD) and field data to verify its flow regime, headloss and grit removal characteristics.

Upon request, data on the computation methods used and generic simulation results shall be

made available to the CITY.

L. Grit screw classifiers, grasshoppers, reciprocating rakes and similar type of units shall not be

accepted.

M. Units using Apex valves shall not be accepted.

N. Equipment using paddles or air to supplement or induce a vortex shall not be accepted.

O. All parts of the equipment shall be amply proportioned for all stresses which may occur

during operation and for any additional stresses which may occur during fabrication, erection

and starting.

P. All welding shall comply to the most current standards of the American Welding Society

(AWS).

Q. Stainless steel 304 material and finishes shall comply with the following:

1. Plate and sheet ASTM A 167; ASTM A 240

2. Bar ASTM A 276; ASTM A 479

3. Tube ASTM A 312

4. Exterior finishes shall be acid washed to a uniform finish.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these

Specifications. Include dimensional drawings of panels, panel layouts and BOM, full

component data, and detailed wiring diagrams.


of Section 01 78 23 of these Specifications.


A. Equipment shall be delivered, stored and protected in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions and the requirements of Section 01 60 00 of these Specifications.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and provide with the shop drawings and with the shipping

bill of materials, instructions for storage of all equipment supplied including equipment

exercising instructions, humidity and temperature control instructions which shall be

followed by the CONTRACTOR.


The manufacturer shall provide the CITY with written certification that all equipment furnished


1.07 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



The base bid price shall be based on equipment offered and manufactured by Hydro International.

The grit concentrator equipment shall be Eutek Headcell System as manufactured by Hydro

International or pre-approved equal. The remaining grit equipment shall be Eutek System as

manufactured by Hydro International or pre-approved equal. The CONTRACTOR shall provide

a base bid price for the work based on the base bid manufacturer and may include

additive/deductive prices for proposed alternates in Section 00 41 03A. Alternate suppliers shall

be required to meet the requirements of the contract documents and shall provide either a

certification with their price to the CONTRACTOR at the time of bid stating that they fully

comply with the contract documents, or a detailed list of exceptions to be submitted with the bid

in addition to the items required by paragraph 1.02. In addition, the additive/deductive price shall

include all modifications required to accommodate the alternate design. Award will be based on

the base bid. If CONTRACTOR proposes an alternate, he will need to comply with the

requirements of Section 01 25 00 and list all deviations from this specification. Selection of an

Alternate manufacturer will be based on a review, following bidding, of the exceptions to the

specifications and proposed cost change, including the cost of modifying the design and building,

piping, electrical, instrumentation and controls, and any other ancillary items required to

accommodate the alternate design. CONTRACTOR must assume all schedule risk from use of an

alternate manufacturer. Revised design must be stamped by an Engineer registered in the state of

Ohio and submitted for review. The CONTRACTOR shall include all additional costs in the

alternate price.

2.02 GRIT CONCENTRATORS M-B-03-0005, M-B-03-0006 (HEADCELL)

A. Two grit concentrator units M-B-03-0005 and M-B-03-0006 shall be furnished. The grit

concentrator units shall meet the below design criteria:

1. Number of Units: 2

2. Size: 12’ diameter

3. Number of Trays per Unit: 6

4. Surface Area/Unit: 678 ft2

5. Peak Loading Rate: 18.4 gpm/ft2

6. Performance: 95% removal of all grit

(specific gravity 2.65) ≥ 80 microns at Average Flow


(specific gravity 2.65) ≥ 150 microns at Peak Flow

8. Average Flow/Unit: 7.5 mgd with no more than 3" headloss

9. Peak Flow/Unit: 17.5 mgd with 12" headloss

10. Influent Duct Opening: 2’8” width x 7’4” height

11. Discharge: Weir

12. Underflow Connection: 6"

13. NPW Connection: 1" NPT

14. Materials of Construction: 304SS Support structure/duct/underflow; LDPE trays

B. The concentrators shall each consist of a stack of six, 12-foot diameter nested trays having a


minimum combined total of 1,356 square feet of settling surface. The concentrator shall have

a peak loading rate at 18.4 gpm\ft2. No exceptions shall be allowed.

C. The concentrator shall be designed to be a flow-driven all-hydraulic system that consists of

self cleaning, corrosion resistant, non-metallic trays supported in a frame. The concentrator

shall not have or require any moving parts to settle or enhance grit separation and settling.

D. Concentrator trays shall have a nominal diameter of 144 inches. Flow passages shall be self

cleaning and free of any sharp projections, burrs, flashing, sharp projections and fittings. The

tray design shall prevent accumulation of solids and stringy or fibrous materials. Trays shall

be constructed of LDPE having a minimum thickness of 1\4 inch.

E. The concentrator shall be furnished with a 304 stainless steel support frame. The stainless

steel materials used to fabricate the frame shall have a minimum thickness of 14 gauge. All

weldments shall be ground smooth to the touch. Fasteners and\or hardware used in

construction of the frame shall be 304 stainless steel. The frame shall be provided with pre-

drilled baseplates for enabling the CONTRACTOR to secure the frame support members to

the concrete floor\base slab. The trays shall be mechanically secured and fixed to the support

frame in such manner that changes in flow shall not enable the trays to move or rack from

their installed locations. The design of the frame and installation of the trays shall permit the

CONTRACTOR to form a circular grit collection sump beneath the installed frame\tray

assembly per manufacture instructions and dimensions. The manufacturer shall provide

anchor bolt requirements and placement drawings\data to the CONTRACTOR. The

CONTRACTOR shall utilize the manufacturer’s anchor bolts requirements for anchorage and

utilize 304 stainless steel anchor bolts to secure the frame\tray system.

F. The concentrator shall receive flow from a concrete influent channel. Flow from the channel

into the concentrator shall be via a manufacturer provided inlet. The influent duct of the

concentrator unit shall be fabricated from 14 gage SS. The inlet entry shall be flanged to

permit anchorage by CONTRACTOR provided anchor bolts to the concrete influent channel.

The design of the concentrator inlet shall proportionally split the flow to the individual trays.

The inlet shall be mechanically connected to each inlet tray to provide a positive, rigid

connection. The inlet shall be rigid and self supporting between the concrete channel and the

frame. The inlet assembly shall not require any intermediate supports and shall be totally

supported by its connection to the concrete influent channel and the concentrator frame.

G. All pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1 bolt patterns.

2.03 GRIT VORTEX SEPARATOR UNITS - M-B-03-0007 AND M-B-03-0008

A. Two Grit Vortex Separator units M-B-03-0007 and M-B-03-0008 shall be furnished. The

units shall be a dynamic type separator and be designed to operate continuously with pumped

underflows from the Headcell Concentrators.

B. The grit vortex separator unit shall meet the following criteria:


2. Size:32" diameter


(specific gravity 2.65) ≥ 75 microns in the flow range

4. Influent Solids Concentration: ≤ 1.0%

5. Design Flow/Unit: 300 gpm with 15’ of headloss


6. Minimum Flow/Unit: 280 gpm with 13’ of headloss

7. Maximum Flow/Unit: 400 gpm with 26.6’ of headloss

8. Influent Connection: 6” flanged pipe

9. Effluent Connection: 8” flanged pipe

10. Underflow Connection: 3” NPT pipe

11. NPW Connection: 1.5” NPT

12. Material of Construction: 304 SS

13. Operation: Continuous / Intermittent minimum 10-15 minutes

C. Each unit shall have a maximum headloss of 15 feet at 300 gpm. Each unit shall achieve a

95% removal efficiency of 75 micron at 300 gpm and larger grit having a specific gravity of

2.6 at flows ranging from 280 gpm to 400 gpm.

D. The grit vortex separator unit shall be 32 inches in diameter and have dished and flanged

heads manufactured from 304 stainless steel having a minimum thickness of 1\4 inch. These

vessel walls shall be 3/16 inch thick. The removable top access shall have a minimum

diameter of 18 inches. Any internal elements shall be removable from inside the units.

E. The units shall be mounted above the Grit Dewatering Conveyor onto a free standing

supporting frame with three legs manufactured from 304 stainless steel materials. The frame

design and mounting of the grit vortex separator assemblies shall be arranged and located

such that maintenance has a minimum 18 inches clearance between the bottom of the grit

underflow pipes and the Dewatering Conveyor clarifier surface. The frame supports shall be

provided with pre-drilled baseplates for CONTRACTOR provided anchor bolts. Each vortex

separator unit shall be mounted directly on the clarifier of the grit dewatering conveyor unit

via support bars spanning the grit dewatering conveyor. The manufacturer shall provide the

CONTRACTOR with required anchor bolt sizes and anchor bolt location

templates\dimensions.

F. Each grit vortex separator unit shall have one 6-inch flanged inlet and one 8-inch flanged

outlet connection. Flanges shall be rotatable and conform to ANSI B16.1 bolt patterns for

125 pound drillings.

G. The system shall be designed to withstand a maximum 14.7 psig pressure at the influent of

the unit. The actual maximum pressure at inlet shall be no more than 14.7 psig. Grit

underflow from the grit vortex separator units shall be transported by gravity to the Grit

Dewatering Conveyor. The grit washing\classification units shall each be provided with a

hydraulic valve that assures delivery of a continuous flow of washed grit slurry to the

dewatering unit. The hydraulic valve shall have no mechanical or moving parts.

1. Each grit vortex separator unit shall include a Hydraulic Valve (HV) to deliver a

continuous flow at wash slurry to Grit Dewatering Conveyor located directly below. The

HV shall have no mechanical or moving parts.

2. The grit vortex separator unit shall have a single 1 ½ inch NPT pipe slab for connection

to plant NPW.

H. Each unit shall be provided with the following connections: One 1-1\2 inch grit underflow

connection; one 3-inch threaded drain connection; and one 1-1\2 inch threaded fluidizing

water connection for the hydraulic valve backwash. All threaded connection shall be NPT.

I. The grit washing\classification units shall be provided with the following equipment to


regulate and automate the water supply. Additional non-electrical gages and monitoring

devices are specified in Article 1.01 of this Specification. Unless size is stipulated, sizes shall

be by the manufacturer:

1. One (1) 1.5” bronze ball valve for main water supply shut off.

2. One (1) 1.5” bronze globe valve to regulate water flow to the HV.

3. One (1) 1.5” NEMA 4X brass solenoid valve to automate system water to the HV.

4. One (1) 1.5” NEMA 4X brass solenoid valve to automate system backwash water.

5. One (1) 0-100 psig pressure gauge to monitor the supply water delivery pressure.

6. One (1) 0-30 psig pressure gauge (Pd) to monitor the pressure in the grit slurry discharge

(underflow) line.

7. One (1) 0-30 psig pressure gauge (Pi) to measure the inlet pressure to the Grit Washing

unit.

8. Three (3) 1/4” bronze ball valves to isolate the pressure gauges.

9. One (1) 0-35 gpm SS flow meter.

J. The grit washing\classification unit shall be pre-piped to the limits shown on the Drawings.

K. Each Grit vortex separator unit shall be all-hydraulic with no moving parts within the unit.

The grit underflow from the Grit Washing units shall be transported by gravity to the Grit

Dewatering Conveyor unit. Fluidizing Water shall be continuously supplied to the Grit

Washing units.

2.04 GRIT DEWATERING CONVEYOR (M-B-03-0009 AND M-B-03-0010)

A. Two Grit Dewatering Conveyor Units – M-B-03-0009 and M-B-03-0010 shall be furnished.

The grit dewatering conveyor unit shall meet the following criteria:


2. Maximum Grit Load: 2.0 cy/hr

3. Performance: 95% removal of all grit (specific gravity 2.65) ≥ 75 microns

with less than 15% volatile solids and greater than 60% total solids

4. Belt Width: 12"

5. Clarifier size: 60" square

6. Min. Free Water Surface area: 17.3 ft2

7. Motor: 0.33 hp, TENV

8. Overflow Connection: 6" flanged pipe

9. Drain Connection: 3" flanged pipe

10.NPW Connection: 1" NPT

11. Body Material: 304 SS

12. Belt Material: Neoprene Rubber, re-enforced with Polyester and Aluminum

B. The grit dewatering conveyor unit shall have the dewatering capacity of 2.0 cubic yards per

hour. The unit shall be provided with an integral clarifier having a minimum of 17.3 sq. ft. of

free water surface area and walls having a minimum slope of 45 degrees from the horizontal.


The clarifier shall be provided with fitted with an overflow weir having a minimum length of

60 inches. Grit clarifier unit shall have 6-inch freeboard. A 6-inch flanged overflow pipe

shall be provided.

C. Unless otherwise specified, the grit dewatering conveyor unit shall be manufactured from 10

gage SS.

D. Each Grit Dewatering Conveyor unit shall is designed to capture and dewater concentrated,

washed grit slurry from the Grit Washing unit.

E. Each Grit Dewatering Conveyor unit clarifier shall be designed based on a settling rate not to

exceed 3.2 gpm/ft2.

F. The tail roll mechanism shall be self-cleaning. As the belt rotates with the tailroll at the

bottom of the unit the belt cleats shall lift from the belt to provide a gap of at least a 1-inch.

The Grit Dewatering Conveyor unit belt shall be provided with 2” openings to allow transfer

of fine solids internal to the belt to the underside of each cleat. The tailroll shall be fitted

with a scraper, which shall also function as an internal belt scraper.

G. Each Grit Dewatering Conveyor shall be provided with an integral square clarifier which

shall provide at least 3 inches of freeboard.

H. The housing for Each Grit Dewatering Conveyor belt shall be fitted under the clarifier. The

housing for the Grit Dewatering Conveyor belt shall be stainless steel with urethane bonded

to the internal surfaces. The belt housing shall be inclined at 30 degrees.

I. Each belt housing shall be provided with clean out plates and one (1) flanged drain. 3-inch

flange shall be supplied on the grit dewatering conveyor drain connection.

J. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator unit shall be supplied with a belt made of 1/8 inch x 1/32

inch two-ply polyester reinforced continuous conductor belting. The belt cleats shall be 3-

3/8” X 4-9/16” of molded 60 Durometer neoprene and aluminum reinforced and shall be

vulcanized on the belt. The cleats shall attach to the belt with minimum 5/32 inch thick

neoprene hinges.

K. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator units shall be provided with a 9-3/4 inch diameter lagged

headroll. The headroll shall be adjustable to allow take-up of slack in the Grit Dewatering

Escalator belt. Adjustment of the headroll shall not affect the headroll retainer plate, scraper,

or drive unit.

L. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator unit shall be provided with a headroll scraper having 1/4 inch

thick high density polyethylene (HDPE) contact surfaces with a 1/4 inch thick HDPE retainer

plate. Both retainer plate and scraper shall be loaded to keep belt cleats closed tightly around

the headroll during operation.

M. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator unit is provided with a tailroll designed to mount internally

to the unit belt housing with external sealed bearings.

N. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator unit support structure shall be as shown on the general

arrangement drawing and anchored to a stable base.

O. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator unit shall be supplied with a factory installed rinse bar

system. The system shall include:

1. Two spray bars located above the belt and below the clarifier liquid level to enhance grit

washing.

2. One spray bar located at the bottom of the clarifier as a tailroll area rinse.


P. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator shall be provided with a drive unit consisting of the motor

and the helical gear reducer, mounted as a single integrated unit. All Bearings shall be anti-

friction, ball, or roller type bearings.

Q. Each motor shall be 3 phase, 460 VAC, 60 Hz, NEMA Design B, TENV enclosure.

R. Each helical gear reducer shall have hardened alloy steel gears accurately cut to shape.

S. A mechanical torque-limiting clutch shall be mounted on the headroll gear assembly to

prevent an accidental overload of the drive unit and belt.

T. Each drive speed shall be adjusted by a variable speed drive housed in the control enclosure.

The belt speed shall be adjustable from 1-5 ft/min.

U. Each Grit Dewatering Escalator unit shall be supplied with the following valves:

1. One (1) 3” eccentric cast iron plug valve located on the unit drain.

2. One (1) 1” NEMA 4X brass solenoid valve to automate the water to the rinse bar system.

3. Two (2), 1” bronze ball valve to manually shut off flow to the rinse bar system and tail

roll shutoff.

4. One (1) 1” bronze globe valve to manually regulate flow to the tailroll spray bar.

5. One (1) ¾” bronze ball valves to manually shut off the top rinse bars.

6. One (1) 1-10 gpm acrylic flow meter.

2.05 GRIT SYSTEM UTILITY REQUIREMENTS

A. The below continuous water usage requirements and pressures shall be considered the

maximum demands.

1. Each Grit Concentrator Unit (Headcell): 20 gpm continuous at minimum 50 psig

(fluidizing)

2. Each Grit Vortex Separator Unit (Slurry Cup): 30 gpm continuous at 50 psig ±5 psi.

3. Each Grit Dewatering Conveyor Unit (Grit Snail): 10 gpm continuous at 50 psig ±5 psi.

B. The below intermittent water usage requirements and pressures in addition to the continuous

demand shall be considered the maximum intermittent demands. The total intermittent water

usage shall be: Grit Vortex Separator unit (Slurry Cup) 47 gpm at 50 psig, ±5 psi, for 1-2

minutes every 2-4 hours.

C. The system shall require 480 VAC, three phase electrical service connections to operate.

2.06 CONTROL PANEL AND CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

A. The control panel shall be provided by the manufacturer for CONTRACTOR installation and

connections. The panel shall be freestanding, floor mounted, 304 stainless steel NEMA 4X

construction. Electrical VFD panels can be wall mounted. The panel shall contain all variable

frequency drives (escalator), logic, controllers and components to start\stop all equipment and

completely control the grit system. Control panel enclosure and components shall meet the

requirements of Section 40 95 13 of these Specifications. Comply with Division 26

specifications for wiring, motors, VFDs, control devices, etc. Comply with Section 40 94 43

for PLCs. All panels shall comply with UL 508A. Grit concentrator units require no controls.

B. VFD Panel shall adhere to the following specifications:


1. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X

2. Material:3 04SS

3. Voltage: 480 Volt

4. Phase: 3 Phase

5. Frequency: 60 Hz

6. Load: 15 Amp

C. Electrical panels containing VFDs shall be separate from PLC control panel. Each electrical

panel shall have a door-mounted lockable breaker/switch for isolation. Electrical panels shall

have a door-mounted Human Interface Module (HIM) for the VFD, allowing access to

control functions without having to open the panel.

D. The Control panel shall contain all switches, indicator lights, and other components necessary

to operate the following equipment:

1. One (1) Grit Washing unit

2. One (1) Grit Dewatering Escalator

E. Control panel will be supplied to provide a PLC Control System which will process all input

and output functions and logic for both panels, and provide outputs to three (3) Grit Pump

starters located in the MCC.

F. Electrical control panel shall be supplied with a Transformer with 480 volt primary winding

and 120 volt secondary winding with fused secondary.

G. The control panel shall be supplied with applicable Allen Bradley Control Logix PLC which

will control all grit vortex separators and grit dewatering conveyor functions.

H. The PLC shall be provided with Ethernet Communications Module for remote SCADA

monitoring.

I. Each panel door layout shall include the following items:

1. Front panel mounted combination main disconnect switch and circuit breaker (Electrical

panel)

2. Back lit, push-to-test Power On indicating light (Electrical panel)

3. System three position HOA switch

4. System Emergency Stop push button; Assemble in individual enclosures for field

placement at each unit.

5. System Alarm Reset push button

6. Grit Separation three position HOA switch

7. Grit Separation supply water three position HOA switch.

8. Grit Separation backwash water valve three position HOA switch

9. Grit Separation auxiliary backwash pushbutton

10. Grit Separation RUNNING indicating light

11. Grit Separation SUPPLY OPEN light

12. Grit Separation BACKWASH OPEN light


13. Grit Separation BLOWDOWN light

14. Grit Separation WET/DRY/REMOTE three position switch

15. SYSTEM BLOWDOWN three position HOA switch

16. Grit Dewatering Escalator running light

17. Grit Dewatering Escalator three position HOA switch

18. Grit Dewatering Escalator fail indicating light

19. Grit Dewatering Escalator manual STOP push button

20. Grit Dewatering Escalator manual START push button

21. Grit Dewatering Escalator manual speed potentiometer

22. Grit Dewatering Escalator rinse water valve three position HOA switch

23. Grit Dewatering Escalator rinse water valve OPEN indicating light

24. Grit Dewatering Escalator FAIL RESET push button

25. Grit Dewatering Escalator LOCAL/REMOTE switch for escalator speed control

2.07 OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE

A. An external water supply shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for manufacturer

controlled distribution to the grit vortex separator unit and the grit dewatering conveyor unit.

The manufacturer shall provide all components required for monitoring, distribution and

control of the water supply to the grit system.

B. The system shall be controlled to provide automatic or manual operation, manual starting and

stopping and system shut down when a fault is detected. Clarified plant water shall be

supplied and distributed between the Grit Concentrator fluidizing line, the Grit Washing unit

and the Grit Dewatering Escalator unit. Screened raw wastewater shall be gravity fed /

pumped into the Grit Concentrator continuously.

C. Grit Washing Unit

1. Grit slurry from the Grit Concentrator shall be pumped to the Grit Washing continuously

/ intermittently for 10-15 minutes.

2. During operation, a small volume of washed grit slurry shall continuously underflow

from the Grit Washing unit. Control of the grit slurry underflow rate is via the hydraulic

valve mounted on the bottom of the unit. A portion of the system water is continuously

introduced to the hydraulic valve.

3. Periodically, (typically twice per hour during heavy grit loads and typically once per hour

during light grit loads), a backwash sequence is initiated, by cycling solenoid valves,

which flushes the grit underflow gap inside the unit. Frequency and duration of

backwash cycles is adjustable.

4. Periodically, (typically once every 4 backwashes), a blowdown sequence is initiated to

flush accumulations of debris inside the unit. Blowdown is accomplished by stopping the

influent to the Grit Washing unit, cycling solenoid valves, and resuming operation.

Frequency and duration of blowdown cycles is adjustable.

D. Grit Dewatering Escalator Unit

1. The Grit Dewatering Escalator belt shall run whenever grit slurry is being transported to


the unit.

2. While the dewatering unit is running, water shall be directed to the tailroll self cleaning

mechanism and grit rinse system.

3. The belt speed shall be adjustable via a manual speed control potentiometer on the

control panel or by remote signal (4 20ma) from the plant SCADA system.

4. A motion sensor shall be installed on the side of the Grit Dewatering Escalator takeup

frame and shall detect movement of the headroll scraper arm. Lack of motion of the

headroll scraper arm shall indicate lack of belt movement, drive unit failure and/or

scraper arm overload. Lack of belt movement or scraper arm overload shall interrupt

signal from the motion sensor to the timer. If the motion sensor fails to reset the timer,

the Grit Dewatering Escalator shall stop and the failure light illuminate.

5. After a System Shut Down the Grit Dewatering Escalator shall continue to operate for a

pre-determined amount of time to allow for the removal and dewatering of all grit

accumulated in the clarifier. The off delay timer shall be adjustable from 0-60 minutes

with a typically delay off time of 15 minutes.

6. Grit Pumps: Selected pump will start with selected dewatering unit. PLC shall provide

I/O for all three grit pumps of the following: Discrete Inputs- In Remote, Run

Confirmation, In Service, Seal Water Flow, and Fault. Discrete Outputs- Pump Start.

2.08 SPARE PARTS

A. The manufacturer shall furnish the following spare parts for the system, packed for long term

storage in labeled containers. These parts shall be in addition to parts needed for testing:

1. One complete replacement escalator belt assembly.

2. One each type and pressure rated, pressure gauge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and

details as shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing any required oil and

grease in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be stainless

steel and shall be set by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.


Following installation, the CONTRACTOR shall have the manufacturer demonstrate with

performance testing, to the CITY's satisfaction, that the completed system meets all the

requirements of this Specification, including, but not limited to, the specified removal efficiencies

at the designated flow rates. Should an independent testing lab be required to resolve any issues

concerning the function and\or ability of the system to perform as per requirements in this

Specification, costs for the latter shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to

the CITY. The CONTRACTOR shall make, at CONTRACTOR's own expense, all necessary

changes, modifications, and/or adjustments required to assure satisfactory operation.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE

A. Furnish the services of a factory trained technician for 2, eight hour days during the


installation phase of the equipment. The factory representative shall have full knowledge and

experience in the installation of the type of equipment being installed.

B. Furnish the services of a factory trained technician, having complete knowledge of proper

operation start up procedure and maintenance requirements for 2, eight hour days, to inspect

the final installation and supervise a test run of the equipment.

C. Furnish the services of a factory representative, having complete knowledge of the

operational and maintenance requirements of the system for a minimum of four, four-hour

days for training the CITY’s personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, in

accordance with Section 01 79 00. This time shall be coordinated and scheduled with the

Plant Superintendant in writing and shall not be considered part of any previous time spent on

site.

3.04 FIELD PAINTING

All shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned and painted as specified in Section 09 91 00 of these

Specifications.

3.05 CLEANING

Prior to the acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials,

equipment and related areas in accordance with Section 01 74 00 of these Specifications.
